WO2015045473A1 - Rotary-type powder compression molding device and method of operating same - Google Patents

Rotary-type powder compression molding device and method of operating same Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015045473A1
WO2015045473A1 PCT/JP2014/062505 JP2014062505W WO2015045473A1 WO 2015045473 A1 WO2015045473 A1 WO 2015045473A1 JP 2014062505 W JP2014062505 W JP 2014062505W WO 2015045473 A1 WO2015045473 A1 WO 2015045473A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
value
hardness
calculated
control
control reference
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/062505
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
泰典 和田
稔 上村
Original Assignee
株式会社畑鐵工所
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社畑鐵工所 filed Critical 株式会社畑鐵工所
Publication of WO2015045473A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015045473A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B30PRESSES
    • B30BPRESSES IN GENERAL
    • B30B11/00Presses specially adapted for forming shaped articles from material in particulate or plastic state, e.g. briquetting presses, tabletting presses
    • B30B11/02Presses specially adapted for forming shaped articles from material in particulate or plastic state, e.g. briquetting presses, tabletting presses using a ram exerting pressure on the material in a moulding space
    • B30B11/08Presses specially adapted for forming shaped articles from material in particulate or plastic state, e.g. briquetting presses, tabletting presses using a ram exerting pressure on the material in a moulding space co-operating with moulds carried by a turntable

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a rotary powder compression molding apparatus such as a rotary tableting apparatus for producing a molded product such as a tablet by compressing powder and a method for operating the same.
  • a rotary powder compression molding device (hereinafter referred to as a molding device) having a function of controlling the mass of a molded product in order to maintain the weight (mass) and hardness of the molded product produced by compressing powder within the standard range.
  • a molding device having a function of controlling the mass of a molded product in order to maintain the weight (mass) and hardness of the molded product produced by compressing powder within the standard range.
  • the control of the mass of the molded product in this molding apparatus is performed when the upper and lower ridges moved by the rotation of the rotating disk pass between upper and lower preliminary compression rolls (hereinafter referred to as first rolls). 1 based on molding pressure. More specifically, the mass control trajectory is moved up and down by changing the height position of the lower arm relative to the die, and the amount of powder filling into the die is adjusted by the control of the mass control unit to which the first molding pressure is input. Thus, the mass of the molded product is controlled.
  • the mass control unit is set with a pressure value that is a reference for controlling the first molding pressure (this is commonly referred to as a pressure control reference value or a control set value).
  • a conventional molding apparatus includes a rotary powder compression molding machine (hereinafter abbreviated as a molding machine).
  • a conventional molding apparatus obtains an average value and an average value of molding pressures of a plurality of molded products sampled every predetermined time during continuous operation of the molding machine, and between the mass and molding pressure of the molded product.
  • the molding pressure corresponding to the mass reference value of the molded product is calculated using the established correlation coefficient, and the pressure control reference value is updated with the calculated value (calculated molding pressure). For this reason, the control which hold
  • a molded product molded with the molding pressure of the pressure control reference value is maintained within the standard range.
  • a molded product molded at a molding pressure outside the pressure control reference value may be a defective product whose mass is outside the standard range.
  • the control of the mass of the molded product in the conventional molding apparatus is based on the premise that the tip interval is constant, and that the mass variation and molding pressure variation are equivalent based on this premise. From the above idea, “the mass is controlled based on the correlation coefficient established between the mass and the molding pressure”. Therefore, the conventional control of the mass of the molded product is, in other words, “controlling the mass of the molded product by adjusting the height of the mass adjusting track in order to keep the molding pressure constant”. Therefore, it is based on the idea that the control of the mass of the conventional molded product is equivalent to the control of the molding pressure.
  • the control of the mass of the conventional molded product is actually caused by the influence of thermal expansion or the like accompanying the temperature change (for example, rise) of each part of the molding machine (mainly the upper and lower ridges and the pressure roll) that is continuously operated. It does not take into account changes in the tip spacing (eg reduction).
  • the conventional molding apparatus is generally adjusted so that when the temperature of each part of the molding machine is normal temperature (usually around 20 ° C.), the setting value of the tip distance and the actual tip distance are substantially the same ( Calibration).
  • the “tip point setting value” refers to the tip interval that is set by the molding apparatus and displayed on the tip interval indicator.
  • the actual tip defined by the tip of the upper and lower punches (the tip of each punch) of the molding machine is performed in a state where the tip interval setting value (display value) is not changed. It is not considered that the interval (hereinafter, simply referred to as “tip interval”) changes due to the influence of thermal expansion or the like due to temperature change (for example, increase) of each part of the molding machine.
  • the mass control unit performs control to reduce the molding pressure that has increased due to the temperature increase.
  • the height of the mass adjustment trajectory is adjusted by a control output for the mass control unit to reduce the mass. Therefore, as a result, the mass of the manufactured molded product may not be kept constant.
  • the temperature of each part of the molding machine mainly the upper and lower punches and mortars, and the rotating disk
  • the power may be increased.
  • the degree of springback (re-expansion) after molding decreases, and the thickness of the molded product decreases. For this reason, even if it manufactures with the tip space
  • the mass control unit performs control to increase the reduced molding pressure.
  • the height of the mass adjustment trajectory is adjusted by a control output for the mass control unit to increase the mass.
  • the mass of the manufactured molded product may not be kept constant.
  • the conventional molding equipment can be manufactured so that the mass of the molded product is within the standard range, but the control is not a device to keep the thickness of the molded product within the standard range. May not be able to be held inside.
  • the thickness of the molded product such as a tablet may change if the tip spacing or mass changes.
  • the thickness of the molded product may change if the mass or molding pressure changes.
  • the thickness of the molded product may change if the tip spacing or the molding pressure changes.
  • the thickness of the molded product may change due to increase / decrease in mass, increase / decrease in tip spacing, and increase / decrease in molding pressure.
  • the tip interval is narrower than immediately after the start of continuous operation. Therefore, even if the mass (powder amount) of the molded product to be compression-molded is the same, the thickness of the molded product formed by the upper and lower punches and mortars passing between the pressure rolls is reduced.
  • the thickness of the molded product may change due to the influence of heat depending on the physical properties of the powder. For example, when a powder whose physical properties change due to an increase in temperature, such as a powder whose binding force increases as the temperature rises, is compressed, the degree of spring back (re-expansion) after molding is reduced due to the increase in binding force. Therefore, the thickness of the molded product may be reduced.
  • the molding apparatus may be configured to adjust the tip spacing by changing the tip spacing setting value according to the temperature change.
  • the change in the thickness of the molded product due to the influence of mass and molding pressure cannot be dealt with, and the thickness of the molded product to be manufactured may be out of the standard thickness range.
  • the object of the present invention is to make at least the mass and thickness of the mass, thickness and hardness of the molded product produced by compressing the powder within the standard range regardless of the temperature change of the powder compression molding machine and the physical property change of the powder. It is intended to provide a rotary powder compression molding apparatus capable of producing a molded product by holding it and a method for operating the same.
  • a rotary powder compression molding apparatus includes a rotating disk and a control device that controls the operation of the powder compression molding machine.
  • the control device controls the height position of the lower punch that defines the powder filling depth to the mortar attached to the rotating disk so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured is maintained at the pressure control reference value.
  • the operating method of the said powder compression molding apparatus has the following each process. A step of obtaining a calculated thickness of a molded product from a thickness variation value when mass control is performed and a thickness average value of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation.
  • the control is not performed to directly change the tip interval setting value set in the control device.
  • mass control the mass control reference value of the molded product
  • thickness control what thickness the thickness average value is. (This is referred to as “calculated thickness” in the present invention).
  • the calculated thickness is used as a thickness control reference value (this is referred to as “thickness control” in the present invention), and the tip spacing variation value and the tip spacing setting value
  • the tip interval calculation value is obtained, the tip interval setting value is updated with the tip interval calculation value, and the tip interval is controlled with the updated value.
  • the pressure fluctuation value when the mass control is performed (this is referred to as the present invention)
  • a pressure fluctuation value when the thickness is controlled this is referred to as a “second calculated pressure fluctuation value” in the present invention.
  • a pressure control reference calculation value is obtained from the first and second calculated pressure fluctuation values and a molding pressure average value of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation, and pressure control is performed based on the pressure control reference calculation value.
  • the control pressure value (current value) of the unit is updated.
  • the powder compression molding apparatus updates the tip interval setting value based on the mass control and the thickness control to control the tip interval, and the pressure control unit The control pressure value (current value) of is updated.
  • the pressure control unit that adjusts the height position of the lower punch that defines the filling depth of the powder into the die controls the molding pressure in accordance with the updated control pressure value. Therefore, the powder compression molding device suppresses the mass and thickness fluctuation of the molded product accompanying changes in the physical properties of the powder and the temperature change of the powder compression molding machine, and keeps the mass and thickness of the molded product to be manufactured within the standard range. Can do.
  • the mass / thickness of the molded product produced by compressing the powder regardless of the temperature change of each part of the powder compression molding machine and the physical property change of the powder accompanying the continuous operation of the rotary powder compression molding machine. -It is possible to manufacture a molded product while maintaining at least the mass and thickness within the standard range of the hardness.
  • mass control controls the mass average value Wx of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation to a mass control reference value WM (or mass control reference calculation value WMa described later). Pointing to do.
  • control of the mass of the molded product ...” or “control the mass of the molded product ...” This is distinguished from the term “mass control”.
  • the calculation process is performed by replacing the value of the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the value of the calculated mass Wa that is obtained by pressure control that will be described later.
  • the term “mass control” is used.
  • pressure control refers to controlling the molding pressure average value Px of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation to a pressure control reference value PM described later.
  • the powder to the die mounted on the rotating disk is set so that the molding pressure value of the molded product becomes the control pressure value set in the pressure control unit provided in the control device that controls the operation of the powder compression molding machine.
  • the control for changing the height position of the lower eyelid that defines the filling depth is referred to as feedback control (FBC).
  • FBC feedback control
  • weight (mass) control is also referred to as “pressure control”.
  • the thickness Ta and the calculated hardness Ha are obtained.
  • the pressure based on “mass control” The description of obtaining the fluctuation value PWa, the calculated thickness Ta, and the calculated hardness Ha does not seem consistent.
  • thickness control refers to a later-described calculated thickness Ta obtained from a thickness variation value when mass control is performed and a thickness average value Tx of a molded product, and a later-described thickness control reference value TM. (Or a thickness control reference calculation value TMa described later) is controlled.
  • the “tip tip spacing control” refers to a tip tip calculated value (lMa, LMa) to be described later based on the thickness control and is controlled by a control device that controls the operation of the powder compression molding machine. This refers to the control of updating the respective tip-tip interval values (current values... 1M, LM) at the two positions with the values of the tip-tip interval calculated values (lMa, LMa) and changing the respective tip-tip intervals. .
  • the tip spacing control is performed based on the tip spacing calculated value (lMa, LMa) in a powder compression molding machine having a first roll and a second roll, which will be described later. It refers to controlling the tip interval.
  • the present invention also includes performing the tip distance control only at the second position, including the case where the present invention is implemented as a rotary powder compression molding apparatus including a powder compression molding machine that does not have the first roll.
  • the “thickness control” and the “tip tip spacing control” are not equivalent controls.
  • the terms “thickness control” and “tip tip spacing control” are defined. Use distinctively.
  • “hardness control” means updating (correcting) a hardness control reference calculated value HMa described later with a value of calculated hardness Ha described later (or a hardness control reference provisional value HMb described later).
  • a thickness control reference provisional value TMb described later and a mass control reference provisional value WMb described later respectively correspond to the thickness and mass control reference calculated values described later.
  • control of the hardness of the molded product manufactured by the powder compression molding machine to the target hardness
  • control of the hardness of the molded product ...” and “control of the hardness of the molded product ...” This is distinguished from the term “hardness control”.
  • a rotary powder compression molding apparatus for example, a rotary tableting apparatus 1 that manufactures a tablet as a molded product, includes a rotary powder compression molding machine, for example, a rotary tableting machine 2, A measuring device 3 and a control panel 4 are provided.
  • the tableting machine 2 is provided with a rotating disk 11 having a mortar mounting portion.
  • a plurality of mortars 12 are attached to the peripheral portion of the mortar mounting portion at a constant interval in the circumferential direction of the turntable 11.
  • the upper surfaces of the mortars 12 are the same height as the upper surface of the mortar mounting portion.
  • the die is also referred to as a die, and the die may have a plurality of die holes, that is, a plurality of molding holes.
  • the tableting machine 2 is provided with a powder supplier 14 arranged at the powder supply position.
  • the lower surface opening of the powder feeder 14 is provided so as to contact the upper surface of the mortar mounting portion of the rotating disk 11.
  • the powder 12 passes through the lower surface opening of the powder supplier 14, whereby the powder in the powder supplier 14 is supplied (filled) into the mortar hole of the mortar 12.
  • a powder feeder configured to have a stirring member (not shown) that is rotated to make the density of the powder supplied to the mortar 12 uniform can also be used.
  • the tableting machine 2 is provided with an upper punch 15 and a lower punch 16 that are individually disposed corresponding to each die 12.
  • the upper punch 15 is also called an upper punch
  • the lower punch 16 is also called a lower punch.
  • the upper rod 15 and the lower rod 16 are supported by the turntable 11 so as to be movable up and down.
  • the distal end portion (lower end portion) of the upper punch 15 is inserted into and removed from the mortar hole of the mortar 12 from above.
  • the distal end portion (upper end portion) of the lower punch 16 holds the state of being inserted upward from below into the mortar hole of the mortar 12 and forms the bottom of the mortar hole.
  • the upper punch 15 and the lower punch 16 slide on various guide tracks (not shown) (excluding the mass adjustment track described below) provided in the tableting machine 2 as the rotating plate 11 rotates. Further, the upper rod 15 and the lower rod 16 are moved by a necessary amount in the axial direction during compression molding or the like.
  • a mass adjusting track (also referred to as a weight adjusting track) 17 on which the lower end of the lower punch 16 slides at the powder supply position is disposed below the mortar mounting portion of the rotating disk 11.
  • the mass adjusting track 17 is supported by a track lifting mechanism 19 so as to be lifted and lowered.
  • the track elevating mechanism 19 includes a track elevating motor 19a, an elevating shaft 19b, a gear 19c, and a drive gear 19d.
  • a servo motor can be suitably used as the orbit raising / lowering motor 19a, but a general-purpose motor can also be used.
  • a rotary encoder 19e is attached to the track elevating motor 19a. It is possible to know the height position of the mass adjusting track 17 based on the detection of the rotation amount by the encoder 19e.
  • the elevating shaft 19b is moved up and down along a guide (not shown), and the mass adjusting track 17 is connected to the upper end portion thereof.
  • the gear 19c has an inner peripheral gear portion and an outer peripheral gear portion, and the inner peripheral gear portion is meshed with a male screw portion formed at the lower portion of the elevating shaft 19b.
  • the drive gear 19d is meshed with the outer peripheral gear portion of the gear 19c, and is rotated by the orbit raising / lowering motor 19a. Therefore, the mass adjusting track 17 is lifted and lowered together with the lifting shaft 19b according to the forward and reverse rotation of the track lifting motor 19a of the track lifting mechanism 19.
  • the various guide tracks include a lowering track disposed below the powder feeder 14 and immediately before the mass adjusting track 17.
  • the powder in the powder feeder 14 is sucked into the mortar hole and supplied (filled).
  • excess powder is discharged into the powder feeder 14.
  • the lower iron 16 slides on a horizontal plane continuous with the upper end of the inclined surface of the mass adjusting track 17 the upper surface of the die 12 is scraped off at the lower end of the downstream side wall 14a of the powder supplier 14.
  • the amount of powder supplied to the mortar 12 in other words, the mass (weight) of the tablet to be manufactured is weighed. Therefore, the mass of the tablet to be manufactured is changed (corrected) by changing the height position of the mass adjusting track 17.
  • the tableting machine 2 is provided with upper and lower preliminary compression molding rolls (hereinafter abbreviated as first rolls) 21 and 22 disposed at its preliminary compression molding position (hereinafter abbreviated as first position).
  • the first position is set on the downstream side in the rotation direction of the turntable 11 with respect to the powder supply position.
  • the upper first roll 21 is disposed above the mortar mounting portion of the turntable 11, and the lower first roll 22 is disposed below the mortar mounting portion of the turntable 11.
  • the first rolls 21 and 22 move the upper punch 15 and the lower punch 16 so as to approach each other, so that the powder in the die 12 is preliminarily moved. It is provided for compression molding.
  • the upper first roll 21 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction.
  • the lower first roll 22 is rotatably supported by a pre-compression roll support 23 and adjusts the pre-compression interval in order to adjust a pre-forming pressure (hereinafter referred to as pre-pressure).
  • the mechanism 24 can be moved up and down together with the roll support 23.
  • the preliminary pressure is set lower than the main compression force described later.
  • the interval adjusting mechanism 24 for pre-compression is provided to change the tip interval between the upper rod 15 and the lower rod 16 that is about to pass between the first rolls 21 and 22.
  • the preliminary pressure interval adjusting mechanism 24 has the same configuration as the track elevating mechanism 19, and includes a roll elevating motor 24a, an elevating shaft 24b, a gear 24c, and a drive gear 24d.
  • a servo motor can be suitably used as the roll lifting motor 24a, but a general-purpose motor can also be used.
  • a rotary encoder 24e is attached to the roll lifting / lowering motor 24a. Based on the detection of the rotation amount of the roll raising / lowering motor 24a by the encoder 24e, the height position of the lower first roll 22, and hence the height position of the lower punch 16 at the first position, and consequently the lower punch 16 It is possible to know the tip interval l between the heel and the upper hook 15.
  • An interval detection unit (interval detection means) that detects the tip interval 1 between the lower rod 16 and the lower rod 16 is provided.
  • the elevating shaft 24b is moved up and down along a guide (not shown), and the upper end portion supports the pre-compression roll support 23 from below.
  • the gear 24c has an inner peripheral gear portion and an outer peripheral gear portion, and the inner peripheral gear portion is meshed with a male screw portion formed at the lower portion of the elevating shaft 24b.
  • the drive gear 24d is meshed with the outer peripheral gear portion of the gear 24c, and is rotated by the roll lifting / lowering motor 24a. Accordingly, the lower first roll 22 is lifted and lowered together with the lifting shaft 24b in accordance with the forward / reverse rotation of the roll lifting / lowering motor 24a of the pre-compression interval adjusting mechanism 24. Accordingly, the height position of the lower collar 16 is increased accordingly. As a result, the tip l at the first position is changed (controlled).
  • the tableting machine 2 has upper and lower main compression molding rolls (hereinafter abbreviated as second rolls) disposed at the main compression molding position (which may also be referred to as a final compression molding position but hereinafter referred to as a second position). .) 25 and 26 are provided.
  • the second position is set on the downstream side in the rotation direction of the turntable 11 with respect to the first position.
  • the upper second roll 25 is disposed above the mortar mounting portion of the turntable 11, and the lower second roll 26 is disposed below the mortar mounting portion of the turntable 11.
  • the second rolls 25 and 26 move the upper punch 15 and the lower punch 16 so as to approach each other when the upper punch 15 and the lower punch 16 are about to pass between them. Is provided for final compression molding.
  • the upper second roll 25 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction.
  • the lower second roll 26 is rotatably supported by a main compression roll support 27, and the main compression interval adjusting mechanism 28 together with the roll support 27 in order to adjust the final molding pressure. It can be moved up and down.
  • the interval adjustment mechanism 28 for main compression is provided to change the tip interval between the upper rod 15 and the lower rod 16 that is about to pass between the second rolls 25 and 26.
  • the interval adjustment mechanism 28 for main compression has the same configuration as that of the track elevating mechanism 19, and includes a roll elevating motor 28a, an elevating shaft 28b, a gear 28c, and a drive gear 28d.
  • a servo motor can be preferably used, but a general-purpose motor can also be used.
  • a rotary encoder 28e is attached to the roll lifting / lowering motor 28a. Based on the detection of the amount of rotation of the roll raising / lowering motor 28a by the encoder 28e, the height position of the lower second roll 26, and hence the height position of the lower collar 16 at the second position, and thus the lower collar 16 and It is possible to know the tip distance L between the upper side 15 and the upper side 15.
  • the rotary encoder 28e of the roll lifting / lowering motor 28a and a calculation unit (not shown) are provided between the upper rod 15 and the lower rod 16 that are about to pass between the second rolls 25 and 26 at the second position.
  • An interval detecting unit (interval detecting means) for detecting the tip interval L is provided.
  • the elevating shaft 28b supports the main-compression roll support 27 from below via a pressure sensor 29 disposed at the upper end thereof, and is moved up and down along a guide (not shown).
  • the gear 28c has an inner peripheral gear portion and an outer peripheral gear portion, and the inner peripheral gear portion is meshed with a male screw portion formed at a lower portion of the elevating shaft 28b.
  • the drive gear 28d is meshed with the outer peripheral gear portion of the gear 28c, and is rotated by the roll lifting / lowering motor 28a. Accordingly, the lower second roll 26 is moved up and down together with the lifting shaft 28b in accordance with the forward / reverse rotation of the roll lifting / lowering motor 28a of the interval adjusting mechanism 28 for main compression. As a result, the tip distance L at the second position is changed (controlled).
  • the tip spacing at the first position and the second position is changed (controlled), but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the tip spacing control mechanism holds the lower compression molding roll at one or both of the first position and the second position so as not to move in the vertical direction. It is possible to change the height position of the upper compression molding roll to control the tip spacing, and further, to change the height position of both the upper and lower compression molding rolls, It can be set as the structure which controls a tip space
  • the pressure sensor 29 is provided to detect a molding pressure (hereinafter referred to as a main compression force) at the time of main compression (final compression) molding.
  • a molding pressure hereinafter referred to as a main compression force
  • the pressure sensor 29 is moved up and down by a main compression roll support 27 and a lifting shaft 28b. It is arranged between.
  • the pressure sensor 29 can be suitably provided with a load cell that converts a molding pressure to be detected into an electric quantity.
  • the pressure sensor 29 is fixed to the upper end of the elevating shaft 28b as described above, and the pressure receiving end 29a receives the lower surface of the roll support 27 for main compression.
  • the tableting machine 2 includes a defective product discharge unit 31 and a non-defective product discharge unit 37 at the discharge position.
  • the discharge position is set on the downstream side in the rotation direction of the turntable 11 with respect to the second position. Further, the powder supply position is set on the downstream side in the rotation direction of the turntable 11 with reference to the discharge position.
  • the defective product discharge unit 31 is arranged on the upstream side in the rotation direction of the turntable 11 with respect to the non-defective product discharge unit 37.
  • this defective product discharge part 31 is not limited to the following structures, it has the chamber 32, the chute
  • the chamber 32 is provided close to the lower end of the chamber 32 so as not to contact the upper surface of the mortar mounting portion of the rotating disk 11.
  • the chamber 32 intersects the rotational trajectory of the mortar 12.
  • a chute 33 is connected to the chamber 32.
  • the chute 33 extends outside the rotating disk 11 and obliquely downward.
  • the blast nozzle 34 is supported by the chamber 32 so as to eject compressed air from the area toward the chute 33 disposed outside the area surrounded by the rotation locus of the mortar 12.
  • vent pipe 35 One end of the vent pipe 35 is connected to the jet nozzle 34, and the other end of the vent pipe 35 is connected to a compressed air source (not shown).
  • An electromagnetic valve 36 for opening and closing is provided in the middle portion of the vent pipe 35.
  • the electromagnetic valve 36 is normally kept closed and is opened for a predetermined short period of time in accordance with a valve opening signal input based on detection of a pressure abnormality in a pressure control unit 51 described later.
  • the chamber 32 has an inlet-side passage port (not shown) and an outlet-side passage port 32a that are positioned on the rotation trajectory of the mortar 12. These passage openings are provided so as to cut out the side wall of the chamber 32 from the lower end, and the tablets extruded by the lower punch 16 can pass through the upper surface of the mortar mounting portion of the turntable 11. Therefore, a tablet (usually a good product) determined to be within the standard range based on the molding pressure can pass through the chamber 32 through an inlet side passage port and an outlet side passage port 32a (not shown). During this passage, the compressed air is not ejected from the jet nozzle 34.
  • the electromagnetic valve 36 is opened and compressed from the squirt nozzle 34 at the same timing. Air is ejected and this compressed air is sprayed onto the defective product on the lower rod 16. Therefore, the tablet determined to be out of the standard range is peeled off from the lower punch 16 and simultaneously blown off toward the chute 33 and discharged out of the turntable 11.
  • the non-defective product discharge unit 37 includes, for example, a scraper 38 that is connected to the chamber 32 of the defective product discharge unit 31 so as to be immovable, intersects with the rotational trajectory of the mortar 12, and a discharge chute 39 connected thereto.
  • the tablet (good product) that has passed through the chamber 32 and is determined to be within the standard range is removed from the lower punch 16 by the scraper 38 of the good product discharge unit 37, passes through the discharge chute 39, It is taken out of the rotating disk 11 from above the mortar mounting portion.
  • the non-defective product discharge section 37 is provided with a sampling section 41 for sampling a plurality of tablets from the tablets that are discharged and molded with an appropriate molding pressure.
  • the sampling unit 41 includes a sampling chute 42, a sampling shutter 43, a sampling driver 44, and the like.
  • the sampling chute 42 is branched downward from the oblique discharge chute 39.
  • the sampling shutter 43 opens and closes the entrance of the sampling chute 42, and is normally disposed at a closed position for closing the entrance as shown by a solid line in FIG. Thereby, tablets within the standard range can be discharged toward the outlet formed by the opened lower end of the discharge chute 39.
  • the sampling shutter 43 is arranged at an open position where the inlet of the sampling chute 42 is opened, so that the tablet passing through the discharge chute 39 is taken out through the sampling chute 42.
  • the sampling driver 44 is composed of, for example, an actuator such as a rotary solenoid, and normally holds the sampling shutter 43 in the closed position, and moves the sampling shutter 43 to the open position for a predetermined time by the input of the sampling signal.
  • the method for sampling a plurality of tablets (molded products) during operation is not limited to the above-described method. That is, instead of sampling only non-defective tablets, sampling may be performed on non-defective and defective tablets.
  • a sampling unit (not shown) is also provided on the defective chute 33 side, and the tablets merged with the tablets discharged from the discharge chute 39 for non-defective tablets (mixed with non-defective products and defective products). May be supplied to the measuring device 3.
  • the measuring device 3 is arranged below the sampling unit 41 so as to receive a plurality of tablets discharged from the sampling chute 42 every time an appropriate number of tablets are sampled.
  • the measuring device 3 is preferably an automatic type.
  • the automatic measuring device 3 measures the mass (weight) of a predetermined number (plurality) of tablets (sampling tablets) received, and calculates the mass average value of the tablets measured based on the measurement result. It has a function of calculating and outputting the calculation result to the outside together with the measured value of the mass of each sampling tablet.
  • the automatic measuring device 3 measures the thickness of the predetermined number of tablets received from each sampling, and calculates the average thickness value of the tablets measured based on the measurement result, And it has the function to output the calculation result to the outside with the thickness measurement value of each sampling tablet.
  • the automatic measuring device 3 measures the hardness of the predetermined number of tablets out of the tablets received every sampling, and calculates the average hardness value of the tablets measured based on the measurement result, And it has the function to output the calculation result to the outside with the hardness measurement value of each sampling tablet.
  • the control panel 4 that controls the overall operation of the tableting machine 2 includes a touch panel type input device (not shown) provided on the surface of a control panel casing (not shown), a microcomputer, and the like. And a control device 4a built in the control panel housing.
  • the control device 4a has a function of outputting various input data (trial hit data, sampling data, etc.) to an external recording device.
  • the control device 4a is used to control the tablet due to the expansion and contraction of the upper punch 15 and the lower punch 16 due to the temperature change of each part of the tableting machine 2 during the continuous operation of the tableting machine 2 and the change in physical properties of the powder to be compressed. It is configured to perform control to keep the mass, thickness, and hardness of the manufactured tablet at the control reference value while suppressing mass fluctuation, thickness fluctuation, and hardness fluctuation.
  • This control device 4a is used not only to maintain the mass of the tablet to be manufactured within the standard range, but also to maintain the molding pressure at the pressure control reference value in order to maintain the thickness and hardness of the tablet within the standard range.
  • a control unit 51 is provided. This pressure control unit 51 is used for the purpose of “controlling the molding pressure to the pressure control reference value”, so that even in the case of a control pattern that does not require the mass to be kept within the standard range, the molding is performed. It functions to control the pressure to the pressure control reference value.
  • TH control thickness and hardness control
  • T single control thickness only control
  • the pressure control unit 51 updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM set thereto as described later, thereby generating a signal output corresponding to the level of the updated pressure control reference value PM. It is configured to be supplied to the motor 19a for raising and lowering the track of the mechanism 19 so as to change the height position of the lower rod 16 and perform mass correction. In this way, the molding pressure is controlled by changing the height position of the lower eyelid 16 by the mass adjustment track 17 based on the pressure control reference value PM and correcting the mass of the tablet (molded product). This is referred to as feedback control (FBC).
  • FBC feedback control
  • control device 4a has a basic data acquisition unit for calculating the following correlation coefficients a0 to a5 based on various test hit data acquired by the trial hit operation of the tableting machine 2.
  • the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 are as follows.
  • the correlation coefficient a0 is a correlation coefficient established between the molding pressure fluctuation value ⁇ P (unit KN) and the mass fluctuation value ⁇ W (unit mg) at the time of final compression molding (also referred to as main compression molding) of the tablet. is there.
  • This correlation coefficient a0 is referred to as a PW correlation coefficient (unit: KN / mg).
  • the correlation coefficient a1 is a correlation coefficient established between the tablet thickness variation value ⁇ T (unit mm) and the mass variation value ⁇ W (unit mg). This correlation coefficient a1 is referred to as a TW correlation coefficient (unit: mm / mg).
  • the correlation coefficient a2 is a correlation coefficient established between the tablet molding pressure fluctuation value ⁇ P (unit KN) and the thickness fluctuation value ⁇ T (unit mm). This correlation coefficient a2 is referred to as PT correlation coefficient (unit: KN / mm).
  • the correlation coefficient a3 is a correlation coefficient established between the tip interval variation value ⁇ L (unit mm) and the thickness variation value ⁇ T (unit mm) during the main compression molding of the tablet. This correlation coefficient a3 is referred to as an LT correlation coefficient (unit: mm / mm).
  • the correlation coefficient a4 is a correlation coefficient established between the tablet thickness fluctuation value ⁇ T (unit mm) and the hardness fluctuation value ⁇ H (unit N). This correlation coefficient a4 is referred to as a TH correlation coefficient (unit: mm / N).
  • the correlation coefficient a5 is a correlation coefficient established between the tablet mass fluctuation value ⁇ W (unit: mg) and the hardness fluctuation value ⁇ H (unit N). This correlation coefficient a5 is referred to as a WH correlation coefficient (unit: mg / N).
  • the correlation coefficients (a0 to a5) used in the arithmetic processing described later are a0 as a PW correlation coefficient, a1 as a TW correlation coefficient, a2 as a PT correlation coefficient, and a3.
  • a0 is a PW correlation coefficient
  • a1 is a TW correlation coefficient
  • a2 is a PT correlation coefficient
  • a3 is L
  • the following description will be made assuming that the ⁇ T correlation coefficient
  • a4 is the TH correlation coefficient
  • a5 is the WH correlation coefficient.
  • the control device 4a controls the operation of the tableting machine 2 according to any of the six control patterns described later.
  • the desired molded product is manufactured by controlling the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H of the molded product so as to become target control reference values within the standard range of the product by the control pattern 1.
  • each of the mass W and the thickness T of the molded product is controlled so as to become a target control reference value within the standard range of the product, and a desired molded product is manufactured.
  • each of the mass W and the hardness H of the molded product is controlled to become a target control reference value within the product specification range, and a desired molded product is manufactured.
  • the mass W of the molded product is controlled so as to become a target control reference value within the standard range of the product, and a desired molded product is manufactured.
  • the thickness T and the hardness H of the molded product are controlled so as to become the target control reference value within the standard range of the product, and a desired molded product is manufactured.
  • the thickness T of the molded product is controlled so as to become a target control reference value within the standard range of the product, and a desired molded product is manufactured.
  • control patterns 1 to 6 The relationship between the control patterns 1 to 6 and the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 will be described below.
  • the correlation coefficients a0 to a3 are used, and the correlation coefficients a4 and a5 are used. Is not used.
  • the correlation coefficients a0 and a5 are used, and the correlation coefficients a1 to a4 are not used.
  • the correlation coefficient a0 is used, and the correlation coefficients a1 to a5 are Not used.
  • correlation coefficients a0 to a5 (where a5 ⁇ is used as a5). ) Is used, and there is no correlation coefficient that is not used.
  • the correlation coefficients a0 to a3 are used, and the correlation coefficients a4 and a4 are used. a5 is not used.
  • a list of symbols and the like used for explaining the control by the control device 4a includes a control-related symbol of mass W, a control-related symbol of thickness T, a control-related symbol of hardness H, a control-related symbol of pressure P, and a main compression
  • the following is divided into a related symbol of the tip interval L and a related symbol of the tip interval l for pre-compression.
  • Thickness T control-related symbols TO (unit: mm): tablet thickness standard value (molded product standard standard value) TOL (unit: mm): lower limit value of tablet thickness control reference value correction range TOH (unit: mm): upper limit of tablet thickness control reference value correction range TM (unit: mm): Tablet thickness control reference value (current value) TMa (unit: mm): tablet thickness control standard calculation value used for calculation processing TMb (unit: mm): provisional value for thickness control reference used for calculation processing for obtaining updated value of tablet thickness control reference calculated value Tx (unit: mm): Average thickness of sampled tablets Ta (unit: mm): Calculated thickness of tablet used for calculation processing, obtained from thickness variation value when thickness average value Wx of sampled tablet is mass control standard calculated value WMa, and thickness average value Tx kt: Thickness correction coefficient for correcting the thickness control standard calculation value.
  • LM unit: mm
  • Tip distance setting value at the second position current value
  • LMa unit: mm
  • LLP Abnormal pressure lower limit of the pressure controller
  • LEP Defective discharge pressure lower limit value of the pressure control unit
  • LCL unit: KN
  • MEAN unit KN
  • Pressure reference value of pressure control unit (equivalent to pressure control reference value PM)
  • HCL unit: KN
  • HEP (Unit: KN): Upper limit value of defective discharge pressure in the pressure controller HLP (unit KN): Upper limit value of abnormal pressure of the pressure control unit.
  • the operator performs operations for adjusting the mass, thickness, and hardness using the input device (not shown) in order to acquire basic data of the tablet to be manufactured.
  • the control device 4a Based on the operation of this operator, the control device 4a performs the first trial driving operation (trial driving operation) of the tableting machine 2, operates the sampling unit 41 during this operation, samples a predetermined number of tablets, and presses the tablet. The operation of the lock machine 2 is stopped.
  • the pressure data P1, the mass data W1, the thickness data T1, the hardness data H1, the tip distance data 11 at the time of preliminary compression, and the tip distance data L1 at the time of main compression are: Obtained as trial hit data 1 (step S01).
  • the pressure sensor 29 detects the molding pressure for each of the manufactured tablets.
  • the control device 4a acquires the molding pressures of the individual tablets detected by the pressure sensor 29, and performs a process of averaging the individual molding pressures.
  • the molding pressure average value calculated by this processing is the pressure data P1.
  • the control device 4a determines the tip interval setting value at the first position based on the output of the rotary encoder 24e of the preliminary compression interval adjusting mechanism 24 at the time of preliminary compression.
  • the interval data l1 based on the output of the rotary encoder 28e of the interval adjustment mechanism 28 for main compression, the setting value of the tip interval at the second position is detected as the tip interval data L1 at the time of main compression.
  • the measuring device 3 measures the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H of each of the plurality of tablets sampled during the first trial driving operation.
  • the measuring device 3 performs an operation for obtaining a mass average value, a thickness average value, and a hardness average value (trial hit data 1) of the plurality of tablets based on the measured values.
  • the mass average value obtained by this calculation is mass data W1
  • the thickness average value is thickness data T1
  • the hardness average value is hardness data H1.
  • the control device 4a performs the second trial driving operation of the tableting machine 2 by changing only the tablet mass without changing the setting value of the tip interval at the first position and the second position.
  • the control device 4a assumes that the molding pressure rises due to the influence of the tip interval narrowed by the temperature rise in the continuous operation described later, and that the pressure control works to reduce the mass, thereby reducing the mass adjustment track 17.
  • the tablet is preferably moved in the direction of decreasing the mass of the tablet so that the molding pressure is lowered, and the second trial driving operation of the tableting machine 2 is performed.
  • the control device 4a stops the operation of the tableting machine 2 after sampling a predetermined number of tablets during the second operation.
  • pressure data P2, mass data W2, thickness data T2, hardness data H2, tip distance data l2 at the time of preliminary compression, and tip distance data L2 at the time of main compression are: Obtained as trial hit data 2 (step S02).
  • the pressure sensor 29 detects the molding pressure for each of the manufactured tablets.
  • the control device 4a acquires the molding pressures of the individual tablets detected by the pressure sensor 29, and performs a process of averaging the individual molding pressures.
  • the molding pressure average value calculated by this processing is the pressure data P2.
  • the control device 4a determines the tip interval setting value at the first position based on the output of the rotary encoder 24e of the preliminary compression interval adjusting mechanism 24 at the time of preliminary compression.
  • the interval data l2 based on the output of the rotary encoder 28e of the interval adjustment mechanism 28 for main compression, the setting value of the tip interval at the second position is detected as the tip interval data L2 at the time of main compression.
  • the measuring device 3 measures the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H of each of the plurality of tablets sampled during the second trial driving operation.
  • the measuring device 3 performs an operation for obtaining a mass average value, a thickness average value, and a hardness average value (trial hit data 2) of the plurality of tablets based on the measured values.
  • the mass average value obtained by this calculation is mass data W2
  • the thickness average value is thickness data T2
  • the hardness average value is hardness data H2.
  • control device 4a returns the mass adjusting orbit 17 so as to be substantially the same as the height position when the test hit data 1 is obtained, and assumes a tip interval narrowed by a temperature increase in the continuous operation described later. Then, the third trial punching operation of the tableting machine 2 is performed after narrowing the gap between the tips at the first position and the second position by the same amount, preferably narrowing.
  • the control device 4a stops the operation of the tableting machine 2 after sampling a predetermined number of tablets during the third operation.
  • the pressure data P3, the mass data W3, the thickness data T3, the hardness data H3, the tip distance data l3 at the time of preliminary compression, and the tip distance data L3 at the time of main compression are: Obtained as trial hit data 3 (step S03).
  • the pressure sensor 29 detects the molding pressure for each of the manufactured tablets.
  • the control device 4a acquires the molding pressures of the individual tablets detected by the pressure sensor 29, and performs a process of averaging the individual molding pressures.
  • the molding pressure average value calculated by this processing is the pressure data P3.
  • the control device 4a sets the tip interval setting value at the first position on the basis of the output of the rotary encoder 24e of the preliminary compression interval adjusting mechanism 24.
  • the setting value of the tip interval at the second position is detected as the tip interval data L3 at the time of main compression.
  • the measuring device 3 measures the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H of each of the plurality of tablets sampled during the third trial driving operation.
  • the measuring device 3 performs an operation for obtaining a mass average value, a thickness average value, and a hardness average value (test hit data 3) of the plurality of tablets based on the measured values.
  • the mass average value obtained by this calculation is mass data W3, the thickness average value is thickness data T3, and the hardness average value is hardness data H3.
  • step S04 the controller 4a uses the trial hit data 1 to 3 to determine the PW correlation coefficient a0, the TW correlation coefficient a1, the PT correlation coefficient a2, and the LT correlation coefficient.
  • step S04 the controller 4a uses the trial hit data 1 to 3 to determine the PW correlation coefficient a0, the TW correlation coefficient a1, the PT correlation coefficient a2, and the LT correlation coefficient.
  • Each of a3, TH correlation coefficient a4, and WH correlation coefficient a5 (a5 ⁇ and a5 ⁇ described later) is obtained by calculation, and the control device 4a determines the values of these correlation coefficients a0 to a5. It is registered (stored) in a storage unit (not shown).
  • the control device 4a obtains the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 by the following calculation.
  • the PW correlation coefficient a0 obtained in step S04 is a coefficient that is established between the tablet mass W and the molding pressure P.
  • the PW correlation coefficient a0 is the trial hit data 1 obtained by the first trial run operation and the trial hit data obtained by the second trial run with the mass reduced under the same conditions as the first and the tip spacing. 2 and the trial hit data (P1, P2, W1, W2) regarding the molding pressure P and the mass W.
  • the TW correlation coefficient a1 obtained in step S04 is a coefficient that is established between the thickness T and the mass W of the tablet. Further, the TW correlation coefficient a1 was obtained by the trial run data 1 obtained by the first trial run and the second trial run by reducing the mass W under the same conditions as the first and the tip spacing.
  • the PT correlation coefficient a2 obtained in step S04 is a coefficient that is established between the tablet thickness T and the tablet molding pressure P. It is a coefficient used when determining whether it changes.
  • the LT correlation coefficient a3 obtained in step S04 is a coefficient established between the tablet thickness T and the tip interval L (or l), and when the tip interval L (or l) changes. It is a coefficient used when calculating
  • these correlation coefficients a2 and a3 are obtained by returning the trial weight data 1 obtained by the first trial driving operation and the tablet mass to the vicinity of the tablet mass at the first trial driving operation after the second trial driving operation.
  • trial hit data 3 obtained by the third trial hitting operation performed under the condition that the tip interval is different from that of the first round trial hit data (W1, W3, P1) regarding the molding pressure P, the thickness T, the mass W, etc. , P3, T1, T3).
  • the mass data W3 of the tablet in the third trial driving operation is obtained in the first trial driving operation. It cannot be expected to completely match the same mass as the mass data W1. For this reason, there is a possibility that the molding pressure also varies according to the variation in the mass of the tablet. Therefore, it is not accurate to obtain the PT correlation coefficient a2 using the pressure data P3 as it is.
  • the pressure (referred to as the calculated pressure P3a) of the molding pressure P is obtained when the mass data W3 is controlled to be the mass data W1.
  • step S04 the calculated pressure P3a for obtaining the PT correlation coefficient a2 is obtained by the following equation.
  • P3a P3 + a (W1 ⁇ W3) Equation (3).
  • the mass data reference for obtaining the PT correlation coefficient a2 can be made uniform, and the molding pressure error caused by the difference between the mass data W1 and the mass data W3 can be eliminated. It becomes possible.
  • the mass data W3 remains in the first trial driving operation. It cannot be expected to completely match the same mass as the mass data W1. For this reason, there is a possibility that the thickness of the tablet also varies depending on the variation of the mass of the tablet. Therefore, it is not accurate to obtain the PT correlation coefficient a2 using the thickness data T3 as it is. Therefore, the thickness of the tablet (referred to as a calculated thickness T3a) is determined when the mass data W3 is controlled to be the mass data W1.
  • step S04 the calculated thickness T3a for obtaining the PT correlation coefficient a2 is obtained by the following equation.
  • T3a T3 + a1 (W1 ⁇ W3) (4)
  • the standard of mass data for obtaining the PT correlation coefficient a2 can be aligned, and an error in tablet thickness caused by the difference between the mass data W1 and the mass data W3 can be eliminated. Is possible.
  • the LT correlation coefficient a3 obtained in step S04 is obtained by the following equation that divides the variation value ⁇ L (or ⁇ l) of the tip distance by the variation value ⁇ T of the thickness corrected by the calculated thickness T3a.
  • the TH correlation coefficient a4 obtained in step S04 is a coefficient established between the tablet thickness T and the tablet hardness H. When the tablet hardness H changes, how many mm the tablet thickness T is. It is a coefficient used when determining whether it changes.
  • the correlation coefficient a4 is calculated by comparing the trial hit data 1 obtained by the first trial run operation, the tablet mass after the second trial run operation to the vicinity of the tablet mass at the first trial run operation, Among the test hit data 3 obtained by the third test hit operation performed under different conditions of the tip distance, the test hit data (T1, T3, H1, H3, W1, the hardness H, the thickness T, and the mass W) W3).
  • the mass data W3 is changed to the first trial driving operation. It cannot be expected to completely match the same mass as the mass data W1 in operation. For this reason, the hardness of a tablet may also change according to the fluctuation
  • H3a H3 + (W1-W3) / a5 ⁇ Equation (8).
  • the WH correlation coefficients a5 ⁇ and a5 ⁇ obtained in step S04 are coefficients established between the tablet mass W and the tablet hardness H. When the tablet hardness H changes, the mass W changes by several mg. It is a coefficient used when determining whether to do.
  • the correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ used in the control pattern 3 (WH control) that does not include the control of the tablet thickness is based on the assumption that the tablet thickness T changes according to the tablet mass change, and the tablet hardness H changes. It is a coefficient used when calculating how many mg the tablet weight W changes.
  • the WH correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ is calculated based on the test hit data 1 obtained by the first test hit operation and the second test hit operation performed by reducing the mass under the same conditions of the tip interval and the tip interval.
  • calculation is performed using trial hit data (W1, W2, H1, H2) relating to the mass W and the hardness H. That is, the WH correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ is obtained by the following equation that divides the mass fluctuation value ⁇ W by the hardness fluctuation value ⁇ H.
  • the WH correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ obtained in step S04 is a correlation coefficient used in control pattern 1 (WTH control) and control pattern 5 (TH control) including control of tablet thickness, and the WH phase. Similar to the relation number a5 ⁇ , this is a coefficient established between the tablet mass W and the tablet hardness H.
  • the correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ is used under different preconditions from the correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ used in the control pattern 3 (WH control) not including the above-described thickness control. That is, the correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ is used to determine how many mg of the tablet mass W changes when the tablet hardness H changes, on the premise that the tablet thickness T also changes according to the tablet mass change. Used. On the other hand, the correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ is based on the assumption that the tablet thickness T changes according to the tablet mass change, and the tablet mass W changes by how many mg when the tablet hardness H changes. This is used to determine whether
  • the correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ was obtained by the trial hit data 1 obtained by the first trial strike operation and by the second trial strike operation performed by reducing the mass under the same conditions as the first and tip tips.
  • the trial hit data 2 is calculated using trial hit data (W1, W2, H1, H2) regarding the mass W and the hardness H.
  • the hardness data H2 of the tablet in the second trial driving operation performed by reducing the mass under the same conditions as the first time and the tip distance are the thickness data T1 and the thickness according to the difference between the mass data W1 and the mass data W2. Since a difference also occurs in the data T2, it is not accurate to obtain the WH correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ using the hardness data H2 as it is.
  • the hardness of the tablet (referred to as calculated hardness H2a) is obtained when the thickness data T2 is controlled to be the thickness data T1.
  • H2a H2 + (T1-T2) / a4 (8a).
  • the standard of thickness data for obtaining the WH correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ can be made uniform, and an error in tablet hardness caused by the difference between the thickness data T1 and the thickness data T2 can be eliminated. Is possible.
  • step S04 using the calculated hardness H2a obtained as described above, the WH correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ on the assumption that the tablet thickness T changed according to the tablet mass change is corrected is calculated as the tablet mass.
  • the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 calculated by the control device 4a based on the trial hit data 1 to 3 are automatically stored in a storage unit (not shown) of the control device 4a as basic data for automatic control during continuous operation. Registered (stored).
  • Steps S01 to S04 described above constitute a basic data acquisition unit that executes a basic data acquisition process.
  • steps S01 to S03 are a trial hit data acquisition unit for executing the trial hit data acquisition process.
  • Step S04 is a data registration unit that executes a data registration step of obtaining various correlation coefficients and registering (storing) them as trial data together with trial hit data.
  • the operator operates the input device of the control panel 4 to designate one of the control patterns 1 to 6 and in the designated control pattern. If a correction order of mass, thickness, and hardness (specifically, the correction order of each control reference calculated value, hereinafter referred to as “correction order of each control reference calculated value”) is specified, it is designated. Based on this designation, the control device 4a discriminates and designates the designated control pattern from the control patterns 1 to 6.
  • the control pattern determination procedure executed by the control device 4a will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 3A to 3C.
  • step S1 the control device 4a determines whether or not to control the mass of the tablet based on an operation (designation of a control pattern) of the operator on the input device of the control panel 4. If the determination in step S1 is YES (controls the mass), in step S2, the control device 4a determines whether or not to control the tablet thickness based on the operation. When the determination in step S2 is YES (controls the thickness), in step S3, the control device 4a determines whether or not to control the hardness of the tablet based on the operation.
  • step S4 the control device 4a registers (specifies the correction ranks of the control reference calculation values for the mass, thickness, and hardness for controlling the tablet hardness based on the operator's operation on the input device of the control panel 4. ), Each reference value (also referred to as a standard reference value) and the correction range of each control reference value are registered in a storage unit (not shown) in the control device 4a.
  • Each reference value (standard reference value) registered in step S4 is a mass reference value WO, a thickness reference value TO, and a hardness reference value HO.
  • the correction order of each control reference calculation value is the order in which the control reference calculation values for mass, thickness, and hardness are corrected (updated), and may be automatically registered according to a predetermined order. Alternatively, registration may be performed in an arbitrary order by an artificially performed registration operation. In addition, since control of the tablet hardness is not performed for the control patterns 2, 4, and 6, registration work for the correction ranks of the control reference calculated values is not required. On the other hand, for the control patterns 1, 3, and 5, since there are a plurality of patterns of the correction order of each control reference calculation value as will be described later, the operator selects one of them and the control device 4a is selected. The correction order of each control reference calculated value is registered in the storage unit.
  • the mass reference value WO is a standard reference value for the mass of the tablet to be produced.
  • the mass control reference value correction range is a range in which the mass control reference value WM of the manufactured tablet may be changed, and is defined by the upper limit value WOH and the lower limit value WOL.
  • the thickness reference value TO is a standard reference value for the thickness of the tablet to be produced.
  • the thickness control reference value correction range is a range in which the thickness control reference value TM of the manufactured tablet may be changed, and is defined by the upper limit value TOH and the lower limit value TOL.
  • the hardness reference value HO is a standard reference value for the hardness of the tablets to be produced.
  • the hardness control reference value correction range is a range in which the hardness control reference value HM of the manufactured tablet may be changed, and is defined by an upper limit value HOH and a lower limit value HOL.
  • step S4 When the process of step S4 is executed, the control device 4a selects the control pattern 1 (WTH control described later) via the process of step S17.
  • step S17 a process of replacing a5 with the value of the WH correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ for the WH correlation coefficient a5 used in the WTH control calculation process described later is performed.
  • the control pattern 1 all of the already acquired correlation coefficients a0 to a4 and a5 (a5 ⁇ ) are used.
  • step S5 the control device 4a registers each control reference value for controlling the mass and thickness of the tablet in a storage unit (not shown).
  • the control reference values registered in the process of step S5 are the mass control reference value WM and the thickness control reference value TM.
  • step S 5 When the process of step S5 is executed, the control device 4a selects the control pattern 2 (WT control described later) via the process of step S6. In step S ⁇ b> 6, the control device 4 a determines how to handle correlation coefficients that are not used in the control pattern 2. Specifically, among correlation coefficients a0 to a5 that have already been acquired, when correlation coefficients a4 and a5 that are not used in the WT control described later are included in the calculation expression, they are not used in the subsequent calculation expressions. The unary expression including the correlation coefficients a4 and a5 is automatically set as “0”.
  • step S2 determines whether or not to control the hardness of the tablet based on the operation (designation of the control pattern) of the operator on the input device of the control panel 4.
  • step S8 the control device 4a registers the correction rank of each control reference calculation value of mass and hardness for controlling the hardness of the tablet, each reference value (standard reference value) of each mass and hardness, and each control reference value. Is registered in a storage unit (not shown).
  • the correction order of each control reference calculated value is the order in which the control reference calculated values for mass and hardness are corrected (updated), and may be automatically registered according to a predetermined order. Alternatively, registration may be performed by a manual registration operation.
  • the correction range of each control reference value registered in step S8 is as described in the process of step S4.
  • step S8 the control device 4a selects the control pattern 3 (WH control described later) via the process of step S9.
  • step S9 the control device 4a determines how to handle correlation coefficients that are not used in the control pattern 3. Specifically, among correlation coefficients a0 to a5 that have already been acquired, when correlation coefficients a1 to a4 that are not used in WH control, which will be described later, are included in the calculation expression, they are not used in subsequent calculation expressions.
  • the unary expression including the correlation coefficients a1 to a4 is automatically set as “0”.
  • step S9 the control device 4a performs a process of replacing a5 with the value of the WH correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ for the WH correlation coefficient a5 used in the calculation process of the WH control described later.
  • step S10 the control device 4a registers a mass control reference value WM for controlling only the mass of the tablet in a storage unit (not shown).
  • the registration of the mass control reference value WM may be automatically registered or may be artificially registered.
  • the control device 4a selects the control pattern 4 via the process of step S11.
  • the control device 4a determines how to handle correlation coefficients that are not used in the control pattern 4. Specifically, among the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 that have already been acquired, when the correlation coefficients a1 to a5 that are not used in the later single control over the mass W are included in the calculation formula, A handling item is automatically set such that a monomial including correlation coefficients a1 to a5 that are not used is calculated as “0”.
  • step S1 determines whether or not to control the thickness of the tablet. If this determination is NO (thickness is not controlled), the process returns to step S1. Note that instead of the process of returning to the process of step S1, the program may be terminated. If the determination in step S12 is YES (controls the thickness), in step S13, the control device 4a determines whether to control the hardness of the tablet.
  • step S14 the control device 4a controls the correction ranks of the thickness and hardness control reference calculation values, the thickness and hardness reference values (standard reference values), and the correction of the control reference values for controlling the tablet hardness.
  • the range is registered in a storage unit (not shown).
  • the correction order of each control reference calculated value is the order in which the control reference calculated values for thickness and hardness are corrected (changed).
  • the correction order of each control reference calculation value may be automatically registered according to a predetermined order, or may be registered by a manual registration operation.
  • the correction range of each control reference value for the thickness and hardness registered in step S14 is as described in the process of step S4.
  • step S14 When the process of step S14 is executed, the control device 4a selects the control pattern 5 (TH control described later) via the process of step S18. In step S18, the control device 4a performs a process of replacing a5 with the value of the WH correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ for the WH correlation coefficient a5 used in the calculation process of the control pattern 5.
  • step S15 the control device 4a registers a thickness control reference value TM for controlling only the tablet thickness in a storage unit (not shown).
  • the registration of the thickness control reference value TM may be automatically registered or may be registered artificially.
  • step S15 When the process of step S15 is executed, the control device 4a selects the control pattern 6 (T single control described later) via the process of step S16.
  • step S ⁇ b> 16 the control device 4 a determines how to handle correlation coefficients that are not used in the control pattern 6. Specifically, out of the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 that have already been acquired, if the correlation coefficients a4 and a5 that are not used in the T independent control to be described later with respect to the thickness T are included in the calculation formula, The handling item that a monomial including correlation coefficients a4 and a5 that are not used in the equation is calculated as “0” is automatically set.
  • the processing in steps S1 to S18 described with reference to FIG. 3 constitutes a pattern discrimination unit.
  • the processing of steps S1 to S3, S7, S12, and S13 is a control pattern selecting unit that selects which one of the control patterns 1 to 6 is the designated control pattern.
  • the processing in steps S4, S8, and S14 is a correction content registration unit that registers each reference value (standard reference value), the correction range of each control reference value, and the correction rank of the control reference calculated value, and steps S5 and S10.
  • S15 is a reference value registration unit for registering each control reference value.
  • steps S6, S9, S11, and S16 to S18 includes handling of unused correlation coefficients and whether the value of the used WH correlation coefficient a5 is set to a5 ⁇ or a5 ⁇ . It is a correlation coefficient setting unit for setting handling.
  • the process of step S17 may be executed before the process of step S4, and the process of step S6 may be executed before the process of step S5.
  • the process of step S9 may be executed before the process of step S8, the process of step S11 may be executed before the process of step S10, and the process of step S16 is executed before the process of step S15.
  • the process of step S18 may be executed before the process of step S14.
  • Control pattern 4 The control pattern 4 (W single control) of the first embodiment will be described below.
  • control procedure in the case where, for example, the control pattern 4 (W single control) for controlling only the mass of the tablet is selected by the pattern discriminating unit described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 4A, 4B, 5 and 6. To do.
  • the control device 4a selects the control pattern 4 and selects the tablet press. Only the mass for tablets produced in 2 continuous runs is controlled.
  • the control device 4a executes the processes shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B according to a program stored in a storage unit (not shown).
  • the control device 4 a outputs a “sampling command” to the sampling unit 41.
  • step S102 the control device 4a drives the sampling driver 44 of the sampling unit 41 to start tablet sampling.
  • the sampling shutter 43 is moved to an open position where the inlet of the sampling chute 42 is opened, and the outlet side of the discharge chute 39 is closed by the sampling shutter 43.
  • a plurality of tablets to be manufactured are sampled and supplied to the measuring device 3 through the sampling chute 42.
  • Such tablet sampling is executed at predetermined time intervals, for example, every 30 minutes, during the continuous operation of the tableting machine 2 under the control of the sampling unit 41 by the control device 4a.
  • the control device 4a acquires sampling data in step S103.
  • the sampling data acquired here is measured and calculated by the tip distance setting value (current value) 1M at the first position, the tip distance setting value (current value) LM at the second position, and the measuring device 3.
  • description of each tip interval setting value (current value) is hereinafter abbreviated as “tip tip interval setting value”, omitting description of (current value). Any data other than the molding pressure average value Px is read into the control device 4a by communication processing.
  • step S103 the control device 4a calculates the molding pressure average value Px for the plurality of sampled tablets based on the pressure data detected by the pressure sensor 29.
  • the acquisition of sampling data and its input (supply) to the control device 4a can be performed manually instead of automatically.
  • step S104 the control device 4a executes processing for obtaining the calculated mass Wa of the tablet.
  • the control device 4a obtains a mass fluctuation value when the pressure is controlled (that is, a mass fluctuation value when the molding pressure average value Px is set to the pressure control reference value PM), and the mass fluctuation value Wx. From this, the calculated mass Wa of the tablet is obtained.
  • step S104 The reason why the process of step S104 is necessary is as follows.
  • the tableting device 1 performs pressure control (feedback control) so that the molding pressure becomes the pressure control reference value PM set in the pressure control unit 51 by changing the filling depth of the powder into the mortar hole.
  • pressure control feedback control
  • the tableting device 1 produces tablets having a mass (referred to as a calculated mass Wa) corresponding to the set pressure control reference value PM by feedback control.
  • the calculated mass Wa is changed to the mass control reference value by updating the pressure control reference value PM to a control pressure value corresponding to the mass control reference value WM.
  • WM can be controlled.
  • step S105 the control device 4a determines whether or not the control pattern selected by the pattern determination unit includes control of tablet hardness. Specifically, the control device 4a determines whether any one of the control patterns 1, 3, and 5 is selected. In this case, since the control pattern 4 that controls only the mass of the tablet is selected in the pattern determination unit, the determination in step S105 is NO. Thereby, the operation control system by the control patterns 2, 4, and 6 not including the control of the tablet hardness is selected.
  • step S106 which constitutes a first control reference calculation value update unit (first control reference calculation value update means or first control reference calculation value update step).
  • step S106 is provided to ensure the consistency of the subsequent arithmetic processing.
  • step S106 the control device 4a performs a process of replacing the corresponding control reference calculated value with each value of each control reference value. That is, the control device 4a replaces the tablet mass control reference calculation value WMa with the tablet mass control reference value WM, and replaces the tablet thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the tablet thickness control reference value TM.
  • control device 4a controls the operation of the tableting machine 2 by the following operation control system. That is, first, the control device 4a determines whether or not the selected control pattern includes control of the tablet mass. Specifically, whether or not one of the control patterns 2 and 4 is selected is determined by step S107 which constitutes a control pattern second selection unit (control pattern second selection means or control pattern second selection step). The In this case, since the control pattern 4 is selected in the pattern determination unit, the determination in step S107 is YES. Next, the control device 4a executes the process of step S109, which constitutes a first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit (first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation means or first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation step).
  • step S109 which constitutes a first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit (first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation means or first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation step).
  • step S107 determines whether the control pattern 6 that does not include control of the tablet mass is selected.
  • the control device 4a executes the process of the next step S108, and thereafter executes the process of step S109.
  • step S108 which constitutes the second control reference calculated value update unit (second control reference calculated value update means or second control reference calculated value update step)
  • the control device 4a ensures the consistency of the subsequent arithmetic processing.
  • the tablet mass control reference calculated value WMa is replaced with the calculated tablet weight value Wa.
  • a calculated pressure fluctuation value (pressure fluctuation value due to mass fluctuation) PWa when mass control is performed by the process of step S109 is obtained. That is, in step S109, the control device 4a obtains a calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass average value Wx is controlled to be the mass control reference calculated value WMa by the following equation.
  • the mass control reference calculation value WMa is the same value as the mass control reference value WM as described above.
  • PWa a0 (WMa ⁇ Wx) (Equation 12)
  • a0 is the PW correlation coefficient
  • the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a0 is the calculated pressure fluctuation value when the control device 4a performs mass control (this is expressed as This is referred to as the first calculated pressure fluctuation value.) PWa.
  • step S109 When the process of step S109 is completed, the control device 4a executes the process of step S110 that forms a calculated thickness calculation unit (calculated thickness calculation means or calculated thickness calculation step). Note that the process of step S109 may be executed before the process of step S115 is performed, and the process of step S109 may be executed simultaneously with the process of step S110.
  • step S110 the control device 4a calculates the tablet calculated thickness Ta from the thickness variation value and the thickness average value Tx when mass control is performed (when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa). Obtained by the formula.
  • the mass control reference value WMa in this case is also the same value as the mass control reference value WM as described above.
  • Ta Tx + a1 (WMa ⁇ Wx) (Equation 13)
  • a1 is a TW correlation coefficient
  • a calculated value obtained by calculation of a1 (WMa-Wx) is a thickness fluctuation value when mass control is performed.
  • the calculated thickness Ta when the mass average value Wx is controlled to be the mass control reference calculated value WMa is obtained from the thickness fluctuation value and the thickness average value Tx of the sampling tablet.
  • the value of the monomial including the correlation coefficient a1 in the control pattern 4 is handled as “0”, and thus the equation (13) for determining the thickness variation due to the mass variation
  • the calculated thickness Ta calculated by the above calculation is equal to the thickness average value Tx.
  • step S111 the control device 4a performs the thickness control (when the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa), the tip distance calculated value lMa at the first position, and the second position.
  • the tip distance calculation value LMa is obtained by the following equation.
  • the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is the same value as the thickness control reference value TM as described above.
  • LMa LM + a3 (TMa-Ta)
  • lMa 1M + a3 (TMa ⁇ Ta) (16)
  • LM is the setting value of the tip distance at the second position
  • a3 is the LT correlation coefficient
  • Ta is the calculated thickness obtained in step S110.
  • the tip interval calculation value LMa at the second position calculated by the equation (15) is equal to the tip interval setting value LM at the second position.
  • Equation (16) 1M is the setting value of the tip interval at the first position, a3 is the LT correlation coefficient, and Ta is the calculated thickness obtained in step S110.
  • the value of the monomial including the correlation coefficient a3 in the control pattern 4 is handled as “0” according to the selection by the pattern discriminating unit, so the value of a3 (TMa ⁇ Ta) is “0”. Accordingly, the tip distance calculated value lMa at the first position calculated by the equation (16) is equal to the tip distance setting value 1M for the precompression.
  • step S111 After execution of the process of step S111, the control device 4a executes the process of step S112 that constitutes a second calculated pressure change value calculation unit (second calculated pressure change value calculation means or a second calculated pressure change value calculation step). Note that the order in which the process of step S111 and the process of step S112 are executed may be reversed from the above description, and the process of step S111 and the process of step S112 may be executed simultaneously. .
  • step S112 the control device 4a calculates the calculated pressure fluctuation value (this is referred to as a second calculated pressure fluctuation value) PTa when the thickness is controlled (when the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa). Obtained by the following equation.
  • the thickness control reference calculation value TMa in this case is the same value as the thickness control reference value TM.
  • PTa a2 (TMa ⁇ Ta) (Expression (14))
  • a2 is a PT correlation coefficient
  • a calculated value obtained by calculation of a2 (TMa-Ta) is a calculated pressure fluctuation value (second calculated pressure fluctuation value).
  • the value of the monomial including the correlation coefficient a2 in the control pattern 4 is handled as “0”, and thus is calculated by the calculation of the equation (14) for obtaining the pressure variation due to the thickness variation.
  • the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa is “0”.
  • step S115 which is a pressure control reference calculation value calculation unit (pressure control reference calculation value calculation means or pressure control reference calculation value calculation step), is executed by the control device 4a.
  • step S115 the control device 4a obtains the pressure control reference calculation value PMa by the following equation.
  • PMa Px + PWa + PTa Equation (17).
  • Px is the molding tablet average pressure value
  • PWa is the calculated pressure fluctuation value (first calculated pressure fluctuation value) obtained in step S109
  • PTa is the calculated pressure fluctuation value (first value) obtained in step S112. 2 calculated pressure fluctuation value).
  • the pressure control reference calculated value PMa calculated by the equation (17) in step S115 is the sum of the molding pressure average value Px, the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa by mass control, and the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa by thickness control. Equal to the value.
  • the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa is “0”.
  • step S115 the control device 4a executes the tip interval control unit (tip tip interval control means) KK having steps S116a to S124 (see FIG. 5).
  • the tip interval control unit KK that performs the tip interval control step performs control to change the tip interval in small steps.
  • step S116a forming a flag ON section (means)
  • the control device 4a turns on the tip interval control flag to start control of the tip interval.
  • step S117 the control device 4a determines whether or not to perform the tip distance control. That is, in step S117, which forms the tip interval control determination unit (tip tip interval control determining means or tip tip interval control determining step), the control device 4a determines the tip interval setting value LM at the second position, It is determined whether or not the tip distance calculated value LMa at the position is equal. Alternatively, instead of such processing, the control device 4a determines whether or not the tip interval setting value 1M at the first position is equal to the tip interval calculated value 1Ma at the first position. May be.
  • step S117 determines whether changing the tip interval is unnecessary. If the determination in step S117 is YES (that is, if it is determined that changing the tip interval is unnecessary), the control device 4a executes the processing in step S116b that forms a flag OFF unit (means). In the process of step S116b, the determination in step S126, which will be described later, becomes YES, and the control device 4a turns off the tip interval control flag so that the tip interval is not changed.
  • the control device 4a includes the first tip interval determining unit (the first tip interval determining means or the first tip interval determining means). The determination in step S119 is performed. In step S119, the control device 4a determines whether or not the tip distance calculation value LMa at the second position is smaller than the tip distance setting value LM at the second position. Alternatively, instead of this process, the control device 4a may determine whether or not the tip distance calculation value lMa at the first position is smaller than the tip distance setting value 1M at the first position.
  • step S119 determines the second tip distance determination unit (second tip distance determination means or second tip distance determination step).
  • the determination in step S120a is performed.
  • the control device 4a obtains a value obtained by subtracting the tip interval calculation value LMa at the second position from the tip interval setting value LM at the second position (or alternatively, at the first position. It may be a value obtained by subtracting the tip distance calculated value 1Ma at the first position from the tip distance setting value 1M of the first tip, and it is determined whether or not the absolute value is smaller than the specified dimension value.
  • the prescribed dimension value is set to be 1.00 mm or less, for example, 0.01 mm, in the pattern discrimination unit.
  • the specified dimension value is preferably 0.01 mm to 0.50 mm, and more preferably 0.01 mm to 0.25 mm.
  • Step S121b which is a means or second tip interval control step
  • the control device 4a updates the tip position setting value LM with the value of the tip position calculation value LMa, thereby changing the tip position setting value LM.
  • the tip distance L is changed so that
  • the control device 4a updates the tip interval setting value 1M with the value of the tip interval calculated value lMa for the tip interval l at the first position, thereby setting the tip interval setting.
  • the tip interval l is changed so as to be the value lM.
  • the control device 4a When the determination in step S120a is NO (when the difference between the tip interval setting value and the tip interval calculation value is larger than the specified dimension value), the control device 4a includes the first tip interval control unit (first tip interval).
  • the process of step S121a which makes a control means or a 1st tip distance control process) is performed.
  • the control device 4a performs control so that the tip-toe-tip interval is further narrowed. That is, for the tip position L of the second position, the control device 4a updates the tip position setting value LM with a value of (tip point setting value LM ⁇ specified dimension value), thereby setting the tip position setting.
  • the tip distance L is narrowed so that the value LM is obtained.
  • the control device 4a updates the tip position setting value 1M by updating the tip position setting value 1M with a value of (tip point setting value 1M ⁇ specified dimension value).
  • the tip interval l is narrowed so that the tip interval setting value 1M is obtained.
  • the specified dimension value is as described above, and when the specified dimension value is set to 0.01 as described above, for the tip distance L at the second position, The tip distance setting value LM is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 0.01 mm from the LM, and the tip distance L is narrowed to be the updated tip distance setting value LM. Similarly, with respect to the tip distance l at the first position, the tip distance setting value 1M is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 0.01 mm from the tip distance setting value 1M, and becomes the updated tip distance setting value 1M. Thus, the tip interval l is narrowed.
  • step S119 determines that the third tip distance determination unit (the third tip distance determination means or the third tip distance determination step).
  • the determination in step S120b is performed.
  • the control device 4a obtains a value obtained by subtracting the tip interval calculation value LMa at the second position from the tip interval setting value LM at the second position (or the tip interval setting value at the first position). It may be a value obtained by subtracting the tip distance calculation value lMa at the first position from 1M, where it is determined whether or not the absolute value is smaller than the specified dimension value.
  • the specified dimension value in this case is the same as in step S120a.
  • the determination in step S120b is YES (when the difference between the tip distance setting value and the tip distance calculated value is smaller than the specified dimension value)
  • the control device 4a executes the process in step S121b as described above.
  • the control device 4a When the determination in step S120b is NO (when the difference between the tip distance setting value and the tip distance calculation value is greater than the specified dimension value), the control device 4a includes a third tip distance control unit (third tip distance). The process of step S121c which makes a control means or a 3rd tip distance control process) is performed. In step S121c, the control device 4a performs control so as to widen the tip interval, contrary to the processing in step S121a.
  • the control device 4 a updates the tip position setting value LM with the value of the tip position setting value LM + the specified dimension value for the tip position L at the second position.
  • the tip interval L is increased so as to be the interval set value LM.
  • the control device 4a for the tip position l at the first position, updates the tip distance setting value 1M with the value of (tip point setting value 1M + specified dimension value).
  • the tip interval l is increased so that the tip interval setting value 1M is obtained.
  • the specified dimension value is as described above, and when the specified dimension value is set to 0.01 mm, for example, as described above, the tip distance L is set for the tip distance L at the second position.
  • the tip distance setting value LM is updated to a value obtained by adding 0.1 mm to 01 mm to the value LM, and the tip distance L is changed (controlled) to be the updated tip distance setting value LM.
  • the tip distance setting value 1M is updated to a value obtained by adding 0.01 mm to the tip distance setting value 1M, and this updated tip distance setting value 1M is obtained. In this way, the tip interval l is changed (controlled).
  • step S122 the control device 4a starts an operation of measuring the rotation of the turntable 11. Thereafter, the control device 4a performs the determination in step S123, which constitutes a first rotation speed determination unit (a first rotation speed determination means or a first rotation speed determination step). In step S123, the control device 4a determines whether or not the measured rotation (n rotation) of the turntable 11 has reached a set rotation speed (referred to as PV). This determination is repeated until YES is obtained.
  • step S123 a first rotation speed determination unit (a first rotation speed determination means or a first rotation speed determination step).
  • step S123 determines whether the determination in step S123 is YES. If the determination in step S123 is YES, the control device 4a executes the process of step S124 that forms a first measurement end unit (first measurement end means or first measurement end step). By the processing in step S124, the operation for measuring the rotation of the turntable 11 is completed.
  • step S125 the control device 4a determines whether or not to update the pressure control reference value PM. That is, in step S125, which is a pressure control reference value update determination unit (pressure control reference value update determination unit or pressure control reference value update determination step), the control device 4a determines the pressure control reference value (current value) of the pressure control unit 51. ) It is determined whether PM is equal to the pressure control reference calculation value PMa.
  • step S125 which is a pressure control reference value update determination unit (pressure control reference value update determination unit or pressure control reference value update determination step
  • the control device 4a determines the pressure control reference value (current value) of the pressure control unit 51. ) It is determined whether PM is equal to the pressure control reference calculation value PMa.
  • step S126 the control device 4a determines whether or not the tip interval control flag is ON. If the control device 4a determines that the tip interval control flag indicates a signal (flag OFF signal) that has passed through step S116b, the determination in step S126 is NO. On the other hand, if the control device 4a determines that the tip distance control flag indicates a signal (flag ON signal) that has passed through step S124 without passing through step S116b, the determination in step S126 is YES.
  • step S126 If the determination in step S126 is YES, the process returns to step S117 described above. And when judgment of this step S117 becomes NO, the control apparatus 4a restarts the control which changes the tip distance (L and l) by the tip distance control part KK. Therefore, as long as the determination in step S117 is NO, the control of the tip interval (L and l) is repeated without turning the tip interval control flag OFF.
  • the tip interval (L and l) is increased in small increments according to the specified dimension value when updating the tip interval setting values (LM and 1M). It is changed (controlled) in stages (1.00 mm or less, for example, 0.01 mm). Thereby, a rapid fluctuation of the molding pressure P is suppressed. Therefore, the tableting device 1 does not detect any abnormality in the pressure control unit 51, and can avoid the possibility that the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped due to the abnormality detection in the pressure control unit 51.
  • step S126 If the determination in step S126 is NO, the control device 4a returns to the start and continues control.
  • a control pressure value update unit (control pressure value update process) PK having the process of step S135 is executed.
  • the pressure control reference value PM is changed step by step by the control pressure value update unit PK that executes the control pressure value update step, and the molding pressure is stepped by execution of feedback control of the tablet mass in the pressure control unit 51 associated therewith. And it is changed in stages.
  • step S127 is a first pressure control reference value determination unit (a first pressure control reference value determination unit or a first pressure control reference value determination step).
  • step S127 the control device 4a determines whether or not the pressure control reference value (current value) PM of the pressure control unit 51 is greater than the pressure control reference calculation value PMa.
  • step S127 When the determination in step S127 is YES (when PM> PMa), the control device 4a forms a second pressure control reference value determination unit (a second pressure control reference value determination unit or a second pressure control reference value determination step).
  • step S128 the control device 4a determines whether or not the monomial value (absolute value) of (PM-PMa) is smaller than the specified pressure value. That is, in step S128, the control device 4a determines whether the value (absolute value) obtained by subtracting the pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the pressure control reference value (current value) PM of the pressure control unit 51 is smaller than the specified pressure value. Determine whether.
  • the specified pressure value is preferably set to 10.00 kN or less, for example, 0.30 kN in the pattern discriminating unit, but is not limited thereto.
  • the specified pressure value is more preferably a pressure fluctuation value [value determined by (specified dimension value ⁇ a2 / a3)] based on the step-by-step change in the specified dimension value of the tip interval. .
  • the pressure fluctuation value obtained by this (specified dimension value ⁇ a2 / a3) is, for example, the pressure fluctuation generated by changing the tip interval by 0.01 mm when the specified dimension value set in the pattern discrimination unit is 0.01 mm. Value.
  • step S128 When the determination in step S128 is YES (that is, when the difference between the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculation value PMa is smaller than the specified pressure value), the control device 4a includes the second control pressure value update unit (first control unit).
  • the process of step S131 which performs (2 control pressure value update means or a 2nd control pressure value update process) is performed.
  • step S131 the control device 4a updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM with the pressure control reference calculated value PMa, and each control pressure of the pressure control unit 51 based on the updated pressure control reference value PM. Update the value.
  • control device 4a can accurately match the pressure control reference value PM with the pressure control reference calculated value PMa obtained by calculation, and avoid the calculation processing program falling into an infinite loop. Can do.
  • step S128 When the determination in step S128 is NO (that is, when the difference between the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculation value PMa is greater than the specified pressure value), the control device 4a includes the first control pressure value update unit (the first control pressure value update unit).
  • Step S129 is executed to perform (1 control pressure value update means or first control pressure value update process).
  • the control device 4a updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM with the calculated value of (pressure control reference value PM ⁇ specified pressure value), and the pressure control unit based on the pressure control reference value PM.
  • the control pressure values of 51 are updated so as to decrease.
  • step S127 When the determination in step S127 is NO (when PM ⁇ PMa), the control device 4a forms a third pressure control reference value determination unit (a third pressure control reference value determination unit or a third pressure control reference value determination step).
  • step S130 the control device 4a determines whether or not the monomial value (absolute value) of PM-PMa is smaller than the specified pressure value. That is, the control device 4a determines whether or not the difference between the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculation value PMa is smaller than the specified pressure value.
  • step S130 determines whether the control device 4a is YES. If the determination in step S130 is YES, the control device 4a executes the process in step S131 described above.
  • the control device 4a includes the third control pressure value update unit (the first control value). Step S132 that constitutes (3 control pressure value update means or third control pressure value update step) is executed.
  • step S132 the pressure control reference value PM is increased in contrast to the process of step S129. That is, in step S132, the control device 4a updates the pressure control reference value PM with the calculated value of (pressure control reference value PM + specified pressure value), and each of the pressure control units 51 based on the pressure control reference value PM. Update to increase the control pressure value.
  • step S133 the control device 4a executes the process of step S133 that forms a second measurement start determination unit (second measurement start determination unit or second measurement start determination step). To do.
  • step S133 the control device 4a starts an operation of measuring the rotation of the turntable 11. Thereafter, the control device 4a performs the determination in step S134, which is a second rotation speed determination unit (a second rotation speed determination means or a second rotation speed determination step).
  • step S134 the control device 4a determines whether or not the measured rotation (n rotation) of the turntable 11 has reached the set rotation speed (PV). This determination is repeated until YES is obtained.
  • step S134 the control device 4a executes the process of step S135 that forms a second measurement end unit (second measurement end means or second measurement end step).
  • step S1335 the control device 4a ends the operation of measuring the rotation of the turntable 11.
  • step S117 the control device 4a resumes the control for changing the tip interval by the tip interval control unit KK.
  • step S117 As long as the determination in step S117 is NO, the control of the tip interval is repeated, and as long as the determination in step S125 is NO, the pressure control unit 51 Since the update of the pressure control reference value PM is repeated, every change in the tip interval and the molding pressure is performed step by step.
  • the tip distance control unit KK changes the tip distances L and l in small steps (1.00 mm or less, for example, 0.01 mm) in a stepwise manner according to the updated values of the tip distance setting values 1M and LM. (Control. Thereby, a rapid fluctuation of the molding pressure P is suppressed. Therefore, the tableting device 1 does not detect any abnormality in the pressure control unit 51, and can avoid the possibility that the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped due to the abnormality detection in the pressure control unit 51.
  • the pressure control reference value PM is changed in small steps. That is, when the difference between the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculated value PMa is smaller than the specified pressure value in steps S127 to S132, the control device 4a uses the value of the pressure control reference calculated value PMa that has already been calculated.
  • the control for updating the pressure control reference value PM is performed and the difference between the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculated value PMa is larger than the specified pressure value
  • the pressure control reference calculated value PMa calculated according to the specified pressure value
  • the control for updating the pressure control reference value PM is performed with the value of.
  • the tableting device 1 does not detect any abnormality in the pressure control unit 51, and can avoid the possibility that the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped due to the abnormality detection in the pressure control unit 51.
  • the control pattern 4 (W single control) described above does not include control of tablet hardness, which will be described later, and also does not include control of tablet thickness. Therefore, each of the tip interval calculation values lMa and LMa is the tip. This is the same as the interval set values 1M and LM, and therefore the tip interval is not changed.
  • the pressure control standard calculated value PMa calculated from the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass average value Wx is controlled to be the mass control standard calculated value WMa and the molding pressure average value Px is the tablet.
  • Feedback control based on the pressure control reference value PM of the pressure control unit 51 updated with the value of the pressure control reference calculation value PMa.
  • FBC means that the signal output corresponding to the pressure control reference value (current value) PM set in the pressure control unit 51 is supplied to the track lifting / lowering motor 19a of the track lifting / lowering mechanism 19 and the lower arm 16 Is a control for correcting the mass of a tablet (molded product) by changing the height position of the tablet.
  • Control pattern 6 (T single control) of the first embodiment will be described below.
  • the control device 4a controls the control pattern 6 (T single control). Is selected, and only the thickness control for the tablets manufactured by continuous operation of the tablet press 2 is executed.
  • control procedure by the control pattern 6 is the same as the control by the control pattern 4, but as described above, in the control pattern 6, the correlation coefficients a4 and a5 are not used according to the selection of the control pattern by the pattern discrimination unit. Only the correlation coefficients a0 to a3 are used in the arithmetic processing.
  • the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa calculated in the process of step S109 is the mass replaced with the value of the calculated mass Wa obtained by the calculated mass calculator in step S104 in the second control reference value update unit in step S108. It is a pressure fluctuation value when mass control is performed using the control reference calculation value WMa.
  • the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa obtained through the processing of step S104, step S108 and step S109 can be obtained simply as the difference between the pressure control reference value PM and the molding pressure average value Px. Therefore, the control device 4a can obtain the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa regardless of the mass average value Wx obtained every sampling and the calculated mass Wa obtained in step S104.
  • the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa in the control pattern 6 is a pressure fluctuation value when the mass is not controlled.
  • the first control pressure fluctuation value PWa obtained in step S109 via the process in step S108, the pressure control reference value PMa obtained in the process in step S115 is the pressure control reference value PM (current value) and the thickness. It becomes equal to the value obtained from the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa at the time of control, and only the tablet thickness is controlled.
  • the FBC control in the pressure control unit 51 is also performed in the control pattern 6 in which the mass of the tablet is not controlled. Function. However, in this case, the pressure control reference value that is obtained and updated to control the thickness of the tablet, not the FBC control for maintaining the tablet mass at the mass control reference value WM (or the standard reference value WO). This is executed as FBC control (pressure control) based on PM. The same applies to the case where the thickness and hardness are controlled (in the case of TH control of control pattern 5 described later, which does not include mass control).
  • the correlation coefficient a3 is used in the control pattern 6, the sum of the value obtained in a3 (TMa-Ta) and the tip interval setting value LM at the second position in the process of step S111 is calculated. It is obtained as the tip distance calculated value LMa at the second position when the thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa (when the thickness is controlled).
  • the total value of the value obtained in a3 (TMa ⁇ Ta) and the tip distance setting value 1M at the first position sets the calculated thickness Ta to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa. It is obtained as the tip distance calculation value lMa at the first position (when the thickness is controlled).
  • the tip interval setting values 1M and LM are updated little by little by the tip interval control unit KK.
  • the tip compression interval at the first position is changed by controlling the preliminary compression interval adjusting mechanism 24 so that the updated tip separation setting value 1M is obtained, and the updated tip separation setting value LM.
  • the interval adjustment mechanism 28 for main compression so as to become, the tip interval at the second position is changed.
  • a molded product having a mass (calculated mass Wa) corresponding to the pressure control reference value PM of the pressure control unit 51 is produced.
  • the control device 4a performs sampling by obtaining the pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa, the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa, and the molding pressure average value Px of the molded product.
  • the calculated mass Wa obtained each time is held, and only the thickness of the tablet is controlled according to the update of the pressure control reference value PM commensurate with the update of the tip interval setting value.
  • a tablet (molded product) having a mass (calculated mass Wa) corresponding to the pressure control reference value PM of the pressure control unit 51 is produced.
  • the control device 4a first obtains the calculated mass Wa corresponding to the pressure control reference value PM in step S104, replaces the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the value of the calculated mass Wa in step S108, and further in step S109.
  • the first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit obtains the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa (first calculated pressure fluctuation value) when the mass average value Wx is controlled to the mass control reference calculated value WMa (the same value as the calculated mass Wa).
  • control device 4a is a pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit in step S115, and forms the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa, the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa described in step S112, and the sampling tablet.
  • a pressure control reference calculation value PMa is obtained from the pressure average value Px.
  • the control device 4a can control only the tablet thickness according to the update of the pressure control reference value PM commensurate with the update of the tip interval setting value while holding the calculated mass Wa obtained every sampling. it can.
  • the control pattern 6 is executed under the condition where it is selected not to control the mass of the tablet in step S1 of the pattern discriminating unit, and under the condition where the hardness of the tablet is not controlled in step S13.
  • the change of the tip interval based on the tip interval calculated values lMa and LMa calculated in step S111 (more precisely, the change of the tip interval in consideration of the correction in the tip interval control unit KK)
  • the step Control of the tablet thickness is performed by changing the control pressure value based on the pressure control reference calculation value PMa calculated in S115 (more precisely, by changing the control pressure value taking into account the update at the control pressure value update unit PK). .
  • Control pattern 2 The control pattern 2 (WT control) of the first embodiment will be described below.
  • control pattern 2 WT control
  • control device 4a is manufactured by continuous operation of tablet press 2. Control the mass and thickness of the tablets to be produced.
  • the correlation coefficients a4 and a5 are not used, and the correlation coefficients a0 to a3 are used in the arithmetic processing.
  • the control device 4a controls the tip spacing at the first position and the tip spacing at the second position by steps S121a to 121c in the tip spacing control unit KK. Further, the control device 4a updates the pressure control reference value PM of the pressure control unit 51 and updates each control pressure value by the processing of step S129, step S131, or step S132 in the control pressure value update unit PK. As a result, the height position of the lower punch 16 is changed via the trajectory elevating mechanism 19, feedback control (FBC) for correcting the mass of the tablet (molded product) is performed, and the thickness and mass of the tablet are controlled. Is called.
  • FBC feedback control
  • the tip interval setting values 1M and LM can be changed as described above.
  • the control device 4a can control the molding pressure so as not to change and change the mass of the tablet.
  • the control device 4a uses the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass control is performed (when the mass average value Wx of the sampled tablets is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa) as the molding pressure P.
  • the TW correlation coefficient established between the thickness T and the mass W is obtained by using the PW correlation coefficient a0 established between the thickness W and the thickness fluctuation value when the mass control is performed.
  • the calculated thickness Ta of the tablet is obtained from the thickness variation value and the average thickness value Tx.
  • the control device 4a establishes the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa between the molding pressure P and the thickness T when the thickness is controlled (when the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa).
  • the tip interval calculation values LMa and lMa are obtained from the tip interval variation value and the tip interval setting values LM and 1M, respectively.
  • the control device 4a obtains the pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the molding pressure average value Px, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa by mass control, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa by thickness control.
  • the control device 4a updates the tip interval setting values LM and 1M with the tip interval calculation values LMa and lMa, respectively, to control the tip interval, and the pressure control reference with the pressure control reference calculation value PMa.
  • the value PM is updated to update each control pressure value, and the molding pressure P is controlled with each updated control pressure value.
  • the tips L and l are controlled in accordance with the thickness control that corrects fluctuations such as a decrease in tablet thickness, and the updated pressure control reference value PM Is used as a reference, and the height position of the lower punch 16 that defines the filling depth of the powder into the die 12 is adjusted.
  • the tableting device 1 calculates the pressure control standard suitable for the mass control and thickness control calculated in step S115. Tablets are manufactured according to feedback control based on the value PMa and control of the tablet mass and thickness by controlling the tip distance calculated values LMa and lMa calculated in step S111.
  • Control pattern 1 The control pattern 1 (WTH control) in the first embodiment will be described below.
  • step S105 shown in FIG. 4A determines whether the control pattern selected by the pattern determination unit includes control of tablet hardness.
  • the control pattern 1 WTH control
  • all of the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 are used in the calculation process as described below.
  • step S105 When the determination in step S105 is YES, the control device 4a executes the process of step S137 that constitutes a third control reference calculation value update unit (third control reference calculation value update means or a third control reference calculation value update step). .
  • Step S137 shown in FIG. 7 is provided in order to ensure the consistency of the subsequent arithmetic processing, similarly to step S106.
  • step S137 the control device 4a performs a process of replacing the corresponding control reference calculated value with each value of each reference value (each standard reference value). That is, the control device 4a uses the tablet mass reference value WO as the tablet mass control standard calculation value WMa, the tablet thickness standard value TO as the tablet thickness control standard calculation value TMa, and the tablet hardness standard value.
  • the hardness control standard calculation value HMa of the tablet is replaced with the value of HO, respectively.
  • the mass reference value WO and the mass control reference calculation value WMa are the same value
  • the thickness reference value TO and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa are the same value
  • the hardness reference value HO and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa are the same value.
  • control device 4a performs the determination in step S138, which constitutes a control pattern third selection unit (control pattern third selection means or control pattern third selection step).
  • step S138 the control device 4a determines whether any one of the control patterns 1 and 3 is selected.
  • the determination in step S138 is YES.
  • the control device 4a includes steps S140 and S141, and a first calculated hardness determination unit (first calculated hardness determination means or first calculated hardness determination step) that calculates the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet. Execute WK1.
  • step S140 the control device 4a controls the thickness when the mass control is performed (when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa) (this is referred to as a first hardness variation value). From the hardness fluctuation value (this is called the second hardness fluctuation value) when the thickness average value Tx is set to the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet Obtained by the formula.
  • Ha Hx + [(WMa ⁇ Wx) / a5] + [(TMa ⁇ Tx) / a4] (18)
  • Hx is the hardness average value of the sampling tablets
  • a5 is the WH correlation coefficient
  • the value calculated by [(WMa-Wx) / a5] is the first hardness fluctuation value.
  • Tx of the sampling tablet is an average thickness value
  • a4 is a TH correlation coefficient
  • a value calculated by [(TMa-Tx) / a4] is a second hardness variation value. Therefore, using the equation (18), the control device 4a can obtain the calculated hardness Ha by adding the hardness average value Hx, the first hardness variation value, and the second hardness variation value.
  • step S141 which constitutes a calculated hardness first determining unit (calculated hardness first determining means or calculated hardness first determining step).
  • the determination in step S141 is based on the following two phenomena.
  • the first is that the thickness T of the tablets to be produced is the same, in other words, the hardness of the tablets to be produced if the control is performed to reduce the mass W of the tablets under the condition that the tip spacing of the tablet press 2 is kept constant. This is a phenomenon that H decreases.
  • the tablet thickness T is increased under the condition that the mass W of the manufactured tablet is kept constant, in other words, the hardness of the manufactured tablet is controlled by increasing the gap between the tips of the tablet press 2. This is a phenomenon that H decreases.
  • step S141 the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is appropriate (can be produced while maintaining the tablet hardness within the standard range). That is, in step S141, the control device 4a has the calculated hardness Ha within the range of hardness controllable by each control reference value correction to the upper limit value or lower limit value of each control reference value correction range of mass, thickness, and hardness. It is determined whether or not.
  • HOL ⁇ [(WOH ⁇ WMa) / a5] ⁇ [(TOL ⁇ TMa) / a4] is defined as the lower limit value HL of the hardness controllable range
  • HOH + [(WMa ⁇ WOL) / a5] + [(TMa ⁇ TOH) / a4] is the upper limit value HH of the possible hardness range
  • the lower limit value HL of the hardness controllable range in step S141 is calculated by the following equation.
  • HL HOL-[(WOH-WMa) / a5]-[(TOL-TMa) / a4]
  • the upper limit value HH of the hardness controllable range in step S141 is calculated by the following equation.
  • HOL is the lower limit value of the tablet hardness control reference value correction range
  • HOH is the upper limit value of the tablet hardness control reference value correction range
  • WOL is the lower limit value of the tablet mass control reference value correction range
  • WOH is the tablet.
  • TOL is the lower limit value of the tablet thickness control reference value correction range
  • TOH is the upper limit value of the tablet thickness control reference value correction range
  • a5 is the WH correlation coefficient
  • a4 is a TH correlation coefficient.
  • step S141 the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is appropriate (can be produced while maintaining the tablet hardness within the standard range) by an expression of HL ⁇ Ha ⁇ HH. To do.
  • step S141 If the determination in step S141 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the control reference calculation values for mass, thickness, and hardness), all control reference calculation values for mass, thickness, and hardness are corrected. Even so, the hardness of the tablets to be produced cannot be controlled within the standard range.
  • the control device 4a executes the process of step S146 that forms a notification / stop unit (notification / stop unit or notification / stop unit step). As a result, a signal for reporting an abnormality (abnormal signal) is output, and for example, the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped.
  • step S141 When the determination in step S141 is YES, the control device 4a performs the determination in step S151 which is a correction destination first determination unit (correction destination first determination means or correction destination first determination step) shown in FIG. In step S151, the control device 4a determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “hardness”.
  • step S151 determines the correction destination second determination unit (correction destination second determination means or correction destination second).
  • step S161 the control device 4a determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculated value is “thickness”.
  • step S161 determines that the correction destination third determination unit (correction destination third determination means or correction destination third The determination in step S171 is performed.
  • step S171 the control device 4a determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculated value is “mass”.
  • steps S151, S161, and S171 are not determination units (determination means) for determining whether or not all fall within the hardness controllable range, but what is the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value to the last? It is a judgment part (judgment means) which judges.
  • step S171 If the determination in step S171 is NO, that is, no control standard calculation values for hardness, thickness, and mass are set (registered) as the first correction destination according to the rank set by the input device described above. , The tableting device 1 cannot be controlled by the control device 4a. For this reason, the control device 4a executes the process of step S146, outputs a signal notifying abnormality (abnormal signal), and stops the operation of the tableting machine 2, for example. Note that such an option is not actually possible because the correction order of the control reference calculation value is registered in advance in step S4.
  • step S151 determines the determination in step S151 (YES (the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is hardness)
  • the control device 4a determines the calculated hardness third determination unit (calculated hardness third determination means, calculated hardness third determination).
  • the determination in step S152 is performed.
  • step S152 the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculated value HMa.
  • the hardness controllable range is defined by the following equation. HMa ⁇ kh (HMa ⁇ HOL) ⁇ Ha ⁇ HMa + kh (HOH ⁇ HMa)
  • kh is a hardness correction coefficient when correcting the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, and is set to an arbitrary value between 0.01 and 1.00.
  • the hardness correction coefficient kh is preferably less than 1.00.
  • the hardness controllable range is as follows. HOL ⁇ Ha ⁇ HOH
  • the control device 4a includes the first hardness control reference calculation value update unit (first hardness).
  • Step S153 which is a control reference value update means or a first hardness control reference calculation value update step, is executed.
  • the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculated value HMa with the value of the calculated hardness Ha in order to ensure consistency in the subsequent arithmetic processing.
  • control device 4a supplies the hardness control reference calculation value HMa updated in step S153 to the processing in step S109. Therefore, when step S152 is determined to be YES, the processing of step S109 to step S126 is executed through the processing of step S153. Thereby, the tableting apparatus 1 can manufacture a tablet, keeping the hardness of the tablet manufactured within the range of a specification.
  • step S152 determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the tablet hardness control reference calculated value HMa by the following equation.
  • HMa-kh (HMa-HOL)> Ha
  • the control device 4a includes the second hardness control reference calculation value update unit (second hardness control reference calculation value update means or Step S155 which performs (2 hardness control reference calculation value update step) is executed.
  • step S155 shown in FIG. 9 the control device 4a obtains the tablet hardness control reference provisional value HMb by the following equation using the hardness control reference calculated value HMa and the like.
  • HMb HMa ⁇ kh (HMa ⁇ HOL) (Equation 19)
  • step S155 the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculated value HMa with the calculated hardness control reference provisional value HMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S155, when the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines that the difference between the lower limit value HOL of the hardness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference calculated value HMa is step S152.
  • the hardness control reference provisional value HMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the hardness correction coefficient kh used in the above and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is updated with the value of the hardness control reference provisional value HMb. . Thereby, the process which reduces the hardness control reference
  • the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is not reduced at a stretch to the full range within the allowable range, but is processed by the hardness correction coefficient kh. In accordance with the correction, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is reduced below the limit. In the correction in the case where the hardness correction coefficient kh is set to 1.00, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is reduced at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
  • step S154 If the determination in step S154 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is greater than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa), the control device 4a is configured to update the second hardness control reference calculation value update unit (second hardness control reference calculation value update means or Step S156, which is a 2 hardness control reference calculated value update step), is executed.
  • step S156 shown in FIG. 9 the control device 4a calculates the tablet hardness control reference provisional value HMb using the hardness control reference calculated value HMa and the like by the following equation.
  • HMb HMa + kh (HOH ⁇ HMa) (Equation 20)
  • step S156 the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculated value HMa with the calculated hardness control reference provisional value HMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S156, when the calculated hardness Ha is larger than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the upper limit value HOH of the hardness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference calculated value HMa is step S152.
  • the hardness control reference provisional value HMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the hardness correction coefficient kh used in the above and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is updated with the value of the hardness control reference provisional value HMb. . Thereby, the process which increases the hardness control reference
  • the process in the case where the hardness correction coefficient kh is set to less than 1.00, the process is not performed by increasing the hardness control reference calculation value HMa all at once, but by the hardness correction coefficient kh. According to the correction, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is increased below the limit. In the correction when the hardness correction coefficient kh is set to 1.00, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is increased at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
  • the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculation value HMa so that the tablet hardness control reference calculation value HMa does not fall outside the hardness control reference value correction range.
  • the correction of the hardness control reference calculation value HMa cannot optimize the tablet hardness according to the determination in step S152. For this reason, after the process of step S155 or step S156 is completed, the control device 4a determines the next correction destination in step S157 which constitutes a correction destination fourth determination unit (correction destination fourth determination means or correction destination fourth determination step).
  • the hardness control reference calculated value HMa is an arithmetic value for correcting (updating) the hardness control reference calculation value HMa.
  • step S157 the control device 4a determines whether or not the next correction destination is “mass”. Thereby, when the next correction destination is “mass” (when the determination in step S157 is YES), the process proceeds to step S172 for determining the correction processing procedure of the mass control reference calculated value WMa. When the next correction destination is not “mass” (when the determination in step S157 is NO), the process proceeds to step S162 for determining the correction processing procedure for the thickness control reference calculation value TMa.
  • the determination in step S157 (that is, whether the next correction is “mass” or “thickness”) is in accordance with the correction order of the control reference calculation values specified by the input device described above.
  • step S151 determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness control reference calculated value TMa.
  • the hardness controllable range is defined by the following equation. HMa ⁇ kt (TOL ⁇ TMa) / a4 ⁇ Ha ⁇ HMa + kt (TMa ⁇ TOH) / a4
  • kt is a thickness correction coefficient for correcting the thickness control standard calculation value TMa, and is 0.01 to 1.00. Set to any value.
  • the thickness correction coefficient kt is preferably less than 1.00.
  • the hardness controllable range is as follows. HMa ⁇ (TOL ⁇ TMa) / a4 ⁇ Ha ⁇ HMa + (TMa ⁇ TOH) / a4
  • the control device 4a includes the first thickness control reference calculation value update unit (first thickness).
  • Step S163 which is a control reference calculated value update means or a first thickness control reference calculated value update step), is executed.
  • step S163 the control device 4a obtains the tablet thickness control reference provisional value TMb using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the like by the following equation.
  • TMb TMa + a4 (HMa ⁇ Ha) (Formula (21))
  • step S163 the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculated value TMa with the calculated thickness control reference provisional value TMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent calculation processing.
  • the thickness control reference provisional value TMb is a calculation value for correcting (updating) the thickness control reference calculation value TMa.
  • the control device 4a supplies the thickness control reference calculation value TMa updated in step S163 to the arithmetic processing after step S109. Therefore, if it is determined in step S162 that YES (the calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness control reference calculated value TMa), the processes of steps S109 to S126 are executed via step S163. Thereby, the tableting apparatus 1 can manufacture a tablet, hold
  • step S162 When the determination in step S162 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the thickness control reference calculation value TMa), the control device 4a uses the calculated hardness seventh determination unit (calculated hardness seventh determination means). Alternatively, the process of step S164 which is a calculated hardness seventh determination step) is executed. In step S164 shown in FIG. 10, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the tablet hardness control reference calculated value HMa by the following equation.
  • the control device 4a includes the second thickness control reference calculation value update unit (second thickness control reference calculation value update means or The process of step S165 which performs (2 thickness control reference
  • step S165 shown in FIG. 10 the control device 4a obtains the tablet thickness control reference provisional value TMb using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the like by the following equation.
  • TMb TMa-kt (TMa-TOL) (Equation 22)
  • step S165 the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the calculated thickness control reference provisional value TMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S165, when the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the lower limit value TOL of the thickness control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference calculated value TMa is in step S162.
  • the thickness control reference provisional value TMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the thickness correction coefficient kt used in step 1 and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is updated with the value of the thickness control reference provisional value TMb. . Thereby, the process which reduces thickness control reference
  • the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is not reduced at a stroke to the full range within the allowable range, but is processed by the thickness correction coefficient kt. According to the correction, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is reduced to be smaller than the above limit. In the correction in the case where the thickness correction coefficient kt is set to 1.00, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is reduced at a stroke to the full limit of the allowable range.
  • step S164 When the determination in step S164 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is greater than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa), the control device 4a includes the second thickness control reference calculation value update unit (second thickness control reference calculation value update means or The process of step S166, which is 2 thickness control reference calculated value update step), is executed.
  • step S166 shown in FIG. 10 the control device 4a obtains the tablet thickness control reference provisional value TMb by the following formula using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the like.
  • TMb TMa + kt (TOH ⁇ TMa) (Expression (23))
  • step S166 the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the calculated thickness control reference provisional value TMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S166, when the calculated hardness Ha is larger than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the upper limit value TOH of the thickness control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference calculated value TMa is set.
  • the thickness control reference provisional value TMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the thickness correction coefficient kt used in S162 and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is updated with the value of the thickness control reference provisional value TMb. To do. Thereby, the process which increases thickness control reference
  • the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is not increased at a stretch to the full range within the allowable range, but by the thickness correction coefficient kt. According to the correction, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is increased below the limit. In the correction in the case where the thickness correction coefficient kt is set to 1.00, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is increased at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
  • step S167 is a third calculated hardness calculation unit (third calculated hardness calculation means or third calculated hardness calculation process), and performs a new calculation.
  • the hardness Ha is obtained by the following formula. This expression is the same as Expression (18) described above.
  • the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculation value TMa so that the tablet thickness control reference calculation value TMa does not deviate from the correction range of the thickness control reference value, and uses the updated thickness control reference calculation value TMa and the like.
  • the calculated hardness Ha is calculated. However, the hardness control based on the thickness change cannot optimize the hardness of the tablet according to the determination in step S162.
  • step S167 the control device 4a determines the next correction destination in step S168, which is a correction destination fifth determination unit (correction destination fifth determination means or correction destination fifth determination step), and The thickness control reference calculated value TMa updated in step S165 or step S166 and the calculated hardness Ha newly calculated in step S167 are supplied to the correction destination.
  • step S168 a correction destination fifth determination unit (correction destination fifth determination means or correction destination fifth determination step)
  • the thickness control reference calculated value TMa updated in step S165 or step S166 and the calculated hardness Ha newly calculated in step S167 are supplied to the correction destination.
  • step S168 the control device 4a determines whether or not the next correction destination is “mass”. Thereby, when the next correction destination is “mass” (when the determination in step S168 is YES), the process proceeds to step S172 for determining a correction processing procedure of the mass control reference calculated value WMa described later. . When the next correction destination is not “mass” (when the determination in step S168 is NO), the process proceeds to step S152 for determining the correction processing procedure of the hardness control reference calculated value HMa.
  • the determination in step S168 (that is, whether the next correction is “mass” or “hardness”) is in accordance with the correction order of the control reference calculation values specified by the input device described above.
  • step S171 determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “mass”.
  • the control device 4a calculates the calculated hardness fifth determination unit (calculated hardness fifth determination means or calculated hardness fifth determination).
  • the determination in step S172 is performed.
  • step S172 the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the mass control reference calculated value WMa.
  • the hardness controllable range is defined by the following equation. HMa ⁇ kw (WOH ⁇ WMa) / a5 ⁇ Ha ⁇ HMa + kw (WMa ⁇ WOL) / a5
  • kw is a mass correction coefficient for correcting the mass control reference calculation value WMa, and is an arbitrary value between 0.01 and 1.00
  • the mass correction coefficient kw is preferably less than 1.00.
  • the hardness controllable range is as follows.
  • step S172 the control device 4a includes the first mass control reference calculation value update unit (first mass).
  • step S173 which performs a control reference calculation value update means or a first mass control reference calculation value update step) is executed.
  • step S173 the control device 4a obtains the tablet mass control reference provisional value WMb using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and the like by the following equation.
  • WMb WMa + a5 (HMa ⁇ Ha) (Expression (24))
  • step S173 the control device 4a updates the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass control reference provisional value WMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing.
  • the mass control reference provisional value WMb is a calculated value for correcting (updating) the mass control reference calculated value WMa.
  • step S172 is YES (calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the mass control reference calculated value)
  • the control device 4a performs the process of step S109 to step S126 through the process of step S173. Execute the process.
  • the tableting apparatus 1 can manufacture a tablet, hold
  • step S172 determines NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the mass control reference calculated value)
  • the control device 4a uses the calculated hardness eighth determining unit (calculated hardness eighth determining means). The process of a certain step S174 is executed.
  • step S174 shown in FIG. 11 the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa of the tablet by the following equation.
  • step S174 the determination in step S174 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa)
  • the control device 4a includes the second mass control reference calculated value update unit (the second mass control reference calculated value update unit or the second
  • the process of step S175 which performs the 2 mass control reference calculation value update step) is executed.
  • step S175 shown in FIG. 11 the control device 4a obtains the tablet mass control reference provisional value WMb using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and the like by the following equation.
  • WMb WMa + kw (WOH ⁇ WMa) (Formula 25)
  • step S175 the control device 4a updates the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass control reference provisional value WMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent calculation processing. That is, in step S175, when the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the upper limit value WOH of the mass control reference value correction range and the mass control reference calculation value WMa is equal to step S172.
  • the mass control reference provisional value WMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the mass correction coefficient kw used in the above and the mass control reference calculation value WMa, and the mass control reference calculation value WMa is updated with the value of the mass control reference provisional value WMb. . Thereby, the process which increases mass control standard calculation value WMa is made.
  • the mass control reference calculation value WMa is not increased at a stretch within the allowable range, but the mass correction coefficient kw is used. According to the correction, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is increased below the limit. In the correction in the case where the mass correction coefficient kw is set to 1.00, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is increased at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
  • step S174 When the determination in step S174 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is greater than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa), the control device 4a includes the second mass control reference calculated value update unit (the second mass control reference calculated value update unit or the second The process of step S176 which performs the 2 mass control reference calculated value update step) is executed.
  • step S176 shown in FIG. 11 the control device 4a obtains the tablet mass control reference provisional value WMb using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and the like by the following formula.
  • WMb WMa ⁇ kw (WMa ⁇ WOL) (26)
  • step S176 the control device 4a updates the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass control reference provisional value WMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S176, when the calculated hardness Ha is larger than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the lower limit value WOL of the mass control reference value correction range and the mass control reference calculated value WMa is equal to step S172.
  • the mass control reference provisional value WMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the mass correction coefficient kw used in the above and the mass control reference calculation value WMa, and the mass control reference calculation value WMa is updated with the value of the mass control reference provisional value WMb. . Thereby, the process which reduces the mass control reference
  • the mass control reference calculation value WMa is not reduced at a stretch to the full range within the allowable range, but the mass correction coefficient kw is used. According to the correction, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is reduced to be smaller than the above limit. In the correction in the case where the mass correction coefficient kw is set to 1.00, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is reduced all at once to the full limit of the allowable range.
  • step S175 or step S176 the control device 4a executes the process of step S177 forming the fourth calculated hardness calculation unit (fourth calculated hardness calculation means), and obtains a new calculated hardness Ha by the following equation. .
  • This formula is the same as the formula (18).
  • Ha Hx + [(WMa ⁇ Wx) / a5] + [(TMa ⁇ Tx) / a4] (18)
  • the control device 4a Updates the mass control reference calculation value WMa so that the mass control reference calculation value WMa does not fall outside the correction range of the mass control reference value, and uses the updated mass control reference calculation value WMa to obtain a new calculated hardness. Ha is calculated.
  • the hardness control based on such a mass change cannot optimize the hardness of the tablet according to the determination in step S172.
  • step S177 determines the next correction destination in step S178, which is a correction destination sixth determination unit (correction destination sixth determination means), and sets the correction destination to step S178.
  • the mass control reference calculated value WMa updated in the process of S175 or step S176 and the new calculated hardness Ha calculated in step S177 are supplied.
  • step S178 the control device 4a determines whether or not the next correction destination is “thickness”. Thereby, when the next correction destination is “thickness” (when the determination in step S178 is YES), the process proceeds to step S162 for determining the correction processing procedure of the thickness control reference calculation value TMa. When the next correction destination is not “thickness” (when the determination in step S178 is NO), the process proceeds to step S152 for determining the correction processing procedure of the hardness control reference calculated value HMa.
  • the determination in step S178 (that is, whether the next correction is “thickness” or “hardness”) is in accordance with the correction order of the control reference calculation values specified by the input device described above.
  • control pattern 1 WTH control
  • steps S154 to S157 are executed to obtain the hardness control reference calculated value HMa for obtaining the hardness within the standard range. Correction is made.
  • step S164 is performed.
  • Step S168 is executed to correct the thickness control reference calculation value TMa to obtain a hardness within the standard range.
  • step S168 If it is determined in step S168 that the correction target of the next control reference calculation value is “mass” and the determination in step S172 is NO, the processing in steps S174 to S178 is executed and within the standard range.
  • the mass control standard calculation value WMa for obtaining the hardness of is corrected.
  • step S172 After each of the processes of step S152, step S162, or step S172 becomes YES, each control reference calculated value is corrected according to the correction order of the control reference calculated value registered by the input device described above. The process is repeated. Thereby, the hardness H of the manufactured tablet is kept within the standard range.
  • the tableting machine 2 controls the hardness of the tablets to be manufactured within the standard range (the hardness is within the standard range of the product) by the control by the steps S137 to S178 of executing the hardness control system of the program stored in the control device 4a. It is possible to produce tablets.
  • the tableting machine 2 is subsequently operated according to steps S109 to S126. Thereby, the tip interval is controlled, and the pressure control reference value (current value) set in the pressure controller 51 is updated. Therefore, the tableting device 1 can manufacture a tablet in which the hardness and the hardness are maintained within the standard range.
  • the tableting device 1 of the first embodiment at least one of the mass, thickness and hardness of the tablet produced by compressing the powder, such as the mass and thickness, is determined by the tableting machine 2. It is possible to provide a tableting device 1 that can be manufactured while being held within the standard range regardless of the temperature change of each part of the tableting machine 2 during the continuous operation.
  • each correction coefficient kh, kt, kw is 1.00
  • the correction order of the control reference calculation values in the WTH control described above is 1st hardness, 2nd thickness, 3rd mass
  • the determination in step S172 is always YES.
  • the reason is whether or not the calculated hardness Ha falls within the standard range when the control device 4a corrects all the control reference calculated values of mass, thickness, and hardness to the upper limit value or the lower limit value in the process of step S141. This is because, when the determination is YES, the correction order of the control standard calculation values of hardness H ⁇ thickness T ⁇ mass W is corrected.
  • each of the correction factors (kh, kt, kw) for hardness, thickness, and mass is less than 1.00 so that excessively large control is not performed at one time when the tablet hardness is within the standard range.
  • the control standard calculation values of hardness, thickness, and mass are corrected in small increments.
  • the value of each correction coefficient (kh, kt, kw) was made the same in 1st Embodiment, these may differ.
  • the correction order of each control reference calculated value in the selected control pattern 1 is the hardness H
  • the second is the thickness T
  • the third is the mass W (that is, the order of description of HTW).
  • the correction ranking of each control reference calculation value is designated as one of HWT description order, THW description order, TWH description order, WHT description order, or WTH description order. It is also possible. And by designating one of these, the hardness control based on the correction of the control reference calculation values of the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H according to the correction order of each control reference calculation value was performed.
  • the tableting device 1 has the mass W It is possible to produce a tablet in which the thickness T and the hardness H are maintained within the standard range of the product.
  • the control pattern 5 (TH control) in the first embodiment will be described below.
  • the correction order of the control reference calculation value in the hardness control unit HK is the thickness T
  • the second is the hardness H
  • the pattern discriminating unit can designate (select) either the case where the first is hardness H or the case where the second is thickness T.
  • step S138 When the control pattern 5 (TH control) is selected by the pattern determination unit, the determination in step S138 is NO. In response to this, the control device 4a executes the process of step S142 shown in FIG. In step S142, the control device 4a replaces the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass Wa value obtained in step S104 in order to ensure the consistency of the subsequent arithmetic processing.
  • the process of step S142 constitutes a fourth control reference calculation value update unit (fourth control reference calculation value update means or a fourth control reference calculation value update step).
  • control device 4a executes the second calculated hardness judgment unit (second calculated hardness judgment means) WK2 that includes the steps S144 and S145 to obtain the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet.
  • second calculated hardness judgment unit second calculated hardness judgment means
  • step S144 the control device 4a, similarly to the processing in step S140, performs the hardness control value (when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa) (this is the first hardness).
  • a variation value) a hardness variation value when the thickness is controlled (when the thickness average value Tx is set to the thickness control reference calculation value TMa), this is referred to as a second hardness variation value, and a hardness average value Hx.
  • This equation (18) is the same as the equation used in step S140.
  • step S145 the control device 4a executes the process of step S145 which forms the calculated hardness second determining unit (calculated hardness second determining means or calculated hardness second determining step) similar to the process of step S141.
  • step S145 the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is appropriate (can be produced while maintaining the tablet hardness within the standard range). That is, in step S145, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting each control reference calculation value for thickness and hardness.
  • HOL ⁇ (TOL ⁇ TMa) / a4 is the lower limit value HL of the hardness controllable range and HOH + (TMa ⁇ TOH) / a4 is the upper limit value HH of the hardness controllable range
  • the lower limit value HL of the hardness controllable range in step S145 is calculated by the following equation.
  • HL HOL- (TOL-TMa) / a4
  • the upper limit value HH of the hardness controllable range in step S145 is calculated by the following equation.
  • HOL is the lower limit value of the tablet hardness control reference value correction range
  • HOH is the upper limit value of the tablet hardness control reference value correction range
  • TOL is the lower limit value of the tablet thickness control reference value correction range
  • TOH is the tablet Is the upper limit value of the thickness control reference value correction range
  • a4 is a TH correlation coefficient.
  • step S145 the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is appropriate (it is possible to produce the tablet while keeping the hardness of the tablet within the standard range) by an expression of HL ⁇ Ha ⁇ HH. To do.
  • step S145 the judgment in step S145 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the control values calculated for thickness and hardness) is manufactured even if the control reference values for thickness and hardness are corrected. This means that it is impossible to control the hardness of the tablet to be within the standard range.
  • the control device 4a executes the process of step S146 described above. As a result, a signal (abnormal signal) for notifying abnormality is output and, for example, the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped.
  • step S145 the judgment in step S145 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness and hardness control reference calculation values) is manufactured by correcting the thickness and hardness control reference values.
  • the control device 4a executes the hardness control unit (hardness control means) HK shown in FIG. 8 according to the order of correction destinations of the various control reference calculated values that have already been input.
  • the calculated hardness correction unit HKA that executes the steps S152 to S157, and the steps S162 to S162
  • the calculated thickness correction unit HKB that executes each step of S168 is executed.
  • the hardness control based on the correction of the control reference calculated values of the thickness T and the hardness H according to the correction rank is performed.
  • the tablet thickness and hardness are controlled by updating the tip interval setting values 1M and LM and the pressure control reference value PM of the pressure control unit 51.
  • the tableting device 1 can manufacture a tablet in which the thickness T and the hardness H are held within the standard range of the product.
  • Control pattern 3 The control pattern 3 (WH control) in the first embodiment will be described below.
  • the correction ranking of the control reference calculation value in the hardness control unit HK is the mass W
  • the second is the hardness H
  • the case where the first is the hardness H and the second is the mass W can be specified in the pattern discrimination unit.
  • the calculated hardness correction unit HKA that executes the processes of steps S152 to S157 and the calculated mass correction that executes the processes of steps S172 to S178.
  • the unit HKC is executed.
  • the hardness control based on the correction of the control reference calculation values of the mass W and the hardness H according to the rank is performed.
  • pressure control is performed to change the mass by updating the pressure control reference value PM of the pressure control unit 51.
  • control pattern 3 it is possible to manufacture a tablet in which the mass W and the hardness H are maintained within the standard range of the product.
  • control pattern including the control of the tablet mass for example, the control pattern 3 (WH control), the tablet mass W and the thickness T to be manufactured are held at the respective control reference values. Can be manufactured.
  • the cause of mass fluctuation will be described. Due to the thermal expansion caused by the temperature rise of each part of the tableting machine 2 accompanying the continuous operation of the tableting machine 2, the tip spacing changes so as to narrow, and the molding pressure increases with the change. Thereby, the feedback control by the pressure control unit 51 performs control to reduce the molding pressure (that is, control to reduce the mass) even if the mass of the tablet does not increase. As a result, the mass of the tablet may not be maintained within the standard range.
  • the temperature of the tableting machine 2 is increased, the binding property of the powder may be increased depending on the physical properties of the powder to be compressed. In this case, even if molding is performed while keeping the tip interval constant, the molding pressure decreases.
  • the pressure control unit 51 performs control to increase the molding pressure, so that the mass may increase and the mass may not be maintained within the standard range.
  • the tableting device 1 of the first embodiment at least one of the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H of the tablet produced by compressing the powder, for example, the mass W and the thickness T.
  • a rotary tableting device 1 capable of producing tablets while maintaining the temperature within the standard range regardless of the temperature change of each part of the tableting machine 2 accompanying the continuous operation of the tableting machine 2 and its operating method. Is possible.
  • the tablet thickness T can be maintained within the standard range.
  • the tablet W is manufactured by maintaining the mass W of the tablet within the standard range by controlling the operation control system that automatically updates the pressure control reference value (current value) set in the pressure control unit 51. Is possible.
  • the tableting device 1 of the first embodiment in addition to being able to control the tablet mass W, thickness T, and hardness H by the operation control system, respectively, It is possible to control the thickness T, the tablet mass W and the hardness H, or the combination of the tablet thickness T and the hardness H, respectively, and further to control the tablet mass W independently. It is also possible to control the tablet thickness T independently.
  • the tableting device 1 of the first embodiment can use a common flowchart for controlling a plurality of control patterns, specifically, the control patterns 1 to 6 described above, There is an advantage that it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated flowchart every time.
  • the same configuration as that of the first embodiment or the configuration of the second embodiment having the same function as the first embodiment is denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.
  • the basic data acquisition procedure and the basic data acquisition unit for executing this procedure are the same as in the first embodiment.
  • the procedure for obtaining each correlation coefficient by the calculation in the basic data acquisition unit is also the same as that in the first embodiment, and the description thereof is also omitted.
  • the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2 used in the description of the first embodiment and the respective flowcharts as necessary.
  • the tableting device 1 corrects each control standard calculation value of the mass W, thickness T, and hardness H of the tablet in a specified order so that each of the mass W, thickness T, and hardness H is within the standard range.
  • the tablet is selected by selecting one of the control pattern 1 (WTH control) for performing control to be held in the control and the control pattern 2 (WT control) for controlling the tablet mass W and thickness T to the respective control reference values.
  • WTH control control pattern 1
  • WT control control pattern 2
  • the tableting device 1 according to the second embodiment can select either one of the two control patterns 1 and 2, and an individual flowchart corresponding to each of the two control patterns 1 and 2 (in other words, paraphrase).
  • a program is different from the first embodiment.
  • the pattern discriminating unit in the control device 4a in the second embodiment is shown in FIG.
  • the pattern discrimination unit includes a control pattern selection unit (control pattern selection unit) that selects whether the control pattern designated using an input device (not shown) is the control pattern 1 or the control pattern 2, and each reference value ( Standard reference value), correction range of each control reference value, and correction content registration unit (correction content registration means) for registering the correction order of control reference calculated values, and a reference value registration unit (reference value) for registering each control reference value Registration means) and a correlation coefficient setting unit (correlation coefficient setting means) for setting the handling of whether the value of the WH correlation coefficient a5 to be used is a5 ⁇ or a5 ⁇ .
  • the control pattern selection unit of the second embodiment is configured by omitting the process of step S6 used in the first embodiment, that is, the process of determining the handling of unused correlation coefficients.
  • the control pattern selection unit has step SA and step SB.
  • step SA the control device 4a determines whether or not the designated control pattern is “control pattern 1”. When the determination in step SA is YES, the control device 4a executes step S4 that forms a correction content registration unit. If the determination in step SA is NO, the process proceeds to step SB.
  • step SB the control device 4a determines whether or not the designated control pattern is “control pattern 2”. When the determination in step SB is YES, the control device 4a executes step S5 that forms a reference value registration unit. If the determination in step SB is NO, the process returns to step SA.
  • Step S4 and step S5 are as described in the first embodiment.
  • Step S17 executed after step S4 forms a correlation coefficient setting unit, and the processing of step S17 is as described in the first embodiment.
  • the tableting device 1 can, for example, “control the density of a molded product” or “molding” in addition to the first to sixth control patterns described in the first embodiment.
  • Control pattern 1" or “Control pattern 2” is selected from various control patterns that are considered in consideration of "control of product disintegration” or a combination of these patterns. It becomes possible to manufacture a tablet (molded product) by control according to the above.
  • determination part is not restrict
  • step S4 When the control pattern 1 is selected in FIG. 12 (in the alternative example, when the determination in step S3 is YES (controls the hardness)), the next step S4 processing is executed.
  • the control device 4a registers (specifies) the correction ranks of the control reference calculation values of mass, thickness, and hardness for controlling the hardness of the tablet, and sets each reference value (standard reference value) and each Register the correction range of the control reference value.
  • Each reference value registered in step S4 is a mass reference value WO, a thickness reference value TO, and a hardness reference value HO.
  • the correction range of each control reference value registered in step S4 includes the upper limit value WOH of the mass control reference value correction range and the lower limit value WOL of the correction range, the upper limit value TOH of the thickness control reference value correction range, and the same correction.
  • step S4 the control device 4a selects the control pattern 1 (WTH control) for controlling the mass, the thickness, and the hardness through the processing of the next step S17.
  • step S17 the control device 4a performs processing for replacing the WH correlation coefficient a5 used in the control pattern 1 with the value of the WH correlation coefficient a5 ⁇ described above. In this control pattern 1, all the already acquired correlation coefficients a0 to a5 are used.
  • step S3 determines whether the determination in step S3 is NO (does not control the hardness). If the determination in step S3 is NO (does not control the hardness), the control device 4a executes the process of step S5. In step S5, the control device 4a registers a mass control reference value WM for controlling the mass of the tablet and a thickness control reference value TM for controlling the thickness.
  • step S3 when the determination in step S3 is NO (the hardness is not controlled)), the control device 4a executes the process of step S5.
  • step S5 the control device 4a selects the control pattern 2 (WT control) for controlling the mass and thickness of the tablet.
  • step S4 is a correction content registration unit
  • step S5 is a reference value registration unit
  • step S17 is a correlation coefficient setting unit.
  • control pattern 1 WTH control
  • step S104 that forms the calculated mass calculation unit described in the first embodiment and the step S105 that forms the control pattern first selection unit are omitted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13, after step S103 for acquiring sampling data, the process of step S137, which is a control reference calculation value update unit (control reference calculation value update means or control reference calculation value update process), is performed by the control device 4a. It is executed by.
  • step S137 is the same as the third control reference calculated value update unit described in the first embodiment.
  • the tableting device 1 does not have the control patterns 3 to 6 described in the first embodiment. Therefore, in the control pattern 1 of the second embodiment, step S138 (control pattern third selection unit) described in the first embodiment is omitted. Moreover, in the control pattern 1 of 2nd Embodiment, step S142 which makes the 4th control standard calculation value update part demonstrated in 1st Embodiment, step S144 which makes a 2nd calculation hardness calculating part, and calculated hardness 2nd judgment part Step S145 (see FIG. 7) is also omitted.
  • the control device 4a executes each process of the first calculated hardness determination unit WK1 after the process of step S137 as shown in FIG. Thereby, first, the control apparatus 4a performs the process of step S140 which makes a 1st calculated hardness calculating part.
  • step S141 the control device 4a performs the determination of step S141 which is a calculated hardness first determination unit. If the determination in step S141 is YES, the control device 4a performs steps S151 to S178 (FIGS. 14 to 17) forming the hardness control unit (hardness control means) HK that performs the hardness control process described in the first embodiment. (See) are sequentially performed.
  • control device 4a executes any one of steps S153, S163, and S173 of the hardness control unit HK shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18, the control device 4a executes the process of step S109, which is the first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit described in the first embodiment, and then calculates the calculated thickness described in the first embodiment.
  • step S109 which is the first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit described in the first embodiment
  • step S110 which makes a calculating part is performed.
  • step S109 the control device 4a obtains the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculated value WMa given via the hardness correction unit HK.
  • step S110 the control device 4a calculates from the thickness variation value and the thickness average value Tx when mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculation value WMa given via the hardness correction unit HK. The thickness Ta is obtained.
  • step S111 that constitutes the tip distance calculated value calculation unit described in the first embodiment.
  • the control device 4a uses the thickness control reference calculation value TMa given via the hardness correction unit HK to control the tip interval variation value and the tip interval setting value. From these, the calculated tip spacing value (LMa, lMa) is obtained.
  • control device 4a executes the process of step S112 which constitutes the second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit described in the first embodiment, and then the pressure control reference calculation value calculation unit described in the first embodiment.
  • step S115 is performed.
  • step S112 the control device 4a obtains the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the thickness control is performed using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa given via the hardness correction unit HK.
  • step S115 the control device 4a uses the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa obtained in step S109, the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa obtained in step S112, and the molding pressure average value Px obtained during operation.
  • the pressure control reference calculation value PMa is obtained.
  • step S115 the control device 4a uses the preliminary compression and main compression tip interval calculated values (lMa, LMa) obtained in step S111 to perform preliminary compression. And the process of step S118 which makes the tip interval control part which updates the tip interval setting value (1M, LM) of this compression and controls the tip interval is executed. Thereafter, the control device 4a updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM with the value of the pressure control reference calculated value PMa obtained in step S115, and updates each control pressure value of the pressure control unit 51. The process of step S149 that forms an update unit is executed. After executing step S149, the process returns to the start.
  • control flow for control pattern 1 (WTH control) is the same as in the first embodiment. Therefore, when the tableting device 1 is operated by designating this control pattern 1, the tableting device 1 does not depend on the temperature change during operation of the tableting machine 2 for the reason already described in the first embodiment. It is possible to produce a tablet while maintaining all of the tablet mass W, thickness T, and hardness H within the specified range.
  • control device 4a executes the process of step S101 shown in FIG. 13 based on the program stored in the storage unit (not shown), and the sampling unit 41 outputs a “sampling command”. Instead of this processing, the control device 4a can also determine whether or not there is a “forced sampling command” that artificially outputs a sampling command.
  • step S102 the process of step S102 is executed, and the control device 4a drives the sampling driver 44 of the sampling unit 41.
  • the sampling shutter 43 is moved to an open position where the inlet of the sampling chute 42 is opened, and the outlet side of the discharge chute 39 is closed by the sampling shutter 43. Therefore, a plurality of tablets to be manufactured are sampled and supplied to the measuring device 3 through the sampling chute 42.
  • Such tablet sampling is executed every predetermined time, for example, every 30 minutes, during continuous operation of the tableting machine 2 by controlling the sampling unit 41 by the control device 4a.
  • step S103 the control device 4a acquires sampling data.
  • the sampling data acquired here includes the tip interval setting value 1M at the first position, the tip interval setting value LM at the second position, the mass average value Wx measured and calculated by the measuring instrument 3, and the thickness.
  • step S103 the control device 4a calculates the molding pressure average value Px for the plurality of sampled tablets based on the pressure data detected by the pressure sensor 29.
  • the acquisition of sampling data and its input (supply) to the control device 4a can be performed manually instead of automatically.
  • step S137 the control device 4a performs a process of substituting the corresponding control reference calculated value with each value of each reference value of the tablet in order to ensure the consistency of the subsequent calculation process. That is, the control device 4a uses the tablet mass reference value WO as the tablet mass control standard calculation value WMa, the tablet thickness standard value TO as the tablet thickness control standard calculation value TMa, and the tablet hardness standard value.
  • the hardness control standard calculation value HMa of the tablet is replaced with the value of HO, respectively.
  • the mass reference value WO and the mass control reference calculated value WMa are the same value
  • the thickness reference value TO and the thickness control reference calculated value TMa are the same value
  • the hardness reference value HO and the hardness control reference calculated value HMa are the same value.
  • step S140 the control device 4a controls the thickness when the mass control is performed (when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa) (this is referred to as a first hardness variation value).
  • the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet is obtained from the hardness fluctuation value (this is called the second hardness fluctuation value) when the thickness average value Tx is changed to the thickness control reference calculation value TMa and the hardness average value Hx. .
  • Hx is the hardness average value of the sampling tablets
  • a5 is the WH correlation coefficient
  • the value calculated by (WMa-Wx) / a5 is the first hardness variation value
  • Tx is the thickness average value of the sampling tablets
  • a4 is the TH correlation coefficient
  • the value calculated by (TMa-Tx) / a4 is the second hardness variation value. Therefore, the control device 4a can obtain the calculated hardness Ha by adding the hardness average value Hx, the first hardness variation value, and the second hardness variation value according to the equation (18).
  • step S141 the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is appropriate (the hardness can be maintained within the standard range and production can be continued). That is, in step S141, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting each control reference calculated value of mass, thickness, and hardness. Furthermore, in other words, in step S141, the control device 4a determines that the calculated hardness Ha is equal to the tablet when all the control reference calculated values of mass and thickness are corrected to the upper limit value or the lower limit value.
  • the control device 4a can maximize the hardness when the mass is increased to the maximum and the thickness is reduced to the minimum, and conversely, the mass is reduced to the minimum while calculating the thickness. The hardness can be minimized when the value is increased to the maximum.
  • HOL ⁇ [(WOH ⁇ WMa) / a5] ⁇ [(TOL ⁇ TMa) / a4] is defined as the lower limit value HL of the hardness controllable range
  • HOH + [(WMa ⁇ WOL) / a5] + [(TMa ⁇ TOH) / a4] is the upper limit value HH of the possible hardness range
  • the lower limit value HL of the hardness controllable range in step S141 is calculated by the following equation.
  • HL HOL-[(WOH-WMa) / a5]-[(TOL-TMa) / a4]
  • the upper limit value HH of the hardness controllable range in step S141 is calculated by the following equation.
  • HOL is the lower limit value of the tablet hardness control reference value correction range
  • HOH is the upper limit value of the tablet hardness control reference value correction range
  • WOL is the lower limit value of the tablet mass control reference value correction range
  • WOH is the tablet.
  • TOL is the lower limit value of the tablet thickness control reference value correction range
  • TOH is the upper limit value of the tablet thickness control reference value correction range
  • a5 is the WH phase relationship.
  • the number, a4, is a TH correlation coefficient.
  • step S141 the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is appropriate (the hardness can be maintained within the standard range and the production can be continued) according to the formula HL ⁇ Ha ⁇ HH. to decide.
  • step S141 If the determination in step S141 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the control reference calculation values of mass, thickness, and hardness), all control reference values of mass, thickness, and hardness are set to the upper limit value or This means that even if the lower limit value is corrected, it is impossible to control the hardness of the manufactured tablet within the standard range.
  • the control device 4a executes step S146 that forms a notification / stop unit (means). Thereby, while outputting the signal (abnormal signal) which notifies abnormality, the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped, for example.
  • step S141 determines the correction order of the already input control reference calculation values. Accordingly, a hardness control unit (hardness control means) HK for correcting each control reference calculation value for hardness control is executed.
  • step S151 the control device 4a executes the process of step S151 which is a correction destination first determination unit shown in FIG.
  • step S151 the control device 4a determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “hardness”.
  • step S151 When the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is not “hardness”, the determination in step S151 is NO, and thus the control device 4a performs the determination in step S161 which constitutes a correction destination second determination unit. In step S161, it is determined whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “thickness”.
  • step S161 When the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is not “thickness”, the determination in step S161 is NO, and thus the control device 4a performs the determination in step S171 that constitutes the correction destination third determination unit. In step S171, the control device 4a determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculated value is “mass”.
  • step S151, step S161, and step S171 are NO, that is, any control reference calculation value of hardness, thickness, and mass is set as the first correction destination according to the order set by an input device (not shown).
  • the control device 4a cannot control the hardness of the tablet.
  • the control apparatus 4a performs the process of step S146 mentioned above.
  • a signal (abnormal signal) for notifying abnormality is output and, for example, the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped. Note that such an option is not actually possible because the correction order of the control reference calculation value is set (registered) in advance in step S4.
  • step S152 the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculated value HMa.
  • the hardness controllable range is defined by the following equation. HMa ⁇ kh (HMa ⁇ HOL) ⁇ Ha ⁇ HMa + kh (HOH ⁇ HMa)
  • kh is a hardness correction coefficient when correcting the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, and is set to an arbitrary value between 0.01 and 1.00.
  • the hardness correction coefficient kh is preferably less than 1.00.
  • step S152 determines whether the determination in step S152 is YES (calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculation value HMa).
  • the control device 4a constitutes a first hardness control reference calculation value update unit step S153. Execute the process.
  • step S153 the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculated value HMa with the value of the calculated hardness Ha in order to ensure consistency in the subsequent arithmetic processing.
  • the control device 4a executes a program stored in a storage unit (not shown), supplies the hardness control reference calculation value HMa updated in step S153 to an operation control system described later, and sequentially performs each step of this system. Execute. That is, the determination in step S151 is YES (the first correction destination of the control reference calculated value is “hardness”), and step S152 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculated value HMa). If it is determined that there is a), the control device 4a executes each step of the operation control system, which will be described later, through the process of step S153. Thereby, the tableting apparatus 1 can manufacture a tablet, keeping the hardness of the tablet manufactured within a specification range.
  • step S152 determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa of the tablet by the following equation.
  • step S154 determines whether the hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa. If the determination in step S154 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa), the control device 4a is configured to update the second hardness control reference calculation value update unit (second hardness control reference calculation value update means or The process of step S155 which performs the 2 hardness control reference calculated value update step) is executed.
  • step S155 shown in FIG. 15 the control device 4a obtains the tablet hardness control reference provisional value HMb by using the following formula using the hardness control reference calculated value HMa and the like.
  • HMb HMa ⁇ kh (HMa ⁇ HOL) (Equation 19)
  • step S155 the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculated value HMa with the value of the hardness control reference provisional value HMb calculated to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S155, when the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines that the difference between the lower limit value HOL of the hardness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference calculated value HMa is step S152.
  • the hardness control reference provisional value HMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the hardness correction coefficient kh used in the above and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is updated with the value of the hardness control reference provisional value HMb. . Thereby, the process which reduces the hardness control reference
  • the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is not reduced at a stretch to the full range within the allowable range, but is processed by the hardness correction coefficient kh. In accordance with the correction, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is reduced below the limit. When the hardness correction coefficient kh is set to 1.00, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is reduced at a stroke to the full limit of the allowable range.
  • step S154 determines whether the determination in step S154 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is greater than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa)
  • the control device 4a uses the second hardness control reference calculation value update means (second hardness control reference calculation value update means or The process of step S156 is executed.
  • step S156 shown in FIG. 15 the control device 4a calculates the tablet hardness control reference provisional value HMb using the hardness control reference calculated value HMa and the like by the following equation.
  • HMb HMa + kh (HOH ⁇ HMa) (Equation 20)
  • step S156 the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculated value HMa with the calculated hardness control reference provisional value HMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S156, when the calculated hardness Ha is larger than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the upper limit value HOH of the hardness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference calculated value HMa is step S152.
  • the hardness control reference provisional value HMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the hardness correction coefficient kh used in the above and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is updated with the value of the hardness control reference provisional value HMb. . Thereby, the process which increases the hardness control reference
  • the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is not increased at a stretch to the full limit within the allowable range, but by the hardness correction coefficient kh. According to the correction, the hardness control standard calculation value HMa is increased below the limit. In the correction according to the case where the hardness correction coefficient kh is set to 1.00, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is increased at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
  • the tablet hardness control reference calculation value HMa is corrected to the hardness control reference value correction.
  • the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is updated so as not to fall outside the range.
  • the correction of the hardness control reference calculation value HMa cannot optimize the tablet hardness according to the determination in step S152.
  • the control device 4a determines the next correction destination in step S157 that forms the correction destination fourth determination unit, and sets the correction destination in step S155 or step S156.
  • the hardness control reference calculation value HMa updated with the value of the hardness control reference provisional value HMb is supplied.
  • step S157 the control device 4a determines whether or not the next correction destination is “mass”. Thereby, when the next correction destination is “mass” (when the determination in step S157 is YES), the control device 4a determines in step S172 to determine the correction processing procedure for the mass control reference calculated value WMa. To do. When the next correction destination is not “mass” (when the determination in step S157 is NO), the control device 4a performs the determination in step S162 for determining the correction processing procedure for the thickness control reference calculation value TMa. .
  • the determination in step S157 (that is, whether the next correction is “mass” or “thickness”) is in accordance with the correction rank of each control reference calculation value designated by an input device (not shown).
  • step S151 When the determination in step S151 is NO and the determination in step S161 to be executed next is YES (the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “thickness”), the control device In step 4a, the determination in step S162, which is a calculated hardness fourth determination unit, is performed. In step S162, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness control reference calculated value TMa.
  • the hardness controllable range is defined by the following equation. HMa ⁇ kt (TOL ⁇ TMa) / a4 ⁇ Ha ⁇ HMa + kt (TMa ⁇ TOH) / a4
  • kt is a thickness correction coefficient for correcting the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and is an arbitrary value between 0.01 and 1.00
  • the thickness correction coefficient kt is preferably less than 1.00.
  • step S162 determines whether the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness control reference calculation value TMa.
  • the control device 4a forms a first thickness control reference calculation value update unit. Execute the process.
  • step S163 the control device 4a obtains the tablet thickness control reference provisional value TMb by using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the like according to the following equation.
  • TMb TMa + a4 (HMa ⁇ Ha) (Formula (21))
  • step S163 the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the calculated thickness control reference provisional value TMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent calculation processing.
  • the control device 4a supplies the thickness control reference calculation value TMa updated in step S163 to the operation control system shown in FIG. 18, and sequentially executes the processes of steps S109 to S149 of this system. That is, the determination in step S161 is YES (the first correction destination of the control reference calculated value is “thickness”), and step S162 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness control reference calculated value TMa). In step S163, the control device 4a sequentially executes steps S109 to S149 of the operation control system. Thereby, the tableting apparatus 1 can manufacture a tablet, keeping the hardness of the tablet manufactured within a specification range.
  • step S162 determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet is smaller than the calculated hardness control reference value HMa of the tablet by the following equation.
  • control device 4a uses second thickness control reference calculated value update means (second thickness control reference calculated value update means or The process of step S165 which performs (2 thickness control reference
  • step S165 shown in FIG. 16 the control device 4a obtains the tablet thickness control reference provisional value TMb using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the like according to the following equation.
  • TMb TMa ⁇ kh (TMa ⁇ TOL) (Expression (22))
  • step S165 the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the calculated thickness control reference provisional value TMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S165, when the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the lower limit value TOL of the thickness control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference calculated value TMa is in step S162.
  • the thickness control reference provisional value TMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the thickness correction coefficient kt used in step 1 and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is updated with the value of the thickness control reference provisional value TMb. . Thereby, the process which reduces thickness control reference
  • the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is not reduced at a stroke to the full range within the allowable range, but is processed by the thickness correction coefficient kt. According to the correction, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is reduced to be smaller than the above limit. In the correction according to the case where the thickness correction coefficient kt is set to 1.00, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is reduced at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
  • step S164 When the determination in step S164 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is greater than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa), the control device 4a includes the second thickness control reference calculation value update unit (second thickness control reference calculation value update means or The process of step S166 is performed.
  • step S166 shown in FIG. 16 the control device 4a obtains the tablet thickness control reference provisional value TMb using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the like by the following formula.
  • TMb TMa + kt (TOH ⁇ TMa) (Expression (23))
  • step S166 the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the calculated thickness control reference provisional value TMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S166, when the calculated hardness Ha is larger than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the upper limit value TOH of the thickness control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference calculated value TMa is set.
  • the thickness control reference provisional value TMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the thickness correction coefficient kt used in S162 and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is updated with the value of the thickness control reference provisional value TMb. To do. Thereby, the process which increases thickness control reference
  • the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is not increased at a stroke to the full range within the allowable range, but is processed by the thickness correction coefficient kt. According to the correction, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is increased below the limit. In the correction according to the case where the thickness correction coefficient kt is set to 1.00, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is increased at a stroke up to the limit of the allowable range.
  • step S165 or step S166 the control device 4a executes the process of step S167 forming the third calculated hardness calculation unit, and obtains a new calculated hardness Ha by the following equation.
  • Ha Hx + [(WMa ⁇ Wx) / a5] + [(TMa ⁇ Tx) / a4] (18)
  • the tablet thickness control reference calculation value TMa is corrected to the thickness control reference value correction.
  • the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is updated so as not to fall outside the range.
  • the hardness control based on the thickness change cannot optimize the hardness of the tablet according to the determination in step S162.
  • the control device 4a determines the next correction destination in step S168, which is the fifth correction destination determination unit, and the thickness control updated in step S165 or step S166 to the correction destination.
  • the reference calculated value TMa and the calculated hardness Ha newly calculated in step S167 are supplied.
  • step S168 the control device 4a determines whether or not the next correction destination is “mass”. Thereby, when the next correction destination is “mass” (when the determination in step S168 is YES), the control device 4a determines in step S172 to determine the correction processing procedure for the mass control reference calculated value WMa. To do. When the next correction destination is not “mass” (when the determination in step S168 is NO), the control device 4a performs the determination in step S152 for determining the correction processing procedure of the hardness control reference calculated value HMa. .
  • the determination in step S168 (that is, whether the next correction is “mass” or “hardness”) is in accordance with the correction rank of each control reference calculation value designated by an input device (not shown).
  • step S171 to be executed next the control device 4a determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “mass”. to decide.
  • the control device 4a performs the determination in step S172 that constitutes the calculated hardness fifth determination unit.
  • step S172 the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the mass control reference calculated value WMa.
  • the hardness controllable range is defined by the following equation. HMa ⁇ kw (WOH ⁇ WMa) / a5 ⁇ Ha ⁇ HMa + kw (WMa ⁇ WOL) / a5
  • kw is a mass correction coefficient when correcting the mass control reference calculation value WMa, and is set to an arbitrary value between 0.01 and 1.00, and this mass correction coefficient kw is preferably less than 1.00.
  • step S172 When the determination in step S172 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is within the range of hardness controllable by correcting the mass control reference calculation value WMa), the control device 4a forms a first mass control reference calculation value update unit. Execute the process.
  • step S173 the control device 4a obtains the tablet mass control reference provisional value WMb using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and the like according to the following equation.
  • WMb WMa + a5 (HMa ⁇ Ha) (Expression (24))
  • step S173 the control device 4a updates the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass control reference provisional value WMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing.
  • control device 4a supplies the mass control reference calculated value WMa updated in step S173 to the operation control system, and sequentially executes the processes of steps S109 to S149 of this system.
  • step S171 determines whether the first correction destination of the control reference calculated value is “mass”), and step S172 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha can be controlled by correcting the mass control reference calculated value WMa). If it is determined that it is within the range, the control device 4a sequentially executes the processing of steps S109 to S149 of the operation control system via step S173. Thereby, the tableting apparatus 1 can manufacture a tablet, keeping the hardness of the tablet manufactured within a specification range).
  • step S172 determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet is smaller than the calculated hardness control reference value HMa of the tablet by the following equation.
  • control device 4a uses second mass control reference calculated value update means (second mass control reference calculated value update means or second mass control reference calculated value update means).
  • step S175 which performs the 2 mass control reference calculation value update step
  • the control device 4a obtains the tablet mass control reference provisional value WMb using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and the like by the following equation.
  • WMb WMa + kw (WOH ⁇ WMa) (Formula 25)
  • step S175 the control device 4a updates the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass control reference provisional value WMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent calculation processing. That is, in step S175, when the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the upper limit value WOH of the mass control reference value correction range and the mass control reference calculation value WMa is equal to step S172.
  • the mass control reference provisional value WMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the mass correction coefficient kw used in the above and the mass control reference calculation value WMa, and the mass control reference calculation value WMa is updated with the value of the mass control reference provisional value WMb. . Thereby, the process which increases mass control reference
  • the mass control reference calculation value WMa is not increased at a stretch to the full range within the allowable range, but by the mass correction coefficient kw. According to the correction, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is increased below the limit. In the correction according to the case where the mass correction coefficient kw is set to 1.00, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is increased at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
  • step S174 When the determination in step S174 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is greater than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa), the control device 4a includes the second mass control reference value update unit (the second mass control reference value update unit or the second mass).
  • step S176 that performs the control reference value update step is executed.
  • step S176 shown in FIG. 17 the control device 4a obtains the tablet mass control reference provisional value WMb by the following formula using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and the like.
  • WMb WMa ⁇ kw (WMa ⁇ WOL) (26)
  • step S176 the control device 4a updates the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass control reference provisional value WMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S176, when the calculated hardness Ha is larger than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the lower limit value WOL of the mass control reference value correction range and the mass control reference calculated value WMa is equal to step S172.
  • the mass control reference provisional value WMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the mass correction coefficient kw used in the above and the mass control reference calculation value WMa, and the mass control reference calculation value WMa is updated with the value of the mass control reference provisional value WMb. . Thereby, the process which reduces the mass control reference
  • the mass control reference calculation value WMa is not reduced at a stretch to the full range within the allowable range, but the mass correction coefficient kw is used. According to the correction, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is reduced to be smaller than the above limit. In the correction according to the case where the mass correction coefficient kw is set to 1.00, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is reduced at a stroke to the full limit of the allowable range.
  • step S177 Hx + [(WMa ⁇ Wx) / a5] + [(TMa ⁇ Tx) / a4] (18)
  • the tablet mass control reference calculation value WMa is corrected by the mass control reference value correction.
  • the mass control reference calculation value WMa is updated so as not to deviate from the range, and a new calculated hardness is calculated using the updated mass control reference calculation value WMa and the like.
  • the hardness control based on such a mass change cannot optimize the hardness of the tablet according to the determination in step S172.
  • step S177 the control device 4a determines the next correction destination in step S178 which constitutes a correction destination sixth determination unit, and the mass control updated in step S175 or step S176 to the correction destination.
  • the reference calculated value WMa and the new calculated hardness Ha calculated in step S177 are supplied.
  • step S178 the control device 4a determines whether or not the next correction destination is “thickness”. Thereby, when the next correction destination is “thickness” (when the determination in step S178 is YES), the control device 4a determines in step S162 to determine the correction processing procedure for the thickness control reference calculation value TMa. To do. When the next correction destination is not “thickness” (when the determination in step S178 is NO), the control device 4a performs the determination in step S152 for determining the correction processing procedure of the hardness control reference calculated value HMa. . The determination in step S178 (that is, whether or not the next correction is “thickness”) is in accordance with the correction rank of each control reference calculation value designated by an input device (not shown).
  • This operation control system is controlled as follows by the control device 4a after any one of steps S153, S163, and S173 of the hardness control unit HK shown in FIG. 14 is executed.
  • step S109 is a first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit, and obtains a pressure fluctuation value due to a mass fluctuation. That is, in step S109, the control device 4a updates (corrects) when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa replaced in step S137, or in any of steps S173, S175, and S176.
  • the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass control reference calculated value WMa is set is obtained by the following equation. In this case, the mass control reference calculated value WMa may not be the same value as the mass reference value WO replaced in step S137.
  • a0 is the PW correlation coefficient
  • the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a0 (WMa-Wx) is the mass average value Wx when the control device 4a performs mass control.
  • This is a calculated pressure fluctuation value (this is referred to as a first calculated pressure fluctuation value) PWa obtained when the mass control reference calculated value WMa is used.
  • step S109 When the process of step S109 is completed, the control device 4a executes the process of step S110 that forms a calculated thickness calculation unit. Note that the process of step S109 may be executed by the process of step S115 described later, and can be executed simultaneously with step S110 in parallel processing.
  • a1 is a TW correlation coefficient
  • the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a1 (WMa-Wx) is the value when the control device 4a performs mass control (the mass average value Wx is controlled by mass control).
  • This is the thickness fluctuation value obtained when the reference calculation value WMa is used.
  • the calculated thickness Ta when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculated value WMa is obtained from the thickness variation value and the thickness average value Tx of the sampling tablet.
  • step S111 the control device 4a sets the calculated thickness Ta to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa replaced in step S137, or the thickness control updated in any of steps S163, S165, and S166.
  • the reference calculated value TMa is used (that is, when the thickness is controlled)
  • the tip distance calculated value lMa at the first position and the tip distance calculated value LMa at the second position are obtained by the following equations, respectively.
  • the thickness control reference calculation value TMa may not be the same value as the thickness reference value TO replaced in step S137.
  • LMa LM + a3 (TMa-Ta)
  • lMa 1M + a3 (TMa ⁇ Ta) (16)
  • Equation (15) LM is the setting value of the tip interval at the second position, a3 is the LT correlation coefficient, and Ta is the calculated thickness obtained in step S110.
  • lM is the setting value of the tip interval at the first position, a3 is the LT correlation coefficient, and Ta is the calculated thickness obtained in step S110.
  • step S111 the control device 4a executes the process of step S112 that forms the second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit.
  • the control device 4a performs the thickness control (calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa (this is the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa given via the hardness control unit HK)) Is referred to as a second calculated pressure fluctuation value).
  • the thickness control reference calculation value TMa may not be the same value as the thickness reference value TO replaced in step 137.
  • PTa a2 (TMa ⁇ Ta) (Expression (14))
  • a2 is a PT correlation coefficient
  • the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a2 (TMa-Ta) is the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa (second calculated pressure fluctuation value).
  • step S115 is a pressure control reference calculation value calculation unit.
  • the control device 4a displays the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculated value WMa given via the hardness control unit HK, and the hardness control unit HK.
  • Px is the molding tablet average pressure value
  • PWa is the calculated pressure fluctuation value (first calculated pressure fluctuation value) obtained in step S109
  • PTa is the calculated pressure fluctuation value (first value) obtained in step S112. 2 calculated pressure fluctuation value).
  • the pressure control reference calculated value PMa calculated by the equation (17) in step S115 is equal to the total value of the molding pressure average value Px and the calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa.
  • step S118 the control device 4a updates the tip position setting value 1M of the first position with the value of the tip position calculated value lMa of the first position obtained in step S111, and this updated tip distance is obtained.
  • the tip position l at the first position is controlled by the set value 1M, and the tip position set value LM at the second position is updated with the value of the tip position calculated value LMa at the second position obtained in the same step S111.
  • the updated tip position setting value LM controls the tip position L of the second position.
  • step S149 which constitutes the control pressure value update unit described in the first embodiment.
  • the control device 4a updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM with the value of the pressure control reference calculated value PMa obtained in step S115, and sets each control pressure value of the pressure control unit 51. Update.
  • the process returns to the start.
  • the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H of the tablet can be controlled by the control according to the control pattern 1 shown in FIGS. .
  • the tableting device 1 is operated by designating this control pattern 1, the tablet weight W and the tablet W are controlled regardless of the temperature change during the operation of the tableting machine 2 for the same reason as described in the first embodiment. It is possible to manufacture a tablet while maintaining the thickness T and hardness H within the specified range.
  • the control pattern 2 of the second embodiment is executed using an individual flowchart (in other words, a program) corresponding to the control pattern 2.
  • the processing in step S106 for ensuring consistency with the other control patterns described in the first embodiment, that is, each control reference value (WM, The process of replacing TM) with the corresponding control reference calculation values (WMa, TMa) is not necessary and is omitted.
  • the control reference values corresponding to the respective computation processes of mass control and thickness control in the processes of steps S109 to S112 described later are used.
  • the replacement process in step S106 may be performed as in the first embodiment. Even in this case, since the control reference calculated values (WMa, TMa) corresponding to the control reference values (WM, TM) are the same value, they are obtained by the processing of steps S109 to S112 and step S115. Each calculated value is the same value as each calculated value obtained when the replacement process in step S106 is not performed (omitted).
  • control device 4a executes a program corresponding to each of the control patterns other than the control pattern 2, the program according to the control pattern selected from several control patterns. The same applies to the case where the control pattern 2 is selected when executing.
  • control pattern 2 does not have a hardness control system process.
  • the process of step S137, step S140, step S141, and step S146 described with reference to FIG. 13 in the control pattern 1 of the second embodiment, and FIG. Processing of all steps (steps S151 to S178) constituting the hardness control unit described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17 is omitted.
  • the control apparatus 4a performs the process of step S109 which makes a 1st calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating part after the process of step S103 which acquires sampling data in the flowchart shown in FIG.
  • step S109 which makes a 1st calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating part after the process of step S103 which acquires sampling data in the flowchart shown in FIG.
  • steps S101 to S103 in FIG. 19 and the processing of steps S109 to S112, step S115, step S118, and step S149 included in the operation control system are the same functions as the corresponding steps described in FIG. It is comprised so that it may have.
  • step S109 corresponds to the process of step S109 shown in FIG.
  • a0 is a PW correlation coefficient
  • the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a0 (WM-Wx) is controlled by the control device 4a.
  • PWa the calculated pressure fluctuation value
  • the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference value WM.
  • step S109 When the process of step S109 is completed, the control device 4a executes the process of step S110 that forms a calculated thickness calculation unit. Note that the process of step S109 may be executed by the process of step S115 for obtaining the pressure control reference calculation value PMa, and can be executed simultaneously with the process of step S110.
  • step S110 the control device 4a obtains the calculated thickness Ta from the following formula using the thickness variation value and the thickness average value Tx when the mass control is performed.
  • Ta Tx + a1 (WM ⁇ Wx) (Expression (13a))
  • step S110 corresponds to the process of step S110 shown in FIG.
  • a1 is a TW correlation coefficient
  • the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a1 (WM-Wx) is obtained when the control device 4a performs mass control (mass This is the thickness fluctuation value when the average value Wx is set to the mass control reference value WM.
  • the calculated thickness Ta when mass control is performed is obtained from the thickness variation value and the thickness average value Tx of the sampling tablet.
  • step S111 the control apparatus 4a performs the process of step S111 which makes a tip distance calculated value calculation part.
  • the control device 4a performs the thickness control (when the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference value TM), and the tip distance calculated value lMa at the first position and the punch at the second position.
  • step S111 corresponds to the process of step S111 shown in FIG.
  • LM is the setting value of the tip interval at the second position
  • a3 is the LT correlation coefficient
  • Ta is the calculated thickness obtained in the process of step S110.
  • 1M is the setting value of the tip distance at the first position
  • a3 is the LT correlation coefficient
  • Ta is the calculated thickness obtained in the process of step S110.
  • step S111 the control device 4a executes the process of step S112 that forms the second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit.
  • the control device 4a calculates the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa (this is referred to as a second calculated pressure fluctuation value) when the thickness is controlled (when the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference value TM). Obtained by the formula.
  • PTa a2 (TM ⁇ Ta) (Formula (14a))
  • step S112 corresponds to the process of step S112 shown in FIG.
  • a2 is a PT correlation coefficient
  • the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a2 (TM-Ta) is the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa (second calculated pressure fluctuation). Value).
  • step S115 the control device 4a obtains the pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa by the mass control and the thickness control, and the molding pressure average value Px by the following equation.
  • PMa Px + PWa + PTa Equation (17).
  • step S115 corresponds to the process of step S115 shown in FIG.
  • Px is the average molding pressure value of the sampling tablet
  • PWa is the calculated pressure fluctuation value (first calculated pressure fluctuation value) obtained in step S109
  • PTa is obtained in step S112. This is the calculated pressure fluctuation value (second calculated pressure fluctuation value).
  • the pressure control reference calculated value PMa calculated by the equation (17) in step S115 is equal to the total value of the molding pressure average value Px and the calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa.
  • step S118 is a tip interval control unit.
  • the control device 4a updates the tip position setting value 1M of the first position with the value of the tip position calculated value lMa of the first position obtained in the process of step S111, and the updated tip position.
  • the tip distance l at the first position is controlled by the distance setting value lM.
  • the control device 4a updates the tip position setting value LM of the second position with the value of the tip position calculated value LMa of the second position obtained by the Sh operation in step S111, and this updated tip position is obtained.
  • the tip interval L of the second position is controlled by the interval setting value LM.
  • the process of step S118 corresponds to the process of step S118 shown in FIG.
  • step S149 that forms a control pressure value update unit, and updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM with the value of the pressure control reference calculation value PMa obtained in the process of step S115. To do.
  • step S149 corresponds to the process of step S149 shown in FIG.
  • the control device 4a can control the mass W and the thickness T of the tablet by the control according to the control pattern 2 shown in FIG.
  • the tableting device 1 may change the temperature or the powder during the operation of the tableting machine 2. Regardless of changes in physical properties, it is possible to manufacture tablets by holding the tablet mass W and thickness T at the control reference values registered in step S5.
  • the operation control system that executes the control pattern 2 (WT control) in the second embodiment described above has the following steps. 1. A step of obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when mass control is performed. 2. A step of obtaining a calculated thickness Ta when the mass control is performed. 3. A step of obtaining the tip distance calculation values lMa and LMa when the thickness is controlled. 4. A step of obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the thickness is controlled. 5. A step of obtaining the pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the molding pressure average value Px, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation. 6.
  • a step of controlling the tip interval by updating the tip interval setting values 1M and LM with the values of the tip tip calculated values lMa and LMa. 7.
  • the tableting apparatus 1 first calculates the tablet mass average value Wx obtained from the sampling data every time sampling is performed. The first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa and the calculated thickness Ta when the WM is set (when mass control is performed) are obtained.
  • the tableting device 1 obtains the tip distance calculated values lMa and LMa and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference value TM (when the thickness is controlled).
  • the calculated tip spacing values lMa and LMa are obtained from the tip spacing variation value and the tip spacing setting value when the thickness is controlled.
  • the tableting device 1 evaluates the influence on the tip distance when changing the tip distance based on the mass average value Wx, and calculates the tip distance calculation value in consideration of this influence (change in the tip distance). lMa and LMa can be obtained.
  • the tableting device 1 updates the tip interval setting values 1M and LM with the values of the tip tip calculated values lMa and LMa, and controls the tip intervals l and L with the updated values.
  • the tableting apparatus 1 can hold
  • the tableting device 1 calculates the pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the previously calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa, the previously calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa, and the molding pressure average value Px. In addition, the tableting device 1 updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM with the value of the pressure control reference calculation value PMa.
  • the pressure control obtained in consideration of the influence on the molding pressure by the mass control and the thickness control (that is, the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass control is performed and the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the thickness control is performed).
  • the pressure control reference value PM By updating the pressure control reference value PM with the reference calculated value PMa, the pressure control reference value (current value) PM of the pressure control unit 51 is updated.
  • the tableting device 1 has the tablet thickness irrespective of the temperature change of each part of the tableting machine 2 accompanying the continuous operation of the tableting machine 2. It is possible to manufacture a tablet by holding T at a pre-registered thickness control reference value. Further, in the operation control system, each control pressure value including the pressure control reference value (current value) set in the pressure control unit 51 is updated by updating the pressure control reference value in step S149 based on the calculation. Since the weight control is automatically updated to meet the mass control and the thickness control, the tableting device 1 can hold the tablet mass W at a pre-registered mass control reference value to produce a tablet. Is possible.
  • the tableting device 1 can control the mass and thickness of the tablet based on the control pattern 2 to manufacture the tablet while maintaining the mass and thickness at the corresponding control reference values. Is possible. Moreover, in this control method, the tableting device 1 can also control the density of the tablet (molded product).
  • the density of the tablet is determined by the mass and volume of the tablet.
  • the diameters of the tablets to be molded are substantially the same based on the fact that the hole diameters of the respective dies 12 are processed to be substantially the same, the diameters of the tablets can be handled as fixed values.
  • the density of the tablet can be determined based on the respective values of the mass and the thickness of the tablet.
  • the tableting device 1 controls the density of the tablet according to the WT control of the control pattern 2 based on the correlation established between the density of the tablet and the disintegration property or the dissolution property. It is possible to produce a tablet whose dissolution property is maintained within the standard range.
  • each tip interval of the pre-compression and the main compression and each change (update) of the control pressure value in the pressure control unit 51 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the tip interval setting value and the control pressure value are gradually changed via the tip interval control unit KK and the control pressure value updating unit PK. It is desirable to be able to suppress the occurrence of abnormal pressure associated with a sudden change in molding pressure.
  • the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments.
  • the present invention can also be applied to a rotary powder compression molding apparatus that does not include the first roll, that is, a molding apparatus that includes only one set of upper and lower compression molding rolls disposed at the second position.
  • update of each control reference value and the tip set in the pressure control unit for at least the mass and thickness of the control may be updated with a time difference or may be performed simultaneously.
  • the tableting device 1 uses the tip distance setting value (current value), the pressure control reference value (current value) of the pressure control unit, and the control reference value (current value) for mass, thickness, and hardness in hardness control.
  • the update is performed (the values for updating the current values are referred to as “update control target values”).
  • the tableting device 1 has a mass control unnecessary range for the mass control reference value, a thickness control unnecessary range for the thickness control reference value, and a hardness control unnecessary range for the hardness control reference value.
  • update control target values may be performed only when the update control target values obtained by calculation are values outside the respective control unnecessary ranges. In this case, if the update control target value obtained by the calculation is a value within a control unnecessary range determined for each control reference value, it is not necessary to perform control based on the update control target value.
  • the tableting device 1 is controlled by controlling the sampling unit so that re-sampling is performed by the control device every time the control is performed. It can also be set as the structure which can acquire the sampling data after the said control. Thereby, it is possible to verify whether or not the control is properly performed.
  • the tableting device 1 continues the resampling and repeats the re-sampling even when the update control target value obtained by the calculation is negligibly small, resulting in product loss, and tableting. It is possible to eliminate the fact that the production of the product by the machine 2 cannot be efficiently operated.
  • the control device 4a registers the acquired trial hit data in a storage unit (not shown) in the control device 4a, and then receives the operation switch manually operated by the operator to operate the tablet press 2 in a continuous production operation. I am letting.
  • a control unit is provided with a data judgment unit for judging whether the trial hit data for mass, thickness, and hardness is within the standard range, and this data judgment unit is used for trial hit data for mass, thickness, and hardness. Can be configured so that the operation switch is automatically turned on to shift to the continuous production operation of the tableting machine 2.
  • the control device sets the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 in the control device. It can be registered in a storage unit (not shown). Accordingly, the tableting device 1 can automatically shift to the continuous production operation of the tableting machine 2 without newly acquiring the correlation coefficient based on the test data at the start of production. is there.
  • control in which the tip interval control unit KK and the control pressure value update unit PK are alternately and gradually changed to target control reference values.
  • control is performed so that either the tip interval control unit KK or the control pressure value update unit PK is gradually changed to the target control reference value first, and the control unit or update executed first After the control of the unit is completed, the control may be performed so as to gradually change to the control reference value targeted for the control of the remaining other control unit or update unit.
  • various correlation coefficients that can be used in the calculation process of the selected control pattern, how to obtain the correlation coefficient based on trial hit data, and the like are not limited to the above description.
  • the method for obtaining the PW correlation coefficient a0 in the above-described embodiment is mass control (W2 is changed to W1).
  • the amount of change in the thickness T of the tablet that occurs when the tablet is taken that is, the value obtained by the equation [a1 (W1-W2)] using the TW correlation coefficient a1 (this is referred to as the “thickness variation value”).
  • No correction processing is performed.
  • the correlation coefficient between the molding pressure P and the mass W when the tablet thickness T2 that changes according to the tablet mass control is not corrected to the thickness T1 (thickness control) is expressed as P -W correlation coefficient a0.
  • the PW correlation coefficient according to this method is “a ⁇ ”.
  • the PW correlation coefficient is “a ⁇ ” on the premise that correction processing of the tablet thickness variation value described above that changes according to tablet mass control is performed, for example,
  • PWa previously described first calculated pressure fluctuation value
  • the value of the aforementioned PW correlation coefficient a0 is set to the value of “a ⁇ ”.
  • the value of the PW correlation coefficient a0 may be calculated as the value of “a ⁇ ”.
  • the PW correlation coefficient a0 from the trial hit data is obtained by using the trial hit data (P1, W1 and P2, W2) of the molding pressure P and the mass W in the trial hit 1 and the trial hit 2 described above.
  • the control device performs the arithmetic processing using the PW correlation coefficient a ⁇ that does not include the pressure fluctuation value (fluctuation factor) when the thickness fluctuation value that changes according to the mass control is corrected.
  • standard calculated value PMa is calculated
  • the pressure control reference calculation value PMa can be obtained according to the following arithmetic expression using the PW correlation coefficient a ⁇ on the assumption that no correction is made.
  • the thickness fluctuation value is obtained. Is corrected from the calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa obtained from the equations (12c) and (14b), the equations [12c] and (14b) [a2 (Ta ⁇ Tx)]] is canceled out, and all values become the same value.
  • the control device first controlled the thickness data T2 to the thickness data T1 from the test hit data described above.
  • the molding pressure data P2 is determined by the following equation using the PW correlation coefficient a2 to determine what molding pressure (this is referred to as the calculated pressure P2a).
  • P2a P2 + a2 (T1-T2) (Formula (3a)).
  • the control device uses this calculated pressure P2a to obtain the PW correlation coefficient a ⁇ by the following equation that divides the fluctuation value ⁇ P of the molding pressure corrected by the thickness fluctuation value by the fluctuation value ⁇ W of the tablet mass.
  • the control device can align the standard of the thickness data in obtaining the PW correlation coefficient a ⁇ with the calculated pressure P2a, and an error in the molding pressure (pressure) caused by the difference between the thickness data T1 and the thickness data T2 can be obtained. (Variable factors) can be eliminated.
  • the control device An arithmetic process according to the equation may be performed.
  • the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa obtained by a ⁇ (WMa ⁇ Wx) is obtained by using the PW correlation coefficient a ⁇ obtained on the assumption that the tablet thickness fluctuation value that changes according to mass control is corrected. Therefore, the pressure fluctuation value by the thickness fluctuation value correction is included.
  • the control device uses the pressures from the calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa obtained by the equations (12b) and (14) without correcting the thickness fluctuation values that change according to mass control.
  • a control reference calculation value PMa is obtained.
  • the control device can correct the thickness fluctuation value by using the PW correlation coefficient a ⁇ obtained on the assumption that the tablet thickness fluctuation value that changes according to the mass control is not corrected.
  • the pressure control reference calculated value PMa is determined from the calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa determined by the formula (12c) and the formula (14b) included.
  • the control device uses the PW correlation coefficient a ⁇ obtained on the assumption that the tablet thickness variation value that changes according to the mass control is corrected, and the equation (12d) and the thickness variation value.
  • the pressure control reference calculation value PMa is obtained from the respective calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa obtained by the equation (14c) including the correction of.
  • the control device uses a PL correlation coefficient (or Pl correlation coefficient) established between the molding pressure P and the tip interval L (or l), and the tip. It is also possible to obtain the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa using the interval variation value (the difference between the tip interval calculation value LMa and the tip interval setting value LM).
  • the PT correlation coefficient a2 is ⁇ P / ⁇ T
  • the LT correlation coefficient a3 is a coefficient obtained by ⁇ L / ⁇ T. Therefore, (a2 / a3) in the above formula (14d) for obtaining PTa is obtained by dividing the pressure fluctuation value ( ⁇ P) by the tip interval fluctuation value ( ⁇ L) by the following calculation formula, It can be paraphrased as -L correlation coefficient (for example, a6).
  • a6 a2 / a3
  • the value PTa is the value of the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa described above obtained by multiplying the difference (TMa ⁇ Ta) between the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the calculated thickness Ta by the PT correlation coefficient (a2). It becomes the same value.
  • the value of a5 ⁇ is used in the control pattern 3 (WH control), and the control pattern 1 (WTH control) and the control pattern 5 ( In the (TH control), the embodiment using the value of a5 ⁇ has been described, but it is also possible to perform arithmetic processing by replacing a5 ⁇ with a5 ⁇ .
  • WH control control pattern 3
  • WTH control control pattern 1
  • TH control control pattern 5
  • the embodiment using the value of a5 ⁇ has been described, but it is also possible to perform arithmetic processing by replacing a5 ⁇ with a5 ⁇ .
  • Similar to the method for obtaining the pressure fluctuation values when the mass control and the thickness control are performed from the correlation established between the tablet mass, the thickness and the molding pressure, as described above. This is based on the fact that the correlation between the mass, the thickness, and the hardness is established, so that it is possible to obtain the respective hardness fluctuation values when the mass control and the thickness control are performed.
  • the control device performs setting to greatly expand the mass control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference value correction range. For example, the lower limit value of each control reference value correction range of mass and thickness is set to 0, and the upper limit value of each control reference value correction range is set to the maximum value of the settable range.
  • the control device minimizes only the hardness control reference value correction range (for example, by setting the lower limit value and upper limit value of the hardness control reference value correction range to the same value, etc.), so that the pressure control reference is changed according to the hardness change.
  • the value PM and the tip interval setting values LM and lM are updated.
  • the control device performs setting to greatly widen the thickness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference value correction range. For example, the lower limit value of each control reference value correction range for thickness and hardness is set to zero.
  • the control device sets the upper limit value of each control reference value correction range to the maximum value of the settable range and minimizes only the mass control reference value correction range (for example, the lower limit value of the mass control reference value correction range and By changing the upper limit value to the same value, etc.), the pressure control reference value PM and the tip interval setting values LM, 1M are updated according to the mass change.
  • the control device performs setting to greatly expand the mass control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference value correction range. For example, the lower limit value of each control reference value correction range of mass and hardness is set to 0, and the upper limit value of each control reference value correction range of mass and hardness is set to the maximum value of the settable range.
  • the control device minimizes only the thickness control reference value correction range (for example, by setting the lower limit value and upper limit value of the thickness control reference value correction range to the same value, etc.), so that the pressure control reference is changed according to the thickness change.
  • the value PM and the tip interval setting values LM and lM are updated.
  • the control device performs setting to greatly widen the mass control reference value correction range. For example, the lower limit value of the mass control reference value correction range is set to 0, and the upper limit value of the mass control reference value correction range is set to the maximum value of the settable range.
  • the control device minimizes each of the thickness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference value correction range (for example, the lower limit value and the upper limit value of each control reference value correction range for thickness and hardness are the same value, etc.)
  • the pressure control reference value PM and the tip interval setting values LM, 1M are updated in accordance with each change in thickness and hardness.
  • the control device performs setting to greatly widen the thickness control reference value correction range. For example, the lower limit value of the thickness control reference value correction range is set to 0, and the upper limit value of the thickness control reference value correction range is set to the maximum value of the settable range.
  • the control device minimizes each of the mass control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference value correction range (for example, the lower limit value and the upper limit value of each control reference value correction range for mass and hardness are the same value, etc.)
  • the pressure control reference value PM and the tip interval setting values LM and lM are updated in accordance with each change in mass and hardness.
  • the control device performs setting to greatly widen the hardness control reference value correction range. For example, the lower limit value of the hardness control reference value correction range is set to 0, and the upper limit value of the hardness control reference value correction range is set to the maximum value of the settable range.
  • the control device minimizes each of the mass control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference value correction range (for example, the lower limit value and the upper limit value of each control reference value correction range for mass and thickness are set to the same value, etc.)
  • the pressure control reference value PM and the tip interval setting values LM and lM are updated in accordance with each change in mass and thickness.
  • control pattern 1 WTH control
  • control pattern 2 WT control
  • control means selecting and implementing each of the control patterns from the combination by combining the control pattern or the control unit (control means).
  • the control device 4a for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine 2 including the rotating disk 11 is attached to the rotating disk 11 so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured is maintained at the pressure control reference value PM.
  • a rotary powder compression molding apparatus 1 (or an operation method of this apparatus) having a pressure control unit 51 for controlling the height position of the lower punch 16 that defines the filling depth of the powder into the die 12, The following portions (each means or each step) for controlling only the thickness of the film are provided.
  • Calculated mass calculation unit (calculated mass calculation means or calculated mass calculation process) for calculating the calculated mass Wa of the molded product from the mass fluctuation value when the pressure is controlled and the mass average value Wx of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation. .
  • a first control reference calculation value update unit (first control reference calculation value update means or first control reference calculation value update step) that replaces the thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the value of the thickness control reference value TM.
  • a second control reference value update unit (second control reference value update means or second control reference value update step) that replaces the mass control reference calculation value WMa with the value of the calculated mass Wa.
  • a first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating unit (first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating means or first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step) for obtaining a calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when mass control is performed.
  • Calculated thickness calculation unit (calculated thickness calculating means or calculated thickness calculating step) for calculating the calculated thickness Ta of the molded product from the thickness variation value when the mass control is performed and the average thickness Tx of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation .
  • a tip interval calculation value calculation unit (tip interval calculation value calculation means or a tip interval calculation value calculation step) for calculating a tip interval calculation value (lMa and LMa) when the thickness is controlled.
  • a second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating unit (second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating means or a second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step) for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the thickness is controlled.
  • Pressure control reference calculation value calculation for calculating pressure control reference calculation value PMa from the molding pressure average value Px of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation and the first and second calculated pressure fluctuation values (PWa, PTa).
  • Part pressure control reference calculation value calculation means or pressure control reference calculation value calculation step.
  • a tip spacing control unit (tip tip spacing control means or tip tip spacing control step) that determines the necessity of controlling the tip spacing and changes the tip spacing when it is determined that it is necessary.
  • the control device 4a for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine 2 including the rotating disk 11 is attached to the rotating disk 11 so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured is maintained at the pressure control reference value PM.
  • a rotary powder compression molding apparatus 1 (or an operation method of this apparatus) having a pressure control unit 51 for controlling the height position of the lower punch 16 that defines the filling depth of the powder into the mortar 12, and having a thickness and It comprises the following parts (means or processes) for controlling the hardness.
  • Calculated mass calculation unit (calculated mass calculation means or calculated mass calculation process) for calculating the calculated mass Wa of the molded product from the mass fluctuation value when the pressure is controlled and the mass average value Wx of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation. .
  • a third control reference calculation value update unit (third control reference calculation value update means or a third control reference calculation value update means or Third control standard calculation value update process).
  • a fourth control reference calculation value update unit (a fourth control reference calculation value update unit or a fourth control reference calculation value update step) that replaces the mass control reference calculation value WMa with the value of the calculated mass Wa.
  • a hardness fluctuation value when mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and a hardness fluctuation value when thickness control is performed using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa are obtained, respectively,
  • a second calculated hardness calculating unit (second calculated hardness calculating means or second calculated hardness calculating step) that calculates the calculated hardness Ha of the molded product from the hardness average value Hx of the plurality of molded products determined during operation.
  • Calculated hardness second determination unit (calculated hardness second determination means or calculation) for determining whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range when the thickness and hardness control standard calculation values are corrected. Hardness second judgment step).
  • the determination of the calculated hardness second determining unit (calculated hardness second determining means or calculated hardness second determining step) is within a hardness controllable range
  • at least one of the control standard calculated values of thickness and hardness is set to at least A hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control step) that is updated within a control reference value correction range corresponding to one.
  • First calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when mass control is performed using a mass control reference calculation value given via the hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control process) (First calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating means or first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step).
  • a calculated thickness calculation unit (calculated thickness calculation means or calculated thickness calculation step) for calculating a calculated thickness Ta of a molded product from the thickness variation value when the mass control is performed and the thickness average value Tx.
  • Tip distance calculation value calculation unit for calculating the tip distance calculation values lMa and LMa when the thickness is controlled using the thickness control reference calculation value given via the hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control step) (Tip interval calculation value calculation means or tip interval calculation value calculation step).
  • a second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating section (second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating section means or a second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step) for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the thickness is controlled.
  • Pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit pressure control for determining a pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the molding pressure average value Px of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation and the first and second calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa.
  • a tip spacing control unit (tip tip spacing control means or tip tip spacing control step) that determines the necessity of controlling the tip spacing and changes the tip spacing when it is determined that it is necessary.
  • a control pressure value updating unit (control pressure value updating means or Control pressure value update process).
  • the control device 4a for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine 2 including the rotating disk 11 is attached to the rotating disk 11 so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured is maintained at the pressure control reference value PM.
  • a rotary powder compression molding apparatus 1 (or an operation method of this apparatus) having a pressure control unit 51 for controlling the height position of the lower punch 16 that defines the filling depth of the powder into the mortar 12, and It comprises the following parts (or each process) for controlling the hardness.
  • a third control reference calculation value update unit (third control reference calculation value update means or third control reference value update unit or replacement means for replacing the mass control reference calculation value WMa with the value of the mass reference value WO and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa with the value of the hardness reference value HO, respectively.
  • a first calculated hardness calculating unit calculates a calculated hardness Ha of a molded product from a hardness variation value when mass control is performed and a hardness average value Hx of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation. 1 calculation hardness calculation process).
  • a calculated hardness first determining unit (calculated hardness first determining means or calculation) for determining whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range when each control standard calculated value of mass and hardness is corrected. Hardness first determination step).
  • At least one of the control reference calculated values of mass and hardness is calculated by A hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control step) that is updated within a control reference value correction range corresponding to at least one.
  • First calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when mass control is performed using a mass control reference calculation value given via the hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control process) (First calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating means or first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step).
  • a pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit (a pressure control reference calculated value calculation means or a pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit) that calculates a pressure control reference calculated value PMa from a molding pressure average value Px of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation and the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa. Pressure control standard calculation value calculation process).
  • a control pressure value updating unit (control pressure value updating means or Control pressure value update process).
  • the control device 4a for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine 2 including the rotating disk 11 is attached to the rotating disk 11 so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured is maintained at the pressure control reference value PM.
  • a rotary powder compression molding apparatus 1 (or an operation method of this apparatus) having a pressure control unit 51 for controlling the height position of the lower punch 16 that defines the filling depth of the powder into the mortar 12, and It comprises the following parts (means or steps) for controlling the thickness and hardness.
  • Calculated mass calculation unit (calculated mass calculation means or calculated mass calculation process) for calculating the calculated mass Wa of the molded product from the mass fluctuation value when the pressure is controlled and the mass average value Wx of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation. .
  • a control pattern first selection unit for determining whether or not the designated control pattern includes control of the hardness of the molded product.
  • control pattern first selection unit determines that the designated control pattern does not include control of the hardness of the molded product
  • the value of the mass control reference value WM The first control reference calculated value update unit (first control reference calculated value update means or first control reference calculated) replaces the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the thickness control reference value TM and the thickness control reference calculated value TMa. Value update process).
  • a control pattern second selection unit for determining whether or not the designated control pattern includes control of the mass of the molded product.
  • control pattern second selection unit determines that the designated control pattern does not include control of the mass of the molded product
  • the mass control reference calculated value is calculated based on the calculated mass Wa.
  • a second control reference calculation value update unit (second control reference calculation value update means or a second control reference calculation value update step) that replaces WMa. If the control pattern first selection unit (control pattern first selection means or control pattern first selection step) determines that the designated control pattern includes control of the hardness of the molded product, the mass is represented by the mass reference value WO.
  • the third control reference calculation value update unit (first control unit) replaces the control reference calculation value WMa with the thickness reference value TO, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and the hardness reference value HO with the hardness control reference calculation value HMa.
  • 3 control standard calculation value update means or third control standard calculation value update process).
  • a control pattern third selection unit (control pattern third selection means or control pattern third selection step) for determining whether or not the designated control pattern includes control of the mass of the molded product.
  • control pattern third selection unit determines that the designated control pattern includes the control of the mass of the molded product, the hardness variation when the mass control is performed
  • Hardness calculation section first calculated hardness calculation means or first calculated hardness calculation step.
  • a calculated hardness first determining unit (calculated hardness first determining means) for determining whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range when each control reference calculated value of mass, thickness, and hardness is corrected. Or calculated hardness first judgment step).
  • control pattern third selection unit determines that the designated control pattern does not include control of the mass of the molded product
  • the value of the calculated mass Wa A fourth control reference calculation value update unit (a fourth control reference calculation value update unit or a fourth control reference calculation value update step) that replaces the mass control reference calculation value WMa.
  • the hardness fluctuation value when the mass is controlled and the hardness fluctuation value when the thickness is controlled are obtained, and the calculated hardness of the molded product from these hardness fluctuation values and the average hardness value Hx of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation.
  • a second calculated hardness calculation unit for obtaining Ha (second calculated hardness calculation means or a second calculated hardness calculation step).
  • a calculated hardness second determining unit (calculated hardness second determining means or calculated hardness) for determining whether or not the calculated hardness is within a hardness controllable range when the thickness and hardness control standard calculated values are corrected. Second determination step). When the determination of the calculated hardness first determining unit (calculated hardness first determining means or calculated hardness first determining step) is within a hardness controllable range, at least one of the control reference calculated values of mass, thickness, and hardness is calculated.
  • a hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control step) updated within a control reference value correction range corresponding to at least one of these, or the calculated hardness second judgment unit (calculated hardness second judgment means or calculation)
  • the determination in the second hardness determination step is within the hardness controllable range
  • at least one of the thickness and hardness control reference calculation values is updated within the control reference value correction range corresponding to the at least one.
  • Hardness control unit hardness control means or hardness control process).
  • the control pattern second selection unit determines, or the designated control pattern is When the control pattern second selection unit (control pattern second selection means or control pattern second selection step) determines that the control of the mass of the molded product is not included, and the second control reference value update unit (first 2 control reference value update means or the second control reference value update process), or when the designated control pattern passes through the hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control process)
  • a first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating section for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value when the first calculation pressure fluctuation is performed (first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating means or first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step);
  • Calculated thickness calculation unit (calculated thickness calculating means or calculated thickness calculating step) for determining the calculated thickness Ta of the molded product from the thickness fluctuation value when the mass control is performed and the average thickness Tx of the plurality of molded products determined during operation .
  • Tip distance calculation value calculation unit (tip distance calculation value calculation means or tip distance calculation value) for calculating the tip distance calculation values LMa and lMa from the tip distance variation value and the tip distance setting value when the thickness is controlled. Calculation process).
  • a second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating unit (second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating means or a second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step) for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the thickness is controlled.
  • Pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit for obtaining a pressure control reference calculated value PMa from a molding pressure average value Px of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa. (Pressure control reference calculation value calculation means or pressure control reference calculation value calculation step).
  • a tip spacing control unit (tip tip spacing control means or tip tip spacing control step) that determines the necessity of controlling the tip spacing and changes the tip spacing when it is determined that it is necessary.
  • a control pressure value updating unit (control pressure value updating means or control) that updates each control pressure value of the pressure control unit 51 Pressure value update process).
  • the rotary powder compression molding apparatus according to any one of [1], [2], [4] and claims 2, 4 and 7 (or [1], [2] In the above [4], the operation method of the rotary powder compression molding apparatus according to any one of claims 1, 3 and 5)
  • the tip interval control section (tip tip control means or tip tip control step)
  • a tip interval control determining unit (tip tip interval control determining means or a tip interval control determining step) for determining whether or not the tip interval calculation value and the tip interval setting value are the same;
  • Each of the following parts (means or each process) that is repeatedly executed until the judgment of the tip distance control determining unit (tip distance control determining means or the tip distance control determining step) becomes YES, Is further provided.
  • tip interval control determining unit determines whether or not the tip interval setting value is larger than the tip interval calculated value.
  • a first tip interval determining unit for determining (first tip interval determining means or a first tip interval determining step). If the determination of the first tip interval determining unit (the first tip interval determining means or the first tip interval determining step) is YES, the difference (absolutely) between the tip interval setting value and the tip interval calculation value Value) is smaller than the prescribed dimension value, and determines whether or not the second tip interval determination unit (second tip interval determination means or second tip interval determination step).
  • the difference (absolutely) between the tip interval setting value and the tip interval calculated value Value) is smaller than the specified dimension value, and determines whether or not a third tip distance determination unit (third tip distance determination means or third tip distance determination step).
  • the flange is set to a value obtained by subtracting the specified dimension value from the tip interval setting value.
  • a first tip interval control unit that updates the tip interval setting value and narrows the tip interval (first tip interval control means or first tip interval control step).
  • the second tip interval control unit updates the tip interval setting value with the tip tip calculated value and changes the tip interval to the updated value.
  • the hook is set to a value obtained by adding the specified dimension value to the tip interval setting value.
  • a third tip distance control unit that updates the tip distance setting value and widens the tip distance (a third tip distance control means or a third tip distance control step).
  • the control pressure value update unit control pressure value update means or control pressure value update step
  • a pressure control reference value update determination unit pressure control reference value update determination means or pressure control reference value update determination step for determining whether or not the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculated value PMa are the same;
  • the pressure control reference value update determination unit pressure control reference value update determination unit or pressure control reference value update determination step further includes the following unit (or step) that is repeatedly executed until the determination is YES.
  • a first pressure control reference value determining unit (first pressure control reference value determining means or first pressure control reference value determining step) for determining whether or not the pressure control reference value PM is greater than the pressure control reference calculated value PMa;
  • the determination of the first pressure control reference value determination unit (the first pressure control reference value determination means or the first pressure control reference value determination step) is YES, the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculated value PMa
  • a second pressure control reference value determination unit (second pressure control reference value determination means or a second pressure control reference value determination step) for determining whether or not the difference (absolute value) is smaller than the specified pressure value.
  • the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculation value PMa A third pressure control reference value determination unit (a third pressure control reference value determination means or a third pressure control reference value determination step) for determining whether or not the difference (absolute value) is smaller than the specified pressure value.
  • the first control pressure value updating unit updates the pressure control reference value PM and updates each control pressure value of the pressure control unit based on the updated pressure control reference value PM.
  • the third control pressure value updating unit updates the pressure control reference value PM and updates each control pressure value of the pressure control unit based on the updated pressure control reference value PM. Or a 3rd control pressure value update process).
  • control pattern second selection unit step S108 ... second Control reference calculated value update unit, step S109 ... first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation part, step S110 ... calculated thickness calculation part, step S111 ... tip distance calculated value calculation part, step S112 ... second calculated pressure fluctuation value Calculation unit, step S115 ... pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit, step S117 ... tip distance control determination unit, step S118 ... tip distance control unit, step S119 ... first tip distance determination unit, step S120a ... second key Point interval determination unit, step S120b ... third rod tip interval determination unit, step S121a ... first rod tip interval control unit, step S121b ... second rod tip interval control unit, step S121c ...
  • step S125 pressure control reference value update determination unit
  • step S127 first pressure control reference value determination unit
  • step S128 second pressure control reference value determination unit
  • step S129 first control pressure value update unit
  • step S130 third Pressure control reference value determination unit
  • step S131 ... second control pressure value update unit
  • step S132 ... third control pressure value update unit
  • step 137 ... Control reference calculated value update unit or third control reference calculated value update unit
  • step S138 ... Control pattern third selection unit
  • step S140 ... First calculated hardness calculation unit
  • step S141 ... Calculated hardness first determination unit
  • step S142 ... 4th control standard calculation value update part
  • step S144 ... 2nd calculation hardness calculation part
  • step S145 calculation hardness 2nd judgment part
  • step S149 ...
  • step S151 ... correction destination 1st judgment part
  • step S152 Calculated hardness third determining unit
  • step S153 First hardness control reference calculated value updating unit
  • step S154 ... Calculated hardness sixth determining unit, steps S155, 156 ... Second hardness control reference calculated value updating unit, step S157 ... Correction destination fourth determination unit, step S161 ... Correction destination second determination unit, step S162 ... Calculated hardness fourth determination unit, step S163: first thickness control reference calculated value update unit, step S164 ... calculated hardness seventh determination unit, steps S165, 166 ... second thickness control reference calculated value update unit, step S167 ... third calculated hardness calculation unit, step S168 ... Correction destination fifth determination unit, step S171 ...
  • Correction destination third determination unit step S172 ... Calculated hardness fifth determination unit, step S173 ... First mass control reference calculated value update unit, step S174 ... Calculated hardness eighth determination unit, Steps S175, 176 ... second mass control reference calculated value update unit, step S177 ... fourth calculated hardness calculation unit, step S178 ... correction destination sixth determination unit, PK ... control pressure value update unit (control pressure value update means), KK ... Tip distance control section (tip distance control means), HK ... Hardness control section (hardness control means)

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Control Of Presses (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a method of operating a powder compression molding device with which the mass and thickness of a molded product manufactured by compressing powder are maintained within a standard range irrespective of changes in the temperature of a powder compression molding machine. An estimated pressure variation and a thickness variation when the mass of a molded product is controlled are obtained, and the thickness variation and the mean thickness are used to obtain an estimated thickness. An estimated pressure variation and an estimated punch tip gap when the thickness of the molded product is controlled on the basis of the estimated thickness are obtained, and the set value of the punch tip gap is updated using the estimated punch tip gap. In conjunction with this, the estimated pressure variation values and the mean molding pressure value are used to obtain an estimated pressure control reference value, the pressure control reference value is updated using this estimated value, and a control pressure value in a pressure control unit is updated. The mass and thickness of the molded product are maintained within the standard range by updating the set value of the punch tip gap to control the punch tip gap, and by updating the control pressure value in the pressure control unit to control the molding pressure in this way while the molding machine is being operated.

Description

回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置とその運転方法Rotary powder compression molding apparatus and its operating method
 本発明は、粉末を圧縮成型して例えば錠剤等の成型品を製造する回転式の打錠装置などの回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置とその運転方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a rotary powder compression molding apparatus such as a rotary tableting apparatus for producing a molded product such as a tablet by compressing powder and a method for operating the same.
 粉末を圧縮して製造される成型品の重量(質量)と硬度を規格範囲内に保持するために、成型品の質量の制御を行う機能を備えた回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置(以下成型装置と略称する。)が、従来技術として知られている(例えば、特許文献1参照。)。 A rotary powder compression molding device (hereinafter referred to as a molding device) having a function of controlling the mass of a molded product in order to maintain the weight (mass) and hardness of the molded product produced by compressing powder within the standard range. Is abbreviated to be a prior art (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
 この成型装置での成型品の質量の制御は、回転盤の回転により移動される上下の杵が上下の予備圧縮ロール(以下第1ロールと略称する。)間を通過する際に検出される第1成型圧力に基づいて行われる。具体的には、第1成型圧力が入力される質量制御部での制御により、質量調節軌道を昇降させ、臼に対する下杵の高さ位置を変えて、臼内への粉末充填量を加減することで、成型品の質量の制御を行っている。 The control of the mass of the molded product in this molding apparatus is performed when the upper and lower ridges moved by the rotation of the rotating disk pass between upper and lower preliminary compression rolls (hereinafter referred to as first rolls). 1 based on molding pressure. More specifically, the mass control trajectory is moved up and down by changing the height position of the lower arm relative to the die, and the amount of powder filling into the die is adjusted by the control of the mass control unit to which the first molding pressure is input. Thus, the mass of the molded product is controlled.
 質量制御部には第1成型圧力を制御するための基準となる圧力値(これは圧力制御基準値又は制御設定値と通称されている。)が設定されている。 The mass control unit is set with a pressure value that is a reference for controlling the first molding pressure (this is commonly referred to as a pressure control reference value or a control set value).
 従来の成型装置は、回転式の粉末圧縮成型機(以下、成型機と略称する。)を備える。従来の成型装置は、成型機の連続運転中、所定時間毎にサンプリングされる複数の成型品の実際の質量の平均値と成型圧力平均値を求め、成型品の質量と成型圧力との間に成立する相関係数を用いて成型品の質量基準値に相当する成型圧力を算出し、この算出された値(算出成型圧力)で前記圧力制御基準値を更新するように構成されている。このため、サンプリングの度に質量制御部に設定された圧力制御基準値が更新されることによって、成型品の質量を規格範囲内に保持する制御が実施される。 A conventional molding apparatus includes a rotary powder compression molding machine (hereinafter abbreviated as a molding machine). A conventional molding apparatus obtains an average value and an average value of molding pressures of a plurality of molded products sampled every predetermined time during continuous operation of the molding machine, and between the mass and molding pressure of the molded product. The molding pressure corresponding to the mass reference value of the molded product is calculated using the established correlation coefficient, and the pressure control reference value is updated with the calculated value (calculated molding pressure). For this reason, the control which hold | maintains the mass of a molded product within a specification range is implemented by updating the pressure control reference value set to the mass control part at every sampling.
 こうした制御によって、圧力制御基準値の成型圧力で成型された成型品は、その質量が規格範囲内に保持されていると判定される。この逆に、圧力制御基準値を外れた成型圧力で成型された成型品は、その質量が規格範囲外の不良品となる可能性がある。 By such control, it is determined that the molded product molded with the molding pressure of the pressure control reference value is maintained within the standard range. Conversely, a molded product molded at a molding pressure outside the pressure control reference value may be a defective product whose mass is outside the standard range.
特許第2941226号公報Japanese Patent No. 2941226
 従来の成型装置での成型品の質量の制御は、「杵先間隔が一定である」ことを前提とし、この前提の基に成立する「質量変動と成型圧力の変動とが等価である」との考え方から、「質量と成型圧力との間に成立する相関係数に基づいて質量を制御する」としている。そのため、従来の成型品の質量の制御は、言い換えれば、「成型圧力を一定に保つために質量調節軌道の高さを調整して成型品の質量を制御する」、ことに他ならない。したがって、従来の成型品の質量の制御は成型圧力の制御と等価である、という考え方に基づいている。 The control of the mass of the molded product in the conventional molding apparatus is based on the premise that the tip interval is constant, and that the mass variation and molding pressure variation are equivalent based on this premise. From the above idea, “the mass is controlled based on the correlation coefficient established between the mass and the molding pressure”. Therefore, the conventional control of the mass of the molded product is, in other words, “controlling the mass of the molded product by adjusting the height of the mass adjusting track in order to keep the molding pressure constant”. Therefore, it is based on the idea that the control of the mass of the conventional molded product is equivalent to the control of the molding pressure.
 しかし、従来の成型品の質量の制御は、連続運転される成型機の各部(主に、上下の杵、及び加圧ロール)の温度変化(例えば上昇)に伴う熱膨張などの影響による実際の杵先間隔の変化(例えば減少)を考慮していない。 However, the control of the mass of the conventional molded product is actually caused by the influence of thermal expansion or the like accompanying the temperature change (for example, rise) of each part of the molding machine (mainly the upper and lower ridges and the pressure roll) that is continuously operated. It does not take into account changes in the tip spacing (eg reduction).
 つまり、従来の成型装置は、一般的に成型機各部の温度が常温(通常、20℃前後)であるときに、杵先間隔設定値と実際の杵先間隔は略同一となるように調整(校正)されている。ここで、「杵先間隔設定値」とは、成型装置で設定されてその杵先間隔表示器に表示される杵先間隔を指している。 In other words, the conventional molding apparatus is generally adjusted so that when the temperature of each part of the molding machine is normal temperature (usually around 20 ° C.), the setting value of the tip distance and the actual tip distance are substantially the same ( Calibration). Here, the “tip point setting value” refers to the tip interval that is set by the molding apparatus and displayed on the tip interval indicator.
 そして、従来の成型品の質量の制御は杵先間隔設定値(表示値)が変更されていない状態で、成型機の上下杵の杵先(各杵の先端)で規定される実際の杵先間隔(以下、これを単に「杵先間隔」と称する。)が、成型機各部の温度変化(例えば上昇)に伴う熱膨張などの影響によって変化することを考慮していない。 In the conventional control of the mass of the molded product, the actual tip defined by the tip of the upper and lower punches (the tip of each punch) of the molding machine is performed in a state where the tip interval setting value (display value) is not changed. It is not considered that the interval (hereinafter, simply referred to as “tip interval”) changes due to the influence of thermal expansion or the like due to temperature change (for example, increase) of each part of the molding machine.
 杵先間隔が減少した場合には成型圧力は上昇する。このため、成型品の質量自体が増加していなくても、質量制御部は、温度上昇を原因として上昇した成型圧力を低下させようとする制御を行う。この制御により、質量制御部が質量を減少させるための制御出力で質量調節軌道の高さが調整される。そのため、結果として、製造される成型品の質量を一定に保つことができなくなることがある。 ¡When the tip interval decreases, the molding pressure increases. For this reason, even if the mass of the molded product itself does not increase, the mass control unit performs control to reduce the molding pressure that has increased due to the temperature increase. By this control, the height of the mass adjustment trajectory is adjusted by a control output for the mass control unit to reduce the mass. Therefore, as a result, the mass of the manufactured molded product may not be kept constant.
 この他、温度上昇等により物性が変化する粉末を圧縮成型する場合、例えば、温度上昇に伴って結合力が上がる粉末を圧縮成型する場合にも、製造される成型品の質量を一定に保つことができなくなることがある。 In addition, when compressing and molding powders whose physical properties change due to temperature rise, etc., for example, when molding powders whose binding strength increases with increasing temperature, the mass of the molded product to be manufactured is kept constant. May not be possible.
 即ち、連続運転に伴い、成型される粉末に接する成型機の各部(主に、上下の杵や臼、及び回転盤)の温度が上昇することで、この温度の影響を受けて、粉末の結合力が高められる場合がある。結合力が高まると、成型後のスプリングバック(再膨張)の度合が小さくなり、成型品の厚みが減る。このため、杵先間隔を一定に保って製造したとしても、成型圧力が低下することがある。 That is, with continuous operation, the temperature of each part of the molding machine (mainly the upper and lower punches and mortars, and the rotating disk) that comes into contact with the powder to be molded rises. The power may be increased. When the binding force increases, the degree of springback (re-expansion) after molding decreases, and the thickness of the molded product decreases. For this reason, even if it manufactures with the tip space | interval kept constant, a molding pressure may fall.
 こうした現象が生じると、質量制御部は、低下した成型圧力を上昇させようとする制御を行う。この制御により、質量制御部が質量を増加させる制御出力で質量調節軌道の高さが調整される。その結果として、製造される成型品の質量を一定に保つことができなくなることがある。 When such a phenomenon occurs, the mass control unit performs control to increase the reduced molding pressure. By this control, the height of the mass adjustment trajectory is adjusted by a control output for the mass control unit to increase the mass. As a result, the mass of the manufactured molded product may not be kept constant.
 又、従来の成型装置は、成型品の質量が規格範囲内となるように製造できるが、その制御は成型品の厚みを規格範囲内に保持する工夫ではないので、成型品の厚みを規格範囲内に保持できなくなることがある。 In addition, the conventional molding equipment can be manufactured so that the mass of the molded product is within the standard range, but the control is not a device to keep the thickness of the molded product within the standard range. May not be able to be held inside.
 即ち、成型品の製造において、成型品に対する成型圧力を一定に保っても、杵先間隔や質量が変化すれば、錠剤などの成型品の厚みが変化することがある。同様に、成型品の製造において、杵先間隔を一定に保っても、質量や成型圧力が変化すれば、成型品の厚みが変化することがある。又、成型品の製造において、質量を一定に保っても、杵先間隔や成型圧力が変化すれば、成型品の厚みが変化することがある。 That is, in manufacturing a molded product, even if the molding pressure on the molded product is kept constant, the thickness of the molded product such as a tablet may change if the tip spacing or mass changes. Similarly, in the manufacture of a molded product, even if the tip spacing is kept constant, the thickness of the molded product may change if the mass or molding pressure changes. In the production of a molded product, even if the mass is kept constant, the thickness of the molded product may change if the tip spacing or the molding pressure changes.
 このように成型品の厚みは、質量の増減、杵先間隔の増減、及び成型圧力の増減に起因して変化することがある。例えば、成型機の連続運転中の温度上昇に伴う成型機各部の熱膨張により、杵先間隔は連続運転開始直後に比べて狭まる。そのため、圧縮成型される成型品の質量(粉体量)が同じであっても、加圧ロール間を通過する上下の杵と臼によって成型される成型品の厚みは減少する。 Thus, the thickness of the molded product may change due to increase / decrease in mass, increase / decrease in tip spacing, and increase / decrease in molding pressure. For example, due to thermal expansion of each part of the molding machine accompanying a temperature increase during continuous operation of the molding machine, the tip interval is narrower than immediately after the start of continuous operation. Therefore, even if the mass (powder amount) of the molded product to be compression-molded is the same, the thickness of the molded product formed by the upper and lower punches and mortars passing between the pressure rolls is reduced.
 更に、粉末の物性によっても熱の影響を受けて成型品の厚みが変化する場合がある。例えば、温度上昇に伴って結合力が上がる粉末等のように温度上昇等により物性が変化する粉末を圧縮成型する場合、結合力の上昇により、成型後のスプリングバック(再膨張)の度合が小さくなるため、成型品の厚みが減ることがある。 Furthermore, the thickness of the molded product may change due to the influence of heat depending on the physical properties of the powder. For example, when a powder whose physical properties change due to an increase in temperature, such as a powder whose binding force increases as the temperature rises, is compressed, the degree of spring back (re-expansion) after molding is reduced due to the increase in binding force. Therefore, the thickness of the molded product may be reduced.
 したがって、厚みを規格範囲内に保持する必要がある成型品を製造する場合に、温度変化に応じて杵先間隔設定値を変更して杵先間隔を調節するように成型装置を構成しても、それだけでは、質量や成型圧力の影響による成型品の厚みの変化に対処できず、製造される成型品の厚みが、厚みの規格範囲から外れることがある。 Therefore, when manufacturing a molded product that needs to maintain the thickness within the standard range, the molding apparatus may be configured to adjust the tip spacing by changing the tip spacing setting value according to the temperature change. By itself, the change in the thickness of the molded product due to the influence of mass and molding pressure cannot be dealt with, and the thickness of the molded product to be manufactured may be out of the standard thickness range.
 本発明の目的は、粉末を圧縮して製造される成型品の質量・厚み・硬度のうちの少なくとも質量と厚みを、粉末圧縮成型機の温度変化や粉末の物性変化に拘らず、規格範囲内に保持して成型品を製造可能な回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置とその運転方法を提供することにある。 The object of the present invention is to make at least the mass and thickness of the mass, thickness and hardness of the molded product produced by compressing the powder within the standard range regardless of the temperature change of the powder compression molding machine and the physical property change of the powder. It is intended to provide a rotary powder compression molding apparatus capable of producing a molded product by holding it and a method for operating the same.
 本発明の一態様によると、回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置は、回転盤と、前記粉末圧縮成型機の運転を制御する制御装置とを備える。前記制御装置は、製造される成型品の成型圧力が圧力制御基準値に保持されるように前記回転盤に取付けられた臼への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵の高さ位置を制御する圧力制御部を含む。そして、前記粉末圧縮成型装置の運転方法は、以下の各工程を有する。 
 質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の厚み平均値とから成型品の算定厚みを求める工程。 
 前記算定厚みに基づく厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値とから杵先間隔算定値を求める工程。 
 運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値と、前記質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値と、前記厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値を求めた上で圧力制御基準算定値を求める工程。 
 前記杵先間隔算定値で前記杵先間隔設定値を更新して、杵先間隔を制御する工程。 
 前記圧力制御基準算定値で前記圧力制御部の前記圧力制御基準値を更新し、前記圧力制御部の各制御圧力値を更新する工程。
According to one aspect of the present invention, a rotary powder compression molding apparatus includes a rotating disk and a control device that controls the operation of the powder compression molding machine. The control device controls the height position of the lower punch that defines the powder filling depth to the mortar attached to the rotating disk so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured is maintained at the pressure control reference value. Including a pressure controller. And the operating method of the said powder compression molding apparatus has the following each process.
A step of obtaining a calculated thickness of a molded product from a thickness variation value when mass control is performed and a thickness average value of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation.
A step of calculating a tip interval calculation value from a tip interval variation value and a tip interval setting value when thickness control is performed based on the calculated thickness.
The pressure after obtaining the molding pressure average value of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value when the mass control is performed, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value when the thickness control is performed. The process of obtaining the control standard calculation value.
Updating the tip spacing setting value with the tip spacing calculated value to control the tip spacing;
Updating the pressure control reference value of the pressure control unit with the pressure control reference calculated value and updating each control pressure value of the pressure control unit;
 前記運転方法では、運転中に求めた複数の成型品の厚み平均値にしたがって、直接的に制御装置に設定されている杵先間隔設定値を変更する制御をするのではなく、まず、運転中に求めた複数の成型品の質量平均値を成型品の質量制御基準値にした(これを、本発明では「質量制御」と称する。)ときに、前記厚み平均値がどのような厚みになるか(これを、本発明では「算定厚み」と称する。)を求める。その上で、前記質量制御とともに、前記算定厚みを厚み制御基準値にした(これを、本発明では「厚み制御」と称する。)ときの杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値とから杵先間隔算定値を求めて、この杵先間隔算定値で杵先間隔設定値を更新し、更新された値で杵先間隔を制御する。 In the operation method, according to the thickness average value of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation, the control is not performed to directly change the tip interval setting value set in the control device. When the mass average value of a plurality of molded products obtained in the above is used as the mass control reference value of the molded product (this is referred to as “mass control” in the present invention), what thickness the thickness average value is. (This is referred to as “calculated thickness” in the present invention). Then, together with the mass control, the calculated thickness is used as a thickness control reference value (this is referred to as “thickness control” in the present invention), and the tip spacing variation value and the tip spacing setting value The tip interval calculation value is obtained, the tip interval setting value is updated with the tip interval calculation value, and the tip interval is controlled with the updated value.
 これとともに、前記杵先間隔設定値の更新に伴って成型圧力が変動して成型品の質量が変わらないようにするために、前記質量制御をしたときの圧力変動値(これを、本発明では「第1算定圧力変動値」と称する。)、および、前記厚み制御をしたときの圧力変動値(これを、本発明では「第2算定圧力変動値」と称する。)を夫々求める。さらに、この第1、第2の算定圧力変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値とから圧力制御基準算定値を求めて、この圧力制御基準算定値に基づいて圧力制御部の制御圧力値(現在値)を更新する。 At the same time, in order to prevent the molding pressure from fluctuating and the mass of the molded product from changing with the update of the tip interval setting value, the pressure fluctuation value when the mass control is performed (this is referred to as the present invention) And a pressure fluctuation value when the thickness is controlled (this is referred to as a “second calculated pressure fluctuation value” in the present invention). Further, a pressure control reference calculation value is obtained from the first and second calculated pressure fluctuation values and a molding pressure average value of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation, and pressure control is performed based on the pressure control reference calculation value. The control pressure value (current value) of the unit is updated.
 このように粉末圧縮成型機の連続運転中に、粉末圧縮成型装置は、前記質量制御と前記厚み制御に基づいて、杵先間隔設定値を更新して杵先間隔を制御するとともに、圧力制御部の制御圧力値(現在値)を更新する。そして、粉末圧縮成型装置は、この更新された制御圧力値に従って、臼への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵の高さ位置を調節する圧力制御部が成型圧力を制御する。したがって、粉末圧縮成型装置は、粉末の物性変化や粉末圧縮成型機の温度変化に伴う成型品の質量と厚み変動が抑制され、製造される成型品の質量と厚みを規格範囲内に保持することができる。 Thus, during the continuous operation of the powder compression molding machine, the powder compression molding apparatus updates the tip interval setting value based on the mass control and the thickness control to control the tip interval, and the pressure control unit The control pressure value (current value) of is updated. In the powder compression molding apparatus, the pressure control unit that adjusts the height position of the lower punch that defines the filling depth of the powder into the die controls the molding pressure in accordance with the updated control pressure value. Therefore, the powder compression molding device suppresses the mass and thickness fluctuation of the molded product accompanying changes in the physical properties of the powder and the temperature change of the powder compression molding machine, and keeps the mass and thickness of the molded product to be manufactured within the standard range. Can do.
 本発明によれば、回転式の粉末圧縮成型機の連続運転に伴う粉末圧縮成型機各部の温度変化や粉末の物性変化に拘らずに、粉末を圧縮して製造される成型品の質量・厚み・硬度のうち、少なくとも質量と厚みを規格範囲内に保持して成型品を製造することが可能である。 According to the present invention, the mass / thickness of the molded product produced by compressing the powder, regardless of the temperature change of each part of the powder compression molding machine and the physical property change of the powder accompanying the continuous operation of the rotary powder compression molding machine. -It is possible to manufacture a molded product while maintaining at least the mass and thickness within the standard range of the hardness.
本発明の第1実施形態に係る回転式打錠装置の構成を展開し概略的に示す図である。It is a figure which expands and shows roughly composition of a rotary tableting device concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. 図1の回転式打錠装置の連続運転前に行われる試打データの取得手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition procedure of the trial hit data performed before the continuous operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of FIG. 図1の回転式打錠装置で制御パターンを選択する手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure which selects a control pattern with the rotary tableting apparatus of FIG. 図1の回転式打錠装置で制御パターンを選択する手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure which selects a control pattern with the rotary tableting apparatus of FIG. 図1の回転式打錠装置で制御パターンを選択する手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure which selects a control pattern with the rotary tableting apparatus of FIG. 図1の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of FIG. 図1の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of FIG. 図1の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of FIG. 図1の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of FIG. 図1の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of FIG. 図1の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of FIG. 図1の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of FIG. 図1の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of FIG. 図1の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of FIG. 本発明の第2実施形態に係る回転式打錠装置で制御パターンを選択する手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure which selects a control pattern with the rotary tableting apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 第2実施形態の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous driving | operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous driving | operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous driving | operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous driving | operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous driving | operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous driving | operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態の回転式打錠装置の連続運転の手順の一部を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows a part of procedure of the continuous driving | operation of the rotary tableting apparatus of 2nd Embodiment.
(第1実施形態) 
 以下、本発明の第1実施形態について、図1~図11を参照して詳細に説明する。
(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.
 まず、以下の説明において使用する用語の定義を説明する。 First, the definitions of terms used in the following explanation will be explained.
 「質量制御」とは、本第1実施形態においては、運転中に求めた複数の成型品の質量平均値Wxを後述の質量制御基準値WM(または後述の質量制御基準算定値WMa)に制御することを、指している。 In the first embodiment, “mass control” controls the mass average value Wx of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation to a mass control reference value WM (or mass control reference calculation value WMa described later). Pointing to do.
 ただし、粉末圧縮成型機で製造される成型品の質量Wを目標とする質量にすることを目的とした制御については、「成型品の質量の制御…」や「成型品の質量を制御…」という表現とし、前記「質量制御」の用語と区別する。 However, for control aimed at setting the mass W of the molded product manufactured by the powder compression molding machine to the target mass, “control of the mass of the molded product ...” or “control the mass of the molded product ...” This is distinguished from the term “mass control”.
 なお、後述の成型品の質量を制御しない制御パターンにおいて、後述の圧力制御によって求められる算定質量Waの値で前記質量制御基準算定値WMaの値を置換して演算処理する場合についても、前記「質量制御」の用語を用いる。 In addition, in a control pattern that does not control the mass of a molded product that will be described later, the calculation process is performed by replacing the value of the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the value of the calculated mass Wa that is obtained by pressure control that will be described later. The term “mass control” is used.
 「圧力制御」とは、本第1実施形態においては、運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値Pxを後述の圧力制御基準値PMに制御することを、指している。 In the first embodiment, “pressure control” refers to controlling the molding pressure average value Px of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation to a pressure control reference value PM described later.
 また、成型品の成型圧力値が、粉末圧縮成型機の運転を制御する制御装置に備えられた圧力制御部に設定された制御圧力値になるように、回転盤に取付けられた臼への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵の高さ位置を変更する制御は、フィードバック制御(FBC)と称する。従来はこのような制御を「重量(質量)制御」と称していたが、本第1実施形態においては、このような制御も同様に「圧力制御」と言う。 In addition, the powder to the die mounted on the rotating disk is set so that the molding pressure value of the molded product becomes the control pressure value set in the pressure control unit provided in the control device that controls the operation of the powder compression molding machine. The control for changing the height position of the lower eyelid that defines the filling depth is referred to as feedback control (FBC). Conventionally, such control is referred to as “weight (mass) control”, but in the first embodiment, such control is also referred to as “pressure control”.
 以上のことから、前記「質量制御」と前記「圧力制御」とは同等の制御ではなく、本第1実施形態においては、「質量制御」と「圧力制御」の用語の定義を区別して用いる。 From the above, the “mass control” and the “pressure control” are not equivalent controls, and in the first embodiment, the definitions of the terms “mass control” and “pressure control” are used separately.
 なお、後述するフローチャートによる演算処理では、質量平均値Wxを後述の質量制御基準値WM(または後述の質量制御基準算定値WMa)にしたときの「質量制御」に基づく圧力変動値PWaや、算定厚みTa、算定硬度Haを求めるようにしている。このため、本第1実施形態に含まれる後述する制御パターンの中で、成型品の質量を制御しない制御パターン(制御パターン5および制御パターン6)における前記演算処理において、「質量制御」に基づく圧力変動値PWaや、算定厚みTaや、算定硬度Haを求める、とする記載は整合性がないように見える。しかし、この場合に用いる質量制御基準算定値WMaは、後述する式(11)で求める算定質量Waの値で置換して取り扱うことを前提としており、式(11)は以下に示すように〔(WMa-Wx)=(PM-Px)/a0〕に置き換えることができる。したがって、質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたとき、つまり、(WMa-Wx)で表される「質量制御」をしたときの値は、〔(PM-Px)/a0〕の値である、と言い換えることができる。 In the calculation processing according to the flowchart described later, the pressure fluctuation value PWa based on the “mass control” when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference value WM (or mass control reference calculated value WMa described later), The thickness Ta and the calculated hardness Ha are obtained. For this reason, in the calculation process in the control pattern (control pattern 5 and control pattern 6) which does not control the mass of a molded product in the control patterns described later included in the first embodiment, the pressure based on “mass control” The description of obtaining the fluctuation value PWa, the calculated thickness Ta, and the calculated hardness Ha does not seem consistent. However, it is assumed that the mass control reference calculated value WMa used in this case is replaced with the value of the calculated mass Wa obtained by the equation (11) described later, and the equation (11) is expressed as [( WMa−Wx) = (PM−Px) / a0]. Therefore, when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa, that is, when “mass control” represented by (WMa−Wx) is performed, the value is [(PM−Px) / a0]. In other words.
 Wa=Wx+(PM-Px)/a……式(11)
 この式(11)は、(Wa-Wx)=(PM-Px)/a0と展開でき、更に、算定質量Waの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを置換した場合、(WMa-Wx)=(PM-Px)/a0とすることができる。
Wa = Wx + (PM−Px) / a (Formula 11)
This equation (11) can be expanded as (Wa−Wx) = (PM−Px) / a0. Further, when the calculated mass control reference value WMa is replaced with the calculated mass Wa value, (WMa−Wx) = ( PM-Px) / a0.
 このことから、成型品の質量を制御しないことを前提とした制御パターンでの演算処理において、「質量制御をしたとき」と称して求める前記各演算値(PWa、Ta、Ha)は、実際には、何れも圧力平均値Pxを圧力制御基準値PMにしたときの演算値として求められる。つまり、「圧力制御」をしたときの演算値として求められることになる。このため、成型品の質量を制御しない制御パターン(制御パターン5および制御パターン6)における前記演算処理で、「質量制御」に基づく圧力変動値PWaや、算定厚みTaや、算定硬度Haを求める、とする記載は、整合性を損なうものではない。 From this, in the calculation processing with the control pattern on the assumption that the mass of the molded product is not controlled, the respective calculation values (PWa, Ta, Ha) to be called as “when mass control is performed” are actually Are obtained as calculated values when the pressure average value Px is set to the pressure control reference value PM. That is, it is obtained as a calculated value when “pressure control” is performed. For this reason, the pressure fluctuation value PWa based on “mass control”, the calculated thickness Ta, and the calculated hardness Ha are obtained by the calculation processing in the control pattern (control pattern 5 and control pattern 6) that does not control the mass of the molded product. This statement does not impair consistency.
 「厚み制御」とは、本第1実施形態においては、質量制御をした時の厚み変動値と成型品の厚み平均値Txとから求められる後述の算定厚みTaを、後述の厚み制御基準値TM(または後述の厚み制御基準算定値TMa)に制御することを、指している。 In the first embodiment, “thickness control” refers to a later-described calculated thickness Ta obtained from a thickness variation value when mass control is performed and a thickness average value Tx of a molded product, and a later-described thickness control reference value TM. (Or a thickness control reference calculation value TMa described later) is controlled.
 ただし、粉末圧縮成型機で製造される成型品の厚みTを目標とする厚みにすることを目的とした制御については、「成型品の厚みの制御」や「成型品の厚みを制御」という表現とし、前記「厚み制御」の用語と区別する。 However, for the purpose of controlling the thickness T of the molded product manufactured by the powder compression molding machine to the target thickness, the expressions “control of the thickness of the molded product” and “control the thickness of the molded product” And the term “thickness control”.
 「杵先間隔制御」とは、前記厚み制御に基づいて後述の杵先間隔算定値(lMa,LMa)を求め、粉末圧縮成型機の運転を制御する制御装置によって、後述の第1位置及び第2位置での夫々の杵先間隔設定値(現在値…lM,LM)を前記杵先間隔算定値(lMa,LMa)の値で更新し、夫々の杵先間隔を変更する制御を指している。なお、本第1実施形態においては、杵先間隔制御は、後述する第1ロールと第2ロールとを有する粉末圧縮成型機においては、杵先間隔算定値(lMa,LMa)に基づいて夫々の杵先間隔を制御することを指している。しかし、本発明は、第1ロールを有しない粉末圧縮成型機を備える回転式の粉末圧縮成形装置として実施する場合を含めて、第2位置のみで杵先間隔制御を行うことも含んでいる。 The “tip tip spacing control” refers to a tip tip calculated value (lMa, LMa) to be described later based on the thickness control and is controlled by a control device that controls the operation of the powder compression molding machine. This refers to the control of updating the respective tip-tip interval values (current values... 1M, LM) at the two positions with the values of the tip-tip interval calculated values (lMa, LMa) and changing the respective tip-tip intervals. . In the first embodiment, the tip spacing control is performed based on the tip spacing calculated value (lMa, LMa) in a powder compression molding machine having a first roll and a second roll, which will be described later. It refers to controlling the tip interval. However, the present invention also includes performing the tip distance control only at the second position, including the case where the present invention is implemented as a rotary powder compression molding apparatus including a powder compression molding machine that does not have the first roll.
 以上のことから、前記「厚み制御」と前記「杵先間隔制御」とは同等の制御ではなく、本第1実施形態においては、「厚み制御」と「杵先間隔制御」の用語の定義を区別して用いる。 From the above, the “thickness control” and the “tip tip spacing control” are not equivalent controls. In the first embodiment, the terms “thickness control” and “tip tip spacing control” are defined. Use distinctively.
 「硬度制御」とは、本第1実施形態においては、後述の算定硬度Ha(または後述の硬度制御基準暫定値HMb)の値で後述の硬度制御基準算定値HMaを更新(補正)することで、及び算定硬度Haを硬度制御基準算定値HMaにするために後述の厚み制御基準暫定値TMbと、後述の質量制御基準暫定値WMbで夫々に対応する後述の厚み、質量の各制御基準算定値(TMa、WMa)を更新(補正)することで、前記算定硬度Haの値と前記硬度制御基準算定値HMaの値が同一値となるように制御することを指している。 In the first embodiment, “hardness control” means updating (correcting) a hardness control reference calculated value HMa described later with a value of calculated hardness Ha described later (or a hardness control reference provisional value HMb described later). In order to set the calculated hardness Ha to the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, a thickness control reference provisional value TMb described later and a mass control reference provisional value WMb described later respectively correspond to the thickness and mass control reference calculated values described later. By updating (correcting) (TMa, WMa), the value of the calculated hardness Ha and the value of the hardness control reference calculated value HMa are controlled to be the same value.
 ただし、粉末圧縮成型機で製造される成型品の硬度Hを目標とする硬度にすることを目的とした制御については、「成型品の硬度の制御…」や「成型品の硬度を制御…」という表現とし、前記「硬度制御」の用語と区別する。 However, regarding the control for the purpose of setting the hardness H of the molded product manufactured by the powder compression molding machine to the target hardness, “control of the hardness of the molded product ...” and “control of the hardness of the molded product ...” This is distinguished from the term “hardness control”.
 次に、回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置について説明する。図1に示すように、回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置、例えば成型品として錠剤を製造する回転式の打錠装置1は、回転式の粉末圧縮成型機、例えば回転式の打錠機2と、測定器3と、制御盤4等を備えている。 Next, a rotary powder compression molding apparatus will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, a rotary powder compression molding apparatus, for example, a rotary tableting apparatus 1 that manufactures a tablet as a molded product, includes a rotary powder compression molding machine, for example, a rotary tableting machine 2, A measuring device 3 and a control panel 4 are provided.
 打錠機2は臼取付け部を有した回転盤11を備えている。複数の臼12が臼取付け部の周部に回転盤11の周方向に一定間隔で取付けられている。これら臼12の上面は臼取付け部の上面と同じ高さである。尚、臼はダイとも称されているとともに、このダイが、臼孔、つまり、成型孔を複数有している場合もある。 The tableting machine 2 is provided with a rotating disk 11 having a mortar mounting portion. A plurality of mortars 12 are attached to the peripheral portion of the mortar mounting portion at a constant interval in the circumferential direction of the turntable 11. The upper surfaces of the mortars 12 are the same height as the upper surface of the mortar mounting portion. The die is also referred to as a die, and the die may have a plurality of die holes, that is, a plurality of molding holes.
 打錠機2は、粉末供給位置に配置された粉末供給器14を備えている。粉末供給器14の下面開口は回転盤11の臼取付け部上面に接するように設けられている。回転盤11の回転により臼12が粉末供給器14の下面開口に臨んで通過することにより、粉末供給器14内の粉末が臼12の臼孔に供給(充填)される。粉末供給器14には、臼12に供給される粉末の密度を均一にするために回転される攪拌部材(図示しない)を有した構成の粉末供給器を用いることもできる。 The tableting machine 2 is provided with a powder supplier 14 arranged at the powder supply position. The lower surface opening of the powder feeder 14 is provided so as to contact the upper surface of the mortar mounting portion of the rotating disk 11. As the rotator 11 rotates, the mortar 12 passes through the lower surface opening of the powder supplier 14, whereby the powder in the powder supplier 14 is supplied (filled) into the mortar hole of the mortar 12. As the powder feeder 14, a powder feeder configured to have a stirring member (not shown) that is rotated to make the density of the powder supplied to the mortar 12 uniform can also be used.
 打錠機2は、各臼12の夫々に個別に対応して配設された上杵15と下杵16とを備えている。尚、上杵15は上パンチとも称されており、下杵16は下パンチとも称されている。これら上杵15と下杵16は上下動可能に回転盤11に支持されている。上杵15の先端部(下端部)は臼12の臼孔に対してその上方から挿脱される。下杵16の先端部(上端部)は、臼12の臼孔に対して下方から上向きに挿入された状態を保持していて、臼孔の底をなしている。これら上杵15及び下杵16は、回転盤11の回転に伴って打錠機2が備える図示しない(次に説明する質量調節軌道を除く)各種の案内軌道等を摺動する。また、上杵15及び下杵16は、圧縮成型時等に軸線方向に必要量動かされる。 The tableting machine 2 is provided with an upper punch 15 and a lower punch 16 that are individually disposed corresponding to each die 12. The upper punch 15 is also called an upper punch, and the lower punch 16 is also called a lower punch. The upper rod 15 and the lower rod 16 are supported by the turntable 11 so as to be movable up and down. The distal end portion (lower end portion) of the upper punch 15 is inserted into and removed from the mortar hole of the mortar 12 from above. The distal end portion (upper end portion) of the lower punch 16 holds the state of being inserted upward from below into the mortar hole of the mortar 12 and forms the bottom of the mortar hole. The upper punch 15 and the lower punch 16 slide on various guide tracks (not shown) (excluding the mass adjustment track described below) provided in the tableting machine 2 as the rotating plate 11 rotates. Further, the upper rod 15 and the lower rod 16 are moved by a necessary amount in the axial direction during compression molding or the like.
 粉末供給位置において下杵16の下端が摺動する質量調節軌道(重量調節軌道ともいう。)17は、回転盤11の臼取付け部の下方に配設されている。質量調節軌道17は、軌道昇降機構19により昇降可能に支持されている。この軌道昇降機構19は、軌道昇降用モータ19aと、昇降軸19bと、歯車19cと、駆動歯車19dとを有している。 A mass adjusting track (also referred to as a weight adjusting track) 17 on which the lower end of the lower punch 16 slides at the powder supply position is disposed below the mortar mounting portion of the rotating disk 11. The mass adjusting track 17 is supported by a track lifting mechanism 19 so as to be lifted and lowered. The track elevating mechanism 19 includes a track elevating motor 19a, an elevating shaft 19b, a gear 19c, and a drive gear 19d.
 軌道昇降用モータ19aには、例えばサーボモータを好適に使用できるが、汎用モータを使用することもできる。この軌道昇降用モータ19aにロータリー式のエンコーダ19eが取付けられている。このエンコーダ19eによる回転量の検出を基に質量調節軌道17の高さ位置を知ることが可能である。昇降軸19bは、図示しないガイドに沿って昇降され、その上端部に質量調節軌道17が連結されている。歯車19cは内周歯車部及び外周歯車部を有していて、その内周歯車部は昇降軸19bの下部に形成された雄ねじ部に噛み合わされている。駆動歯車19dは歯車19cの外周歯車部に噛み合わされていて、軌道昇降用モータ19aにより回転される。したがって、軌道昇降機構19の軌道昇降用モータ19aの正逆回転に従い、昇降軸19bとともに質量調節軌道17が昇降される。 For example, a servo motor can be suitably used as the orbit raising / lowering motor 19a, but a general-purpose motor can also be used. A rotary encoder 19e is attached to the track elevating motor 19a. It is possible to know the height position of the mass adjusting track 17 based on the detection of the rotation amount by the encoder 19e. The elevating shaft 19b is moved up and down along a guide (not shown), and the mass adjusting track 17 is connected to the upper end portion thereof. The gear 19c has an inner peripheral gear portion and an outer peripheral gear portion, and the inner peripheral gear portion is meshed with a male screw portion formed at the lower portion of the elevating shaft 19b. The drive gear 19d is meshed with the outer peripheral gear portion of the gear 19c, and is rotated by the orbit raising / lowering motor 19a. Therefore, the mass adjusting track 17 is lifted and lowered together with the lifting shaft 19b according to the forward and reverse rotation of the track lifting motor 19a of the track lifting mechanism 19.
 前記図示しない各種の案内軌道の中には、粉末供給器14の下方で、かつ、質量調節軌道17の直前に配置された低下軌道が含まれている。この低下軌道に従って下杵16が下降される時に、粉末供給器14内の粉末が臼孔内に吸込まれて供給(充填)される。この直後に下杵16が低下軌道から質量調節軌道17の傾斜面を摺動して上がることに伴い、余剰粉末が粉末供給器14内に吐き出される。次いで、下杵16が質量調節軌道17の傾斜面の上端に連続した水平面を摺動することに伴い、粉末供給器14の下流側壁14aの下端で臼12の上面が摺り切られる。それによって、臼12への供給粉末量、言い換えれば、製造しようとする錠剤の質量(重量)が秤量される。したがって、質量調節軌道17の高さ位置が変更されることにより、製造しようとする錠剤の質量が変更(補正)される。 The various guide tracks (not shown) include a lowering track disposed below the powder feeder 14 and immediately before the mass adjusting track 17. When the lower punch 16 is lowered according to the lowering trajectory, the powder in the powder feeder 14 is sucked into the mortar hole and supplied (filled). Immediately after this, as the lower iron 16 slides up the inclined surface of the mass adjusting orbit 17 from the lowering orbit, excess powder is discharged into the powder feeder 14. Next, as the lower iron 16 slides on a horizontal plane continuous with the upper end of the inclined surface of the mass adjusting track 17, the upper surface of the die 12 is scraped off at the lower end of the downstream side wall 14a of the powder supplier 14. Thereby, the amount of powder supplied to the mortar 12, in other words, the mass (weight) of the tablet to be manufactured is weighed. Therefore, the mass of the tablet to be manufactured is changed (corrected) by changing the height position of the mass adjusting track 17.
 打錠機2はその予備圧縮成型位置(以下第1位置と略称する。)に配設された上下の予備圧縮成型ロール(以下第1ロールと略称する。)21,22を備えている。第1位置は、粉末供給位置を基準に回転盤11の回転方向下流側に設定されている。上側の第1ロール21は回転盤11の臼取付け部の上方に配置され、下側の第1ロール22は回転盤11の臼取付け部の下方に配置されている。第1ロール21,22は、これらの間を上杵15と下杵16が通過する際に、これら上杵15と下杵16を互に近付くように移動させて、臼12内の粉末を予備的に圧縮成型するために設けられている。 The tableting machine 2 is provided with upper and lower preliminary compression molding rolls (hereinafter abbreviated as first rolls) 21 and 22 disposed at its preliminary compression molding position (hereinafter abbreviated as first position). The first position is set on the downstream side in the rotation direction of the turntable 11 with respect to the powder supply position. The upper first roll 21 is disposed above the mortar mounting portion of the turntable 11, and the lower first roll 22 is disposed below the mortar mounting portion of the turntable 11. When the upper punch 15 and the lower punch 16 pass between them, the first rolls 21 and 22 move the upper punch 15 and the lower punch 16 so as to approach each other, so that the powder in the die 12 is preliminarily moved. It is provided for compression molding.
 上側の第1ロール21は上下方向に移動することがないように保持されている。下側の第1ロール22は、予備圧縮用のロール支持体23に回転自在に支持されていて、予備的な成型圧力(以下予備圧力と称する。)を調整するために予備圧縮用の間隔調整機構24によりロール支持体23とともに昇降可能である。一般的に予備圧力は後述する本圧縮力より低く設定される。 The upper first roll 21 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. The lower first roll 22 is rotatably supported by a pre-compression roll support 23 and adjusts the pre-compression interval in order to adjust a pre-forming pressure (hereinafter referred to as pre-pressure). The mechanism 24 can be moved up and down together with the roll support 23. Generally, the preliminary pressure is set lower than the main compression force described later.
 予備圧縮用の間隔調整機構24は、第1ロール21,22間を通過しようとする上杵15と下杵16との間の杵先間隔を変更するために設けられている。この予備圧力用の間隔調整機構24は、軌道昇降機構19と同様な構成であって、ロール昇降用モータ24aと、昇降軸24bと、歯車24cと、駆動歯車24dを有している。 The interval adjusting mechanism 24 for pre-compression is provided to change the tip interval between the upper rod 15 and the lower rod 16 that is about to pass between the first rolls 21 and 22. The preliminary pressure interval adjusting mechanism 24 has the same configuration as the track elevating mechanism 19, and includes a roll elevating motor 24a, an elevating shaft 24b, a gear 24c, and a drive gear 24d.
 ロール昇降用モータ24aには例えばサーボモータを好適に使用できるが、汎用モータを使用することもできる。このロール昇降用モータ24aにロータリー式のエンコーダ24eが取付けられている。このエンコーダ24eによるロール昇降用モータ24aの回転量の検出を基に、下側の第1ロール22の高さ位置、したがって、第1位置での下杵16の高さ位置、ひいてはこの下杵16と上杵15との間の杵先間隔lを知ることが可能である。このロール昇降用モータ24aが有したロータリー式のエンコーダ24eと、これからの出力を処理する後述の制御装置4aが有する図示しない演算部とは、第1ロール21,22間を通過しようとする上杵15と下杵16との間の杵先間隔lを検出する間隔検出部(間隔検出手段)をなしている。 For example, a servo motor can be suitably used as the roll lifting motor 24a, but a general-purpose motor can also be used. A rotary encoder 24e is attached to the roll lifting / lowering motor 24a. Based on the detection of the rotation amount of the roll raising / lowering motor 24a by the encoder 24e, the height position of the lower first roll 22, and hence the height position of the lower punch 16 at the first position, and consequently the lower punch 16 It is possible to know the tip interval l between the heel and the upper hook 15. A rotary encoder 24e included in the roll lifting / lowering motor 24a and a calculation unit (not shown) included in a control device 4a (described later) that processes output from the rotary encoder 24e An interval detection unit (interval detection means) that detects the tip interval 1 between the lower rod 16 and the lower rod 16 is provided.
 昇降軸24bは、図示しないガイドに沿って昇降され、その上端部で予備圧縮用のロール支持体23を下方から支持している。歯車24cは内周歯車部及び外周歯車部を有していて、その内周歯車部は昇降軸24bの下部に形成された雄ねじ部に噛み合わされている。駆動歯車24dは歯車24cの外周歯車部に噛み合わされていて、ロール昇降用モータ24aにより回転される。したがって、予備圧縮用の間隔調整機構24のロール昇降用モータ24aの正逆回転に従い、昇降軸24bとともに下側の第1ロール22が昇降されるので、これに伴って下杵16の高さ位置が変更される結果、第1位置での杵先間隔lが変更(制御)される。 The elevating shaft 24b is moved up and down along a guide (not shown), and the upper end portion supports the pre-compression roll support 23 from below. The gear 24c has an inner peripheral gear portion and an outer peripheral gear portion, and the inner peripheral gear portion is meshed with a male screw portion formed at the lower portion of the elevating shaft 24b. The drive gear 24d is meshed with the outer peripheral gear portion of the gear 24c, and is rotated by the roll lifting / lowering motor 24a. Accordingly, the lower first roll 22 is lifted and lowered together with the lifting shaft 24b in accordance with the forward / reverse rotation of the roll lifting / lowering motor 24a of the pre-compression interval adjusting mechanism 24. Accordingly, the height position of the lower collar 16 is increased accordingly. As a result, the tip l at the first position is changed (controlled).
 打錠機2は、その本圧縮成型位置(最終圧縮成型位置と称することもできるが、以下第2位置と称する。)に配設された上下の本圧縮成型ロール(以下第2ロールと略称する。)25,26を備えている。第2位置は、第1位置を基準に回転盤11の回転方向下流側に設定されている。上側の第2ロール25は回転盤11の臼取付け部の上方に配置され、下側の第2ロール26は回転盤11の臼取付け部の下方に配置されている。第2ロール25,26は、これらの間を上杵15と下杵16が通過しようとする際に、これら上杵15と下杵16を互に近付くように移動させて、臼12内の粉末を最終的に圧縮成型するために設けられている。 The tableting machine 2 has upper and lower main compression molding rolls (hereinafter abbreviated as second rolls) disposed at the main compression molding position (which may also be referred to as a final compression molding position but hereinafter referred to as a second position). .) 25 and 26 are provided. The second position is set on the downstream side in the rotation direction of the turntable 11 with respect to the first position. The upper second roll 25 is disposed above the mortar mounting portion of the turntable 11, and the lower second roll 26 is disposed below the mortar mounting portion of the turntable 11. The second rolls 25 and 26 move the upper punch 15 and the lower punch 16 so as to approach each other when the upper punch 15 and the lower punch 16 are about to pass between them. Is provided for final compression molding.
 上側の第2ロール25は上下方向に移動することがないように保持されている。下側の第2ロール26は、本圧縮用のロール支持体27に回転自在に支持されていて、最終的な成型圧力を調整するためにロール支持体27とともに本圧縮用の間隔調整機構28により昇降可能である。 The upper second roll 25 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. The lower second roll 26 is rotatably supported by a main compression roll support 27, and the main compression interval adjusting mechanism 28 together with the roll support 27 in order to adjust the final molding pressure. It can be moved up and down.
 本圧縮用の間隔調整機構28は、第2ロール25,26間を通過しようとする上杵15と下杵16との間の杵先間隔を変更するために設けられている。この本圧縮用の間隔調整機構28は、軌道昇降機構19と同様な構成であって、ロール昇降用モータ28aと、昇降軸28bと、歯車28cと、駆動歯車28dとを有している。 The interval adjustment mechanism 28 for main compression is provided to change the tip interval between the upper rod 15 and the lower rod 16 that is about to pass between the second rolls 25 and 26. The interval adjustment mechanism 28 for main compression has the same configuration as that of the track elevating mechanism 19, and includes a roll elevating motor 28a, an elevating shaft 28b, a gear 28c, and a drive gear 28d.
 ロール昇降用モータ28aには、例えばサーボモータを好適に使用できるが、汎用モータを使用することもできる。このロール昇降用モータ28aにはロータリー式のエンコーダ28eが取付けられている。このエンコーダ28eによるロール昇降用モータ28aの回転量の検出を基に下側の第2ロール26の高さ位置、したがって、第2位置での下杵16の高さ位置、ひいてはこの下杵16と上杵15との間の杵先間隔Lを知ることが可能である。このロール昇降用モータ28aが有したロータリー式のエンコーダ28eと、図示しない演算部とは、第2位置の第2ロール25,26間を通過しようとする上杵15と下杵16との間の杵先間隔Lを検出する間隔検出部(間隔検出手段)をなしている。 As the roll lifting / lowering motor 28a, for example, a servo motor can be preferably used, but a general-purpose motor can also be used. A rotary encoder 28e is attached to the roll lifting / lowering motor 28a. Based on the detection of the amount of rotation of the roll raising / lowering motor 28a by the encoder 28e, the height position of the lower second roll 26, and hence the height position of the lower collar 16 at the second position, and thus the lower collar 16 and It is possible to know the tip distance L between the upper side 15 and the upper side 15. The rotary encoder 28e of the roll lifting / lowering motor 28a and a calculation unit (not shown) are provided between the upper rod 15 and the lower rod 16 that are about to pass between the second rolls 25 and 26 at the second position. An interval detecting unit (interval detecting means) for detecting the tip interval L is provided.
 昇降軸28bは、その上端部に配設された圧力センサ29を介して本圧縮用のロール支持体27を下方から支持していて、図示しないガイドに沿って昇降される。歯車28cは内周歯車部及び外周歯車部を有していて、その内周歯車部は昇降軸28bの下部に形成された雄ねじ部に噛み合わされている。駆動歯車28dは歯車28cの外周歯車部に噛み合わされていて、ロール昇降用モータ28aにより回転される。したがって、本圧縮用の間隔調整機構28のロール昇降用モータ28aの正逆回転に従い、昇降軸28bとともに下側の第2ロール26が昇降されるので、これに伴って下杵16の高さ位置が変更される結果、第2位置での杵先間隔Lが変更(制御)される。 The elevating shaft 28b supports the main-compression roll support 27 from below via a pressure sensor 29 disposed at the upper end thereof, and is moved up and down along a guide (not shown). The gear 28c has an inner peripheral gear portion and an outer peripheral gear portion, and the inner peripheral gear portion is meshed with a male screw portion formed at a lower portion of the elevating shaft 28b. The drive gear 28d is meshed with the outer peripheral gear portion of the gear 28c, and is rotated by the roll lifting / lowering motor 28a. Accordingly, the lower second roll 26 is moved up and down together with the lifting shaft 28b in accordance with the forward / reverse rotation of the roll lifting / lowering motor 28a of the interval adjusting mechanism 28 for main compression. As a result, the tip distance L at the second position is changed (controlled).
 以上説明したように第1位置及び第2位置における杵先間隔の変更(制御)が行われるが、これに本発明は制限されない。例えば、杵先間隔制御機構は、第1位置と第2位置のいずれか、または双方の位置における下側の圧縮成型ロールを上下方向に移動しないように保持しておいて、前記説明とは逆に上側の圧縮成型ロールの高さ位置を変更させて、杵先間隔を制御する構成とすることができ、更には、上側と下側の双方の圧縮成型ロールの高さ位置を変更させて、杵先間隔を制御する構成とすることができる。 As described above, the tip spacing at the first position and the second position is changed (controlled), but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the tip spacing control mechanism holds the lower compression molding roll at one or both of the first position and the second position so as not to move in the vertical direction. It is possible to change the height position of the upper compression molding roll to control the tip spacing, and further, to change the height position of both the upper and lower compression molding rolls, It can be set as the structure which controls a tip space | interval.
 圧力センサ29は本圧縮(最終圧縮)成型時の成型圧力(以下本圧縮力と称する。)を検出するために設けられていて、例えば本圧縮用のロール支持体27と昇降軸28bとで上下から挟まれて配設されている。この圧力センサ29には、検出する成型圧力を電気量に変換するロードセル等を好適に設けることできる。圧力センサ29は既述のように昇降軸28bの上端に固定されていて、その受圧端29aは本圧縮用のロール支持体27の下面を受けている。 The pressure sensor 29 is provided to detect a molding pressure (hereinafter referred to as a main compression force) at the time of main compression (final compression) molding. For example, the pressure sensor 29 is moved up and down by a main compression roll support 27 and a lifting shaft 28b. It is arranged between. The pressure sensor 29 can be suitably provided with a load cell that converts a molding pressure to be detected into an electric quantity. The pressure sensor 29 is fixed to the upper end of the elevating shaft 28b as described above, and the pressure receiving end 29a receives the lower surface of the roll support 27 for main compression.
 打錠機2は、その排出位置に、不良品排出部31と良品排出部37とを備えている。排出位置は第2位置を基準に回転盤11の回転方向下流側に設定されている。更に、この排出位置を基準に回転盤11の回転方向下流側に前記粉末供給位置が設定されている。 The tableting machine 2 includes a defective product discharge unit 31 and a non-defective product discharge unit 37 at the discharge position. The discharge position is set on the downstream side in the rotation direction of the turntable 11 with respect to the second position. Further, the powder supply position is set on the downstream side in the rotation direction of the turntable 11 with reference to the discharge position.
 不良品排出部31は良品排出部37を基準に回転盤11の回転方向上流側に配置されている。この不良品排出部31は、以下の構成に限定されるものではないが、例えばチャンバ32と、シュート33と、噴気ノズル34と、通気管35とを有している。 The defective product discharge unit 31 is arranged on the upstream side in the rotation direction of the turntable 11 with respect to the non-defective product discharge unit 37. Although this defective product discharge part 31 is not limited to the following structures, it has the chamber 32, the chute | shoot 33, the blast nozzle 34, and the vent pipe 35, for example.
 チャンバ32はその開放された下端を回転盤11の臼取付け部上面に接しないように近接して設けられている。チャンバ32は臼12の回転軌跡と交差している。このチャンバ32にシュート33が接続されている。シュート33は回転盤11の外側でかつ斜め下方に向けて延びている。噴気ノズル34は、臼12の回転軌跡で囲まれる領域外に配設されたシュート33に向けて、圧縮空気を前記領域内から噴出するようにチャンバ32に支持されている。 The chamber 32 is provided close to the lower end of the chamber 32 so as not to contact the upper surface of the mortar mounting portion of the rotating disk 11. The chamber 32 intersects the rotational trajectory of the mortar 12. A chute 33 is connected to the chamber 32. The chute 33 extends outside the rotating disk 11 and obliquely downward. The blast nozzle 34 is supported by the chamber 32 so as to eject compressed air from the area toward the chute 33 disposed outside the area surrounded by the rotation locus of the mortar 12.
 通気管35の一端は噴気ノズル34に接続され、通気管35の他端は図示しない圧縮空気源に接続されている。通気管35の中間部に開閉用の電磁弁36が設けられている。電磁弁36は、常時は閉じた状態を維持し、後述の圧力制御部51での圧力異常の検出に基づいて入力される開弁信号に従い所定の短時間だけ開かれる。 One end of the vent pipe 35 is connected to the jet nozzle 34, and the other end of the vent pipe 35 is connected to a compressed air source (not shown). An electromagnetic valve 36 for opening and closing is provided in the middle portion of the vent pipe 35. The electromagnetic valve 36 is normally kept closed and is opened for a predetermined short period of time in accordance with a valve opening signal input based on detection of a pressure abnormality in a pressure control unit 51 described later.
 チャンバ32は、臼12の回転軌跡上に位置される入口側通過口(図示しない)と出口側通過口32aを有している。これらの通過口は、チャンバ32の側壁を下端から切り欠くように設けられていて、回転盤11の臼取付け部の上面に下杵16により押出された錠剤が通過可能である。そのため、成型圧力に基づいて規格範囲内であると判断された錠剤(通常は良品)は、図示しない入口側通過口と出口側通過口32aを通ってチャンバ32を通り抜けることができる。この通過時に噴気ノズル34から圧縮空気が噴出されることはない。 The chamber 32 has an inlet-side passage port (not shown) and an outlet-side passage port 32a that are positioned on the rotation trajectory of the mortar 12. These passage openings are provided so as to cut out the side wall of the chamber 32 from the lower end, and the tablets extruded by the lower punch 16 can pass through the upper surface of the mortar mounting portion of the turntable 11. Therefore, a tablet (usually a good product) determined to be within the standard range based on the molding pressure can pass through the chamber 32 through an inlet side passage port and an outlet side passage port 32a (not shown). During this passage, the compressed air is not ejected from the jet nozzle 34.
 しかし、成型圧力に基づいて規格範囲外であると判断された錠剤(通常は不良品)がチャンバ32に搬入されてきた場合は、それにタイミングを合わせて電磁弁36が開かれ噴気ノズル34から圧縮空気が噴出されて、この圧縮空気が下杵16上の不良品に噴き付けられる。そのため、規格範囲から外れていると判断された錠剤は、下杵16から剥離されると同時にシュート33に向けて吹き飛ばされ、回転盤11外に排出される。 However, when a tablet (usually a defective product) determined to be out of the standard range based on the molding pressure has been carried into the chamber 32, the electromagnetic valve 36 is opened and compressed from the squirt nozzle 34 at the same timing. Air is ejected and this compressed air is sprayed onto the defective product on the lower rod 16. Therefore, the tablet determined to be out of the standard range is peeled off from the lower punch 16 and simultaneously blown off toward the chute 33 and discharged out of the turntable 11.
 良品排出部37は、例えば不良品排出部31のチャンバ32に連結して移動不能に設けられて、臼12の回転軌跡と交差するスクレーパ38と、これに連なる排出シュート39からなる。チャンバ32を通過し、かつ、規格範囲内にあると判断された錠剤(良品)は、良品排出部37のスクレーパ38により下杵16上から外されて、排出シュート39を通って回転盤11の臼取付け部上から回転盤11の外部に取出される。 The non-defective product discharge unit 37 includes, for example, a scraper 38 that is connected to the chamber 32 of the defective product discharge unit 31 so as to be immovable, intersects with the rotational trajectory of the mortar 12, and a discharge chute 39 connected thereto. The tablet (good product) that has passed through the chamber 32 and is determined to be within the standard range is removed from the lower punch 16 by the scraper 38 of the good product discharge unit 37, passes through the discharge chute 39, It is taken out of the rotating disk 11 from above the mortar mounting portion.
 良品排出部37には、これにより排出されるとともに適正な成型圧力で成型された錠剤の中から複数の錠剤を適時サンプリングするサンプリング部41が取付けられている。サンプリング部41は、サンプリングシュート42と、サンプリングシャッタ43と、サンプリング駆動器44等を備えている。 The non-defective product discharge section 37 is provided with a sampling section 41 for sampling a plurality of tablets from the tablets that are discharged and molded with an appropriate molding pressure. The sampling unit 41 includes a sampling chute 42, a sampling shutter 43, a sampling driver 44, and the like.
 サンプリングシュート42は斜めの排出シュート39から下向きに分岐されている。サンプリングシャッタ43は、サンプリングシュート42の入口を開閉するもので、通常は図1中実線で示すように入口を閉じる閉じ位置に配置されている。それにより、規格範囲内の錠剤を排出シュート39の開放された下端がなした出口に向けて排出することができる。 The sampling chute 42 is branched downward from the oblique discharge chute 39. The sampling shutter 43 opens and closes the entrance of the sampling chute 42, and is normally disposed at a closed position for closing the entrance as shown by a solid line in FIG. Thereby, tablets within the standard range can be discharged toward the outlet formed by the opened lower end of the discharge chute 39.
 又、図1中二点鎖線で示すようにサンプリングシャッタ43がサンプリングシュート42の入口を開く開き位置に配置されることにより、排出シュート39を通った錠剤がサンプリングシュート42を通って取出される。サンプリング駆動器44は、例えばロータリーソレノイド等のアクチュエータからなり、サンプリングシャッタ43を通常は閉じ位置に保持し、サンプリング信号の入力によって所定時間の間、サンプリングシャッタ43を開き位置に移動させる。 Further, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 1, the sampling shutter 43 is arranged at an open position where the inlet of the sampling chute 42 is opened, so that the tablet passing through the discharge chute 39 is taken out through the sampling chute 42. The sampling driver 44 is composed of, for example, an actuator such as a rotary solenoid, and normally holds the sampling shutter 43 in the closed position, and moves the sampling shutter 43 to the open position for a predetermined time by the input of the sampling signal.
 なお、運転中の複数の錠剤(成型品)をサンプリングする方法は上述の方法に制約されない。つまり、良品の錠剤のみをサンプリングするのではなく、良品及び不良品の錠剤を対象にしてサンプリングをしても良い。この場合は、例えば、不良品シュート33側にもサンプリング部(図示しない)を設けて、良品の錠剤用の排出シュート39から排出される錠剤と合流した(良品、不良品が混合された)錠剤を測定器3に供給するようにすれば良い。 In addition, the method for sampling a plurality of tablets (molded products) during operation is not limited to the above-described method. That is, instead of sampling only non-defective tablets, sampling may be performed on non-defective and defective tablets. In this case, for example, a sampling unit (not shown) is also provided on the defective chute 33 side, and the tablets merged with the tablets discharged from the discharge chute 39 for non-defective tablets (mixed with non-defective products and defective products). May be supplied to the measuring device 3.
 測定器3は、適正数の錠剤がサンプリングされる度に、サンプリングシュート42から排出される複数の錠剤を受取るように、サンプリング部41の下方に配置されている。この測定器3には自動式のものを用いることが好ましい。自動式の測定器3は、受取った錠剤(サンプリング錠)の中から所定数(複数)の錠剤の質量(重量)を測定するとともに、この測定結果を基に測定された錠剤の質量平均値を算出し、かつ、その算出結果を、個々のサンプリング錠の質量の測定値とともに外部に出力する機能を有している。 The measuring device 3 is arranged below the sampling unit 41 so as to receive a plurality of tablets discharged from the sampling chute 42 every time an appropriate number of tablets are sampled. The measuring device 3 is preferably an automatic type. The automatic measuring device 3 measures the mass (weight) of a predetermined number (plurality) of tablets (sampling tablets) received, and calculates the mass average value of the tablets measured based on the measurement result. It has a function of calculating and outputting the calculation result to the outside together with the measured value of the mass of each sampling tablet.
 また、自動式の測定器3は、サンプリングの度に受取った錠剤の中から前記所定数の錠剤について厚みを測定するとともに、この測定結果を基に測定された錠剤の厚み平均値を算出し、かつ、その算出結果を、個々のサンプリング錠の厚み測定値とともに外部に出力する機能を有している。 In addition, the automatic measuring device 3 measures the thickness of the predetermined number of tablets received from each sampling, and calculates the average thickness value of the tablets measured based on the measurement result, And it has the function to output the calculation result to the outside with the thickness measurement value of each sampling tablet.
 更に、自動式の測定器3は、サンプリングの度に受取った錠剤の中から前記所定数の錠剤について硬度を測定するとともに、この測定結果を基に測定された錠剤の硬度平均値を算出し、かつ、その算出結果を、個々のサンプリング錠の硬度測定値とともに外部に出力する機能を有している。 Further, the automatic measuring device 3 measures the hardness of the predetermined number of tablets out of the tablets received every sampling, and calculates the average hardness value of the tablets measured based on the measurement result, And it has the function to output the calculation result to the outside with the hardness measurement value of each sampling tablet.
 前記打錠機2の運転全般の制御を担う制御盤4は、図示しない制御盤筐体の表面等に露出して設けられたタッチパネル式等の入力装置(図示しない)、及びマイクロコンピュータ等を備えて制御盤筐体に内蔵された制御装置4aなどを備えている。制御装置4aは、各種の入力データ(試打データ及びサンプリングデータ等)を外部の記録装置に出力する機能等を有している。 The control panel 4 that controls the overall operation of the tableting machine 2 includes a touch panel type input device (not shown) provided on the surface of a control panel casing (not shown), a microcomputer, and the like. And a control device 4a built in the control panel housing. The control device 4a has a function of outputting various input data (trial hit data, sampling data, etc.) to an external recording device.
 制御装置4aは、打錠機2の連続運転に伴う打錠機2各部の温度変化による上杵15及び下杵16等の膨張・収縮や圧縮される粉末の物性の変化を原因とする錠剤の質量変動、厚み変動、及び硬度変動を抑制して、製造される錠剤の質量と厚みと硬度を制御基準値に保持する制御等を担うように構成されている。 The control device 4a is used to control the tablet due to the expansion and contraction of the upper punch 15 and the lower punch 16 due to the temperature change of each part of the tableting machine 2 during the continuous operation of the tableting machine 2 and the change in physical properties of the powder to be compressed. It is configured to perform control to keep the mass, thickness, and hardness of the manufactured tablet at the control reference value while suppressing mass fluctuation, thickness fluctuation, and hardness fluctuation.
 この制御装置4aは、製造される錠剤の質量を規格範囲内に保持するためだけでなく、錠剤の厚み及び硬度を規格範囲内に保持するために、成型圧力を圧力制御基準値に保持する圧力制御部51を備えている。この圧力制御部51は、「成型圧力を圧力制御基準値に保持する制御を行うこと」を目的として用いられているため、質量を規格範囲内に保持する必要がない制御パターンの場合でも、成型圧力を圧力制御基準値にする制御を行うように機能する。したがって、後述する厚みと硬度の制御(TH制御)、および厚みのみの制御(T単独制御)が行われる場合、錠剤の質量Wを目標とする質量にするための制御はしないが、算定質量Waに基づく質量制御、及び厚み制御をした時の夫々の圧力変動値を求めて更新される圧力制御基準値にするためのフィードバック制御は行なう。 This control device 4a is used not only to maintain the mass of the tablet to be manufactured within the standard range, but also to maintain the molding pressure at the pressure control reference value in order to maintain the thickness and hardness of the tablet within the standard range. A control unit 51 is provided. This pressure control unit 51 is used for the purpose of “controlling the molding pressure to the pressure control reference value”, so that even in the case of a control pattern that does not require the mass to be kept within the standard range, the molding is performed. It functions to control the pressure to the pressure control reference value. Therefore, when the thickness and hardness control (TH control) and the thickness only control (T single control), which will be described later, are performed, control for setting the tablet mass W to the target mass is not performed, but the calculated mass Wa Feedback control is performed to obtain a pressure control reference value that is updated by obtaining each pressure fluctuation value when performing mass control based on the thickness control and thickness control.
 圧力制御部51は、これに設定された圧力制御基準値(現在値)PMが後述のように更新されることで、更新された圧力制御基準値PMのレベルに応じた信号出力を前記軌道昇降機構19の軌道昇降用モータ19aに供給して、下杵16の高さ位置を変えて質量補正を行わせるように構成されている。このように圧力制御基準値PMに基づいて下杵16の高さ位置を質量調節軌道17により変更して錠剤(成型品)の質量を補正することによって、成型圧力を制御することを、ここではフィードバック制御(FBC)と称している。 The pressure control unit 51 updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM set thereto as described later, thereby generating a signal output corresponding to the level of the updated pressure control reference value PM. It is configured to be supplied to the motor 19a for raising and lowering the track of the mechanism 19 so as to change the height position of the lower rod 16 and perform mass correction. In this way, the molding pressure is controlled by changing the height position of the lower eyelid 16 by the mass adjustment track 17 based on the pressure control reference value PM and correcting the mass of the tablet (molded product). This is referred to as feedback control (FBC).
 更に、制御装置4aは、打錠機2の試し打ち運転により取得される各種の試打データを基に以下の相関係数a0~a5を演算により求める基礎データ取得部を有している。相関係数a0~a5は以下の通りである。 Furthermore, the control device 4a has a basic data acquisition unit for calculating the following correlation coefficients a0 to a5 based on various test hit data acquired by the trial hit operation of the tableting machine 2. The correlation coefficients a0 to a5 are as follows.
 相関係数a0は、錠剤の最終圧縮成型時(本圧縮成型時とも称する。)の成型圧力変動値ΔP(単位KN)と質量変動値ΔW(単位mg)との間で成立する相関係数である。この相関係数a0をP-W相関係数(単位KN/mg)と称する。 The correlation coefficient a0 is a correlation coefficient established between the molding pressure fluctuation value ΔP (unit KN) and the mass fluctuation value ΔW (unit mg) at the time of final compression molding (also referred to as main compression molding) of the tablet. is there. This correlation coefficient a0 is referred to as a PW correlation coefficient (unit: KN / mg).
 相関係数a1は、錠剤の厚み変動値ΔT(単位mm)と質量変動値ΔW(単位mg)との間で成立する相関係数である。この相関係数a1をT-W相関係数(単位mm/mg)と称する。 The correlation coefficient a1 is a correlation coefficient established between the tablet thickness variation value ΔT (unit mm) and the mass variation value ΔW (unit mg). This correlation coefficient a1 is referred to as a TW correlation coefficient (unit: mm / mg).
 相関係数a2は、錠剤の成型圧力変動値ΔP(単位KN)と厚み変動値ΔT(単位mm)との間で成立する相関係数である。この相関係数a2をP-T相関係数(単位KN/mm)と称する。 The correlation coefficient a2 is a correlation coefficient established between the tablet molding pressure fluctuation value ΔP (unit KN) and the thickness fluctuation value ΔT (unit mm). This correlation coefficient a2 is referred to as PT correlation coefficient (unit: KN / mm).
 相関係数a3は、錠剤の本圧縮成型時の杵先間隔変動値ΔL(単位mm)と厚み変動値ΔT(単位mm)との間で成立する相関係数である。この相関係数a3をL-T相関係数(単位mm/mm)と称する。 The correlation coefficient a3 is a correlation coefficient established between the tip interval variation value ΔL (unit mm) and the thickness variation value ΔT (unit mm) during the main compression molding of the tablet. This correlation coefficient a3 is referred to as an LT correlation coefficient (unit: mm / mm).
 相関係数a4は、錠剤の厚み変動値ΔT(単位mm)と硬度変動値ΔH(単位N)との間で成立する相関係数である。この相関係数a4をT-H相関係数(単位mm/N)と称する。 The correlation coefficient a4 is a correlation coefficient established between the tablet thickness fluctuation value ΔT (unit mm) and the hardness fluctuation value ΔH (unit N). This correlation coefficient a4 is referred to as a TH correlation coefficient (unit: mm / N).
 相関係数a5は、錠剤の質量変動値ΔW(単位mg)と硬度変動値ΔH(単位N)との間で成立する相関係数である。この相関係数a5をW-H相関係数(単位mg/N)と称する。 The correlation coefficient a5 is a correlation coefficient established between the tablet mass fluctuation value ΔW (unit: mg) and the hardness fluctuation value ΔH (unit N). This correlation coefficient a5 is referred to as a WH correlation coefficient (unit: mg / N).
 なお、成型品の成型圧力P、質量W、厚みT、硬度H、および杵先間隔L(またはl)の間には夫々相関関係があって、夫々に相関係数が成立する。このため、後述の演算処理で使用する前記各相関係数(a0~a5)は、a0をP-W相関係数、a1をT-W相関係数、a2をP-T相関係数、a3をL-T相関係数、a4をT-H相関係数、a5をW-H相関係数とすることに限定されるものではない。 Note that there is a correlation among the molding pressure P, the mass W, the thickness T, the hardness H, and the tip interval L (or l) of the molded product, and a correlation coefficient is established for each. For this reason, the correlation coefficients (a0 to a5) used in the arithmetic processing described later are a0 as a PW correlation coefficient, a1 as a TW correlation coefficient, a2 as a PT correlation coefficient, and a3. Is an LT correlation coefficient, a4 is a TH correlation coefficient, and a5 is a WH correlation coefficient.
 例えば成型品の厚みTに係わる相関係数に関しては、厚みTと杵先間隔L(またはl)との間に成立するL-T相関係数を用いることによって、前記相関係数のうちでT-W相関係数をL-W相関係数に、P-T相関係数をP-L相関係数に、T-H相関係数をL-H相関係数に夫々置き換えて演算処理することも可能である。 For example, regarding the correlation coefficient related to the thickness T of the molded product, by using the LT correlation coefficient established between the thickness T and the tip distance L (or l), the correlation coefficient T -Replace the W correlation coefficient with the LW correlation coefficient, replace the PT correlation coefficient with the PL correlation coefficient, and replace the TH correlation coefficient with the LH correlation coefficient. Is also possible.
 このことを前提として、本第1実施形態および後述する第2実施形態では、a0をP-W相関係数、a1をT-W相関係数、a2をP-T相関係数、a3をL-T相関係数、a4をT-H相関係数、a5をW-H相関係数として、以下の説明を行う。 Based on this premise, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described later, a0 is a PW correlation coefficient, a1 is a TW correlation coefficient, a2 is a PT correlation coefficient, and a3 is L The following description will be made assuming that the −T correlation coefficient, a4 is the TH correlation coefficient, and a5 is the WH correlation coefficient.
 制御装置4aは後述する6通りの制御パターンのいずれかにより打錠機2の運転を制御する。 The control device 4a controls the operation of the tableting machine 2 according to any of the six control patterns described later.
 制御パターン1により、成型品の質量Wと厚みTと硬度Hの夫々が、製品の規格範囲内で目標とする制御基準値となるように制御されて所望の成型品が製造される。制御パターン2により、成型品の質量Wと厚みTの夫々が、製品の規格範囲内で目標とする制御基準値となるように制御されて所望の成型品が製造される。制御パターン3により、成型品の質量Wと硬度Hの夫々が、製品の規格範囲内で目標とする制御基準値となるように制御されて所望の成型品が製造される。制御パターン4により、成型品の質量Wが、単独に製品の規格範囲内で目標とする制御基準値となるように制御されて所望の成型品が製造される。制御パターン5により、成型品の厚みTと硬度Hの夫々が、製品の規格範囲内で目標とする制御基準値となるように制御されて所望の成型品が製造される。制御パターン6により、成型品の厚みTが、単独に製品の規格範囲内で目標とする制御基準値となるように制御されて所望の成型品が製造される。 The desired molded product is manufactured by controlling the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H of the molded product so as to become target control reference values within the standard range of the product by the control pattern 1. According to the control pattern 2, each of the mass W and the thickness T of the molded product is controlled so as to become a target control reference value within the standard range of the product, and a desired molded product is manufactured. According to the control pattern 3, each of the mass W and the hardness H of the molded product is controlled to become a target control reference value within the product specification range, and a desired molded product is manufactured. According to the control pattern 4, the mass W of the molded product is controlled so as to become a target control reference value within the standard range of the product, and a desired molded product is manufactured. By the control pattern 5, the thickness T and the hardness H of the molded product are controlled so as to become the target control reference value within the standard range of the product, and a desired molded product is manufactured. By the control pattern 6, the thickness T of the molded product is controlled so as to become a target control reference value within the standard range of the product, and a desired molded product is manufactured.
 各制御パターン1~6と相関係数a0~a5との関係を以下に説明する。 The relationship between the control patterns 1 to 6 and the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 will be described below.
 制御装置4aが制御パターン1(これを、「WTH制御」と称する。)で打錠機2を制御する場合に行われる演算では、全ての相関係数a0~a5(但し、a5は、a5βを用いる。)が使用され、使用しない相関係数は存在しない。 In the calculation performed when the control device 4a controls the tableting machine 2 with the control pattern 1 (this is referred to as “WTH control”), all the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 (where a5 is a5β Used)), and there is no correlation coefficient not used.
 制御装置4aが制御パターン2(これを、「WT制御」と称する。)で打錠機2を制御する場合に行われる演算では、相関係数a0~a3が使用され、相関係数a4,a5は使用されない。 In the calculation performed when the control device 4a controls the tableting machine 2 with the control pattern 2 (this is referred to as “WT control”), the correlation coefficients a0 to a3 are used, and the correlation coefficients a4 and a5 are used. Is not used.
 制御装置4aが制御パターン3(これを、「WH制御」と称する。)で打錠機2を制御する場合に行われる演算では、相関係数a0,a5(但し、a5は、a5αを用いる。)が使用され、相関係数a1~a4は使用されない。 In the calculation performed when the control device 4a controls the tableting machine 2 with the control pattern 3 (this is referred to as “WH control”), the correlation coefficients a0 and a5 (however, a5α is used as a5). ) Are used, and the correlation coefficients a1 to a4 are not used.
 制御装置4aが制御パターン4(これを、「W単独制御」と称する。)で打錠機2を制御する場合に行われる演算では、相関係数a0が使用され、相関係数a1~a5は使用されない。 In the calculation performed when the control device 4a controls the tableting machine 2 with the control pattern 4 (this is referred to as “W single control”), the correlation coefficient a0 is used, and the correlation coefficients a1 to a5 are Not used.
 制御装置4aが制御パターン5(これを、「TH制御」と称する。)で打錠機2を制御する場合に行われる演算では、相関係数a0~a5(但し、a5は、a5βを用いる。)が使用され、使用しない相関係数は存在しない。 In calculations performed when the control device 4a controls the tableting machine 2 with the control pattern 5 (this is referred to as “TH control”), correlation coefficients a0 to a5 (where a5β is used as a5). ) Is used, and there is no correlation coefficient that is not used.
 制御装置4aが制御パターン6(これを、「T単独制御」と称する。)で打錠機2を制御する場合に行われる演算では、相関係数a0~a3が使用され、相関係数a4,a5は使用されない。 In the calculation performed when the control device 4a controls the tableting machine 2 with the control pattern 6 (this is referred to as “T single control”), the correlation coefficients a0 to a3 are used, and the correlation coefficients a4 and a4 are used. a5 is not used.
 制御装置4aによる制御を説明する上で使用する各記号等の一覧を、質量Wの制御関連記号、厚みTの制御関連記号、硬度Hの制御関連記号、圧力Pの制御関連記号、本圧縮用の杵先間隔Lの関連記号、及び予備圧縮用の杵先間隔lの関連記号に分けて、以下に記載する。 A list of symbols and the like used for explaining the control by the control device 4a includes a control-related symbol of mass W, a control-related symbol of thickness T, a control-related symbol of hardness H, a control-related symbol of pressure P, and a main compression The following is divided into a related symbol of the tip interval L and a related symbol of the tip interval l for pre-compression.
 (質量Wの制御関連記号) 
WO(単位mg):錠剤の質量基準値(成型品規格基準値) 
WOL(単位mg):錠剤の質量制御基準値補正範囲の下限値 
WOH(単位mg):錠剤の質量制御基準値補正範囲の上限値 
WM(単位mg):錠剤の質量制御基準値(現在値) 
WMa(単位mg):演算処理に用いる錠剤の質量制御基準算定値 
WMb(単位mg):錠剤の質量制御基準算定値の更新値を求めるための演算処理に用いる質量制御基準暫定値 
Wx(単位mg):サンプリングされた錠剤の質量平均値 
Wa(単位mg):サンプリングされた錠剤の成型圧力平均値Pxを圧力制御基準値PMにしたときに相当する質量変動値と、サンプリングされた錠剤の質量平均値Wxとから求められ、演算処理に用いる錠剤の算定質量 
kw:質量制御基準算定値を補正するときの質量補正係数。
(Control symbol for mass W)
WO (unit: mg): tablet mass standard value (molded product standard standard value)
WOL (unit: mg): Lower limit value of tablet mass control reference value correction range
WOH (unit: mg): Upper limit of tablet mass control reference value correction range
WM (unit: mg): tablet mass control reference value (current value)
WMa (unit: mg): tablet mass control standard calculation value used for calculation processing
WMb (unit: mg): provisional value for mass control reference used for calculation processing to obtain an updated value for the mass control reference calculation value of the tablet
Wx (unit: mg): mass average value of sampled tablets
Wa (unit: mg): It is obtained from the mass fluctuation value corresponding to the molding pressure average value Px of the sampled tablet set to the pressure control reference value PM and the mass average value Wx of the sampled tablet, and is used for the calculation process. Calculated mass of tablets used
kw: Mass correction coefficient for correcting the mass control standard calculation value.
 (厚みTの制御関連記号) 
TO(単位mm):錠剤の厚み基準値(成型品規格基準値) 
TOL(単位mm):錠剤の厚み制御基準値補正範囲の下限値 
TOH(単位mm):錠剤の厚み制御基準値補正範囲の上限値 
TM(単位mm):錠剤の厚み制御基準値(現在値) 
TMa(単位mm):演算処理に用いる錠剤の厚み制御基準算定値 
TMb(単位mm):錠剤の厚み制御基準算定値の更新値を求めるための演算処理に用いる厚み制御基準暫定値 
Tx(単位mm):サンプリングされた錠剤の厚み平均値 
Ta(単位mm):サンプリングされた錠剤の質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたときの厚み変動値と、厚み平均値Txとから求められ、演算処理に用いる錠剤の算定厚み 
kt:厚み制御基準算定値を補正するときの厚み補正係数。
(Thickness T control-related symbols)
TO (unit: mm): tablet thickness standard value (molded product standard standard value)
TOL (unit: mm): lower limit value of tablet thickness control reference value correction range
TOH (unit: mm): upper limit of tablet thickness control reference value correction range
TM (unit: mm): Tablet thickness control reference value (current value)
TMa (unit: mm): tablet thickness control standard calculation value used for calculation processing
TMb (unit: mm): provisional value for thickness control reference used for calculation processing for obtaining updated value of tablet thickness control reference calculated value
Tx (unit: mm): Average thickness of sampled tablets
Ta (unit: mm): Calculated thickness of tablet used for calculation processing, obtained from thickness variation value when thickness average value Wx of sampled tablet is mass control standard calculated value WMa, and thickness average value Tx
kt: Thickness correction coefficient for correcting the thickness control standard calculation value.
 (硬度Hの制御関連記号) 
HO(単位N):錠剤の硬度基準値(成型品規格基準値) 
HOL(単位N):錠剤の硬度制御基準値補正範囲の下限値 
HOH(単位N):錠剤の硬度制御基準値補正範囲の上限値 
HM(単位N):錠剤の硬度制御基準値(現在値) 
HMa(単位N):演算処理に用いる錠剤の硬度制御基準算定値 
HMb(単位N):錠剤の硬度制御基準算定値の更新値を求めるための演算処理に用いる硬度制御基準暫定値 
Hx(単位N):サンプリングされた錠剤の硬度平均値 
Ha(単位N):サンプリングされた錠剤の質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたときの硬度変動値、及び錠剤の算定厚みTaを厚み制御基準算定値TMaにしたときの硬度変動値と、硬度平均値Hxとから求められ、演算処理に用いる錠剤の算定硬度 
kh:硬度制御基準算定値を補正するときの硬度補正係数。
(Control symbol for hardness H)
HO (unit N): Tablet hardness standard value (molded product standard standard value)
HOL (unit N): Lower limit value of tablet hardness control reference value correction range
HOH (unit N): upper limit value of tablet hardness control reference value correction range
HM (unit N): tablet hardness control reference value (current value)
HMa (unit N): tablet hardness control standard calculation value used for calculation processing
HMb (unit N): provisional value of hardness control reference used for calculation processing for obtaining updated value of tablet hardness control reference calculated value
Hx (unit N): hardness average value of sampled tablets
Ha (unit N): hardness variation value when the sampled tablet mass average value Wx is the mass control reference calculated value WMa, and hardness variation value when the tablet calculated thickness Ta is the thickness control reference calculated value TMa Calculated from the hardness average value Hx, and the calculated hardness of the tablet used in the calculation process
kh: Hardness correction coefficient when correcting the hardness control standard calculation value.
 (圧力Pの制御関連記号) 
PM(単位KN):圧力制御部の圧力制御基準値(現在値) 
PMa(単位KN):演算処理に用いる圧力制御部の圧力制御基準算定値 
PTa(単位KN):演算処理に用いる厚み制御による算定圧力変動値 
PWa(単位KN):演算処理に用いる質量制御による算定圧力変動値 
Px(単位KN):サンプリングされた錠剤の成型圧力平均値。
(Control related symbols for pressure P)
PM (unit KN): Pressure control reference value (current value) of the pressure control unit
PMa (unit: KN): pressure control reference calculation value of the pressure control unit used for arithmetic processing
PTa (unit KN): Calculated pressure fluctuation value by thickness control used for calculation processing
PWa (unit: KN): Calculated pressure fluctuation value by mass control used for arithmetic processing
Px (unit KN): molding pressure average value of sampled tablets.
 (本圧縮用の杵先間隔Lの関連記号) 
LM(単位mm):第2位置での杵先間隔設定値(現在値) 
LMa(単位mm):演算処理に用いる第2位置での杵先間隔算定値。
(Related symbol of tip spacing L for main compression)
LM (unit: mm): Tip distance setting value at the second position (current value)
LMa (unit: mm): a calculated point interval value at the second position used for the calculation process.
 (予備圧縮用の杵先間隔lの関連記号) 
lM(単位mm):第1位置での杵先間隔設定値(現在値) 
lMa(単位mm):演算処理に用いる第1位置での杵先間隔算定値。 
 又、圧力制御部51には以下の記号で示される値が設定されている。
(Related symbol of tip spacing l for pre-compression)
1M (unit: mm): Tip distance setting value at the first position (current value)
lMa (unit: mm): a calculated value of the tip distance at the first position used for the calculation process.
The pressure controller 51 is set with values indicated by the following symbols.
 (圧力制御部の各制御圧力値関連記号) 
LLP(単位KN):圧力制御部の異常圧力下限値 
LEP(単位KN):圧力制御部の不良排出圧力下限値 
LCL(単位KN):圧力制御部の質量制御圧力下限値 
MEAN(単位KN):圧力制御部の圧力基準値(圧力制御基準値PMに相当) 
HCL(単位KN):圧力制御部の質量制御圧力上限値 
HEP(単位KN):圧力制御部の不良排出圧力上限値 
HLP(単位KN):圧力制御部の異常圧力上限値。
(Symbols related to each control pressure value of the pressure controller)
LLP (unit: KN): Abnormal pressure lower limit of the pressure controller
LEP (unit: KN): Defective discharge pressure lower limit value of the pressure control unit
LCL (unit: KN): Mass control pressure lower limit value of pressure controller
MEAN (unit KN): Pressure reference value of pressure control unit (equivalent to pressure control reference value PM)
HCL (unit: KN): Mass control pressure upper limit value of pressure control unit
HEP (Unit: KN): Upper limit value of defective discharge pressure in the pressure controller
HLP (unit KN): Upper limit value of abnormal pressure of the pressure control unit.
 次に、制御装置4aによる錠剤の質量・厚み・硬度の各制御についての基礎データの取得、制御パターンの判別、及び制御の手順を、図2~図11を参照して説明する。まず、回転式の打錠装置1を連続運転する前に行われる基礎データの取得手順を図2により説明する。 Next, basic data acquisition, control pattern discrimination, and control procedures for control of tablet mass, thickness, and hardness by the control device 4a will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the basic data acquisition procedure performed before the rotary tableting device 1 is continuously operated will be described with reference to FIG.
 始めに、オペレータは製造しようとする錠剤の基礎データを取得するために、質量・厚み・硬度を、夫々調整するための操作を、図示しない前記入力装置を用いて行う。 First, the operator performs operations for adjusting the mass, thickness, and hardness using the input device (not shown) in order to acquire basic data of the tablet to be manufactured.
 このオペレータの操作に基づいて、制御装置4aは、打錠機2の一回目の試し打ち運転(試打運転)をし、この運転中にサンプリング部41を動作させ所定数の錠剤をサンプリングし、打錠機2の運転を停止させる。 Based on the operation of this operator, the control device 4a performs the first trial driving operation (trial driving operation) of the tableting machine 2, operates the sampling unit 41 during this operation, samples a predetermined number of tablets, and presses the tablet. The operation of the lock machine 2 is stopped.
 この一回目の打錠機2の試打運転において、圧力データP1、質量データW1、厚みデータT1、硬度データH1,予備圧縮時の杵先間隔データl1、本圧縮時の杵先間隔データL1が、試打データ1として取得される(ステップS01)。 In the first trial operation of the tableting machine 2, the pressure data P1, the mass data W1, the thickness data T1, the hardness data H1, the tip distance data 11 at the time of preliminary compression, and the tip distance data L1 at the time of main compression are: Obtained as trial hit data 1 (step S01).
 つまり、製造される各錠剤の個々についての成型圧力が圧力センサ29により検出される。制御装置4aは、圧力センサ29により検出された個々の錠剤の成型圧力を取得し、個々の成型圧力を平均化する処理をする。この処理により算出された成型圧力平均値が圧力データP1である。 That is, the pressure sensor 29 detects the molding pressure for each of the manufactured tablets. The control device 4a acquires the molding pressures of the individual tablets detected by the pressure sensor 29, and performs a process of averaging the individual molding pressures. The molding pressure average value calculated by this processing is the pressure data P1.
 また、制御装置4aは、一回目の試打運転において、予備圧縮用の間隔調整機構24のロータリー式のエンコーダ24eの出力を基に第1位置での杵先間隔設定値を予備圧縮時の杵先間隔データl1として、本圧縮用の間隔調整機構28のロータリー式のエンコーダ28eの出力を基に第2位置での杵先間隔設定値を本圧縮時の杵先間隔データL1として、夫々検出する。 Further, in the first trial driving operation, the control device 4a determines the tip interval setting value at the first position based on the output of the rotary encoder 24e of the preliminary compression interval adjusting mechanism 24 at the time of preliminary compression. As the interval data l1, based on the output of the rotary encoder 28e of the interval adjustment mechanism 28 for main compression, the setting value of the tip interval at the second position is detected as the tip interval data L1 at the time of main compression.
 更に、測定器3は、一回目の試打運転中にサンプリングされた複数の錠剤の夫々についての質量Wと厚みTと硬度Hとを測定する。測定器3は、測定した測定値に基づいて、前記複数の錠剤の質量平均値と厚み平均値と硬度平均値と(試打データ1)を求める演算を行う。この演算により求められた質量平均値が質量データW1であり、厚み平均値が厚みデータT1であり、硬度平均値が硬度データH1である。 Furthermore, the measuring device 3 measures the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H of each of the plurality of tablets sampled during the first trial driving operation. The measuring device 3 performs an operation for obtaining a mass average value, a thickness average value, and a hardness average value (trial hit data 1) of the plurality of tablets based on the measured values. The mass average value obtained by this calculation is mass data W1, the thickness average value is thickness data T1, and the hardness average value is hardness data H1.
 次に、制御装置4aは、第1位置及び第2位置での杵先間隔設定値を変えずに、錠剤質量のみを変動させて、打錠機2の二回目の試打運転をする。この場合、制御装置4aは、後述の連続運転での温度上昇により狭まる杵先間隔の影響で成型圧力が上昇し、それによって圧力制御が働いて質量を減らすことを想定して、質量調節軌道17を望ましくは錠剤の質量が減る方向に移動させて成型圧力が低下するようにし、打錠機2のニ回目の試打運転をする。制御装置4aは、二回目の運転中に所定数の錠剤をサンプリングした後、打錠機2の運転を停止させる。 Next, the control device 4a performs the second trial driving operation of the tableting machine 2 by changing only the tablet mass without changing the setting value of the tip interval at the first position and the second position. In this case, the control device 4a assumes that the molding pressure rises due to the influence of the tip interval narrowed by the temperature rise in the continuous operation described later, and that the pressure control works to reduce the mass, thereby reducing the mass adjustment track 17. The tablet is preferably moved in the direction of decreasing the mass of the tablet so that the molding pressure is lowered, and the second trial driving operation of the tableting machine 2 is performed. The control device 4a stops the operation of the tableting machine 2 after sampling a predetermined number of tablets during the second operation.
 この二回目の打錠機2の試打運転において、圧力データP2、質量データW2、厚みデータT2、硬度データH2、予備圧縮時の杵先間隔データl2、本圧縮時の杵先間隔データL2が、試打データ2として取得される(ステップS02)。 In the trial operation of the tableting machine 2 for the second time, pressure data P2, mass data W2, thickness data T2, hardness data H2, tip distance data l2 at the time of preliminary compression, and tip distance data L2 at the time of main compression are: Obtained as trial hit data 2 (step S02).
 つまり、製造される各錠剤の個々についての成型圧力が圧力センサ29により検出される。制御装置4aは、圧力センサ29により検出された個々の錠剤の成型圧力を取得し、個々の成型圧力を平均化する処理をする。この処理により算出された成型圧力平均値が圧力データP2である。 That is, the pressure sensor 29 detects the molding pressure for each of the manufactured tablets. The control device 4a acquires the molding pressures of the individual tablets detected by the pressure sensor 29, and performs a process of averaging the individual molding pressures. The molding pressure average value calculated by this processing is the pressure data P2.
 また、制御装置4aは、二回目の試打運転において、予備圧縮用の間隔調整機構24のロータリー式のエンコーダ24eの出力を基に第1位置での杵先間隔設定値を予備圧縮時の杵先間隔データl2として、本圧縮用の間隔調整機構28のロータリー式のエンコーダ28eの出力を基に第2位置での杵先間隔設定値を本圧縮時の杵先間隔データL2として、夫々検出する。 Further, in the second trial driving operation, the control device 4a determines the tip interval setting value at the first position based on the output of the rotary encoder 24e of the preliminary compression interval adjusting mechanism 24 at the time of preliminary compression. As the interval data l2, based on the output of the rotary encoder 28e of the interval adjustment mechanism 28 for main compression, the setting value of the tip interval at the second position is detected as the tip interval data L2 at the time of main compression.
 更に、測定器3は、二回目の試打運転中にサンプリングされた複数の錠剤の夫々についての質量Wと厚みTと硬度Hとを測定する。測定器3は、測定した測定値に基づいて、前記複数の錠剤の質量平均値と厚み平均値と硬度平均値と(試打データ2)を求める演算を行う。この演算により求められた質量平均値が質量データW2であり、厚み平均値が厚みデータT2であり、硬度平均値が硬度データH2である。 Furthermore, the measuring device 3 measures the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H of each of the plurality of tablets sampled during the second trial driving operation. The measuring device 3 performs an operation for obtaining a mass average value, a thickness average value, and a hardness average value (trial hit data 2) of the plurality of tablets based on the measured values. The mass average value obtained by this calculation is mass data W2, the thickness average value is thickness data T2, and the hardness average value is hardness data H2.
 この後、制御装置4aは、質量調節軌道17を、試打データ1を得たときの高さ位置と略同じとなるように戻すとともに、後述の連続運転での温度上昇により狭まる杵先間隔を想定して、第1位置及び第2位置での杵先間隔を同量、好ましくは狭めた上で打錠機2の三回目の試打運転をする。制御装置4aは、三回目の運転中に所定数の錠剤をサンプリングした後、打錠機2の運転を停止させる。 Thereafter, the control device 4a returns the mass adjusting orbit 17 so as to be substantially the same as the height position when the test hit data 1 is obtained, and assumes a tip interval narrowed by a temperature increase in the continuous operation described later. Then, the third trial punching operation of the tableting machine 2 is performed after narrowing the gap between the tips at the first position and the second position by the same amount, preferably narrowing. The control device 4a stops the operation of the tableting machine 2 after sampling a predetermined number of tablets during the third operation.
 この三回目の打錠機2の試打運転において、圧力データP3、質量データW3、厚みデータT3、硬度データH3、予備圧縮時の杵先間隔データl3、本圧縮時の杵先間隔データL3が、試打データ3として取得される(ステップS03)。 In the trial operation of the tableting machine 2 for the third time, the pressure data P3, the mass data W3, the thickness data T3, the hardness data H3, the tip distance data l3 at the time of preliminary compression, and the tip distance data L3 at the time of main compression are: Obtained as trial hit data 3 (step S03).
 つまり、製造される各錠剤の個々についての成型圧力が圧力センサ29により検出される。制御装置4aは、圧力センサ29により検出された個々の錠剤の成型圧力を取得し、個々の成型圧力を平均化する処理をする。この処理により算出された成型圧力平均値が圧力データP3である。 That is, the pressure sensor 29 detects the molding pressure for each of the manufactured tablets. The control device 4a acquires the molding pressures of the individual tablets detected by the pressure sensor 29, and performs a process of averaging the individual molding pressures. The molding pressure average value calculated by this processing is the pressure data P3.
 また、制御装置4aは、3回目の試打運転において、予備圧縮用の間隔調整機構24のロータリー式のエンコーダ24eの出力を基に第1位置での杵先間隔設定値を予備圧縮時の杵先間隔データl3として、本圧縮用の間隔調整機構28のロータリー式のエンコーダ28eの出力を基に第2位置での杵先間隔設定値を本圧縮時の杵先間隔データL3として、夫々検出する。 Further, in the third trial driving operation, the control device 4a sets the tip interval setting value at the first position on the basis of the output of the rotary encoder 24e of the preliminary compression interval adjusting mechanism 24. As the interval data l3, based on the output of the rotary encoder 28e of the interval adjusting mechanism 28 for main compression, the setting value of the tip interval at the second position is detected as the tip interval data L3 at the time of main compression.
 更に、測定器3は、3回目の試打運転中にサンプリングされた複数の錠剤の夫々についての質量Wと厚みTと硬度Hとを測定する。測定器3は、測定した測定値に基づいて、前記複数の錠剤の質量平均値と厚み平均値と硬度平均値と(試打データ3)を求める演算を行う。この演算により求められた質量平均値が質量データW3であり、厚み平均値が厚みデータT3であり、硬度平均値が硬度データH3である。 Furthermore, the measuring device 3 measures the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H of each of the plurality of tablets sampled during the third trial driving operation. The measuring device 3 performs an operation for obtaining a mass average value, a thickness average value, and a hardness average value (test hit data 3) of the plurality of tablets based on the measured values. The mass average value obtained by this calculation is mass data W3, the thickness average value is thickness data T3, and the hardness average value is hardness data H3.
 次に、制御装置4aは、ステップS04を実行する。このステップS04では、制御装置4aは、前記各試打データ1~3を用いてP-W相関係数a0、T-W相関係数a1、P-T相関係数a2、L-T相関係数a3、T-H相関係数a4、及びW-H相関係数a5(後述するa5α及びa5β)の夫々を演算により求めて、これらの相関係数a0~a5の夫々の値を制御装置4aが有する図示しない記憶部に登録(記憶)する。 Next, the control device 4a executes step S04. In step S04, the controller 4a uses the trial hit data 1 to 3 to determine the PW correlation coefficient a0, the TW correlation coefficient a1, the PT correlation coefficient a2, and the LT correlation coefficient. Each of a3, TH correlation coefficient a4, and WH correlation coefficient a5 (a5α and a5β described later) is obtained by calculation, and the control device 4a determines the values of these correlation coefficients a0 to a5. It is registered (stored) in a storage unit (not shown).
 制御装置4aは、相関係数a0~a5を以下の演算により求める。 The control device 4a obtains the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 by the following calculation.
 ステップS04で求められるP-W相関係数a0は、錠剤の質量Wと成型圧力Pとの間に成立する係数である。またP-W相関係数a0は、一回目の試打運転により得た試打データ1と、一回目と杵先間隔が同じ条件下で質量を減らして行った二回目の試打運転により得た試打データ2とのうちで、成型圧力Pと質量Wに関する試打データ(P1,P2,W1,W2)を用いて算出される。P-W相関係数a0は、本第1実施形態においては、錠剤の質量変化に応じて錠剤の厚みTが変化することを前提として用いられる係数である。より詳細には、このP-W相関係数a0は、質量Wが変化したときに成型圧力Pが何KN変化するのかを求める場合に用いられる係数であって、成型圧力の変動値ΔPを質量の変動値ΔWで割る次式により求める。 
 a0=ΔP/ΔW=(P1-P2)/(W1-W2)……式(1)。
The PW correlation coefficient a0 obtained in step S04 is a coefficient that is established between the tablet mass W and the molding pressure P. The PW correlation coefficient a0 is the trial hit data 1 obtained by the first trial run operation and the trial hit data obtained by the second trial run with the mass reduced under the same conditions as the first and the tip spacing. 2 and the trial hit data (P1, P2, W1, W2) regarding the molding pressure P and the mass W. In the first embodiment, the PW correlation coefficient a0 is a coefficient used on the assumption that the tablet thickness T changes according to the tablet mass change. More specifically, the PW correlation coefficient a0 is a coefficient used when determining how many KN the molding pressure P changes when the mass W changes. Is obtained by the following equation divided by the fluctuation value ΔW.
a0 = ΔP / ΔW = (P1-P2) / (W1-W2) (1)
 ステップS04で求められるT-W相関係数a1は、錠剤の厚みTと質量Wとの間に成立する係数である。また、T-W相関係数a1は、一回目の試打運転により得た試打データ1と、一回目と杵先間隔が同じ条件下で質量Wを減らして行った二回目の試打運転により得た試打データ2とのうちで、厚みTと質量Wに関する試打データ(T1,T2,W1,W2)を用いて算出される。より詳細には、このT-W相関係数a1は、質量Wが変化したときに錠剤の厚みTが何mm変化するのかを求める場合に用いられる係数であって、厚みの変動値ΔTを質量の変動値ΔWで割る次式により求める。 
 a1=ΔT/ΔW=(T1-T2)/(W1-W2)……式(2)。
The TW correlation coefficient a1 obtained in step S04 is a coefficient that is established between the thickness T and the mass W of the tablet. Further, the TW correlation coefficient a1 was obtained by the trial run data 1 obtained by the first trial run and the second trial run by reducing the mass W under the same conditions as the first and the tip spacing. The trial hit data 2 is calculated using trial hit data (T1, T2, W1, W2) regarding the thickness T and the mass W. More specifically, the TW correlation coefficient a1 is a coefficient used to determine how many millimeters the tablet thickness T changes when the mass W changes. Is obtained by the following equation divided by the fluctuation value ΔW.
a1 = ΔT / ΔW = (T1-T2) / (W1-W2) Equation (2).
 ステップS04で求められるP-T相関係数a2は、錠剤の厚みTと錠剤の成型圧力Pとの間に成立する係数であって、錠剤の厚みTが変化したときに成型圧力Pが何KN変化するのかを求める場合に用いられる係数である。 The PT correlation coefficient a2 obtained in step S04 is a coefficient that is established between the tablet thickness T and the tablet molding pressure P. It is a coefficient used when determining whether it changes.
 ステップS04で求められるL-T相関係数a3は、錠剤の厚みTと杵先間隔L(又はl)との間に成立する係数であって、杵先間隔L(又はl)が変化したときに錠剤の厚みTが何mm変化するのかを求める場合に用いられる係数である。 The LT correlation coefficient a3 obtained in step S04 is a coefficient established between the tablet thickness T and the tip interval L (or l), and when the tip interval L (or l) changes. It is a coefficient used when calculating | requiring how many mm the tablet thickness T changes.
 より詳細には、これらの相関係数a2,a3は、一回目の試打運転により得た試打データ1と、二回目の試打運転後に錠剤質量を一回目の試打運転時の錠剤質量付近に戻すとともに一回目と杵先間隔を異ならせた条件下で行った三回目の試打運転により得た試打データ3とのうちで、成型圧力Pと厚みTと質量W等に関する試打データ(W1,W3,P1,P3,T1,T3)を用いて算出される。 More specifically, these correlation coefficients a2 and a3 are obtained by returning the trial weight data 1 obtained by the first trial driving operation and the tablet mass to the vicinity of the tablet mass at the first trial driving operation after the second trial driving operation. Of the trial hitting data 3 obtained by the third trial hitting operation performed under the condition that the tip interval is different from that of the first round, trial hit data (W1, W3, P1) regarding the molding pressure P, the thickness T, the mass W, etc. , P3, T1, T3).
 しかし、三回目の試打運転での錠剤の質量データW3を一回目の試打運転での質量データW1と同じ質量に戻るようにオペレータが調整しても、質量データW3が一回目の試打運転での質量データW1と同じ質量に完全に一致することは期待できない。このため、錠剤の質量の変動に応じて成型圧力も変動する可能性がある。よって、圧力データP3をそのまま用いてP-T相関係数a2を求めることは正確性に欠ける。 However, even if the operator adjusts the mass data W3 of the tablet in the third trial driving operation so that the mass data W1 returns to the same mass as the mass data W1 in the first trial driving operation, the mass data W3 is obtained in the first trial driving operation. It cannot be expected to completely match the same mass as the mass data W1. For this reason, there is a possibility that the molding pressure also varies according to the variation in the mass of the tablet. Therefore, it is not accurate to obtain the PT correlation coefficient a2 using the pressure data P3 as it is.
 この対策として、質量データW3を質量データW1にする制御をしたときに成型圧力Pがどのような圧力(これを算定圧力P3aと称する。)になるのかを求める。 As a countermeasure, the pressure (referred to as the calculated pressure P3a) of the molding pressure P is obtained when the mass data W3 is controlled to be the mass data W1.
 即ち、ステップS04では、P-T相関係数a2を求めるための算定圧力P3aを次式により求める。 
 P3a=P3+a(W1-W3)……式(3)。
That is, in step S04, the calculated pressure P3a for obtaining the PT correlation coefficient a2 is obtained by the following equation.
P3a = P3 + a (W1−W3) Equation (3).
 この算定圧力P3aにより、P-T相関係数a2を求める上での質量データの基準を揃えることができて、質量データW1と質量データW3との差によって生じる成型圧力の誤差を排除することが可能となる。 With this calculated pressure P3a, the mass data reference for obtaining the PT correlation coefficient a2 can be made uniform, and the molding pressure error caused by the difference between the mass data W1 and the mass data W3 can be eliminated. It becomes possible.
 既述のように三回目の試打運転での錠剤の質量を一回目の試打運転での質量データW1と同じ質量に戻るようにオペレータが調整しても、質量データW3が一回目の試打運転での質量データW1と同じ質量に完全に一致することは期待できない。このため、錠剤の質量の変動に応じて錠剤の厚みも変動する可能性がある。よって、厚みデータT3をそのまま用いてP-T相関係数a2を求めることは正確性に欠ける。そのため、質量データW3を質量データW1にする制御をしたときに錠剤がどのような厚み(これを算定厚みT3aと称する。)になるのかを求める。 As described above, even if the operator adjusts the mass of the tablet in the third trial driving operation so as to return to the same mass as the mass data W1 in the first trial driving operation, the mass data W3 remains in the first trial driving operation. It cannot be expected to completely match the same mass as the mass data W1. For this reason, there is a possibility that the thickness of the tablet also varies depending on the variation of the mass of the tablet. Therefore, it is not accurate to obtain the PT correlation coefficient a2 using the thickness data T3 as it is. Therefore, the thickness of the tablet (referred to as a calculated thickness T3a) is determined when the mass data W3 is controlled to be the mass data W1.
 即ち、ステップS04では、P-T相関係数a2を求めるための算定厚みT3aを次式により求める。 
 T3a=T3+a1(W1-W3)……式(4)。
That is, in step S04, the calculated thickness T3a for obtaining the PT correlation coefficient a2 is obtained by the following equation.
T3a = T3 + a1 (W1−W3) (4)
 この算定厚みT3aにより、P-T相関係数a2を求める上での質量データの基準を揃えることができて、質量データW1と質量データW3との差によって生じる錠剤の厚みの誤差を排除することが可能となる。 Based on this calculated thickness T3a, the standard of mass data for obtaining the PT correlation coefficient a2 can be aligned, and an error in tablet thickness caused by the difference between the mass data W1 and the mass data W3 can be eliminated. Is possible.
 P-T相関係数a2は、以上のように算定圧力P3aと算定厚みT3aを求めた上で、これら算定値によって補正された錠剤の成型圧力の変動値ΔPを厚みの変動値ΔTで割る次式により求める。 
 a2=ΔP/ΔT=(P1-P3a)/(T1-T3a)……式(5)。
The PT correlation coefficient a2 is obtained by calculating the calculated pressure P3a and the calculated thickness T3a as described above, and dividing the fluctuation value ΔP of the tablet molding pressure corrected by these calculated values by the fluctuation value ΔT of the thickness. Obtained by the formula.
a2 = ΔP / ΔT = (P1-P3a) / (T1-T3a) (5)
 ステップS04で求められるL-T相関係数a3は、算定厚みT3aによって補正された厚みの変動値ΔTで杵先間隔の変動値ΔL(またはΔl)を割る次式により求められる。 
 a3=ΔL/ΔT=(L1-L3)/(T1-T3a)……式(6)。
The LT correlation coefficient a3 obtained in step S04 is obtained by the following equation that divides the variation value ΔL (or Δl) of the tip distance by the variation value ΔT of the thickness corrected by the calculated thickness T3a.
a3 = ΔL / ΔT = (L1−L3) / (T1−T3a) (6)
 ステップS04で求められるT-H相関係数a4は、錠剤の厚みTと錠剤の硬度Hとの間に成立する係数であって、錠剤の硬度Hが変化したときに錠剤の厚みTが何mm変化するのかを求める場合に用いられる係数である。 The TH correlation coefficient a4 obtained in step S04 is a coefficient established between the tablet thickness T and the tablet hardness H. When the tablet hardness H changes, how many mm the tablet thickness T is. It is a coefficient used when determining whether it changes.
 より詳細には、この相関係数a4は、一回目の試打運転により得た試打データ1と、二回目の試打運転後に錠剤質量を一回目の試打運転時の錠剤質量付近に戻すとともに一回目と杵先間隔を異ならせた条件下で行った三回目の試打運転により得た試打データ3とのうちで、硬度Hと厚みTと質量Wに関する試打データ(T1,T3、H1,H3、W1,W3)を用いて算出する。 More specifically, the correlation coefficient a4 is calculated by comparing the trial hit data 1 obtained by the first trial run operation, the tablet mass after the second trial run operation to the vicinity of the tablet mass at the first trial run operation, Among the test hit data 3 obtained by the third test hit operation performed under different conditions of the tip distance, the test hit data (T1, T3, H1, H3, W1, the hardness H, the thickness T, and the mass W) W3).
 しかし、既述のように三回目の試打運転での錠剤の質量を一回目の試打運転での質量データW1と同じ質量に戻るようにオペレータが調整しても、質量データW3が一回目の試打運転での質量データW1と同じ質量に完全に一致することは期待できない。このため、錠剤の質量の変動に応じて錠剤の硬度も変動する可能性がある。よって、硬度データH3をそのまま用いてT-H相関係数a4を求めることは正確性に欠ける。そのため、質量データW3を質量データW1にする制御をしたときに錠剤がどのような硬度(これを算定硬度H3aと称する。)になるのかを、後述するW-H相関係数a5αを用いて求める。 However, as described above, even if the operator adjusts the mass of the tablet in the third trial driving operation to return to the same mass as the mass data W1 in the first trial driving operation, the mass data W3 is changed to the first trial driving operation. It cannot be expected to completely match the same mass as the mass data W1 in operation. For this reason, the hardness of a tablet may also change according to the fluctuation | variation of the mass of a tablet. Therefore, it is not accurate to obtain the TH correlation coefficient a4 using the hardness data H3 as it is. Therefore, the hardness of the tablet (this is referred to as calculated hardness H3a) when the mass data W3 is controlled to be the mass data W1 is obtained using the WH correlation coefficient a5α described later. .
 即ち、T-H相関係数a4を求めるための算定硬度H3aを次式により求める。 
 H3a=H3+(W1-W3)/a5α……式(8)。
That is, the calculated hardness H3a for obtaining the TH correlation coefficient a4 is obtained by the following equation.
H3a = H3 + (W1-W3) / a5α Equation (8).
 この算定硬度H3aにより、T-H相関係数a4を求める上での質量データの基準を揃えることができて、質量データW1と質量データW3との差によって生じる錠剤の硬度の誤差を排除することが可能となる。 With this calculated hardness H3a, the standard of mass data for obtaining the TH correlation coefficient a4 can be aligned, and errors in tablet hardness caused by the difference between the mass data W1 and the mass data W3 can be eliminated. Is possible.
 ステップS04で求められるT-H相関係数a4は、以上のように算定硬度H3aと算定厚みT3aを求めた上で、これら算定値によって補正された錠剤の厚みの変動値ΔTを錠剤の硬度の変動値ΔHで割る次式により求める。 
 a4=ΔT/ΔH=(T1-T3a)/(H1-H3a)……式(9)。
The TH correlation coefficient a4 obtained in step S04 is obtained by calculating the calculated hardness H3a and the calculated thickness T3a as described above, and calculating the tablet thickness variation value ΔT corrected by these calculated values as the tablet hardness. It is obtained by the following equation divided by the fluctuation value ΔH.
a4 = ΔT / ΔH = (T1-T3a) / (H1-H3a) (9)
 ステップS04で求められるW-H相関係数a5α及びa5βは錠剤の質量Wと錠剤の硬度Hとの間に成立する係数であって、錠剤の硬度Hが変化したときに質量Wが何mg変化するのかを求める場合に用いられる係数である。 The WH correlation coefficients a5α and a5β obtained in step S04 are coefficients established between the tablet mass W and the tablet hardness H. When the tablet hardness H changes, the mass W changes by several mg. It is a coefficient used when determining whether to do.
 錠剤の厚みの制御を含まない制御パターン3(WH制御)で用いる相関係数a5αは、錠剤の質量変化に応じて錠剤の厚みTが変化することを前提として、錠剤の硬度Hが変化したときに錠剤の質量Wが何mg変化するのかを求める場合に用いられる係数である。 The correlation coefficient a5α used in the control pattern 3 (WH control) that does not include the control of the tablet thickness is based on the assumption that the tablet thickness T changes according to the tablet mass change, and the tablet hardness H changes. It is a coefficient used when calculating how many mg the tablet weight W changes.
 より詳細には、W-H相関係数a5αは、一回目の試打運転により得た試打データ1と、一回目と杵先間隔が同じ条件下で質量を減らして行った二回目の試打運転により得た試打データ2とのうちで、質量Wと硬度Hとに関する試打データ(W1,W2,H1,H2)を用いて算出する。つまり、W-H相関係数a5αは、質量の変動値ΔWを硬度の変動値ΔHで割る次式により求める。 
 a5α=ΔW/ΔH=(W1-W2)/(H1-H2)……式(7)。
More specifically, the WH correlation coefficient a5α is calculated based on the test hit data 1 obtained by the first test hit operation and the second test hit operation performed by reducing the mass under the same conditions of the tip interval and the tip interval. Of the obtained trial hit data 2, calculation is performed using trial hit data (W1, W2, H1, H2) relating to the mass W and the hardness H. That is, the WH correlation coefficient a5α is obtained by the following equation that divides the mass fluctuation value ΔW by the hardness fluctuation value ΔH.
a5α = ΔW / ΔH = (W1-W2) / (H1-H2) (7)
 更に、ステップS04で求められるW-H相関係数a5βは、錠剤の厚みの制御を含む制御パターン1(WTH制御)および制御パターン5(TH制御)で用いる相関係数であり、W-H相関係数a5αと同様に、錠剤の質量Wと錠剤の硬度Hとの間に成立する係数である。 Further, the WH correlation coefficient a5β obtained in step S04 is a correlation coefficient used in control pattern 1 (WTH control) and control pattern 5 (TH control) including control of tablet thickness, and the WH phase. Similar to the relation number a5α, this is a coefficient established between the tablet mass W and the tablet hardness H.
 この相関係数a5βは、既述の厚み制御を含まない制御パターン3(WH制御)で用いる相関係数a5αとは異なる前提条件で用いられる。即ち、相関係数a5αは、錠剤の質量変化に応じて錠剤の厚みTも変化することを前提として、錠剤の硬度Hが変化したときに錠剤の質量Wが何mg変化するのかを求める場合に用いられる。これに対して、相関係数a5βは、錠剤の質量変化に応じて変化した錠剤の厚みTを補正することを前提として、錠剤の硬度Hが変化したときに錠剤の質量Wが何mg変化するのかを求める場合に用いられる。 The correlation coefficient a5β is used under different preconditions from the correlation coefficient a5α used in the control pattern 3 (WH control) not including the above-described thickness control. That is, the correlation coefficient a5α is used to determine how many mg of the tablet mass W changes when the tablet hardness H changes, on the premise that the tablet thickness T also changes according to the tablet mass change. Used. On the other hand, the correlation coefficient a5β is based on the assumption that the tablet thickness T changes according to the tablet mass change, and the tablet mass W changes by how many mg when the tablet hardness H changes. This is used to determine whether
 より詳細には、この相関係数a5βは、一回目の試打運転により得た試打データ1と、一回目と杵先間隔が同じ条件下で質量を減らして行った二回目の試打運転により得た試打データ2とのうちで、質量Wと硬度Hとに関する試打データ(W1,W2,H1,H2)を用いて算出する。 More specifically, the correlation coefficient a5β was obtained by the trial hit data 1 obtained by the first trial strike operation and by the second trial strike operation performed by reducing the mass under the same conditions as the first and tip tips. The trial hit data 2 is calculated using trial hit data (W1, W2, H1, H2) regarding the mass W and the hardness H.
 しかし、一回目と杵先間隔が同じ条件下で質量を減らして行った二回目の試打運転での錠剤の硬度データH2は、質量データW1と質量データW2の差に応じて厚みデータT1と厚みデータT2にも差が生じるので、硬度データH2をそのまま用いてW-H相関係数a5βを求めることは正確性に欠ける。 However, the hardness data H2 of the tablet in the second trial driving operation performed by reducing the mass under the same conditions as the first time and the tip distance are the thickness data T1 and the thickness according to the difference between the mass data W1 and the mass data W2. Since a difference also occurs in the data T2, it is not accurate to obtain the WH correlation coefficient a5β using the hardness data H2 as it is.
 そのため、厚みデータT2を厚みデータT1にする制御をしたときに錠剤の硬度がどのような硬度(これを算定硬度H2aと称する。)になるのかを求める。 Therefore, the hardness of the tablet (referred to as calculated hardness H2a) is obtained when the thickness data T2 is controlled to be the thickness data T1.
 即ち、W-H相関係数a5βを求めるための算定硬度H2aを次式により求める。 
 H2a=H2+(T1-T2)/a4……式(8a)。
That is, the calculated hardness H2a for obtaining the WH correlation coefficient a5β is obtained by the following equation.
H2a = H2 + (T1-T2) / a4 (8a).
 この算定硬度H2aにより、W-H相関係数a5βを求める上での厚みデータの基準を揃えることができて、厚みデータT1と厚みデータT2との差によって生じる錠剤の硬度の誤差を排除することが可能となる。 With this calculated hardness H2a, the standard of thickness data for obtaining the WH correlation coefficient a5β can be made uniform, and an error in tablet hardness caused by the difference between the thickness data T1 and the thickness data T2 can be eliminated. Is possible.
 ステップS04では、以上のように求めた算定硬度H2aを用いて、錠剤の質量変化に応じて変化した錠剤の厚みTを補正することを前提としたW-H相関係数a5βを、錠剤の質量の変動値ΔWを硬度の変動値ΔHで割る次式により求める。 
 a5β=ΔW/ΔH=(W1-W2)/(H1-H2a)……式(7a)。
In step S04, using the calculated hardness H2a obtained as described above, the WH correlation coefficient a5β on the assumption that the tablet thickness T changed according to the tablet mass change is corrected is calculated as the tablet mass. Is obtained by the following equation, which is obtained by dividing the fluctuation value ΔW by the hardness fluctuation value ΔH.
a5β = ΔW / ΔH = (W1-W2) / (H1-H2a) (7a).
 以上のように試打データ1~3を基に制御装置4aで算出された各相関係数a0~a5は、連続運転時の自動制御の基礎データとして、制御装置4aの図示しない記憶部に自動的に登録(記憶)される。 As described above, the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 calculated by the control device 4a based on the trial hit data 1 to 3 are automatically stored in a storage unit (not shown) of the control device 4a as basic data for automatic control during continuous operation. Registered (stored).
 以上説明したステップS01~S04は基礎データ取得工程を実行する基礎データ取得部をなしている。そのうちのステップS01~S03が試打データ取得工程を実行する試打データ取得部である。ステップS04は、各種相関係数を求めて、それらを基礎データとして試打データとともに登録(記憶)するデータ登録工程を実行するデータ登録部である。 Steps S01 to S04 described above constitute a basic data acquisition unit that executes a basic data acquisition process. Among them, steps S01 to S03 are a trial hit data acquisition unit for executing the trial hit data acquisition process. Step S04 is a data registration unit that executes a data registration step of obtaining various correlation coefficients and registering (storing) them as trial data together with trial hit data.
 各種基礎データが以上のように取得された後に、オペレータは、制御盤4の入力装置を操作して、制御パターン1~制御パターン6のうちから一つを指定するとともに、指定された制御パターンにおいて質量、厚み、硬度の補正順位(詳しくは各制御基準算定値の補正順位であり、以下、「各制御基準算定値の補正順位」と称する。)が必要な場合は、それを指定する。この指定に基づいて、制御装置4aは、指定された制御パターンを制御パターン1~6から判別し選択する。以下、制御装置4aが実行する制御パターン判別の手順を図3A乃至図3Cのフローチャートに従って説明する。 After the various basic data are acquired as described above, the operator operates the input device of the control panel 4 to designate one of the control patterns 1 to 6 and in the designated control pattern. If a correction order of mass, thickness, and hardness (specifically, the correction order of each control reference calculated value, hereinafter referred to as “correction order of each control reference calculated value”) is specified, it is designated. Based on this designation, the control device 4a discriminates and designates the designated control pattern from the control patterns 1 to 6. Hereinafter, the control pattern determination procedure executed by the control device 4a will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 3A to 3C.
 まず、ステップS1により、制御装置4aは、オペレータの制御盤4の入力装置に対する操作(制御パターンの指定)に基づいて、錠剤の質量を制御するか否かを判断する。ステップS1の判断がYES(質量を制御する)の場合、ステップS2により、制御装置4aは、前記操作に基づいて錠剤の厚みを制御するか否かを判断する。このステップS2の判断がYES(厚みを制御する)の場合、ステップS3により、制御装置4aは、前記操作に基づいて、錠剤の硬度を制御するか否かを判断する。 First, in step S1, the control device 4a determines whether or not to control the mass of the tablet based on an operation (designation of a control pattern) of the operator on the input device of the control panel 4. If the determination in step S1 is YES (controls the mass), in step S2, the control device 4a determines whether or not to control the tablet thickness based on the operation. When the determination in step S2 is YES (controls the thickness), in step S3, the control device 4a determines whether or not to control the hardness of the tablet based on the operation.
 ステップS3の判断がYES(硬度を制御する)の場合、処理はステップS4に進む。ステップS4では、制御装置4aは、オペレータの制御盤4の入力装置に対する操作に基づいて、錠剤の硬度を制御するための質量、厚み、及び硬度の各制御基準算定値の補正順位の登録(指定)、各基準値(規格基準値とも称する。)及び各制御基準値の補正範囲を制御装置4a内の図示しない記憶部に登録する。このステップS4で登録される各基準値(規格基準値)は、質量基準値WOと、厚み基準値TOと、硬度基準値HOである。又、各制御基準算定値の補正順位とは、質量、厚み、及び硬度のそれぞれの制御基準算定値の補正(更新)を行う順番であり、予め定められた順序に従って自動的に登録しても良いし、或いは、人為的に行われる登録作業によって任意の順序で登録しても差し支えない。なお、制御パターン2,4,6については錠剤の硬度の制御を行わないので、各制御基準算定値の補正順位の登録作業は要しない。一方、制御パターン1,3,5については、後述のように各制御基準算定値の補正順位のパターンが複数通りあるので、オペレータは、そのうちの一つを選択し、制御装置4aは選択された各制御基準算定値の補正順位を記憶部に登録する。 If the determination in step S3 is YES (controls the hardness), the process proceeds to step S4. In step S4, the control device 4a registers (specifies the correction ranks of the control reference calculation values for the mass, thickness, and hardness for controlling the tablet hardness based on the operator's operation on the input device of the control panel 4. ), Each reference value (also referred to as a standard reference value) and the correction range of each control reference value are registered in a storage unit (not shown) in the control device 4a. Each reference value (standard reference value) registered in step S4 is a mass reference value WO, a thickness reference value TO, and a hardness reference value HO. The correction order of each control reference calculation value is the order in which the control reference calculation values for mass, thickness, and hardness are corrected (updated), and may be automatically registered according to a predetermined order. Alternatively, registration may be performed in an arbitrary order by an artificially performed registration operation. In addition, since control of the tablet hardness is not performed for the control patterns 2, 4, and 6, registration work for the correction ranks of the control reference calculated values is not required. On the other hand, for the control patterns 1, 3, and 5, since there are a plurality of patterns of the correction order of each control reference calculation value as will be described later, the operator selects one of them and the control device 4a is selected. The correction order of each control reference calculated value is registered in the storage unit.
 質量基準値WOとは、製造される錠剤の質量の規格基準値である。質量制御基準値補正範囲は、製造される錠剤の質量制御基準値WMを変更しても良い範囲であり、上限値WOHと下限値WOLとにより規定される。厚み基準値TOとは、製造される錠剤の厚みの規格基準値である。厚み制御基準値補正範囲は、製造される錠剤の厚み制御基準値TMを変更しても良い範囲であり、上限値TOHと下限値TOLとにより規定される。硬度基準値HOとは、製造される錠剤の硬度の規格基準値である。硬度制御基準値補正範囲は、製造される錠剤の硬度制御基準値HMを変更しても良い範囲であり、上限値HOHと下限値HOLとにより規定される。 The mass reference value WO is a standard reference value for the mass of the tablet to be produced. The mass control reference value correction range is a range in which the mass control reference value WM of the manufactured tablet may be changed, and is defined by the upper limit value WOH and the lower limit value WOL. The thickness reference value TO is a standard reference value for the thickness of the tablet to be produced. The thickness control reference value correction range is a range in which the thickness control reference value TM of the manufactured tablet may be changed, and is defined by the upper limit value TOH and the lower limit value TOL. The hardness reference value HO is a standard reference value for the hardness of the tablets to be produced. The hardness control reference value correction range is a range in which the hardness control reference value HM of the manufactured tablet may be changed, and is defined by an upper limit value HOH and a lower limit value HOL.
 ステップS4の処理が実行された場合、制御装置4aはステップS17の処理を経由して制御パターン1(後述のWTH制御)を選択する。上記ステップS17は、後述のWTH制御の演算処理で使用するW-H相関係数a5について、W-H相関係数a5βの値の値でa5を置換する処理を行う。なお、制御パターン1では、既に取得された相関係数a0~a4、a5(a5β)の全てが使用される。 When the process of step S4 is executed, the control device 4a selects the control pattern 1 (WTH control described later) via the process of step S17. In step S17, a process of replacing a5 with the value of the WH correlation coefficient a5β for the WH correlation coefficient a5 used in the WTH control calculation process described later is performed. In the control pattern 1, all of the already acquired correlation coefficients a0 to a4 and a5 (a5β) are used.
 ステップS3の判断がNO(硬度を制御しない)であった場合、ステップS5により、制御装置4aは、錠剤の質量及び厚みを制御するための各制御基準値を図示しない記憶部に登録する。このステップS5の処理で登録される各制御基準値は、質量制御基準値WMと厚み制御基準値TMである。 If the determination in step S3 is NO (does not control the hardness), in step S5, the control device 4a registers each control reference value for controlling the mass and thickness of the tablet in a storage unit (not shown). The control reference values registered in the process of step S5 are the mass control reference value WM and the thickness control reference value TM.
 ステップS5の処理が実行された場合、制御装置4aはステップS6の処理を経由して制御パターン2(後述のWT制御)を選択する。ステップS6では、制御装置4aは、制御パターン2において使用しない相関係数の演算上の扱いを定める。具体的には、既に取得された相関係数a0~a5のうちで、後述のWT制御において不使用の相関係数a4、a5が演算式に含まれている場合、以降の演算式で不使用の相関係数a4、a5を含む単項式は、「0」として演算する、との取扱い事項が自動的に設定される。 When the process of step S5 is executed, the control device 4a selects the control pattern 2 (WT control described later) via the process of step S6. In step S <b> 6, the control device 4 a determines how to handle correlation coefficients that are not used in the control pattern 2. Specifically, among correlation coefficients a0 to a5 that have already been acquired, when correlation coefficients a4 and a5 that are not used in the WT control described later are included in the calculation expression, they are not used in the subsequent calculation expressions. The unary expression including the correlation coefficients a4 and a5 is automatically set as “0”.
 前記ステップS2の判断がNO(厚みを制御しない)であった場合、処理はステップS7に進む。ステップS7では、制御装置4aは、オペレータの制御盤4の入力装置に対する操作(制御パターンの指定)に基づいて、錠剤の硬度を制御するか否かを判断する。 If the determination in step S2 is NO (the thickness is not controlled), the process proceeds to step S7. In step S <b> 7, the control device 4 a determines whether or not to control the hardness of the tablet based on the operation (designation of the control pattern) of the operator on the input device of the control panel 4.
 ステップS7の判断がYES(硬度を制御する)の場合、処理はステップS8に進む。ステップS8では、制御装置4aは、錠剤の硬度を制御するための質量及び硬度の各制御基準算定値の補正順位の登録と、質量及び硬度の各基準値(規格基準値)および各制御基準値の補正範囲を図示しない記憶部に登録する。ここで、各制御基準算定値の補正順位とは、質量と硬度の夫々の制御基準算定値の補正(更新)を行う順番であり、予め定められた順序に従って自動的に登録しても良いし、或いは、人為的に行われる登録作業によって登録しても差し支えない。このステップS8で登録される各制御基準値の補正範囲は、ステップS4の処理で説明した通りである。 If the determination in step S7 is YES (controls the hardness), the process proceeds to step S8. In step S8, the control device 4a registers the correction rank of each control reference calculation value of mass and hardness for controlling the hardness of the tablet, each reference value (standard reference value) of each mass and hardness, and each control reference value. Is registered in a storage unit (not shown). Here, the correction order of each control reference calculated value is the order in which the control reference calculated values for mass and hardness are corrected (updated), and may be automatically registered according to a predetermined order. Alternatively, registration may be performed by a manual registration operation. The correction range of each control reference value registered in step S8 is as described in the process of step S4.
 ステップS8の処理が実行された場合、制御装置4aはステップS9の処理を経由して制御パターン3(後述のWH制御)を選択する。ステップS9では、制御装置4aは、制御パターン3において使用しない相関係数の演算上の扱いを定める。具体的には、既に取得された相関係数a0~a5のうちで、後述のWH制御において不使用の相関係数a1~a4が演算式に含まれている場合、以降の演算式で不使用の相関係数a1~a4を含む単項式は、「0」として演算する、との取扱い事項が自動的に設定される。また、このステップS9においては、制御装置4aは、後述のWH制御の演算処理で使用するW-H相関係数a5について、W-H相関係数a5αの値でa5を置換する処理を行う。 When the process of step S8 is executed, the control device 4a selects the control pattern 3 (WH control described later) via the process of step S9. In step S9, the control device 4a determines how to handle correlation coefficients that are not used in the control pattern 3. Specifically, among correlation coefficients a0 to a5 that have already been acquired, when correlation coefficients a1 to a4 that are not used in WH control, which will be described later, are included in the calculation expression, they are not used in subsequent calculation expressions. The unary expression including the correlation coefficients a1 to a4 is automatically set as “0”. In step S9, the control device 4a performs a process of replacing a5 with the value of the WH correlation coefficient a5α for the WH correlation coefficient a5 used in the calculation process of the WH control described later.
 ステップS7の判断がNO(硬度を制御しない)であった場合、ステップS10により、制御装置4aは、錠剤の質量のみを制御するための質量制御基準値WMを図示しない記憶部に登録する。この質量制御基準値WMの登録は、自動的に登録しても良いし、或いは、人為的に登録しても差し支えない。 If the determination in step S7 is NO (does not control the hardness), in step S10, the control device 4a registers a mass control reference value WM for controlling only the mass of the tablet in a storage unit (not shown). The registration of the mass control reference value WM may be automatically registered or may be artificially registered.
 ステップS10の処理が実行された場合、制御装置4aはステップS11の処理を経由して制御パターン4を選択する。ステップS11の処理では、制御装置4aは、制御パターン4において使用しない相関係数の演算上の扱いを定める。具体的には、既に取得された相関係数a0~a5のうちで、質量Wに対する後述の単独制御において不使用の相関係数a1~a5が演算式に含まれている場合、以降の演算式で不使用の相関係数a1~a5を含む単項式は、「0」として演算する、との取扱い事項が自動的に設定される。 When the process of step S10 is executed, the control device 4a selects the control pattern 4 via the process of step S11. In the process of step S11, the control device 4a determines how to handle correlation coefficients that are not used in the control pattern 4. Specifically, among the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 that have already been acquired, when the correlation coefficients a1 to a5 that are not used in the later single control over the mass W are included in the calculation formula, A handling item is automatically set such that a monomial including correlation coefficients a1 to a5 that are not used is calculated as “0”.
 前記ステップS1の判断がNO(質量を制御しない)であった場合、処理はステップS12に進む。ステップS12では、制御装置4aは、錠剤の厚みを制御するか否かを判断し、この判断がNO(厚みを制御しない)の場合、ステップS1の処理に戻る。なお、ステップS1の処理に戻る処理に代えて、プログラムを終了するように処理してもよい。ステップS12の判断がYES(厚みを制御する)の場合、ステップS13により、制御装置4aは、錠剤の硬度を制御するか否かを判断する。 If the determination in step S1 is NO (the mass is not controlled), the process proceeds to step S12. In step S12, the control device 4a determines whether or not to control the thickness of the tablet. If this determination is NO (thickness is not controlled), the process returns to step S1. Note that instead of the process of returning to the process of step S1, the program may be terminated. If the determination in step S12 is YES (controls the thickness), in step S13, the control device 4a determines whether to control the hardness of the tablet.
 ステップS13の判断がYES(硬度を制御する)の場合、処理はステップS14に進む。ステップS14では、制御装置4aは、錠剤の硬度を制御するための厚み及び硬度の各制御基準算定値の補正順位、厚み及び硬度の各基準値(規格基準値)、及び各制御基準値の補正範囲を図示しない記憶部に登録する。ここで、各制御基準算定値の補正順位とは、厚みと硬度の夫々の制御基準算定値の補正(変更)を行う順番である。各制御基準算定値の補正順位は、予め定められた順序に従って自動的に登録しても良いし、或いは、人為的に行われる登録作業によって登録しても差し支えない。このステップS14で登録される厚みと硬度についての各制御基準値の補正範囲は、ステップS4の処理で説明した通りである。 If the determination in step S13 is YES (controls the hardness), the process proceeds to step S14. In step S14, the control device 4a controls the correction ranks of the thickness and hardness control reference calculation values, the thickness and hardness reference values (standard reference values), and the correction of the control reference values for controlling the tablet hardness. The range is registered in a storage unit (not shown). Here, the correction order of each control reference calculated value is the order in which the control reference calculated values for thickness and hardness are corrected (changed). The correction order of each control reference calculation value may be automatically registered according to a predetermined order, or may be registered by a manual registration operation. The correction range of each control reference value for the thickness and hardness registered in step S14 is as described in the process of step S4.
 ステップS14の処理が実行された場合、制御装置4aはステップS18の処理を経由して制御パターン5(後述のTH制御)を選択する。また、このステップS18では、制御装置4aは、制御パターン5の演算処理で使用するW-H相関係数a5について、W-H相関係数a5βの値でa5を置換する処理を行う。 When the process of step S14 is executed, the control device 4a selects the control pattern 5 (TH control described later) via the process of step S18. In step S18, the control device 4a performs a process of replacing a5 with the value of the WH correlation coefficient a5β for the WH correlation coefficient a5 used in the calculation process of the control pattern 5.
 ステップS13の判断がNO(硬度を制御しない)であった場合、ステップS15により、制御装置4aは、錠剤の厚みのみを制御するための厚み制御基準値TMを図示しない記憶部に登録する。この厚み制御基準値TMの登録は、自動的に登録しても良いし、或いは、人為的に登録しても差し支えない。 If the determination in step S13 is NO (does not control the hardness), in step S15, the control device 4a registers a thickness control reference value TM for controlling only the tablet thickness in a storage unit (not shown). The registration of the thickness control reference value TM may be automatically registered or may be registered artificially.
 ステップS15の処理が実行された場合、制御装置4aはステップS16の処理を経由して制御パターン6(後述のT単独制御)を選択する。ステップS16では、制御装置4aは、制御パターン6において使用しない相関係数の演算上の扱いを定める。具体的には、既に取得された相関係数a0~a5のうちで、厚みTに対する後述のT単独制御において不使用の相関係数a4,a5が演算式に含まれている場合、以降の演算式で不使用の相関係数a4,a5を含む単項式は、「0」として演算する、との取扱い事項が自動的に設定される。 When the process of step S15 is executed, the control device 4a selects the control pattern 6 (T single control described later) via the process of step S16. In step S <b> 16, the control device 4 a determines how to handle correlation coefficients that are not used in the control pattern 6. Specifically, out of the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 that have already been acquired, if the correlation coefficients a4 and a5 that are not used in the T independent control to be described later with respect to the thickness T are included in the calculation formula, The handling item that a monomial including correlation coefficients a4 and a5 that are not used in the equation is calculated as “0” is automatically set.
 図3を参照して説明したステップS1~S18の処理はパターン判別部をなしている。このパターン判別部において、ステップS1~S3,S7,S12,S13の処理は、指定された制御パターンが、制御パターン1~制御パターン6のどれであるのかを選択する制御パターン選択部である。ステップS4,S8,S14の処理は、各基準値(規格基準値)と、各制御基準値の補正範囲、及び制御基準算定値の補正順位を登録する補正内容登録部であり、ステップS5,S10,S15の処理は、各制御基準値を登録する基準値登録部である。又、ステップS6,S9,S11,S16~S18の処理は、不使用の相関係数の演算上の取扱い、及び使用するW-H相関係数a5の値をa5αにするかa5βにするかの取扱いを設定する相関係数設定部である。なお、ステップS17の処理はステップS4の処理の前に実行してもよく、ステップS6の処理はステップS5の処理の前に実行してもよい。ステップS9の処理はステップS8の処理の前に実行してもよく、ステップS11の処理はステップS10の処理の前に実行してもよく、ステップS16の処理はステップS15の処理の前に実行してもよく、ステップS18の処理はステップS14の処理の前に実行してもよい。 The processing in steps S1 to S18 described with reference to FIG. 3 constitutes a pattern discrimination unit. In this pattern discriminating unit, the processing of steps S1 to S3, S7, S12, and S13 is a control pattern selecting unit that selects which one of the control patterns 1 to 6 is the designated control pattern. The processing in steps S4, S8, and S14 is a correction content registration unit that registers each reference value (standard reference value), the correction range of each control reference value, and the correction rank of the control reference calculated value, and steps S5 and S10. , S15 is a reference value registration unit for registering each control reference value. Further, the processing of steps S6, S9, S11, and S16 to S18 includes handling of unused correlation coefficients and whether the value of the used WH correlation coefficient a5 is set to a5α or a5β. It is a correlation coefficient setting unit for setting handling. Note that the process of step S17 may be executed before the process of step S4, and the process of step S6 may be executed before the process of step S5. The process of step S9 may be executed before the process of step S8, the process of step S11 may be executed before the process of step S10, and the process of step S16 is executed before the process of step S15. Alternatively, the process of step S18 may be executed before the process of step S14.
(制御パターン4) 
 第1実施形態の制御パターン4(W単独制御)について以下説明する。
(Control pattern 4)
The control pattern 4 (W single control) of the first embodiment will be described below.
 以上説明したパターン判別部で、例えば錠剤の質量のみを制御する制御パターン4(W単独制御)が選択された場合の制御手順を、図4A、図4B、図5及び図6を参照して説明する。 The control procedure in the case where, for example, the control pattern 4 (W single control) for controlling only the mass of the tablet is selected by the pattern discriminating unit described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 4A, 4B, 5 and 6. To do.
 パターン判別部において、ステップS2で錠剤の厚みを制御しないことが選択されるとともに、ステップS7で硬度を制御しないことが選択されると、制御装置4aは、制御パターン4を選択し、打錠機2の連続運転で製造される錠剤に対する質量のみを制御する。 When the pattern discriminating unit selects not to control the thickness of the tablet in step S2 and not to control the hardness in step S7, the control device 4a selects the control pattern 4 and selects the tablet press. Only the mass for tablets produced in 2 continuous runs is controlled.
 即ち、回転式の打錠装置1の連続運転を開始すると、制御装置4aは、図示しない記憶部に記憶されたプログラムに従い図4A及び図4Bに示す処理を実行する。まず、ステップS101の処理において、制御装置4aは、「サンプリング指令」をサンプリング部41へ出力する。なお、このステップST101の処理に代えて、人為的にサンプリング指令を出力する「強制サンプリング指令」の有無を判断し、当該判断結果に基づいて、制御装置4aは「強制サンプリング指令」をサンプリング部41へ出力するようにすることも可能である。 That is, when the continuous operation of the rotary tableting device 1 is started, the control device 4a executes the processes shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B according to a program stored in a storage unit (not shown). First, in the process of step S <b> 101, the control device 4 a outputs a “sampling command” to the sampling unit 41. Instead of the process of step ST101, it is determined whether or not there is a “forced sampling command” for manually outputting a sampling command, and based on the determination result, the control device 4a sends the “forced sampling command” to the sampling unit 41. It is also possible to output to.
 この指令後に、ステップS102において、制御装置4aは、サンプリング部41のサンプリング駆動器44を駆動し、錠剤サンプリングを開始する。これにより、サンプリングシャッタ43がサンプリングシュート42の入口を開く開き位置に移動されるとともに、このサンプリングシャッタ43で排出シュート39の出口側が閉じられる。 After this command, in step S102, the control device 4a drives the sampling driver 44 of the sampling unit 41 to start tablet sampling. As a result, the sampling shutter 43 is moved to an open position where the inlet of the sampling chute 42 is opened, and the outlet side of the discharge chute 39 is closed by the sampling shutter 43.
 したがって、製造される錠剤が複数個サンプリングされ、サンプリングシュート42を通って測定器3に供給される。こうした錠剤のサンプリングは、制御装置4aによるサンプリング部41の制御で、打錠機2の連続運転中、所定時間毎、例えば30分毎に実行される。 Therefore, a plurality of tablets to be manufactured are sampled and supplied to the measuring device 3 through the sampling chute 42. Such tablet sampling is executed at predetermined time intervals, for example, every 30 minutes, during the continuous operation of the tableting machine 2 under the control of the sampling unit 41 by the control device 4a.
 次に、前記サンプリングの開始に基づいて、制御装置4aは、ステップS103において、サンプリングデータを取得する。ここで取得されるサンプリングデータは、第1位置での杵先間隔設定値(現在値)lM、第2位置での杵先間隔設定値(現在値)LM、及び測定器3によって測定されかつ算出された質量平均値Wx、厚み平均値Tx、並びに硬度平均値Hxである。なお、各杵先間隔設定値(現在値)の記載は、以下、(現在値)の記載を省略して「杵先間隔設定値」と略称する。成型圧力平均値Px以外のいずれのデータも通信処理により制御装置4aに読み込まれる。また、ステップS103において、制御装置4aは、圧力センサ29により検出される圧力データを基に、サンプリングされた複数の錠剤についての成型圧力平均値Pxを算出する。なお、サンプリングデータの取得とその制御装置4aへの入力(供給)は、自動ではなく、手動で行うことも可能である。 Next, based on the start of the sampling, the control device 4a acquires sampling data in step S103. The sampling data acquired here is measured and calculated by the tip distance setting value (current value) 1M at the first position, the tip distance setting value (current value) LM at the second position, and the measuring device 3. Mass average value Wx, thickness average value Tx, and hardness average value Hx. In addition, description of each tip interval setting value (current value) is hereinafter abbreviated as “tip tip interval setting value”, omitting description of (current value). Any data other than the molding pressure average value Px is read into the control device 4a by communication processing. In step S103, the control device 4a calculates the molding pressure average value Px for the plurality of sampled tablets based on the pressure data detected by the pressure sensor 29. The acquisition of sampling data and its input (supply) to the control device 4a can be performed manually instead of automatically.
 この後、制御装置4aにより算定質量演算手段(算定質量演算工程)をなすステップS104の処理が実行される。つまり、ステップS104において、制御装置4aは、錠剤の算定質量Waを求める処理を実行する。具体的には、制御装置4aは、圧力制御をしたときの質量変動値(つまり、成型圧力平均値Pxを圧力制御基準値PMにしたときの質量変動値)を求め、これと質量平均値Wxとから錠剤の算定質量Waを求める。その演算式は以下の通りであリ、この式でa0はP-W相関係数である。 
  Wa=Wx+(PM-Px)/a0……式(11)。
Thereafter, the control device 4a executes the process of step S104 which constitutes a calculated mass calculating means (calculated mass calculating step). That is, in step S104, the control device 4a executes processing for obtaining the calculated mass Wa of the tablet. Specifically, the control device 4a obtains a mass fluctuation value when the pressure is controlled (that is, a mass fluctuation value when the molding pressure average value Px is set to the pressure control reference value PM), and the mass fluctuation value Wx. From this, the calculated mass Wa of the tablet is obtained. The arithmetic expression is as follows, where a0 is the PW correlation coefficient.
Wa = Wx + (PM−Px) / a0 (Formula 11)
 ステップS104の処理が必要な理由は次の通りである。 The reason why the process of step S104 is necessary is as follows.
 打錠装置1は、臼孔への粉体の充填深さを変えることで、成型圧力が圧力制御部51に設定された圧力制御基準値PMとなるように圧力制御(フィードバック制御)することによって、錠剤(成型品)の生産を行う。言い換えれば、打錠装置1は、フィードバック制御により、設定された圧力制御基準値PMに相当する質量(これを算定質量Waと称する。)の錠剤を生産する。このフィードバック制御により、生産開始直後は圧力制御基準値PMに制御された算定質量Waと質量制御基準値WMとが同じであっても、粉末の物性等に継時変化が生じると、圧力制御基準値PMと算定質量Waのバランスが崩れて、算定質量Waと質量制御基準値WMとが異なる値になる場合があり、それが錠剤の厚みや硬度にも影響を及ぼすようになる。 The tableting device 1 performs pressure control (feedback control) so that the molding pressure becomes the pressure control reference value PM set in the pressure control unit 51 by changing the filling depth of the powder into the mortar hole. , To produce tablets (molded products). In other words, the tableting device 1 produces tablets having a mass (referred to as a calculated mass Wa) corresponding to the set pressure control reference value PM by feedback control. By this feedback control, even if the calculated mass Wa controlled to the pressure control reference value PM and the mass control reference value WM are the same immediately after the start of production, the pressure control reference The balance between the value PM and the calculated mass Wa may be lost, and the calculated mass Wa and the mass control reference value WM may be different from each other, which affects the thickness and hardness of the tablet.
 そのため、錠剤の質量を制御する制御パターン1~制御パターン4の場合は、圧力制御基準値PMを質量制御基準値WMに相当する制御圧力値に更新することで、算定質量Waを質量制御基準値WMに制御することができる。 Therefore, in the case of the control patterns 1 to 4 for controlling the mass of the tablet, the calculated mass Wa is changed to the mass control reference value by updating the pressure control reference value PM to a control pressure value corresponding to the mass control reference value WM. WM can be controlled.
 これとは逆に、錠剤の質量を制御しない制御パターン5又は制御パターン6の場合は、粉末の物性等に継時変化が生じ、圧力制御をするための圧力制御基準値PMと算定質量Waのバランスが崩れることによって、サンプリングの度に求められる算定質量Waが変動したとしても、求められた算定質量Waをその都度、質量制御基準算定値WMaとして取り扱う(演算処理する)ことで、質量の制御がされずに、錠剤の厚みの制御に応じた圧力制御のみが行われて生産が継続される。 On the contrary, in the case of the control pattern 5 or control pattern 6 in which the mass of the tablet is not controlled, a change in the physical properties of the powder occurs over time, and the pressure control reference value PM and the calculated mass Wa for the pressure control are Even if the calculated mass Wa required for each sampling fluctuates due to the balance being lost, the calculated mass Wa is treated (calculated) as the mass control reference calculated value WMa each time, thereby controlling the mass. Instead, only the pressure control according to the control of the tablet thickness is performed and the production is continued.
 次に、制御装置4aにより制御パターン第1選択部(制御パターン第1選択手段又は制御パターン第1選択工程)をなすステップS105による判断が実行される。ステップS105においては、制御装置4aは、パターン判別部で選択された制御パターンが、錠剤の硬度の制御を含むのか否かを判断する。具体的には、制御装置4aは、制御パターン1,3,5のいずれかが選択されているか否かを判断する。この場合、パターン判別部において錠剤の質量のみを制御する制御パターン4が選択されているので、ステップS105の判断はNOとなる。それにより、錠剤の硬度の制御を含まない制御パターン2,4,6による運転制御系統が選択される。 Next, the control device 4a executes the determination in step S105, which constitutes a control pattern first selection unit (control pattern first selection means or control pattern first selection step). In step S105, the control device 4a determines whether or not the control pattern selected by the pattern determination unit includes control of tablet hardness. Specifically, the control device 4a determines whether any one of the control patterns 1, 3, and 5 is selected. In this case, since the control pattern 4 that controls only the mass of the tablet is selected in the pattern determination unit, the determination in step S105 is NO. Thereby, the operation control system by the control patterns 2, 4, and 6 not including the control of the tablet hardness is selected.
 次に、制御装置4aは、第1制御基準算定値更新部(第1制御基準算定値更新手段又は第1制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS106の処理を実行する。このステップS106は、以降の演算処理の整合性を確保するために設けられている。ステップS106においては、制御装置4aは、各制御基準値の夫々の値で対応する制御基準算定値を置換する処理を行う。つまり、制御装置4aは、錠剤の質量制御基準値WMの値で錠剤の質量制御基準算定値WMaを、錠剤の厚み制御基準値TMの値で錠剤の厚み制御基準算定値TMaを夫々置き換える。 Next, the control device 4a executes the process of step S106 which constitutes a first control reference calculation value update unit (first control reference calculation value update means or first control reference calculation value update step). This step S106 is provided to ensure the consistency of the subsequent arithmetic processing. In step S106, the control device 4a performs a process of replacing the corresponding control reference calculated value with each value of each control reference value. That is, the control device 4a replaces the tablet mass control reference calculation value WMa with the tablet mass control reference value WM, and replaces the tablet thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the tablet thickness control reference value TM.
 この後、制御装置4aは以下の運転制御系統によって打錠機2の運転を制御する。 
 即ち、まず、制御装置4aは、選択された制御パターンが、錠剤の質量の制御を含むのか否かを判断する。具体的には、制御パターン2,4のいずれかが選択されているか否かが、制御パターン第2選択部(制御パターン第2選択手段又は制御パターン第2選択工程)をなすステップS107により判断される。この場合、パターン判別部において制御パターン4が選択されているので、ステップS107の判断はYESである。次に、制御装置4aは、第1算定圧力変動値演算部(第1算定圧力変動値演算手段又は第1算定圧力変動値演算工程)をなすステップS109の処理を実行する。
Thereafter, the control device 4a controls the operation of the tableting machine 2 by the following operation control system.
That is, first, the control device 4a determines whether or not the selected control pattern includes control of the tablet mass. Specifically, whether or not one of the control patterns 2 and 4 is selected is determined by step S107 which constitutes a control pattern second selection unit (control pattern second selection means or control pattern second selection step). The In this case, since the control pattern 4 is selected in the pattern determination unit, the determination in step S107 is YES. Next, the control device 4a executes the process of step S109, which constitutes a first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit (first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation means or first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation step).
 なお、錠剤の質量の制御を含まない制御パターン6が選択されている場合、ステップS107の判断はNOとなる。これに伴って、制御装置4aは次のステップS108の処理を実行し、この後、ステップS109の処理を実行する。第2制御基準算定値更新部(第2制御基準算定値更新手段又は第2制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS108においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理の整合性を確保するために、錠剤の算定質量Waの値で錠剤の質量制御基準算定値WMaを置換する。 If the control pattern 6 that does not include control of the tablet mass is selected, the determination in step S107 is NO. Along with this, the control device 4a executes the process of the next step S108, and thereafter executes the process of step S109. In step S108, which constitutes the second control reference calculated value update unit (second control reference calculated value update means or second control reference calculated value update step), the control device 4a ensures the consistency of the subsequent arithmetic processing. The tablet mass control reference calculated value WMa is replaced with the calculated tablet weight value Wa.
 ステップS109の処理によって質量制御をしたときの算定圧力変動値(質量の変動による圧力の変動値)PWaが求められる。つまり、ステップS109において、制御装置4aは、質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにする制御をしたときの算定圧力変動値PWaを次式により求める。なお、この場合の質量制御基準算定値WMaは既述のように質量制御基準値WMと同一値である。 
 PWa=a0(WMa-Wx)……式(12)。
A calculated pressure fluctuation value (pressure fluctuation value due to mass fluctuation) PWa when mass control is performed by the process of step S109 is obtained. That is, in step S109, the control device 4a obtains a calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass average value Wx is controlled to be the mass control reference calculated value WMa by the following equation. In this case, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is the same value as the mass control reference value WM as described above.
PWa = a0 (WMa−Wx) (Equation 12)
 この式(12)において、a0はP-W相関係数であり、a0(WMa-Wx)の演算で求められる算出値は、制御装置4aが質量制御をしたときの算定圧力変動値(これを第1算定圧力変動値と称する。)PWaである。 In this equation (12), a0 is the PW correlation coefficient, and the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a0 (WMa-Wx) is the calculated pressure fluctuation value when the control device 4a performs mass control (this is expressed as This is referred to as the first calculated pressure fluctuation value.) PWa.
 ステップS109の処理が終了すると、制御装置4aは、算定厚み演算部(算定厚み演算手段又は算定厚み演算工程)をなすステップS110の処理を実行する。なお、ステップS109の処理は、ステップS115の処理を行うまでに実行すれば良く、又、ステップS109の処理はステップS110の処理と同時に実行することも可能である。 When the process of step S109 is completed, the control device 4a executes the process of step S110 that forms a calculated thickness calculation unit (calculated thickness calculation means or calculated thickness calculation step). Note that the process of step S109 may be executed before the process of step S115 is performed, and the process of step S109 may be executed simultaneously with the process of step S110.
 ステップS110においては、制御装置4aは、質量制御をしたとき(質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたとき)の厚み変動値と厚み平均値Txとから錠剤の算定厚みTaを、次式により求める。この場合の質量制御基準算定値WMaも既述のように質量制御基準値WMと同一値である。 
 Ta=Tx+a1(WMa-Wx)……式(13)。
In step S110, the control device 4a calculates the tablet calculated thickness Ta from the thickness variation value and the thickness average value Tx when mass control is performed (when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa). Obtained by the formula. The mass control reference value WMa in this case is also the same value as the mass control reference value WM as described above.
Ta = Tx + a1 (WMa−Wx) (Equation 13)
 この式(13)において、a1はT-W相関係数、a1(WMa-Wx)の演算で求められる算出値が、質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値である。これにより、質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにする制御をしたときの算定厚みTaが、厚み変動値とサンプリング錠の厚み平均値Txとから求められる。ここで、パターン判別部での制御パターン4の選択に従って、制御パターン4において相関係数a1を含む単項式の値は「0」として取扱われるので、質量の変動による厚みの変動を求める式(13)の演算で算出される算定厚みTaは、厚み平均値Txに等しい。 In this equation (13), a1 is a TW correlation coefficient, and a calculated value obtained by calculation of a1 (WMa-Wx) is a thickness fluctuation value when mass control is performed. Thereby, the calculated thickness Ta when the mass average value Wx is controlled to be the mass control reference calculated value WMa is obtained from the thickness fluctuation value and the thickness average value Tx of the sampling tablet. Here, according to the selection of the control pattern 4 in the pattern discriminating unit, the value of the monomial including the correlation coefficient a1 in the control pattern 4 is handled as “0”, and thus the equation (13) for determining the thickness variation due to the mass variation The calculated thickness Ta calculated by the above calculation is equal to the thickness average value Tx.
 次に、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔算定値演算部(杵先間隔算定値演算手段又は杵先間隔算定値演算工程)をなすステップS111の処理を実行する。ステップS111においては、制御装置4aは、厚み制御をしたとき(算定厚みTaを厚み制御基準算定値TMaにしたとき)の、第1位置での杵先間隔算定値lMaと、第2位置での杵先間隔算定値LMaとを、夫々次式により求める。なお、この場合の厚み制御基準算定値TMaは既述のように厚み制御基準値TMと同一値である。 
 LMa=LM+a3(TMa-Ta)……式(15) 
 lMa=lM+a3(TMa-Ta)……式(16)。
Next, the control device 4a executes the process of step S111 that forms a tip interval calculation value calculation unit (tip tip calculation value calculation means or tip interval calculation value calculation step). In step S111, the control device 4a performs the thickness control (when the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa), the tip distance calculated value lMa at the first position, and the second position. The tip distance calculation value LMa is obtained by the following equation. In this case, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is the same value as the thickness control reference value TM as described above.
LMa = LM + a3 (TMa-Ta) (15)
lMa = 1M + a3 (TMa−Ta) (16)
 同様に、式(15)において、LMは第2位置での杵先間隔設定値、a3はL-T相関係数、TaはステップS110で求めた算定厚みである。ここで、パターン判別部での制御パターン4の選択に従い、制御パターン4において相関係数a3を含む単項式の値は「0」として取扱われるので、a3(TMa-Ta)の値は「0」である。したがって、式(15)で算出される第2位置での杵先間隔算定値LMaは第2位置での杵先間隔設定値LMに等しい。 Similarly, in equation (15), LM is the setting value of the tip distance at the second position, a3 is the LT correlation coefficient, and Ta is the calculated thickness obtained in step S110. Here, according to the selection of the control pattern 4 in the pattern discriminating unit, the value of the monomial including the correlation coefficient a3 in the control pattern 4 is handled as “0”, so the value of a3 (TMa−Ta) is “0”. is there. Accordingly, the tip interval calculation value LMa at the second position calculated by the equation (15) is equal to the tip interval setting value LM at the second position.
 式(16)において、lMは第1位置での杵先間隔設定値、a3はL-T相関係数、TaはステップS110で求めた算定厚みである。ここで、パターン判別部での選択に従い制御パターン4において相関係数a3を含む単項式の値は「0」として取扱われるので、a3(TMa-Ta)の値は「0」である。したがって、式(16)で算出される第1位置での杵先間隔算定値lMaは予備圧縮の杵先間隔設定値lMに等しい。 In Equation (16), 1M is the setting value of the tip interval at the first position, a3 is the LT correlation coefficient, and Ta is the calculated thickness obtained in step S110. Here, the value of the monomial including the correlation coefficient a3 in the control pattern 4 is handled as “0” according to the selection by the pattern discriminating unit, so the value of a3 (TMa−Ta) is “0”. Accordingly, the tip distance calculated value lMa at the first position calculated by the equation (16) is equal to the tip distance setting value 1M for the precompression.
 ステップS111の処理の実行後に、制御装置4aは、第2算定圧力変更値演算部(第2算定圧力変更値演算手段又は第2算定圧力変更値演算工程)をなすステップS112の処理を実行する。なお、ステップS111の処理とステップS112の処理とを実行する順番は、以上の説明とは逆にしても良く、又、ステップS111の処理とステップS112の処理とは同時に実行することも可能である。 After execution of the process of step S111, the control device 4a executes the process of step S112 that constitutes a second calculated pressure change value calculation unit (second calculated pressure change value calculation means or a second calculated pressure change value calculation step). Note that the order in which the process of step S111 and the process of step S112 are executed may be reversed from the above description, and the process of step S111 and the process of step S112 may be executed simultaneously. .
 ステップS112においては、制御装置4aは、厚み制御をしたとき(算定厚みTaを厚み制御基準算定値TMaにしたとき)の算定圧力変動値(これを第2算定圧力変動値と称する。)PTaを次式により求める。この場合の厚み制御基準算定値TMaは厚み制御基準値TMと同一値である。 
 PTa=a2(TMa-Ta)……式(14)。
In step S112, the control device 4a calculates the calculated pressure fluctuation value (this is referred to as a second calculated pressure fluctuation value) PTa when the thickness is controlled (when the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa). Obtained by the following equation. The thickness control reference calculation value TMa in this case is the same value as the thickness control reference value TM.
PTa = a2 (TMa−Ta) (Expression (14))
 この式(14)において、a2はP-T相関係数、a2(TMa-Ta)の演算で求められる算出値が算定圧力変動値(第2算定圧力変動値)である。ここで、パターン判別部での選択に従い、制御パターン4において相関係数a2を含む単項式の値は「0」として取扱われるので、厚み変動による圧力の変動を求める式(14)の演算で算出される算定圧力変動値PTaは「0」である。 In this equation (14), a2 is a PT correlation coefficient, and a calculated value obtained by calculation of a2 (TMa-Ta) is a calculated pressure fluctuation value (second calculated pressure fluctuation value). Here, according to the selection by the pattern discriminating unit, the value of the monomial including the correlation coefficient a2 in the control pattern 4 is handled as “0”, and thus is calculated by the calculation of the equation (14) for obtaining the pressure variation due to the thickness variation. The calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa is “0”.
 ステップS112の処理が終了すると、制御装置4aにより、圧力制御基準算定値演算部(圧力制御基準算定値演算手段又は圧力制御基準算定値演算工程)をなすステップS115が実行される。ステップS115においては、制御装置4aは、圧力制御基準算定値PMaを次式により求める。 
 PMa=Px+PWa+PTa……式(17)。
When the process of step S112 is completed, step S115, which is a pressure control reference calculation value calculation unit (pressure control reference calculation value calculation means or pressure control reference calculation value calculation step), is executed by the control device 4a. In step S115, the control device 4a obtains the pressure control reference calculation value PMa by the following equation.
PMa = Px + PWa + PTa Equation (17).
 この式(17)において、Pxはサンプリング錠の成型圧力平均値、PWaはステップS109で求めた算定圧力変動値(第1算定圧力変動値)、PTaはステップS112で求めた算定圧力変動値(第2算定圧力変動値)である。このため、ステップS115の式(17)で算出される圧力制御基準算定値PMaは、成型圧力平均値Pxと、質量制御による算定圧力変動値PWaと、厚み制御による算定圧力変動値PTaとの合計値に等しい。なお、ここで、既述のように算定圧力変動値PTaの値は「0」である。 In this equation (17), Px is the molding tablet average pressure value, PWa is the calculated pressure fluctuation value (first calculated pressure fluctuation value) obtained in step S109, and PTa is the calculated pressure fluctuation value (first value) obtained in step S112. 2 calculated pressure fluctuation value). For this reason, the pressure control reference calculated value PMa calculated by the equation (17) in step S115 is the sum of the molding pressure average value Px, the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa by mass control, and the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa by thickness control. Equal to the value. Here, as described above, the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa is “0”.
 ステップS115の処理が終わると、制御装置4aにより、ステップS116a~ステップS124(図5参照)を有する杵先間隔制御部(杵先間隔制御手段)KKが実行される。杵先間隔制御工程を実施する杵先間隔制御部KKは、杵先間隔を小刻みにかつ段階的に変更させる制御をする。 When the processing of step S115 is completed, the control device 4a executes the tip interval control unit (tip tip interval control means) KK having steps S116a to S124 (see FIG. 5). The tip interval control unit KK that performs the tip interval control step performs control to change the tip interval in small steps.
 即ち、フラグON部(手段)をなすステップS116aにおいては、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔の制御を開始させるために杵先間隔制御フラグをONする。次のステップS117においては、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔制御をするのか否かを判断する。つまり、杵先間隔制御判断部(杵先間隔制御判断手段又は杵先間隔制御判断工程)をなすステップS117においては、制御装置4aは、第2位置での杵先間隔設定値LMと、第2位置での杵先間隔算定値LMaとが等しいか否かを判断する。又は、このような処理に代えて、制御装置4aは、第1位置での杵先間隔設定値lMと、第1位置での杵先間隔算定値lMaとが等しいか否かを判断するようにしてもよい。 That is, in step S116a forming a flag ON section (means), the control device 4a turns on the tip interval control flag to start control of the tip interval. In the next step S117, the control device 4a determines whether or not to perform the tip distance control. That is, in step S117, which forms the tip interval control determination unit (tip tip interval control determining means or tip tip interval control determining step), the control device 4a determines the tip interval setting value LM at the second position, It is determined whether or not the tip distance calculated value LMa at the position is equal. Alternatively, instead of such processing, the control device 4a determines whether or not the tip interval setting value 1M at the first position is equal to the tip interval calculated value 1Ma at the first position. May be.
 ステップS117の判断がYESの場合(つまり、杵先間隔の変更が不要であると判断された場合)、制御装置4aは、フラグOFF部(手段)をなすステップS116bの処理を実行する。このステップS116bの処理においては、後述するステップS126の判断がYESとなって、引き続き杵先間隔が変更されないようにするために、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔制御フラグをOFFする。 If the determination in step S117 is YES (that is, if it is determined that changing the tip interval is unnecessary), the control device 4a executes the processing in step S116b that forms a flag OFF unit (means). In the process of step S116b, the determination in step S126, which will be described later, becomes YES, and the control device 4a turns off the tip interval control flag so that the tip interval is not changed.
 ステップS117の判断がNOである場合(つまり、杵先間隔の変更が必要であると判断された場合)、制御装置4aは、第1杵先間隔判断部(第1杵先間隔判断手段又は第1杵先間隔判断工程)をなすステップS119の判断を行なう。このステップS119においては、制御装置4aは、第2位置での杵先間隔算定値LMaが第2位置での杵先間隔設定値LMより小さいか否かを判断する。又は、この処理に代えて、制御装置4aは、第1位置での杵先間隔算定値lMaが第1位置での杵先間隔設定値lMより小さいか否かを判断するようにしてもよい。 When the determination in step S117 is NO (that is, when it is determined that the tip interval needs to be changed), the control device 4a includes the first tip interval determining unit (the first tip interval determining means or the first tip interval determining means). The determination in step S119 is performed. In step S119, the control device 4a determines whether or not the tip distance calculation value LMa at the second position is smaller than the tip distance setting value LM at the second position. Alternatively, instead of this process, the control device 4a may determine whether or not the tip distance calculation value lMa at the first position is smaller than the tip distance setting value 1M at the first position.
 ステップS119の判断がYESである場合(LM>LMa又はlM>lMaの場合)、制御装置4aは、第2杵先間隔判断部(第2杵先間隔判断手段又は第2杵先間隔判断工程)をなすステップS120aの判断を行う。このステップS120aにおいては、制御装置4aは、第2位置での杵先間隔設定値LMから第2位置での杵先間隔算定値LMaを引いた値(又は、これに代えて、第1位置での杵先間隔設定値lMから第1位置での杵先間隔算定値lMaを引いた値でもよい。なお、いずれも絶対値)が、規定寸法値より小さいか否かを判断する。この場合、規定寸法値は、パターン判別部において、1.00mm以下で例えば0.01mmに設定されている。この規定寸法値は、0.01mm~0.50mmであることが好ましく、更に、0.01mm~0.25mmであることがより好ましい。 When the determination in step S119 is YES (when LM> LMa or lM> lMa), the control device 4a determines the second tip distance determination unit (second tip distance determination means or second tip distance determination step). The determination in step S120a is performed. In this step S120a, the control device 4a obtains a value obtained by subtracting the tip interval calculation value LMa at the second position from the tip interval setting value LM at the second position (or alternatively, at the first position. It may be a value obtained by subtracting the tip distance calculated value 1Ma at the first position from the tip distance setting value 1M of the first tip, and it is determined whether or not the absolute value is smaller than the specified dimension value. In this case, the prescribed dimension value is set to be 1.00 mm or less, for example, 0.01 mm, in the pattern discrimination unit. The specified dimension value is preferably 0.01 mm to 0.50 mm, and more preferably 0.01 mm to 0.25 mm.
 ステップS120aの判断がYESの場合(杵先間隔設定値と杵先間隔算定値の差が規定寸法値より小さい場合)、制御装置4aは、第2杵先間隔制御部(第2杵先間隔制御手段又は第2杵先間隔制御工程)をなすステップS121bの処理を実行する。このステップS121bにおいては、制御装置4aは、第2位置の杵先間隔Lについては、杵先間隔算定値LMaの値で杵先間隔設定値LMを更新することにより、この杵先間隔設定値LMとなるように杵先間隔Lが変更される。同様に、ステップS121bにおいては、制御装置4aは、第1位置の杵先間隔lについては、杵先間隔算定値lMaの値で杵先間隔設定値lMを更新することにより、この杵先間隔設定値lMとなるように杵先間隔lが変更される。こうした更新処理によって、第2位置及び第1位置の杵先間隔設定値と、演算によって求められる夫々の杵先間隔算定値を正確に一致させることができ、演算処理プログラムが無限ループに陥ることを回避することができる。 When the determination in step S120a is YES (when the difference between the tip distance setting value and the tip distance calculation value is smaller than the specified dimension value), the control device 4a uses the second tip distance control unit (second tip distance control). Step S121b, which is a means or second tip interval control step), is executed. In step S121b, for the tip position L of the second position, the control device 4a updates the tip position setting value LM with the value of the tip position calculation value LMa, thereby changing the tip position setting value LM. The tip distance L is changed so that Similarly, in step S121b, the control device 4a updates the tip interval setting value 1M with the value of the tip interval calculated value lMa for the tip interval l at the first position, thereby setting the tip interval setting. The tip interval l is changed so as to be the value lM. By such an update process, the tip position interval setting values of the second position and the first position can be accurately matched with the respective tip distance calculation values obtained by calculation, and the calculation processing program falls into an infinite loop. It can be avoided.
 ステップS120aの判断がNOである場合(杵先間隔設定値と杵先間隔算定値の差が規定寸法値より大きい場合)、制御装置4aは、第1杵先間隔制御部(第1杵先間隔制御手段又は第1杵先間隔制御工程)をなすステップS121aの処理を実行する。ステップS121aにおいては、制御装置4aは、より杵先杆間隔を狭くなるように制御する。つまり、制御装置4aは、第2位置の杵先間隔Lについては、(杵先間隔設定値LM-規定寸法値)の値で杵先間隔設定値LMを更新することにより、この杵先間隔設定値LMとなるように杵先間隔Lを狭める。同様に、第1位置の杵先間隔lについては、制御装置4aは、(杵先間隔設定値lM-規定寸法値)の値で杵先間隔設定値lMを更新することにより、この更新された杵先間隔設定値lMとなるように杵先間隔lを狭める。 When the determination in step S120a is NO (when the difference between the tip interval setting value and the tip interval calculation value is larger than the specified dimension value), the control device 4a includes the first tip interval control unit (first tip interval). The process of step S121a which makes a control means or a 1st tip distance control process) is performed. In step S121a, the control device 4a performs control so that the tip-toe-tip interval is further narrowed. That is, for the tip position L of the second position, the control device 4a updates the tip position setting value LM with a value of (tip point setting value LM−specified dimension value), thereby setting the tip position setting. The tip distance L is narrowed so that the value LM is obtained. Similarly, for the tip position l at the first position, the control device 4a updates the tip position setting value 1M by updating the tip position setting value 1M with a value of (tip point setting value 1M−specified dimension value). The tip interval l is narrowed so that the tip interval setting value 1M is obtained.
 この場合、規定寸法値は既述の通りであり、この規定寸法値が既述のように例えば0.01に設定されていると、第2位置での杵先間隔Lについては、杵先間隔設定値LMから0.01mm差し引いた値に杵先間隔設定値LMが更新され、この更新された杵先間隔設定値LMとなるように杵先間隔Lが狭められる。同様に、第1位置での杵先間隔lについては、杵先間隔設定値lMから0.01mm差し引いた値に杵先間隔設定値lMが更新され、この更新された杵先間隔設定値lMとなるように杵先間隔lが狭められる。 In this case, the specified dimension value is as described above, and when the specified dimension value is set to 0.01 as described above, for the tip distance L at the second position, The tip distance setting value LM is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 0.01 mm from the LM, and the tip distance L is narrowed to be the updated tip distance setting value LM. Similarly, with respect to the tip distance l at the first position, the tip distance setting value 1M is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 0.01 mm from the tip distance setting value 1M, and becomes the updated tip distance setting value 1M. Thus, the tip interval l is narrowed.
 ステップS119の判断がNOである場合(LM<LMa又はlM<lMaの場合)、制御装置4aは、第3杵先間隔判断部(第3杵先間隔判断手段又は第3杵先間隔判断工程)をなすステップS120bの判断を実行する。このステップS120bにおいては、制御装置4aは、第2位置での杵先間隔設定値LMから第2位置での杵先間隔算定値LMaを引いた値(又は第1位置での杵先間隔設定値lMから第1位置での杵先間隔算定値lMaを引いた値でもよい。なお、いずれも絶対値)が、規定寸法値より小さいか否かを判断する。この場合の規定寸法値はステップS120aと同じである。 
 ステップS120bの判断がYESである場合(杵先間隔設定値と杵先間隔算定値の差が規定寸法値より小さい場合)、制御装置4aは、ステップS121bの処理を既述の通り実行する。
When the determination in step S119 is NO (when LM <LMa or 1M <lMa), the control device 4a determines that the third tip distance determination unit (the third tip distance determination means or the third tip distance determination step). The determination in step S120b is performed. In this step S120b, the control device 4a obtains a value obtained by subtracting the tip interval calculation value LMa at the second position from the tip interval setting value LM at the second position (or the tip interval setting value at the first position). It may be a value obtained by subtracting the tip distance calculation value lMa at the first position from 1M, where it is determined whether or not the absolute value is smaller than the specified dimension value. The specified dimension value in this case is the same as in step S120a.
When the determination in step S120b is YES (when the difference between the tip distance setting value and the tip distance calculated value is smaller than the specified dimension value), the control device 4a executes the process in step S121b as described above.
 ステップS120bの判断がNOである場合(杵先間隔設定値と杵先間隔算定値の差が規定寸法値より大きい場合)、制御装置4aは、第3杵先間隔制御部(第3杵先間隔制御手段又は第3杵先間隔制御工程)をなすステップS121cの処理を実行する。このステップS121cにおいては、制御装置4aは、ステップS121aの処理とは反対に杵先間隔を広げるように制御する。 When the determination in step S120b is NO (when the difference between the tip distance setting value and the tip distance calculation value is greater than the specified dimension value), the control device 4a includes a third tip distance control unit (third tip distance). The process of step S121c which makes a control means or a 3rd tip distance control process) is performed. In step S121c, the control device 4a performs control so as to widen the tip interval, contrary to the processing in step S121a.
 つまり、制御装置4aは、第2位置での杵先間隔Lについては、(杵先間隔設定値LM+規定寸法値)の値で杵先間隔設定値LMを更新することにより、更新された杵先間隔設定値LMとなるように杵先間隔Lを広げる。同様に、制御装置4aは、第1位置での杵先間隔lについては、(杵先間隔設定値lM+規定寸法値)の値で杵先間隔設定値lMを更新することにより、更新された杵先間隔設定値lMとなるように杵先間隔lを広げる。 That is, the control device 4 a updates the tip position setting value LM with the value of the tip position setting value LM + the specified dimension value for the tip position L at the second position. The tip interval L is increased so as to be the interval set value LM. Similarly, the control device 4a, for the tip position l at the first position, updates the tip distance setting value 1M with the value of (tip point setting value 1M + specified dimension value). The tip interval l is increased so that the tip interval setting value 1M is obtained.
 この場合、規定寸法値は既述の通りであり、この規定寸法値が既述のように例えば0.01mmに設定されていると、第2位置での杵先間隔Lについては、杵先間隔設定値LMに0. 01mm加えた値に杵先間隔設定値LMが更新され、この更新された杵先間隔設定値LMとなるように杵先間隔Lが変更(制御)される。同様に、第1位置での杵先間隔lについては、杵先間隔設定値lMに0.01mm加えた値に杵先間隔設定値lMが更新され、この更新された杵先間隔設定値lMとなるように杵先間隔lが変更(制御)される。 In this case, the specified dimension value is as described above, and when the specified dimension value is set to 0.01 mm, for example, as described above, the tip distance L is set for the tip distance L at the second position. The tip distance setting value LM is updated to a value obtained by adding 0.1 mm to 01 mm to the value LM, and the tip distance L is changed (controlled) to be the updated tip distance setting value LM. Similarly, with respect to the tip distance l at the first position, the tip distance setting value 1M is updated to a value obtained by adding 0.01 mm to the tip distance setting value 1M, and this updated tip distance setting value 1M is obtained. In this way, the tip interval l is changed (controlled).
 ステップS121a、又はステップS121b、若しくはステップS121cの処理が終わると、制御装置4aは、第1計測開始部(第1計測開始手段又は第1計測開始工程)をなすステップS122の処理を実行する。このステップS122においては、制御装置4aは、回転盤11の回転を計測する動作を開始する。この後、制御装置4aは、第1回転数判断部(第1回転数判断手段又は第1回転数判断工程)をなすステップS123の判断を行なう。ステップS123においては、制御装置4aは、計測された回転盤11の回転(n回転)が設定された回転数(これをPVと称する)に達したか否かを判断する。この判断はYESとなるまで繰り返される。 When the process of step S121a, step S121b, or step S121c is completed, the control device 4a executes the process of step S122 that forms a first measurement start unit (first measurement start means or first measurement start process). In step S122, the control device 4a starts an operation of measuring the rotation of the turntable 11. Thereafter, the control device 4a performs the determination in step S123, which constitutes a first rotation speed determination unit (a first rotation speed determination means or a first rotation speed determination step). In step S123, the control device 4a determines whether or not the measured rotation (n rotation) of the turntable 11 has reached a set rotation speed (referred to as PV). This determination is repeated until YES is obtained.
 ステップS123の判断がYESになると、制御装置4aは、第1計測終了部(第1計測終了手段又は第1計測終了工程)をなすステップS124の処理を実行する。このステップS124の処理により、回転盤11の回転を計測する動作が終了される。 If the determination in step S123 is YES, the control device 4a executes the process of step S124 that forms a first measurement end unit (first measurement end means or first measurement end step). By the processing in step S124, the operation for measuring the rotation of the turntable 11 is completed.
 ステップS116b又はステップS124の処理が終了した後、図6に示すステップS125においては、制御装置4aは、圧力制御基準値PMを更新するか否かを判断する。つまり、圧力制御基準値更新判断部(圧力制御基準値更新判断手段又は圧力制御基準値更新判断工程)をなすステップS125においては、制御装置4aは、圧力制御部51の圧力制御基準値(現在値)PMが、圧力制御基準算定値PMaと等しいか否かを判断する。 After the process of step S116b or step S124 is completed, in step S125 shown in FIG. 6, the control device 4a determines whether or not to update the pressure control reference value PM. That is, in step S125, which is a pressure control reference value update determination unit (pressure control reference value update determination unit or pressure control reference value update determination step), the control device 4a determines the pressure control reference value (current value) of the pressure control unit 51. ) It is determined whether PM is equal to the pressure control reference calculation value PMa.
 このステップS125の判断がYESの場合(PM=PMaの場合、つまり、圧力制御基準値PMの更新が不要であると判断された場合)、フラグON判断部(フラグON判断手段又はフラグON判断工程)をなすステップS126において、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔制御フラグがONであるか否かの判断をする。ここで、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔制御フラグがステップS116bを経由した信号(フラグOFF信号)を示していると判断した場合、このステップS126の判断はNOとなる。一方、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔制御フラグがステップS116bを経由せずにステップS124を経由した信号(フラグON信号)を示していると判断した場合、このステップS126の判断はYESとなる。 When the determination in step S125 is YES (when PM = PMa, that is, when it is determined that it is not necessary to update the pressure control reference value PM), the flag ON determination unit (flag ON determination means or flag ON determination step) In step S126, the control device 4a determines whether or not the tip interval control flag is ON. If the control device 4a determines that the tip interval control flag indicates a signal (flag OFF signal) that has passed through step S116b, the determination in step S126 is NO. On the other hand, if the control device 4a determines that the tip distance control flag indicates a signal (flag ON signal) that has passed through step S124 without passing through step S116b, the determination in step S126 is YES.
 ステップS126の判断がYESとなった場合、処理は既述のステップS117に戻る。そして、このステップS117の判断がNOとなった場合、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔制御部KKにより杵先間隔(L及びl)を変更させる制御を再開する。したがって、ステップS117の判断がNOである限り、杵先間隔制御フラグがOFFとならずに杵先間隔(L及びl)の制御が繰り返される。 If the determination in step S126 is YES, the process returns to step S117 described above. And when judgment of this step S117 becomes NO, the control apparatus 4a restarts the control which changes the tip distance (L and l) by the tip distance control part KK. Therefore, as long as the determination in step S117 is NO, the control of the tip interval (L and l) is repeated without turning the tip interval control flag OFF.
 このような制御が杵先間隔制御部KKで繰り返えされることにより、杵先間隔設定値(LM及びlM)を更新するときの規定寸法値にしたがって杵先間隔(L及びl)が、小刻み(1.00mm以下例えば0.01mm)にかつ段階的に変更(制御)される。それにより、成型圧力Pの急激な変動が抑制される。そのため、打錠装置1は、圧力制御部51での異常を検出しなくなり、圧力制御部51での異常検出により打錠機2の運転が停止される虞を回避することができる。 By repeating such control in the tip interval control unit KK, the tip interval (L and l) is increased in small increments according to the specified dimension value when updating the tip interval setting values (LM and 1M). It is changed (controlled) in stages (1.00 mm or less, for example, 0.01 mm). Thereby, a rapid fluctuation of the molding pressure P is suppressed. Therefore, the tableting device 1 does not detect any abnormality in the pressure control unit 51, and can avoid the possibility that the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped due to the abnormality detection in the pressure control unit 51.
 ステップS126の判断がNOとなった場合、制御装置4aはスタートに戻って制御を継続する。 If the determination in step S126 is NO, the control device 4a returns to the start and continues control.
 一方、ステップS125の判断がNOとなった場合(PM=PMaでない場合、つまり、圧力制御基準値の更新が必要であると判断された場合)、制御装置4aは、図6に示すステップS127~ステップS135の処理を有する制御圧力値更新部(制御圧力値更新工程)PKを実行する。制御圧力値更新工程を実行する制御圧力値更新部PKによって、圧力制御基準値PMが小刻みかつ段階的に変えられ、それに伴う圧力制御部51での錠剤質量のフィードバック制御の実行によって成型圧力が小刻みかつ段階的に変更される。 On the other hand, when the determination of step S125 is NO (when PM = PMa is not satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the pressure control reference value needs to be updated), the control device 4a performs steps S127 to S127 shown in FIG. A control pressure value update unit (control pressure value update process) PK having the process of step S135 is executed. The pressure control reference value PM is changed step by step by the control pressure value update unit PK that executes the control pressure value update step, and the molding pressure is stepped by execution of feedback control of the tablet mass in the pressure control unit 51 associated therewith. And it is changed in stages.
 即ち、制御装置4aは、第1圧力制御基準値判断部(第1圧力制御基準値判断手段又は第1圧力制御基準値判断工程)をなすステップS127の判断を行なう。このステップS127においては、制御装置4aは、圧力制御部51の圧力制御基準値(現在値)PMが、圧力制御基準算定値PMaより大きいか否かを判断する。 That is, the control device 4a performs the determination in step S127, which is a first pressure control reference value determination unit (a first pressure control reference value determination unit or a first pressure control reference value determination step). In step S127, the control device 4a determines whether or not the pressure control reference value (current value) PM of the pressure control unit 51 is greater than the pressure control reference calculation value PMa.
 ステップS127の判断がYESの場合(PM>PMaの場合)、制御装置4aは、第2圧力制御基準値判断部(第2圧力制御基準値判断手段又は第2圧力制御基準値判断工程)をなすステップS128の処理を行なう。このステップS128においては、制御装置4aは、(PM-PMa)の単項式の値(絶対値)が規定圧力値より小さいか否かを判断する。つまり、ステップS128においては、制御装置4aは、圧力制御部51の圧力制御基準値(現在値)PMから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを引き算した値(絶対値)が、規定圧力値より小さいか否かを判断する。 When the determination in step S127 is YES (when PM> PMa), the control device 4a forms a second pressure control reference value determination unit (a second pressure control reference value determination unit or a second pressure control reference value determination step). The process of step S128 is performed. In step S128, the control device 4a determines whether or not the monomial value (absolute value) of (PM-PMa) is smaller than the specified pressure value. That is, in step S128, the control device 4a determines whether the value (absolute value) obtained by subtracting the pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the pressure control reference value (current value) PM of the pressure control unit 51 is smaller than the specified pressure value. Determine whether.
 この場合、規定圧力値はパターン判別部において10.00kN以下で例えば0.30kNに設定されるのが好ましいが、これには制約されない。この規定圧力値は、既述の杵先間隔の小刻みかつ段階的な規定寸法値での変更に基づく圧力変動値〔(規定寸法値×a2/a3)で求められる値〕であることが更に好ましい。この(規定寸法値×a2/a3)で求められる圧力変動値は、例えばパターン判別部において設定された規定寸法値が0.01mmであった場合、杵先間隔を0.01mm変更することによって生じる圧力変動値である。 In this case, the specified pressure value is preferably set to 10.00 kN or less, for example, 0.30 kN in the pattern discriminating unit, but is not limited thereto. The specified pressure value is more preferably a pressure fluctuation value [value determined by (specified dimension value × a2 / a3)] based on the step-by-step change in the specified dimension value of the tip interval. . The pressure fluctuation value obtained by this (specified dimension value × a2 / a3) is, for example, the pressure fluctuation generated by changing the tip interval by 0.01 mm when the specified dimension value set in the pattern discrimination unit is 0.01 mm. Value.
 ステップS128の判断がYESの場合(つまり、圧力制御基準値PMと圧力制御基準算定値PMaとの差が、規定圧力値より小さい場合)、制御装置4aは、第2制御圧力値更新部(第2制御圧力値更新手段又は第2制御圧力値更新工程)をなすステップS131の処理を実行する。このステップS131において、制御装置4aは、圧力制御基準算定値PMaで圧力制御基準値(現在値)PMを更新し、この更新された圧力制御基準値PMを基準に圧力制御部51の各制御圧力値を更新する。 When the determination in step S128 is YES (that is, when the difference between the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculation value PMa is smaller than the specified pressure value), the control device 4a includes the second control pressure value update unit (first control unit). The process of step S131 which performs (2 control pressure value update means or a 2nd control pressure value update process) is performed. In step S131, the control device 4a updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM with the pressure control reference calculated value PMa, and each control pressure of the pressure control unit 51 based on the updated pressure control reference value PM. Update the value.
 こうした更新処理によって、制御装置4aは、圧力制御基準値PMと、演算により求められる圧力制御基準算定値PMaとを正確に一致させることができ、演算処理プログラムが無限ループに陥ることを回避することができる。 By such update processing, the control device 4a can accurately match the pressure control reference value PM with the pressure control reference calculated value PMa obtained by calculation, and avoid the calculation processing program falling into an infinite loop. Can do.
 ステップS128の判断がNOの場合(つまり、圧力制御基準値PMと圧力制御基準算定値PMaとの差が、規定圧力値より大きい場合)、制御装置4aは、第1制御圧力値更新部(第1制御圧力値更新手段又は第1制御圧力値更新工程)をなすステップS129を実行する。ステップS129においては、制御装置4aは、(圧力制御基準値PM-規定圧力値)の演算値で圧力制御基準値(現在値)PMを更新し、この圧力制御基準値PMを基準に圧力制御部51の各制御圧力値が減るように更新する。 When the determination in step S128 is NO (that is, when the difference between the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculation value PMa is greater than the specified pressure value), the control device 4a includes the first control pressure value update unit (the first control pressure value update unit). Step S129 is executed to perform (1 control pressure value update means or first control pressure value update process). In step S129, the control device 4a updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM with the calculated value of (pressure control reference value PM−specified pressure value), and the pressure control unit based on the pressure control reference value PM. The control pressure values of 51 are updated so as to decrease.
 ステップS127の判断がNOの場合(PM<PMaの場合)、制御装置4aは、第3圧力制御基準値判断部(第3圧力制御基準値判断手段又は第3圧力制御基準値判断工程)をなすステップS130の処理を実行し、ステップS128と同様な判断をする。このステップS130においては、制御装置4aは、PM-PMaの単項式の値(絶対値)が規定圧力値より小さいか否かを判断する。つまり、制御装置4aは、圧力制御基準値PMと圧力制御基準算定値PMaとの差が、規定圧力値より小さいか否かを判断する。 When the determination in step S127 is NO (when PM <PMa), the control device 4a forms a third pressure control reference value determination unit (a third pressure control reference value determination unit or a third pressure control reference value determination step). The process of step S130 is executed, and the same determination as in step S128 is performed. In step S130, the control device 4a determines whether or not the monomial value (absolute value) of PM-PMa is smaller than the specified pressure value. That is, the control device 4a determines whether or not the difference between the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculation value PMa is smaller than the specified pressure value.
 このステップS130の判断がYESの場合、制御装置4aは、既述のステップS131の処理を実行する。ステップS130の判断がNOの場合(つまり、圧力制御基準値PMと圧力制御基準算定値PMaとの差が、規定圧力値より大きい場合)、制御装置4aは、第3制御圧力値更新部(第3制御圧力値更新手段又は第3制御圧力値更新工程)をなすステップS132を実行する。 If the determination in step S130 is YES, the control device 4a executes the process in step S131 described above. When the determination in step S130 is NO (that is, when the difference between the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculation value PMa is larger than the specified pressure value), the control device 4a includes the third control pressure value update unit (the first control value). Step S132 that constitutes (3 control pressure value update means or third control pressure value update step) is executed.
 このステップS132の処理は、前記ステップS129の処理とは反対に圧力制御基準値PMを増やす。つまり、ステップS132においては、制御装置4aは、(圧力制御基準値PM+規定圧力値)の演算値で圧力制御基準値PMを更新し、この圧力制御基準値PMを基準に圧力制御部51の各制御圧力値が増えるように更新する。 In the process of step S132, the pressure control reference value PM is increased in contrast to the process of step S129. That is, in step S132, the control device 4a updates the pressure control reference value PM with the calculated value of (pressure control reference value PM + specified pressure value), and each of the pressure control units 51 based on the pressure control reference value PM. Update to increase the control pressure value.
 前記ステップS129、ステップS131、又はステップS132の処理が終わると、制御装置4aは、第2計測開始判断部(第2計測開始判断手段又は第2計測開始判断工程)をなすステップS133の処理を実行する。このステップS133においては、制御装置4aは、回転盤11の回転を計測する動作を開始する。この後、制御装置4aは、第2回転数判断部(第2回転数判断手段又は第2回転数判断工程)をなすステップS134の判断を行なう。ステップS134においては、制御装置4aは、計測された回転盤11の回転(n回転)が設定された回転数(PV)に達したか否かを判断する。この判断はYESとなるまで繰り返される。 When the process of step S129, step S131, or step S132 ends, the control device 4a executes the process of step S133 that forms a second measurement start determination unit (second measurement start determination unit or second measurement start determination step). To do. In step S133, the control device 4a starts an operation of measuring the rotation of the turntable 11. Thereafter, the control device 4a performs the determination in step S134, which is a second rotation speed determination unit (a second rotation speed determination means or a second rotation speed determination step). In step S134, the control device 4a determines whether or not the measured rotation (n rotation) of the turntable 11 has reached the set rotation speed (PV). This determination is repeated until YES is obtained.
 ステップS134の判断がYESになると、制御装置4aは、第2計測終了部(第2計測終了手段又は第2計測終了工程)をなすステップS135の処理を実行する。このステップS135においては、制御装置4aは、回転盤11の回転を計測する動作を終了する。ステップS135の処理が終わると、処理は、杵先間隔制御部KKのステップS117に戻る。このため、ステップS117の判断がNOである場合、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔制御部KKによって杵先間隔を変更させる制御を再開する。こうしてステップS126の判断がYESであればステップS117に戻り、このステップS117の判断がNOである限り、杵先間隔の制御が繰り返され、ステップS125の判断がNOである限り、圧力制御部51の圧力制御基準値PMの更新が繰り返されるので、杵先間隔と成型圧力の小刻みな変更が段階的に行なわれる。 When the determination in step S134 is YES, the control device 4a executes the process of step S135 that forms a second measurement end unit (second measurement end means or second measurement end step). In step S135, the control device 4a ends the operation of measuring the rotation of the turntable 11. When the process of step S135 ends, the process returns to step S117 of the tip interval control unit KK. For this reason, when the determination in step S117 is NO, the control device 4a resumes the control for changing the tip interval by the tip interval control unit KK. Thus, if the determination in step S126 is YES, the process returns to step S117. As long as the determination in step S117 is NO, the control of the tip interval is repeated, and as long as the determination in step S125 is NO, the pressure control unit 51 Since the update of the pressure control reference value PM is repeated, every change in the tip interval and the molding pressure is performed step by step.
 この場合、既述のように杵先間隔制御部KKは、杵先間隔設定値lM及びLMの更新値にしたがって杵先間隔L及びlを小刻み(1.00mm以下例えば0.01mm)かつ段階的に変更(制御)する。それにより、成型圧力Pの急激な変動が抑制される。したがって、打錠装置1は、圧力制御部51での異常を検出しなくなり、圧力制御部51での異常検出により打錠機2の運転が停止される虞を回避することができる。 In this case, as described above, the tip distance control unit KK changes the tip distances L and l in small steps (1.00 mm or less, for example, 0.01 mm) in a stepwise manner according to the updated values of the tip distance setting values 1M and LM. (Control. Thereby, a rapid fluctuation of the molding pressure P is suppressed. Therefore, the tableting device 1 does not detect any abnormality in the pressure control unit 51, and can avoid the possibility that the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped due to the abnormality detection in the pressure control unit 51.
 また、圧力制御基準値PMも小刻みにかつ段階的に変更される。即ち、ステップS127~ステップS132において、圧力制御基準値PMと圧力制御基準算定値PMaとの差が規定圧力値より小さい場合、制御装置4aは、既に演算された圧力制御基準算定値PMaの値で圧力制御基準値PMを更新する制御を行い、又、圧力制御基準値PMと圧力制御基準算定値PMaとの差が規定圧力値より大きい場合、規定圧力値に従って演算される圧力制御基準算定値PMaの値で、圧力制御基準値PMを更新する制御を行う。 Also, the pressure control reference value PM is changed in small steps. That is, when the difference between the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculated value PMa is smaller than the specified pressure value in steps S127 to S132, the control device 4a uses the value of the pressure control reference calculated value PMa that has already been calculated. When the control for updating the pressure control reference value PM is performed and the difference between the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculated value PMa is larger than the specified pressure value, the pressure control reference calculated value PMa calculated according to the specified pressure value The control for updating the pressure control reference value PM is performed with the value of.
 それにより、圧力制御基準値PMの更新に伴う小刻みかつ段階的な制御によって、成型圧力Pの急激な変動が抑制される。したがって、打錠装置1は、圧力制御部51での異常を検出しなくなり、圧力制御部51での異常検出により打錠機2の運転が停止される虞を回避することができる。 Thereby, a rapid fluctuation of the molding pressure P is suppressed by small and stepwise control accompanying the update of the pressure control reference value PM. Therefore, the tableting device 1 does not detect any abnormality in the pressure control unit 51, and can avoid the possibility that the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped due to the abnormality detection in the pressure control unit 51.
 以上説明した制御パターン4(W単独制御)では、後述の錠剤の硬度の制御を含んでいないとともに、錠剤の厚みの制御も含んでいないため、各杵先間隔算定値lMa,LMaが夫々杵先間隔設定値lM,LMと同じであり、よって、杵先間隔は変更されない。 The control pattern 4 (W single control) described above does not include control of tablet hardness, which will be described later, and also does not include control of tablet thickness. Therefore, each of the tip interval calculation values lMa and LMa is the tip. This is the same as the interval set values 1M and LM, and therefore the tip interval is not changed.
 したがって、制御パターン4では、質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにする制御をしたときの算定圧力変動値PWaと、成型圧力平均値Pxとから求めた圧力制御基準算定値PMaは、錠剤の質量を質量制御基準値WMに制御する質量制御のみに見合った成型圧力値となり、この圧力制御基準算定値PMaの値で更新された圧力制御部51の圧力制御基準値PMに基づくフィードバック制御(FBC)が行われる。ここで、FBCとは、圧力制御部51に設定された圧力制御基準値(現在値)PMに応じた信号出力が軌道昇降機構19の軌道昇降用モータ19aに供給されるに伴い、下杵16の高さ位置を変えて、錠剤(成型品)の質量を補正する制御を指している。 Therefore, in the control pattern 4, the pressure control standard calculated value PMa calculated from the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass average value Wx is controlled to be the mass control standard calculated value WMa and the molding pressure average value Px is the tablet. Feedback control based on the pressure control reference value PM of the pressure control unit 51 updated with the value of the pressure control reference calculation value PMa. FBC). Here, the FBC means that the signal output corresponding to the pressure control reference value (current value) PM set in the pressure control unit 51 is supplied to the track lifting / lowering motor 19a of the track lifting / lowering mechanism 19 and the lower arm 16 Is a control for correcting the mass of a tablet (molded product) by changing the height position of the tablet.
(制御パターン6) 
 第1実施形態の制御パターン6(T単独制御)について以下説明する。
(Control pattern 6)
The control pattern 6 (T single control) of the first embodiment will be described below.
 パターン判別部において、ステップS1で錠剤の質量を制御しないことが選択されるとともに、ステップS13で錠剤の硬度を制御しないことが選択されると、制御装置4aは、制御パターン6(T単独制御)を選択し、打錠機2の連続運転で製造される錠剤に対する厚みのみの制御を実行する。 When the pattern discriminating unit selects not to control the mass of the tablet in step S1 and not to control the hardness of the tablet in step S13, the control device 4a controls the control pattern 6 (T single control). Is selected, and only the thickness control for the tablets manufactured by continuous operation of the tablet press 2 is executed.
 この制御パターン6による制御手順は、制御パターン4による制御と同様であるが、既述のように制御パターン6では、パターン判別部での制御パターンの選択に従い相関係数a4,a5は使用されず、相関係数a0~a3のみが演算処理において使用される。 The control procedure by the control pattern 6 is the same as the control by the control pattern 4, but as described above, in the control pattern 6, the correlation coefficients a4 and a5 are not used according to the selection of the control pattern by the pattern discrimination unit. Only the correlation coefficients a0 to a3 are used in the arithmetic processing.
 このため、ステップS109の処理で演算される算定圧力変動値PWaは、ステップS108の第2制御基準値更新部において、ステップS104の算定質量演算部により求めた算定質量Waの値で置換された質量制御基準算定値WMaを用いて質量制御したときの圧力変動値である。 For this reason, the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa calculated in the process of step S109 is the mass replaced with the value of the calculated mass Wa obtained by the calculated mass calculator in step S104 in the second control reference value update unit in step S108. It is a pressure fluctuation value when mass control is performed using the control reference calculation value WMa.
 言い換えれば、ステップS108においては、ステップS104の演算で用いる式(11)Wa=Wx+(PM-Px)/a0により求められる算定質量Waの値で、質量制御基準算定値WMaが置き換えられるため、式(11)はWMa=Wx+(PM-Px)/aに置き換えることができる。この質量制御基準算定値WMaをステップS109の演算で用いる式(12)PWa=a0(WMa-Wx)に代入すると、PWa=a0〔Wx+(PM-Px)/a0-Wx〕となり、PWa=PM-Pxと整理することができる。同様に、この第1算定圧力変動値PWaをステップS115の演算で用いる式(17)PMa=Px+PWa+PTaに代入すると、PMa=Px+PM-Px+PTaとなり、PMa=PM+PTaと整理することができる。 In other words, in step S108, the mass control reference calculated value WMa is replaced with the calculated mass Wa value obtained by the equation (11) Wa = Wx + (PM−Px) / a0 used in the calculation in step S104. (11) can be replaced with WMa = Wx + (PM−Px) / a. Substituting this mass control reference calculated value WMa into equation (12) PWa = a0 (WMa−Wx) used in the calculation of step S109, PWa = a0 [Wx + (PM−Px) / a0−Wx] and PWa = PM -Can be organized as Px. Similarly, when this first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa is substituted into the equation (17) PMa = Px + PWa + PTa used in the calculation of step S115, PMa = Px + PM−Px + PTa, and PMa = PM + PTa.
 このため、ステップS104、ステップS108及びステップS109の処理を経由して求められる第1算定圧力変動値PWaは、単に圧力制御基準値PMと成型圧力平均値Pxの差として求めることができる。したがって、制御装置4aは、サンプリングの度に求められる質量平均値Wx及びステップS104で求める算定質量Waの値に関係なく、第1算定圧力変動値PWaを求めることができる。 For this reason, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa obtained through the processing of step S104, step S108 and step S109 can be obtained simply as the difference between the pressure control reference value PM and the molding pressure average value Px. Therefore, the control device 4a can obtain the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa regardless of the mass average value Wx obtained every sampling and the calculated mass Wa obtained in step S104.
 つまり、制御パターン6における第1算定圧力変動値PWaは質量を制御しないときの圧力変動値である。このようにステップS108の処理を経由してステップS109で求められる第1算定圧力変動値PWaにより、ステップS115の処理で求められる圧力制御基準値PMaは、圧力制御基準値PM(現在値)と厚み制御をした時の第2算定圧力変動値PTaとから求めた値と等しくなり、錠剤の厚みのみが制御される。 That is, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa in the control pattern 6 is a pressure fluctuation value when the mass is not controlled. As described above, the first control pressure fluctuation value PWa obtained in step S109 via the process in step S108, the pressure control reference value PMa obtained in the process in step S115 is the pressure control reference value PM (current value) and the thickness. It becomes equal to the value obtained from the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa at the time of control, and only the tablet thickness is controlled.
 なお、本第1実施形態では「圧力制御部51でのFBCによる圧力制御すること」を前提としているので、錠剤の質量を制御しない制御パターン6の場合も、圧力制御部51でのFBC制御は機能する。しかし、この場合、錠剤質量を質量制御基準値WM(または規格基準値WO)に保持することを目的としたFBC制御ではなく、錠剤の厚みを制御するために求められ更新される圧力制御基準値PMに基づくFBC制御(圧力制御)として実行される。このことは、厚みと硬度を制御する場合(質量の制御を含まない、後述の制御パターン5のTH制御の場合)も同様である。 In the first embodiment, since “pressure control by FBC in the pressure control unit 51” is assumed, the FBC control in the pressure control unit 51 is also performed in the control pattern 6 in which the mass of the tablet is not controlled. Function. However, in this case, the pressure control reference value that is obtained and updated to control the thickness of the tablet, not the FBC control for maintaining the tablet mass at the mass control reference value WM (or the standard reference value WO). This is executed as FBC control (pressure control) based on PM. The same applies to the case where the thickness and hardness are controlled (in the case of TH control of control pattern 5 described later, which does not include mass control).
 一方、制御パターン6では相関係数a3を使用するので、ステップS111の処理で、a3(TMa-Ta)で求めた値と第2位置での杵先間隔設定値LMとの合計値が、算定厚みTaを厚み制御基準算定値TMaにしたとき(厚み制御をしたとき)の第2位置での杵先間隔算定値LMaとして求められる。同様に、ステップS111の処理では、a3(TMa-Ta)で求めた値と第1位置での杵先間隔設定値lMとの合計値が、算定厚みTaを厚み制御基準算定値TMaにしたとき(厚み制御をしたとき)の第1位置での杵先間隔算定値lMaとして求められる。 On the other hand, since the correlation coefficient a3 is used in the control pattern 6, the sum of the value obtained in a3 (TMa-Ta) and the tip interval setting value LM at the second position in the process of step S111 is calculated. It is obtained as the tip distance calculated value LMa at the second position when the thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa (when the thickness is controlled). Similarly, in the process of step S111, when the total value of the value obtained in a3 (TMa−Ta) and the tip distance setting value 1M at the first position sets the calculated thickness Ta to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa. It is obtained as the tip distance calculation value lMa at the first position (when the thickness is controlled).
 そして、杵先間隔制御部KKにより杵先間隔設定値lM,LMが夫々小刻みかつ段階的に更新される。こうして更新された杵先間隔設定値lMとなるように予備圧縮用の間隔調整機構24が制御されることにより第1位置での杵先間隔が変えられるとともに、更新された杵先間隔設定値LMとなるように本圧縮用の間隔調整機構28が制御されることにより第2位置での杵先間隔が変えられる。 The tip interval setting values 1M and LM are updated little by little by the tip interval control unit KK. The tip compression interval at the first position is changed by controlling the preliminary compression interval adjusting mechanism 24 so that the updated tip separation setting value 1M is obtained, and the updated tip separation setting value LM. By controlling the interval adjustment mechanism 28 for main compression so as to become, the tip interval at the second position is changed.
 したがって、制御パターン6においては、既述のように圧力制御部51の圧力制御基準値PMに相当する質量(算定質量Wa)の成型品が生産される。この場合、制御装置4aは、既述の第1算定圧力変動値PWaと、第2算定圧力変動値PTaと、成型品の成型圧力平均値Pxとから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求めることによりサンプリングの度に求められる算定質量Waを保持すると共に、杵先間隔設定値の更新に見合った圧力制御基準値PMの更新に従って、錠剤の厚みのみを制御する。 Therefore, in the control pattern 6, as described above, a molded product having a mass (calculated mass Wa) corresponding to the pressure control reference value PM of the pressure control unit 51 is produced. In this case, the control device 4a performs sampling by obtaining the pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa, the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa, and the molding pressure average value Px of the molded product. The calculated mass Wa obtained each time is held, and only the thickness of the tablet is controlled according to the update of the pressure control reference value PM commensurate with the update of the tip interval setting value.
 この制御では、既述のように圧力制御部51の圧力制御基準値PMに相当する質量(算定質量Wa)の錠剤(成型品)が生産される。この場合、制御装置4aは、まず、ステップS104で圧力制御基準値PMに相当する算定質量Waを求め、ステップS108でこの算定質量Waの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを置き換え、更にステップS109の第1算定圧力変動値演算部で、質量平均値Wxをこの質量制御基準算定値WMa(算定質量Waと同一値)に制御したときの算定圧力変動値PWa(第1算定圧力変動値)を求める。次に、制御装置4aは、ステップS115の圧力制御基準算定値演算部で、第1算定圧力変動値PWaと、ステップS112で求めた既述の第2算定圧力変動値PTaと、サンプリング錠の成型圧力平均値Pxとから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求める。それにより、制御装置4aは、サンプリングの度に求められる算定質量Waを保持しながら、杵先間隔設定値の更新に見合った圧力制御基準値PMの更新に従って、錠剤の厚みのみを制御することができる。 In this control, as described above, a tablet (molded product) having a mass (calculated mass Wa) corresponding to the pressure control reference value PM of the pressure control unit 51 is produced. In this case, the control device 4a first obtains the calculated mass Wa corresponding to the pressure control reference value PM in step S104, replaces the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the value of the calculated mass Wa in step S108, and further in step S109. The first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit obtains the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa (first calculated pressure fluctuation value) when the mass average value Wx is controlled to the mass control reference calculated value WMa (the same value as the calculated mass Wa). . Next, the control device 4a is a pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit in step S115, and forms the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa, the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa described in step S112, and the sampling tablet. A pressure control reference calculation value PMa is obtained from the pressure average value Px. Thereby, the control device 4a can control only the tablet thickness according to the update of the pressure control reference value PM commensurate with the update of the tip interval setting value while holding the calculated mass Wa obtained every sampling. it can.
 以上のように制御パターン6は、パターン判別部のステップS1で錠剤の質量を制御しないことが選択された条件で、かつ、ステップS13で錠剤の硬度を制御しないことが選択された条件で実行される。このため、ステップS111で算出された杵先間隔算定値lMa,LMaに基づく杵先間隔の変更(正確には、杵先間隔制御部KKでの補正を加味した杵先間隔の変更)、及びステップS115で算出された圧力制御基準算定値PMaに基づく制御圧力値の変更(正確には、制御圧力値更新部PKでの更新を加味した制御圧力値の変更)による錠剤の厚みの制御が行われる。これにより、製造される錠剤に対する厚みのみの制御が行われる。 As described above, the control pattern 6 is executed under the condition where it is selected not to control the mass of the tablet in step S1 of the pattern discriminating unit, and under the condition where the hardness of the tablet is not controlled in step S13. The For this reason, the change of the tip interval based on the tip interval calculated values lMa and LMa calculated in step S111 (more precisely, the change of the tip interval in consideration of the correction in the tip interval control unit KK), and the step Control of the tablet thickness is performed by changing the control pressure value based on the pressure control reference calculation value PMa calculated in S115 (more precisely, by changing the control pressure value taking into account the update at the control pressure value update unit PK). . Thereby, only thickness control with respect to the tablet manufactured is performed.
(制御パターン2) 
 第1実施形態の制御パターン2(WT制御)について以下説明する。パターン判別部で、ステップS3で錠剤の硬度を制御しないことが選択された条件下で、制御パターン2(WT制御)が選択されると、制御装置4aは、打錠機2の連続運転で製造される錠剤に対する質量と厚みの制御を実行する。
(Control pattern 2)
The control pattern 2 (WT control) of the first embodiment will be described below. When control pattern 2 (WT control) is selected under the condition that the pattern discriminating unit has selected not to control tablet hardness in step S3, control device 4a is manufactured by continuous operation of tablet press 2. Control the mass and thickness of the tablets to be produced.
 この制御パターン2では、相関係数a4,a5は使用されず、相関係数a0~a3が演算処理において使用される。 In this control pattern 2, the correlation coefficients a4 and a5 are not used, and the correlation coefficients a0 to a3 are used in the arithmetic processing.
 したがって、杵先間隔制御部KKでのステップS121a~121cによって、制御装置4aは、第1位置での杵先間隔を制御するとともに、第2位置での杵先間隔を制御する。また、制御圧力値更新部PKでのステップS129、ステップS131又はステップS132の処理によって、制御装置4aは、圧力制御部51の圧力制御基準値PMを更新するとともに、各制御圧力値を更新する。これにより、軌道昇降機構19を介して下杵16の高さ位置が変えられて、錠剤(成型品)の質量を補正するフィードバック制御(FBC)が行われ、錠剤の厚みと質量の制御が行われる。 Therefore, the control device 4a controls the tip spacing at the first position and the tip spacing at the second position by steps S121a to 121c in the tip spacing control unit KK. Further, the control device 4a updates the pressure control reference value PM of the pressure control unit 51 and updates each control pressure value by the processing of step S129, step S131, or step S132 in the control pressure value update unit PK. As a result, the height position of the lower punch 16 is changed via the trajectory elevating mechanism 19, feedback control (FBC) for correcting the mass of the tablet (molded product) is performed, and the thickness and mass of the tablet are controlled. Is called.
 繰り返し簡単に説明すれば、錠剤の硬度の制御を含まない前記ステップS109~ステップS126により実行される運転制御系統により、既述のように杵先間隔設定値lM,LMを変更することができるため、制御装置4aは成型圧力が変動して錠剤の質量を変えないように制御できる。 Briefly, because the operation control system executed in steps S109 to S126 does not include tablet hardness control, the tip interval setting values 1M and LM can be changed as described above. The control device 4a can control the molding pressure so as not to change and change the mass of the tablet.
 そのために、まず、制御装置4aは、質量制御をしたとき(サンプリングされた錠剤の質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたとき)の第1算定圧力変動値PWaを、成型圧力Pと質量Wとの間に成立するP-W相関係数a0を用いて求めるとともに、前記質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値を、厚みTと質量Wとの間に成立するT-W相関係数a1を用いて求め、この厚み変動値と厚み平均値Txとから錠剤の算定厚みTaを求める。次に、制御装置4aは、厚み制御をしたとき(算定厚みTaを厚み制御基準算定値TMaにしたとき)の第2算定圧力変動値PTaを、成型圧力Pと厚みTとの間に成立するP-T相関係数a2を用いて求めるとともに、前記厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔変動値を、杵先間隔と厚みとの間に成立するL-T相関係数a3を用いて求め、この杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値LM、lMとから杵先間隔算定値LMa、lMaを夫々求める。この後、制御装置4aは、成型圧力平均値Pxと、質量制御による第1算定圧力変動値PWaと、厚み制御による第2算定圧力変動値PTaとから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求める。更に、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔算定値LMa、lMaで杵先間隔設定値LM、lMを夫々更新して、杵先間隔を制御するとともに、圧力制御基準算定値PMaの値で圧力制御基準値PMを更新して各制御圧力値を更新し、更新された各制御圧力値で成型圧力Pを制御する。 For this purpose, first, the control device 4a uses the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass control is performed (when the mass average value Wx of the sampled tablets is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa) as the molding pressure P. The TW correlation coefficient established between the thickness T and the mass W is obtained by using the PW correlation coefficient a0 established between the thickness W and the thickness fluctuation value when the mass control is performed. The calculated thickness Ta of the tablet is obtained from the thickness variation value and the average thickness value Tx. Next, the control device 4a establishes the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa between the molding pressure P and the thickness T when the thickness is controlled (when the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa). And using the PT correlation coefficient a2 to determine the variation value of the tip interval when the thickness is controlled using the LT correlation coefficient a3 established between the tip interval and the thickness, The tip interval calculation values LMa and lMa are obtained from the tip interval variation value and the tip interval setting values LM and 1M, respectively. Thereafter, the control device 4a obtains the pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the molding pressure average value Px, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa by mass control, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa by thickness control. Further, the control device 4a updates the tip interval setting values LM and 1M with the tip interval calculation values LMa and lMa, respectively, to control the tip interval, and the pressure control reference with the pressure control reference calculation value PMa. The value PM is updated to update each control pressure value, and the molding pressure P is controlled with each updated control pressure value.
 こうした制御によれば、打錠機2の連続運転中に、錠剤の厚み減少などの変動を補正する厚み制御に見合って、杵先間隔L、lが制御され、更新された圧力制御基準値PMを基準とするフィードバック制御が行われて、臼12への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵16の高さ位置が調節される。 According to such control, during the continuous operation of the tableting machine 2, the tips L and l are controlled in accordance with the thickness control that corrects fluctuations such as a decrease in tablet thickness, and the updated pressure control reference value PM Is used as a reference, and the height position of the lower punch 16 that defines the filling depth of the powder into the die 12 is adjusted.
 パターン判別部のステップS3において錠剤の硬度を制御しないことが選択された制御パターン2を用いると、打錠装置1は、ステップS115で算出される質量制御と厚み制御とに見合った圧力制御基準算定値PMaに基づくフィードバック制御と、ステップS111で算出される杵先間隔算定値LMa、lMaに基づく杵先間隔の制御による錠剤の質量と厚みの制御とに従って、錠剤を製造する。 When the control pattern 2 selected not to control the tablet hardness in step S3 of the pattern discriminating unit is used, the tableting device 1 calculates the pressure control standard suitable for the mass control and thickness control calculated in step S115. Tablets are manufactured according to feedback control based on the value PMa and control of the tablet mass and thickness by controlling the tip distance calculated values LMa and lMa calculated in step S111.
(制御パターン1) 
 第1実施形態での制御パターン1(WTH制御)について以下説明する。
(Control pattern 1)
The control pattern 1 (WTH control) in the first embodiment will be described below.
 図4Aに示した前記ステップS105の判断がYESとなった場合、つまり、パターン判別部で選択された制御パターンが錠剤の硬度の制御を含んでいると判断した場合の制御手順を、まず、パターン判別部で制御パターン1(WTH制御)が選択された場合について図7~図11を参照して説明する。制御パターン1では、演算処理において相関係数a0~a5の全てが以下説明するように使用される。 When the determination in step S105 shown in FIG. 4A is YES, that is, when it is determined that the control pattern selected by the pattern determination unit includes control of tablet hardness, A case where the control pattern 1 (WTH control) is selected by the determination unit will be described with reference to FIGS. In the control pattern 1, all of the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 are used in the calculation process as described below.
 ステップS105の判断がYESになると、制御装置4aは、第3制御基準算定値更新部(第3制御基準算定値更新手段又は第3制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS137の処理を実行する。図7に示したステップS137は、前記ステップS106と同じく、以降の演算処理の整合性を確保するために設けられている。 When the determination in step S105 is YES, the control device 4a executes the process of step S137 that constitutes a third control reference calculation value update unit (third control reference calculation value update means or a third control reference calculation value update step). . Step S137 shown in FIG. 7 is provided in order to ensure the consistency of the subsequent arithmetic processing, similarly to step S106.
 このステップS137においては、制御装置4aは、各基準値(各規格基準値)の夫々の値で、対応する制御基準算定値を置換する処理を行う。つまり、制御装置4aは、錠剤の質量基準値WOの値で錠剤の質量制御基準算定値WMaを、錠剤の厚み基準値TOの値で錠剤の厚み制御基準算定値TMaを、錠剤の硬度基準値HOの値で錠剤の硬度制御基準算定値HMaを、夫々置き換える。このとき、質量基準値WOと質量制御基準算定値WMaは同一値、厚み基準値TOと厚み制御基準算定値TMaとは同一値、硬度基準値HOと硬度制御基準算定値HMaは同一値である。 In step S137, the control device 4a performs a process of replacing the corresponding control reference calculated value with each value of each reference value (each standard reference value). That is, the control device 4a uses the tablet mass reference value WO as the tablet mass control standard calculation value WMa, the tablet thickness standard value TO as the tablet thickness control standard calculation value TMa, and the tablet hardness standard value. The hardness control standard calculation value HMa of the tablet is replaced with the value of HO, respectively. At this time, the mass reference value WO and the mass control reference calculation value WMa are the same value, the thickness reference value TO and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa are the same value, and the hardness reference value HO and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa are the same value. .
 次に、制御装置4aは、制御パターン第3選択部(制御パターン第3選択手段又は制御パターン第3選択工程)をなすステップS138の判断を行なう。このステップS138においては、制御装置4aは、制御パターン1,3のいずれかが選択されているか否かを判断する。 Next, the control device 4a performs the determination in step S138, which constitutes a control pattern third selection unit (control pattern third selection means or control pattern third selection step). In step S138, the control device 4a determines whether any one of the control patterns 1 and 3 is selected.
 パターン判別部で制御パターン1,3のいずれかが選択されている場合、ステップS138の判断はYESになる。これを受けて、制御装置4aは、ステップS140、ステップS141の各工程を有して錠剤の算定硬度Haを求める第1算定硬度判断部(第1算定硬度判断手段又は第1算定硬度判断工程)WK1を実行する。 If any one of the control patterns 1 and 3 is selected by the pattern determination unit, the determination in step S138 is YES. In response to this, the control device 4a includes steps S140 and S141, and a first calculated hardness determination unit (first calculated hardness determination means or first calculated hardness determination step) that calculates the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet. Execute WK1.
 即ち、まず、制御装置4aは、第1算定硬度演算部(第1算定硬度演算手段又は第1算定硬度演算工程)をなすステップS140の処理を実行する。ステップS140においては、制御装置4aは、質量制御をしたとき(質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたとき)の硬度変動値(これを第1硬度変動値という。)と、厚み制御をしたとき(厚み平均値Txを厚み制御基準算定値TMaにしたとき)の硬度変動値(これを第2硬度変動値という。)と、硬度平均値Hxとから、錠剤の算定硬度Haを次式により求める。 
 Ha=Hx+〔(WMa-Wx)/a5〕+〔(TMa-Tx)/a4〕……式(18)。
That is, first, the control device 4a executes the process of step S140 that forms the first calculated hardness calculation unit (the first calculated hardness calculation means or the first calculated hardness calculation step). In step S140, the control device 4a controls the thickness when the mass control is performed (when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa) (this is referred to as a first hardness variation value). From the hardness fluctuation value (this is called the second hardness fluctuation value) when the thickness average value Tx is set to the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet Obtained by the formula.
Ha = Hx + [(WMa−Wx) / a5] + [(TMa−Tx) / a4] (18)
 この式(18)において、Hxはサンプリング錠の硬度平均値、a5はW-H相関係数、〔(WMa-Wx)/a5〕で演算された値が第1硬度変動値である。また、サンプリング錠のTxは厚み平均値、a4はT-H相関係数であり、〔(TMa-Tx)/a4〕で演算された値が第2硬度変動値である。したがって、式(18)を用いて、制御装置4aは、硬度平均値Hxと第1硬度変動値と第2硬度変動値とを合計して、算定硬度Haを求めることができる。 In this formula (18), Hx is the hardness average value of the sampling tablets, a5 is the WH correlation coefficient, and the value calculated by [(WMa-Wx) / a5] is the first hardness fluctuation value. Further, Tx of the sampling tablet is an average thickness value, a4 is a TH correlation coefficient, and a value calculated by [(TMa-Tx) / a4] is a second hardness variation value. Therefore, using the equation (18), the control device 4a can obtain the calculated hardness Ha by adding the hardness average value Hx, the first hardness variation value, and the second hardness variation value.
 次に、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第1判断部(算定硬度第1判断手段又は算定硬度第1判断工程)をなすステップS141の判断を行なう。ステップS141の判断は次の二つの現象を前提としている。第1は、製造される錠剤の厚みTが同じ、言い換えれば、打錠機2の杵先間隔を一定に保持した条件で、錠剤の質量Wを減らす制御を行えば、製造される錠剤の硬度Hが下がる、という現象である。第2は、製造される錠剤の質量Wを一定に保持した条件で、錠剤の厚みTを増やす、言い換えれば、打錠機2の杵先間隔を広げる制御を行えば、製造される錠剤の硬度Hが下がる、という現象である。 Next, the control device 4a performs the determination in step S141 which constitutes a calculated hardness first determining unit (calculated hardness first determining means or calculated hardness first determining step). The determination in step S141 is based on the following two phenomena. The first is that the thickness T of the tablets to be produced is the same, in other words, the hardness of the tablets to be produced if the control is performed to reduce the mass W of the tablets under the condition that the tip spacing of the tablet press 2 is kept constant. This is a phenomenon that H decreases. Second, if the tablet thickness T is increased under the condition that the mass W of the manufactured tablet is kept constant, in other words, the hardness of the manufactured tablet is controlled by increasing the gap between the tips of the tablet press 2. This is a phenomenon that H decreases.
 これらの前提のもとにステップS141においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが適正(錠剤の硬度を規格範囲内に保持して生産することが可能)であるか否かを判断する。つまり、ステップS141においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが、質量・厚み・硬度の各制御基準値補正範囲の上限値又は下限値への各制御基準値補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるのか否かを判断する。 Based on these assumptions, in step S141, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is appropriate (can be produced while maintaining the tablet hardness within the standard range). That is, in step S141, the control device 4a has the calculated hardness Ha within the range of hardness controllable by each control reference value correction to the upper limit value or lower limit value of each control reference value correction range of mass, thickness, and hardness. It is determined whether or not.
 既述の算定硬度Haが硬度制御可能範囲に入っているか否かは、次の二つの式に基づいて判断することができる。 
 HOL<Ha+〔(WOH-WMa)/a5〕+〔(TOL-TMa)/a4〕
 HOH>Ha-〔(WMa-WOL)/a5〕-〔(TMa-TOH)/a4〕
 さらに前記二つの式は各々次のように変換することができる。
Whether or not the above-described calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range can be determined based on the following two equations.
HOL <Ha + [(WOH−WMa) / a5] + [(TOL−TMa) / a4]
HOH> Ha-[(WMa-WOL) / a5]-[(TMa-TOH) / a4]
Further, each of the two expressions can be converted as follows.
 HOL-〔(WOH-WMa)/a5〕-〔(TOL-TMa)/a4<Ha〕
 Ha<HOH+〔(WMa-WOL)/a5〕+〔(TMa-TOH)/a4〕
 このことから、ステップS141に示すHOL-〔(WOH-WMa)/a5〕-〔(TOL-TMa)/a4〕<Ha<HOH+〔(WMa-WOL)/a5〕+〔(TMa-TOH)/a4〕の式に置き換えて判断することができる。
HOL-[(WOH-WMa) / a5]-[(TOL-TMa) / a4 <Ha]
Ha <HOH + [(WMa−WOL) / a5] + [(TMa−TOH) / a4]
From this, HOL-[(WOH-WMa) / a5]-[(TOL-TMa) / a4] <Ha <HOH + [(WMa-WOL) / a5] + [(TMa-TOH) / It can be determined by substituting the equation of a4].
 ここで、HOL-〔(WOH-WMa)/a5〕-〔(TOL-TMa)/a4〕を硬度制御可能範囲の下限値HLとし、HOH+〔(WMa-WOL)/a5〕+〔(TMa-TOH)/a4〕を硬度可能範囲の上限値HHとした時、ステップS141での硬度制御可能範囲の下限値HLは次式で演算される。 Here, HOL − [(WOH−WMa) / a5] − [(TOL−TMa) / a4] is defined as the lower limit value HL of the hardness controllable range, and HOH + [(WMa−WOL) / a5] + [(TMa− TOH) / a4] is the upper limit value HH of the possible hardness range, the lower limit value HL of the hardness controllable range in step S141 is calculated by the following equation.
 HL=HOL-〔(WOH-WMa)/a5〕-〔(TOL-TMa)/a4〕
ステップS141での硬度制御可能範囲の上限値HHは次式で演算される。
HL = HOL-[(WOH-WMa) / a5]-[(TOL-TMa) / a4]
The upper limit value HH of the hardness controllable range in step S141 is calculated by the following equation.
 HH=HOH+〔(WMa-WOL)/a5〕+〔(TMa-TOH)/a4〕
 これらの式において、HOLは錠剤の硬度制御基準値補正範囲の下限値、HOHは錠剤の硬度制御基準値補正範囲の上限値、WOLは錠剤の質量制御基準値補正範囲の下限値、WOHは錠剤の質量制御基準値補正範囲の上限値、TOLは錠剤の厚み制御基準値補正範囲の下限値、TOHは錠剤の厚み制御基準値補正範囲の上限値であり、a5はW-H相関係数、a4はT-H相関係数である。
HH = HOH + [(WMa-WOL) / a5] + [(TMa-TOH) / a4]
In these equations, HOL is the lower limit value of the tablet hardness control reference value correction range, HOH is the upper limit value of the tablet hardness control reference value correction range, WOL is the lower limit value of the tablet mass control reference value correction range, and WOH is the tablet. The upper limit value of the mass control reference value correction range, TOL is the lower limit value of the tablet thickness control reference value correction range, TOH is the upper limit value of the tablet thickness control reference value correction range, a5 is the WH correlation coefficient, a4 is a TH correlation coefficient.
 したがって、ステップS141においては、制御装置4aは、HL<Ha<HHの式によって算定硬度Haが適正(錠剤の硬度を規格範囲内に保持して生産することが可能)であるのか否かを判断する。 Therefore, in step S141, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is appropriate (can be produced while maintaining the tablet hardness within the standard range) by an expression of HL <Ha <HH. To do.
 ステップS141の判断がNO(算定硬度Haが質量・厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲外)であることは、質量・厚み・硬度の全ての制御基準算定値を補正しても、製造される錠剤の硬度を規格範囲内とする制御ができない、ということである。この場合、制御装置4aは、報知・停止部(報知・停止手段又は報知・停止手段工程)をなすステップS146の処理を実行する。これにより、異常を報知する信号(異常信号)が出力されるととともに、例えば打錠機2の運転が停止される。 If the determination in step S141 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the control reference calculation values for mass, thickness, and hardness), all control reference calculation values for mass, thickness, and hardness are corrected. Even so, the hardness of the tablets to be produced cannot be controlled within the standard range. In this case, the control device 4a executes the process of step S146 that forms a notification / stop unit (notification / stop unit or notification / stop unit step). As a result, a signal for reporting an abnormality (abnormal signal) is output, and for example, the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped.
 ステップS141の判断がYESになると、制御装置4aは、図8に示す補正先第1判断部(補正先第1判断手段又は補正先第1判断工程)をなすステップS151の判断を行なう。このステップS151においては、制御装置4aは、制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「硬度」であるか否かを判断する。 When the determination in step S141 is YES, the control device 4a performs the determination in step S151 which is a correction destination first determination unit (correction destination first determination means or correction destination first determination step) shown in FIG. In step S151, the control device 4a determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “hardness”.
 制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「硬度」でない場合、ステップS151の判断はNOとなるので、制御装置4aは、補正先第2判断部(補正先第2判断手段又は補正先第2判断工程)をなすステップS161の判断を行なう。このステップS161においては、制御装置4aは、制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「厚み」であるか否かを判断する。 If the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is not “hardness”, the determination in step S151 is NO, so that the control device 4a determines the correction destination second determination unit (correction destination second determination means or correction destination second). The determination in step S161 is performed. In step S161, the control device 4a determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculated value is “thickness”.
 制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「厚み」でない場合、ステップS161の判断はNOとなるので、制御装置4aは、補正先第3判断部(補正先第3判断手段又は補正先第3判断工程)をなすステップS171の判断を行なう。ステップS171においては、制御装置4aは、制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「質量」であるか否かを判断する。なお、これらステップS151、S161、およびS171は、いずれも硬度制御可能範囲に入るか否かを判断する判断部(判断手段)ではなく、あくまでも制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が何であるかを判断する判断部(判断手段)である。 When the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is not “thickness”, the determination in step S161 is NO, and thus the control device 4a determines that the correction destination third determination unit (correction destination third determination means or correction destination third The determination in step S171 is performed. In step S171, the control device 4a determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculated value is “mass”. In addition, these steps S151, S161, and S171 are not determination units (determination means) for determining whether or not all fall within the hardness controllable range, but what is the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value to the last? It is a judgment part (judgment means) which judges.
 ステップS171の判断がNOである場合、即ち、既述の入力装置により設定された順位に従って硬度、厚み、及び質量のいずれの制御基準算定値も1番目の補正先として設定(登録)されていない、と判断された場合、打錠装置1は、制御装置4aによる制御はできない。このため、制御装置4aは、前記ステップS146の処理を実行し、異常を報知する信号(異常信号)を出力するとともに、例えば打錠機2の運転を停止させる。なお、このような選択肢は、前段のステップS4で予め制御基準算定値の補正順位を登録しているので、実際にはあり得ない。 If the determination in step S171 is NO, that is, no control standard calculation values for hardness, thickness, and mass are set (registered) as the first correction destination according to the rank set by the input device described above. , The tableting device 1 cannot be controlled by the control device 4a. For this reason, the control device 4a executes the process of step S146, outputs a signal notifying abnormality (abnormal signal), and stops the operation of the tableting machine 2, for example. Note that such an option is not actually possible because the correction order of the control reference calculation value is registered in advance in step S4.
 ステップS151の判断がYESである(制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が硬度である)場合、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第3判断部(算定硬度第3判断手段、算定硬度第3判断工程)をなすステップS152の判断を行なう。このステップS152においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが、硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する。 When the determination in step S151 is YES (the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is hardness), the control device 4a determines the calculated hardness third determination unit (calculated hardness third determination means, calculated hardness third determination). The determination in step S152 is performed. In step S152, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculated value HMa.
 ここで、硬度制御可能範囲は次式で規定される。 
 HMa-kh(HMa-HOL)≦Ha≦HMa+kh(HOH-HMa)
 この式でkhは硬度制御基準算定値HMaを補正するときの硬度補正係数であり、0.01~1.00の任意な値に設定される。硬度補正係数khは1.00未満であることが好ましい。
Here, the hardness controllable range is defined by the following equation.
HMa−kh (HMa−HOL) ≦ Ha ≦ HMa + kh (HOH−HMa)
In this equation, kh is a hardness correction coefficient when correcting the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, and is set to an arbitrary value between 0.01 and 1.00. The hardness correction coefficient kh is preferably less than 1.00.
 なお、硬度補正係数khが1.00の場合、硬度制御可能範囲は次式の通りとなる。 
 HOL≦Ha≦HOH
 ステップS152の判断がYESである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内である)場合、制御装置4aは、第1硬度制御基準算定値更新部(第1硬度制御基準値更新手段又は第1硬度制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS153を実行する。このステップS153においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理での整合性を確保するため算定硬度Haの値で硬度制御基準算定値HMaを更新する。
When the hardness correction coefficient kh is 1.00, the hardness controllable range is as follows.
HOL ≦ Ha ≦ HOH
When the determination in step S152 is YES (calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculation value HMa), the control device 4a includes the first hardness control reference calculation value update unit (first hardness). Step S153, which is a control reference value update means or a first hardness control reference calculation value update step), is executed. In step S153, the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculated value HMa with the value of the calculated hardness Ha in order to ensure consistency in the subsequent arithmetic processing.
 この後、制御装置4aは、ステップS153で更新された硬度制御基準算定値HMaを前記ステップS109の処理に供給する。そのため、ステップS152がYESと判断した場合、ステップS153の処理を経て前記ステップS109~ステップS126の処理が実行される。それにより、打錠装置1は、製造される錠剤の硬度を規格の範囲内に保持して錠剤を製造することができる。 Thereafter, the control device 4a supplies the hardness control reference calculation value HMa updated in step S153 to the processing in step S109. Therefore, when step S152 is determined to be YES, the processing of step S109 to step S126 is executed through the processing of step S153. Thereby, the tableting apparatus 1 can manufacture a tablet, keeping the hardness of the tablet manufactured within the range of a specification.
 ステップS152の判断がNOである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲外である)場合、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第6判断部(算定硬度第6判断手段又は算定硬度第6判断工程)であるステップS154を実行する。図9に示すステップS154においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが、錠剤の硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さいか否かを、次式によって判断する。 If the determination in step S152 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the hardness control reference calculated value HMa), the control device 4a uses the calculated hardness sixth determining unit (calculated hardness sixth determining means). Alternatively, step S154 which is a calculated hardness sixth determination step) is executed. In step S154 shown in FIG. 9, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the tablet hardness control reference calculated value HMa by the following equation.
 HMa-kh(HMa-HOL)>Ha
 ステップS154の判断がYESである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さい)場合、制御装置4aは、第2硬度制御基準算定値更新部(第2硬度制御基準算定値更新手段又は第2硬度制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS155を実行する。図9に示すステップS155においては、制御装置4aは、硬度制御基準算定値HMa等を用いて錠剤の硬度制御基準暫定値HMbを下記の式によって求める。 
  HMb=HMa-kh(HMa-HOL)……式(19)。
HMa-kh (HMa-HOL)> Ha
When the determination in step S154 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa), the control device 4a includes the second hardness control reference calculation value update unit (second hardness control reference calculation value update means or Step S155 which performs (2 hardness control reference calculation value update step) is executed. In step S155 shown in FIG. 9, the control device 4a obtains the tablet hardness control reference provisional value HMb by the following equation using the hardness control reference calculated value HMa and the like.
HMb = HMa−kh (HMa−HOL) (Equation 19)
 また、ステップS155においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された硬度制御基準暫定値HMbの値で硬度制御基準算定値HMaを更新する。つまり、ステップS155においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さい場合、硬度制御基準値補正範囲の下限値HOLと硬度制御基準算定値HMaとの差に、ステップS152で用いた硬度補正係数khを乗じた値と、硬度制御基準算定値HMaとから硬度制御基準暫定値HMbを求めて、この硬度制御基準暫定値HMbの値で硬度制御基準算定値HMaを更新する。これにより、硬度制御基準算定値HMaを減らす処理がなされる。 In step S155, the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculated value HMa with the calculated hardness control reference provisional value HMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S155, when the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines that the difference between the lower limit value HOL of the hardness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference calculated value HMa is step S152. The hardness control reference provisional value HMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the hardness correction coefficient kh used in the above and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is updated with the value of the hardness control reference provisional value HMb. . Thereby, the process which reduces the hardness control reference | standard calculated value HMa is made.
 この処理において、硬度補正係数khが1.00未満に設定されている場合における補正では、許される範囲で限度一杯まで、硬度制御基準算定値HMaを一気に減らす処理をするのではなく、硬度補正係数khによる補正にしたがい前記限度より小さく硬度制御基準算定値HMaが減らされる。なお、硬度補正係数khが1.00に設定されている場合における補正では、許される範囲の限度一杯まで、硬度制御基準算定値HMaが一気に減らされる。 In this process, in the case where the hardness correction coefficient kh is set to be less than 1.00, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is not reduced at a stretch to the full range within the allowable range, but is processed by the hardness correction coefficient kh. In accordance with the correction, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is reduced below the limit. In the correction in the case where the hardness correction coefficient kh is set to 1.00, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is reduced at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
 ステップS154の判断がNOである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより大きい)場合、制御装置4aは、第2硬度制御基準算定値更新部(第2硬度制御基準算定値更新手段又は第2硬度制御基準算定値更新工程)であるステップS156の処理を実行する。図9に示すステップS156においては、制御装置4aは、硬度制御基準算定値HMa等を用いて錠剤の硬度制御基準暫定値HMbを下記の式によって求める。 
  HMb=HMa+kh(HOH-HMa)……式(20)。
If the determination in step S154 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is greater than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa), the control device 4a is configured to update the second hardness control reference calculation value update unit (second hardness control reference calculation value update means or Step S156, which is a 2 hardness control reference calculated value update step), is executed. In step S156 shown in FIG. 9, the control device 4a calculates the tablet hardness control reference provisional value HMb using the hardness control reference calculated value HMa and the like by the following equation.
HMb = HMa + kh (HOH−HMa) (Equation 20)
 また、ステップS156においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された硬度制御基準暫定値HMbの値で硬度制御基準算定値HMaを更新する。つまり、ステップS156においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより大きい場合、硬度制御基準値補正範囲の上限値HOHと硬度制御基準算定値HMaとの差に、ステップS152で用いた硬度補正係数khを乗じた値と、硬度制御基準算定値HMaとから硬度制御基準暫定値HMbを求めて、この硬度制御基準暫定値HMbの値で硬度制御基準算定値HMaを更新する。これにより、硬度制御基準算定値HMaを増やす処理がなされる。 In step S156, the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculated value HMa with the calculated hardness control reference provisional value HMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S156, when the calculated hardness Ha is larger than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the upper limit value HOH of the hardness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference calculated value HMa is step S152. The hardness control reference provisional value HMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the hardness correction coefficient kh used in the above and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is updated with the value of the hardness control reference provisional value HMb. . Thereby, the process which increases the hardness control reference | standard calculation value HMa is made.
 この処理において、硬度補正係数khが1.00未満に設定されている場合における補正では、許される範囲で限度一杯まで、硬度制御基準算定値HMaを一気に増やす処理をするのではなく、硬度補正係数khによる補正にしたがい前記限度より小さく硬度制御基準算定値HMaが増やされる。なお、硬度補正係数khが1.00に設定されている場合における補正では、許される範囲の限度一杯まで、硬度制御基準算定値HMaが一気に増やされる。 In this process, in the case where the hardness correction coefficient kh is set to less than 1.00, the process is not performed by increasing the hardness control reference calculation value HMa all at once, but by the hardness correction coefficient kh. According to the correction, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is increased below the limit. In the correction when the hardness correction coefficient kh is set to 1.00, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is increased at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
 以上のようにステップS154~ステップS156の処理で形成される、算定硬度補正工程を実行する算定硬度補正部(算定硬度補正手段)HKAによる演算上の硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正では、制御装置4aは、錠剤の硬度制御基準算定値HMaが硬度制御基準値補正範囲を外れないように硬度制御基準算定値HMaを更新する。しかし、こうした硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正では前記ステップS152の判断に従って錠剤の硬度を適正化できない。このため、ステップS155又はステップS156の処理の終了後に、制御装置4aは、補正先第4判断部(補正先第4判断手段又は補正先第4判断工程)をなすステップS157で次の補正先を判断して、その補正先に、ステップS155又はステップS156において硬度制御基準暫定値HMbの値で更新された硬度制御基準算定値HMaを供給する。なお、硬度制御基準暫定値HMbは硬度制御基準算定値HMaを補正(更新)するための演算値である。 As described above, in the correction of the calculated hardness control standard calculation value HMa by the calculated hardness correction unit (calculated hardness correction means) HKA that executes the calculated hardness correction process, which is formed by the processing of steps S154 to S156, the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculation value HMa so that the tablet hardness control reference calculation value HMa does not fall outside the hardness control reference value correction range. However, the correction of the hardness control reference calculation value HMa cannot optimize the tablet hardness according to the determination in step S152. For this reason, after the process of step S155 or step S156 is completed, the control device 4a determines the next correction destination in step S157 which constitutes a correction destination fourth determination unit (correction destination fourth determination means or correction destination fourth determination step). Judgment is made, and the hardness control reference calculated value HMa updated with the value of the hardness control reference provisional value HMb in step S155 or step S156 is supplied to the correction destination. The provisional hardness control reference value HMb is an arithmetic value for correcting (updating) the hardness control reference calculation value HMa.
 具体的には、制御装置4aは、ステップS157においては、次の補正先が「質量」であるか否かを判断する。これにより、次の補正先が「質量」である場合(ステップS157の判断がYESである場合)、処理は、質量制御基準算定値WMaの補正処理手順を判断するためのステップS172に進む。また、次の補正先が「質量」でない場合(ステップS157の判断がNOである場合)、処理は厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正処理手順を判断するためのステップS162に進む。このステップS157の判断(つまり、次の補正が「質量」であるのか「厚み」であるのか)は、既述の入力装置により指定された制御基準算定値の補正順位に従っている。 Specifically, in step S157, the control device 4a determines whether or not the next correction destination is “mass”. Thereby, when the next correction destination is “mass” (when the determination in step S157 is YES), the process proceeds to step S172 for determining the correction processing procedure of the mass control reference calculated value WMa. When the next correction destination is not “mass” (when the determination in step S157 is NO), the process proceeds to step S162 for determining the correction processing procedure for the thickness control reference calculation value TMa. The determination in step S157 (that is, whether the next correction is “mass” or “thickness”) is in accordance with the correction order of the control reference calculation values specified by the input device described above.
 前記ステップS151の判断がNOとなり、かつ、ステップS161の判断がYESである(制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が厚みである)場合、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第4判断部(算定硬度第4判断手段又は算定硬度第4判断工程)をなすステップS162の判断を行なう。このステップS162においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが、厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する。 If the determination in step S151 is NO and the determination in step S161 is YES (the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is thickness), the control device 4a calculates the calculated hardness fourth determination unit (calculation The determination in step S162, which is the fourth hardness determination means or the calculated hardness fourth determination step), is performed. In step S162, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness control reference calculated value TMa.
 ここで、硬度制御可能範囲は次式で規定される。 
HMa-kt(TOL-TMa)/a4≦Ha≦HMa+kt(TMa-TOH)/a4 この式でktは、厚み制御基準算定値TMaを補正するときの厚み補正係数であり、0. 01~1.00の任意な値に設定される。厚み補正係数ktは1.00未満であることが好ましい。
Here, the hardness controllable range is defined by the following equation.
HMa−kt (TOL−TMa) / a4 ≦ Ha ≦ HMa + kt (TMa−TOH) / a4 In this equation, kt is a thickness correction coefficient for correcting the thickness control standard calculation value TMa, and is 0.01 to 1.00. Set to any value. The thickness correction coefficient kt is preferably less than 1.00.
 なお、厚み補正係数ktが1.00の場合、硬度制御可能範囲は次式の通りとなる。 
 HMa-(TOL-TMa)/a4≦Ha≦HMa+(TMa-TOH)/a4
 ステップS162の判断がYESである(算定硬度Haが厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内である)場合、制御装置4aは、第1厚み制御基準算定値更新部(第1厚み制御基準算定値更新手段又は第1厚み制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS163を実行する。
When the thickness correction coefficient kt is 1.00, the hardness controllable range is as follows.
HMa− (TOL−TMa) / a4 ≦ Ha ≦ HMa + (TMa−TOH) / a4
When the determination in step S162 is YES (calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness control reference calculation value TMa), the control device 4a includes the first thickness control reference calculation value update unit (first thickness). Step S163, which is a control reference calculated value update means or a first thickness control reference calculated value update step), is executed.
 このステップS163においては、制御装置4aは、厚み制御基準算定値TMa等を用いて錠剤の厚み制御基準暫定値TMbを下記の式によって求める。 
  TMb=TMa+a4(HMa-Ha)……式(21)。
In step S163, the control device 4a obtains the tablet thickness control reference provisional value TMb using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the like by the following equation.
TMb = TMa + a4 (HMa−Ha) (Formula (21))
 また、ステップS163においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された厚み制御基準暫定値TMbの値で、厚み制御基準算定値TMaを更新する。なお、厚み制御基準暫定値TMbは厚み制御基準算定値TMaを補正(更新)するための演算値である。 In step S163, the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculated value TMa with the calculated thickness control reference provisional value TMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent calculation processing. In addition, the thickness control reference provisional value TMb is a calculation value for correcting (updating) the thickness control reference calculation value TMa.
 この後、制御装置4aは、ステップS163で更新された厚み制御基準算定値TMaを前記ステップS109以降の演算処理に供給する。そのため、ステップS162でYES(算定硬度Haが厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内である)と判断された場合、ステップS163を経てステップS109~ステップS126の処理が実行される。これにより、打錠装置1は、製造される錠剤の硬度を規格の範囲内に保持して錠剤を製造することができる。 Thereafter, the control device 4a supplies the thickness control reference calculation value TMa updated in step S163 to the arithmetic processing after step S109. Therefore, if it is determined in step S162 that YES (the calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness control reference calculated value TMa), the processes of steps S109 to S126 are executed via step S163. Thereby, the tableting apparatus 1 can manufacture a tablet, hold | maintaining the hardness of the tablet manufactured within the range of a specification.
 ステップS162の判断がNOである(算定硬度Haが厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲外である)場合、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第7判断部(算定硬度第7判断手段又は算定硬度第7判断工程)であるステップS164の処理を実行する。図10に示すステップS164においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが、錠剤の硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さいか否かを、次式によって判断する。 When the determination in step S162 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the thickness control reference calculation value TMa), the control device 4a uses the calculated hardness seventh determination unit (calculated hardness seventh determination means). Alternatively, the process of step S164 which is a calculated hardness seventh determination step) is executed. In step S164 shown in FIG. 10, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the tablet hardness control reference calculated value HMa by the following equation.
 HMa-kt(TOL-TMa)/a4>Ha
 ステップS164の判断がYESである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さい)場合、制御装置4aは、第2厚み制御基準算定値更新部(第2厚み制御基準算定値更新手段又は第2厚み制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS165の処理を実行する。図10に示すステップS165においては、制御装置4aは、厚み制御基準算定値TMa等を用いて錠剤の厚み制御基準暫定値TMbを下記の式によって求める。 
  TMb=TMa-kt(TMa-TOL)……式(22)。
HMa-kt (TOL-TMa) / a4> Ha
When the determination in step S164 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa), the control device 4a includes the second thickness control reference calculation value update unit (second thickness control reference calculation value update means or The process of step S165 which performs (2 thickness control reference | standard calculation value update process) is performed. In step S165 shown in FIG. 10, the control device 4a obtains the tablet thickness control reference provisional value TMb using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the like by the following equation.
TMb = TMa-kt (TMa-TOL) (Equation 22)
 また、ステップS165においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された厚み制御基準暫定値TMbの値で厚み制御基準算定値TMaを更新する。つまり、ステップS165においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さい場合、厚み制御基準値補正範囲の下限値TOLと厚み制御基準算定値TMaとの差に、ステップS162で用いた厚み補正係数ktを乗じた値と、厚み制御基準算定値TMaとから厚み制御基準暫定値TMbを求めて、この厚み制御基準暫定値TMbの値で厚み制御基準算定値TMaを更新する。これにより、厚み制御基準算定値TMaを減らす処理がなされる。 In step S165, the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the calculated thickness control reference provisional value TMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S165, when the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the lower limit value TOL of the thickness control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference calculated value TMa is in step S162. The thickness control reference provisional value TMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the thickness correction coefficient kt used in step 1 and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is updated with the value of the thickness control reference provisional value TMb. . Thereby, the process which reduces thickness control reference | standard calculation value TMa is made.
 この処理において、厚み補正係数ktが1.00未満に設定されている場合における補正では、許される範囲で限度一杯まで、厚み制御基準算定値TMaを一気に減らす処理をするのではなく、厚み補正係数ktによる補正にしたがい前記限度より小さく厚み制御基準算定値TMaが減らされる。なお、厚み補正係数ktが1.00に設定されている場合における補正では、許される範囲の限度一杯まで、厚み制御基準算定値TMaが一気に減らされる。 In this process, in the case where the thickness correction coefficient kt is set to less than 1.00, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is not reduced at a stroke to the full range within the allowable range, but is processed by the thickness correction coefficient kt. According to the correction, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is reduced to be smaller than the above limit. In the correction in the case where the thickness correction coefficient kt is set to 1.00, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is reduced at a stroke to the full limit of the allowable range.
 ステップS164の判断がNOである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより大きい)場合、制御装置4aは、第2厚み制御基準算定値更新部(第2厚み制御基準算定値更新手段又は第2厚み制御基準算定値更新工程)であるステップS166の処理を実行する。図10に示すステップS166においては、制御装置4aは、厚み制御基準算定値TMa等を用いて錠剤の厚み制御基準暫定値TMbを下記に示す式によって求める。 
  TMb=TMa+kt(TOH-TMa)……式(23)。
When the determination in step S164 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is greater than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa), the control device 4a includes the second thickness control reference calculation value update unit (second thickness control reference calculation value update means or The process of step S166, which is 2 thickness control reference calculated value update step), is executed. In step S166 shown in FIG. 10, the control device 4a obtains the tablet thickness control reference provisional value TMb by the following formula using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the like.
TMb = TMa + kt (TOH−TMa) (Expression (23))
 また、ステップS166においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された厚み制御基準暫定値TMbの値で厚み制御基準算定値TMaを更新する。つまり、ステップS166においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより大きい場合、厚み制御基準値補正範囲の上限値TOHと前記厚み制御基準算定値TMaとの差に、ステップS162で用いた厚み補正係数ktを乗じた値と、厚み制御基準算定値TMaとから厚み制御基準暫定値TMbを求めて、この厚み制御基準暫定値TMbの値で厚み制御基準算定値TMaを更新する。これにより、厚み制御基準算定値TMaを増やす処理がなされる。 In step S166, the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the calculated thickness control reference provisional value TMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S166, when the calculated hardness Ha is larger than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the upper limit value TOH of the thickness control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference calculated value TMa is set. The thickness control reference provisional value TMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the thickness correction coefficient kt used in S162 and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is updated with the value of the thickness control reference provisional value TMb. To do. Thereby, the process which increases thickness control reference | standard calculation value TMa is made.
 この処理において、厚み補正係数ktが1.00未満に設定されている場合における補正では、許される範囲で限度一杯まで、厚み制御基準算定値TMaを一気に増やす処理をするのではなく、厚み補正係数ktによる補正にしたがい前記限度より小さく厚み制御基準算定値TMaが増やされる。なお、厚み補正係数ktが1.00に設定されている場合における補正では、許される範囲の限度一杯まで、厚み制御基準算定値TMaが一気に増やされる。 In this process, when the thickness correction coefficient kt is set to be less than 1.00, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is not increased at a stretch to the full range within the allowable range, but by the thickness correction coefficient kt. According to the correction, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is increased below the limit. In the correction in the case where the thickness correction coefficient kt is set to 1.00, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is increased at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
 ステップS165又はステップS166の処理が終わると、制御装置4aは、第3算定硬度演算部(第3算定硬度演算手段又は第3算定硬度演算工程)であるステップS167の処理を実行し、新たな算定硬度Haを次式により求める。この式は既述の式(18)と同じである。 When the process of step S165 or step S166 ends, the control device 4a executes the process of step S167, which is a third calculated hardness calculation unit (third calculated hardness calculation means or third calculated hardness calculation process), and performs a new calculation. The hardness Ha is obtained by the following formula. This expression is the same as Expression (18) described above.
 Ha=Hx+〔(WMa-Wx)/a5〕+〔(TMa-Tx)/a4〕……式(18)
 以上のようにステップS164~ステップS167の処理で形成される、算定厚み補正工程を実行する算定厚み補正部(算定厚み補正手段)HKBによる演算上の厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正では、制御装置4aは、錠剤の厚み制御基準算定値TMaが厚み制御基準値の補正範囲を外れないように厚み制御基準算定値TMaを更新し、この更新された厚み制御基準算定値TMa等を用いて新たな算定硬度Haを算出する。しかし、こうした厚み変化による硬度制御では前記ステップS162の判断に従って錠剤の硬度を適正化できない。このため、ステップS167の終了後に、制御装置4aは、補正先第5判断部(補正先第5判断手段又は補正先第5判断工程)をなすステップS168で次の補正先を判断して、その補正先に、ステップS165またはステップS166で更新された厚み制御基準算定値TMaと、ステップS167で新たに算出された算定硬度Haを供給する。
Ha = Hx + [(WMa−Wx) / a5] + [(TMa−Tx) / a4] (18)
As described above, in the correction of the calculated thickness control reference calculation value TMa by the calculated thickness correction unit (calculated thickness correction means) HKB that executes the calculated thickness correction process, which is formed by the processing in steps S164 to S167, the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculation value TMa so that the tablet thickness control reference calculation value TMa does not deviate from the correction range of the thickness control reference value, and uses the updated thickness control reference calculation value TMa and the like. The calculated hardness Ha is calculated. However, the hardness control based on the thickness change cannot optimize the hardness of the tablet according to the determination in step S162. For this reason, after the end of step S167, the control device 4a determines the next correction destination in step S168, which is a correction destination fifth determination unit (correction destination fifth determination means or correction destination fifth determination step), and The thickness control reference calculated value TMa updated in step S165 or step S166 and the calculated hardness Ha newly calculated in step S167 are supplied to the correction destination.
 具体的には、ステップS168においては、制御装置4aは、次の補正先が「質量」であるか否かを判断する。これにより、次の補正先が「質量」である場合(ステップS168の判断がYESである場合)、処理は、後述の質量制御基準算定値WMaの補正処理手順を判断するためのステップS172に進む。又、次の補正先が「質量」でない場合(ステップS168の判断がNOである場合)、処理は、前記硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正処理手順を判断するためのステップS152に進む。このステップS168の判断(つまり、次の補正が「質量」であるのか「硬度」であるのか)は、既述の入力装置により指定された制御基準算定値の補正順位に従っている。 Specifically, in step S168, the control device 4a determines whether or not the next correction destination is “mass”. Thereby, when the next correction destination is “mass” (when the determination in step S168 is YES), the process proceeds to step S172 for determining a correction processing procedure of the mass control reference calculated value WMa described later. . When the next correction destination is not “mass” (when the determination in step S168 is NO), the process proceeds to step S152 for determining the correction processing procedure of the hardness control reference calculated value HMa. The determination in step S168 (that is, whether the next correction is “mass” or “hardness”) is in accordance with the correction order of the control reference calculation values specified by the input device described above.
 前記ステップS161の判断がNOとなった場合、ステップS171においては、制御装置4aは、制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「質量」であるか否かを判断する。ステップS171の判断がYESである(制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が質量である)場合、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第5判断部(算定硬度第5判断手段又は算定硬度第5判断工程)をなすステップS172の判断を行なう。このステップS172においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが、質量制御基準算定値WMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する。 If the determination in step S161 is NO, in step S171, the control device 4a determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “mass”. When the determination in step S171 is YES (the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is mass), the control device 4a calculates the calculated hardness fifth determination unit (calculated hardness fifth determination means or calculated hardness fifth determination). The determination in step S172 is performed. In step S172, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the mass control reference calculated value WMa.
 ここで、硬度制御可能範囲は次式で規定される。 
HMa-kw(WOH-WMa)/a5≦Ha≦HMa+kw(WMa-WOL)/a5 この式でkwは質量制御基準算定値WMaを補正するときの質量補正係数であり、0.01~1.00の任意な値に設定される。質量補正係数kwは1.00未満であることが好ましい。
Here, the hardness controllable range is defined by the following equation.
HMa−kw (WOH−WMa) / a5 ≦ Ha ≦ HMa + kw (WMa−WOL) / a5 In this equation, kw is a mass correction coefficient for correcting the mass control reference calculation value WMa, and is an arbitrary value between 0.01 and 1.00 Set to The mass correction coefficient kw is preferably less than 1.00.
 なお、質量補正係数kwが1.00の場合、硬度制御可能範囲は次式の通りとなる。 When the mass correction coefficient kw is 1.00, the hardness controllable range is as follows.
 HMa-(WOH-WMa)/a5≦Ha≦HMa+(WMa-WOL)/a5
 ステップS172の判断がYESである(算定硬度Haが質量制御基準算定値WMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内である)場合、制御装置4aは、第1質量制御基準算定値更新部(第1質量制御基準算定値更新手段又は第1質量制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS173の処理を実行する。
HMa− (WOH−WMa) / a5 ≦ Ha ≦ HMa + (WMa−WOL) / a5
When the determination in step S172 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is within the range of hardness controllable by correcting the mass control reference calculation value WMa), the control device 4a includes the first mass control reference calculation value update unit (first mass). The process of step S173 which performs a control reference calculation value update means or a first mass control reference calculation value update step) is executed.
 このステップS173においては、制御装置4aは、質量制御基準算定値WMa等を用いて錠剤の質量制御基準暫定値WMbを下記の式によって求める。 
  WMb=WMa+a5(HMa-Ha)……式(24)。
In step S173, the control device 4a obtains the tablet mass control reference provisional value WMb using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and the like by the following equation.
WMb = WMa + a5 (HMa−Ha) (Expression (24))
 また、ステップS173においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された質量制御基準暫定値WMbの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを更新する。なお、質量制御基準暫定値WMbは質量制御基準算定値WMaを補正(更新)するための演算値である。 In step S173, the control device 4a updates the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass control reference provisional value WMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. The mass control reference provisional value WMb is a calculated value for correcting (updating) the mass control reference calculated value WMa.
 この後、制御装置4aは、ステップS173で更新された質量制御基準算定値WMaを前記ステップS109の処理に供給する。そのため、ステップS172がYES(算定硬度Haが質量制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲外である)と判断した場合、制御装置4aは、ステップS173の処理を経て前記ステップS109~ステップS126の処理を実行する。これにより、打錠装置1は、製造される錠剤の硬度を規格の範囲内に保持して錠剤を製造することができる。 Thereafter, the control device 4a supplies the mass control reference calculated value WMa updated in step S173 to the process of step S109. Therefore, when it is determined that step S172 is YES (calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the mass control reference calculated value), the control device 4a performs the process of step S109 to step S126 through the process of step S173. Execute the process. Thereby, the tableting apparatus 1 can manufacture a tablet, hold | maintaining the hardness of the tablet manufactured within the range of a specification.
 ステップS172がNO(算定硬度Haが質量制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲外である)と判断した場合、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第8判断部(算定硬度第8判断手段)であるステップS174の処理を実行する。図11に示すステップS174においては、制御装置4aは、錠剤の算定硬度Haが、錠剤の硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さいか否かを、次式によって判断する。 When step S172 determines NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the mass control reference calculated value), the control device 4a uses the calculated hardness eighth determining unit (calculated hardness eighth determining means). The process of a certain step S174 is executed. In step S174 shown in FIG. 11, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa of the tablet by the following equation.
 HMa-kw(WOH-WMa)/a5>Ha
 ステップS174の判断がYESである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さい)場合、制御装置4aは、第2質量制御基準算定値更新部(第2質量制御基準算定値更新手段又は第2質量制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS175の処理を実行する。図11に示すステップS175においては、制御装置4aは、質量制御基準算定値WMa等を用いて錠剤の質量制御基準暫定値WMbを下記の式によって求める。 
  WMb=WMa+kw(WOH-WMa)……式(25)。
HMa-kw (WOH-WMa) / a5> Ha
When the determination in step S174 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa), the control device 4a includes the second mass control reference calculated value update unit (the second mass control reference calculated value update unit or the second The process of step S175 which performs the 2 mass control reference calculation value update step) is executed. In step S175 shown in FIG. 11, the control device 4a obtains the tablet mass control reference provisional value WMb using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and the like by the following equation.
WMb = WMa + kw (WOH−WMa) (Formula 25)
 また、ステップS175においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された質量制御基準暫定値WMbの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを更新する。つまり、ステップS175においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さい場合、質量制御基準値補正範囲の上限値WOHと質量制御基準算定値WMaとの差に、ステップS172で用いた質量補正係数kwを乗じた値と、質量制御基準算定値WMaとから質量制御基準暫定値WMbを求めて、この質量制御基準暫定値WMbの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを更新する。これにより、質量制御基準算定値WMaを増やす処理がなされる。 In step S175, the control device 4a updates the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass control reference provisional value WMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent calculation processing. That is, in step S175, when the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the upper limit value WOH of the mass control reference value correction range and the mass control reference calculation value WMa is equal to step S172. The mass control reference provisional value WMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the mass correction coefficient kw used in the above and the mass control reference calculation value WMa, and the mass control reference calculation value WMa is updated with the value of the mass control reference provisional value WMb. . Thereby, the process which increases mass control standard calculation value WMa is made.
 この処理において、質量補正係数kwが1.00未満に設定されている場合における補正では、許される範囲で限度一杯まで、質量制御基準算定値WMaを一気に増やす処理をするのではなく、質量補正係数kwによる補正にしたがい前記限度より小さく質量制御基準算定値WMaが増やされる。なお、質量補正係数kwが1.00に設定されている場合における補正では、許される範囲の限度一杯まで、質量制御基準算定値WMaが一気に増やされる。 In this processing, in the case where the mass correction coefficient kw is set to less than 1.00, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is not increased at a stretch within the allowable range, but the mass correction coefficient kw is used. According to the correction, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is increased below the limit. In the correction in the case where the mass correction coefficient kw is set to 1.00, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is increased at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
 ステップS174の判断がNOである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより大きい)場合、制御装置4aは、第2質量制御基準算定値更新部(第2質量制御基準算定値更新手段又は第2質量制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS176の処理を実行する。図11に示すステップS176においては、制御装置4aは、質量制御基準算定値WMa等を用いて錠剤の質量制御基準暫定値WMbを下記に示す式によって求める。 
  WMb=WMa-kw(WMa-WOL)……式(26)。
When the determination in step S174 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is greater than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa), the control device 4a includes the second mass control reference calculated value update unit (the second mass control reference calculated value update unit or the second The process of step S176 which performs the 2 mass control reference calculated value update step) is executed. In step S176 shown in FIG. 11, the control device 4a obtains the tablet mass control reference provisional value WMb using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and the like by the following formula.
WMb = WMa−kw (WMa−WOL) (26)
 また、ステップS176においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された質量制御基準暫定値WMbの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを更新する。つまり、ステップS176においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより大きい場合、質量制御基準値補正範囲の下限値WOLと質量制御基準算定値WMaとの差に、ステップS172で用いた質量補正係数kwを乗じた値と、質量制御基準算定値WMaとから質量制御基準暫定値WMbを求めて、この質量制御基準暫定値WMbの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを更新する。これにより、質量制御基準算定値WMaを減らす処理がなされる。 In step S176, the control device 4a updates the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass control reference provisional value WMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S176, when the calculated hardness Ha is larger than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the lower limit value WOL of the mass control reference value correction range and the mass control reference calculated value WMa is equal to step S172. The mass control reference provisional value WMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the mass correction coefficient kw used in the above and the mass control reference calculation value WMa, and the mass control reference calculation value WMa is updated with the value of the mass control reference provisional value WMb. . Thereby, the process which reduces the mass control reference | standard calculated value WMa is made.
 この処理において、質量補正係数kwが1.00未満に設定されている場合における補正では、許される範囲で限度一杯まで、質量制御基準算定値WMaを一気に減らす処理をするのではなく、質量補正係数kwによる補正にしたがい前記限度より小さく質量制御基準算定値WMaが減らされる。なお、質量補正係数kwが1.00に設定されている場合における補正では、許される範囲の限度一杯まで、質量制御基準算定値WMaが一気に減らされる。 In this process, in the case where the mass correction coefficient kw is set to less than 1.00, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is not reduced at a stretch to the full range within the allowable range, but the mass correction coefficient kw is used. According to the correction, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is reduced to be smaller than the above limit. In the correction in the case where the mass correction coefficient kw is set to 1.00, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is reduced all at once to the full limit of the allowable range.
 ステップS175又はステップS176の処理が終わると、制御装置4aは、第4算定硬度演算部(第4算定硬度演算手段)をなすステップS177の処理を実行し、新たな算定硬度Haを次式により求める。この式は前記式(18)と同じである。 
 Ha=Hx+〔(WMa-Wx)/a5〕+〔(TMa-Tx)/a4〕……式(18)。
When the process of step S175 or step S176 is finished, the control device 4a executes the process of step S177 forming the fourth calculated hardness calculation unit (fourth calculated hardness calculation means), and obtains a new calculated hardness Ha by the following equation. . This formula is the same as the formula (18).
Ha = Hx + [(WMa−Wx) / a5] + [(TMa−Tx) / a4] (18)
 以上のようにステップS174~ステップS177の処理で形成され、算定質量補正工程を実行する算定質量補正部(算定質量補正手段)HKCによる演算上の質量制御基準算定値WMaの補正では、制御装置4aは、質量制御基準算定値WMaが、質量制御基準値の補正範囲を外れないように質量制御基準算定値WMaを更新し、この更新された質量制御基準算定値WMa等を用いて新たな算定硬度Haを算出する。しかし、こうした質量変化による硬度制御では前記ステップS172の判断に従って錠剤の硬度を適正化できない。このため、ステップS177の処理の終了後に、制御装置4aは、補正先第6判断部(補正先第6判断手段)をなすステップS178で次の補正先を判断して、その補正先に、ステップS175又はステップS176の処理で更新された質量制御基準算定値WMaと、ステップS177で算出された新たな算定硬度Haを供給する。 As described above, in the correction of the calculated mass control reference calculated value WMa by the calculated mass correction unit (calculated mass correction means) HKC, which is formed by the processing of step S174 to step S177 and executes the calculated mass correction process, the control device 4a Updates the mass control reference calculation value WMa so that the mass control reference calculation value WMa does not fall outside the correction range of the mass control reference value, and uses the updated mass control reference calculation value WMa to obtain a new calculated hardness. Ha is calculated. However, the hardness control based on such a mass change cannot optimize the hardness of the tablet according to the determination in step S172. For this reason, after the process of step S177 is completed, the control device 4a determines the next correction destination in step S178, which is a correction destination sixth determination unit (correction destination sixth determination means), and sets the correction destination to step S178. The mass control reference calculated value WMa updated in the process of S175 or step S176 and the new calculated hardness Ha calculated in step S177 are supplied.
 具体的には、ステップS178においては、制御装置4aは、次の補正先が「厚み」であるか否かを判断する。これにより、次の補正先が「厚み」である場合(ステップS178の判断がYESである場合)、処理は、前記厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正処理手順を判断するためのステップS162に進む。又、次の補正先が「厚み」でない場合(ステップS178の判断がNOである場合)、処理は、前記硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正処理手順を判断するためのステップS152に進む。このステップS178の判断(つまり、次の補正が「厚み」であるのか「硬度」であるのかの判断)は、既述の入力装置により指定された制御基準算定値の補正順位に従っている。 Specifically, in step S178, the control device 4a determines whether or not the next correction destination is “thickness”. Thereby, when the next correction destination is “thickness” (when the determination in step S178 is YES), the process proceeds to step S162 for determining the correction processing procedure of the thickness control reference calculation value TMa. When the next correction destination is not “thickness” (when the determination in step S178 is NO), the process proceeds to step S152 for determining the correction processing procedure of the hardness control reference calculated value HMa. The determination in step S178 (that is, whether the next correction is “thickness” or “hardness”) is in accordance with the correction order of the control reference calculation values specified by the input device described above.
 以上のように制御パターン1(WTH制御)では、ステップS152の判断がNOとなるに伴い、ステップS154~ステップS157の処理が実行されて規格範囲内の硬度を得るための硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正がなされる。この硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正に基づいてステップS157で次の制御基準算定値の補正先が「厚み」であると判断された上で、ステップS162による判断がNOとなった場合、ステップS164~ステップS168の処理が実行されて規格範囲内の硬度を得るための厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正がなされる。ステップS168で次の制御基準算定値の補正先が「質量」であると判断された上で、ステップS172による判断がNOとなった場合、ステップS174~ステップS178の処理が実行されて規格範囲内の硬度を得るための質量制御基準算定値WMaの補正がなされる。更に、ステップS152、ステップS162、又はステップS172の処理の何れかがYESとなるまで、既述の入力装置により登録された制御基準算定値の補正順位に従って、既述の各制御基準算定値の補正処理が繰り返し行われる。これにより、製造される錠剤の硬度Hが規格範囲内に保持される。 As described above, in control pattern 1 (WTH control), as the determination in step S152 becomes NO, the processing in steps S154 to S157 is executed to obtain the hardness control reference calculated value HMa for obtaining the hardness within the standard range. Correction is made. When it is determined in step S157 that the correction destination of the next control reference calculation value is “thickness” based on the correction of the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, and the determination in step S162 is NO, step S164 is performed. Step S168 is executed to correct the thickness control reference calculation value TMa to obtain a hardness within the standard range. If it is determined in step S168 that the correction target of the next control reference calculation value is “mass” and the determination in step S172 is NO, the processing in steps S174 to S178 is executed and within the standard range. The mass control standard calculation value WMa for obtaining the hardness of is corrected. Further, until each of the processes of step S152, step S162, or step S172 becomes YES, each control reference calculated value is corrected according to the correction order of the control reference calculated value registered by the input device described above. The process is repeated. Thereby, the hardness H of the manufactured tablet is kept within the standard range.
 このように制御装置4aに格納されたプログラムの硬度制御系統を実行するステップS137~ステップS178による制御で、打錠機2は、製造される錠剤の硬度を規格範囲内(硬度が製品の規格範囲内にある。)に保持して、錠剤を製造できる。また、打錠機2は、引き続いてステップS109~ステップS126に従って運転される。これにより、杵先間隔が制御され、かつ、圧力制御部51に設定された圧力制御基準値(現在値)が更新される。したがって、打錠装置1は、厚みと質量と共に硬度が規格範囲内に保持された錠剤を製造することができる。 In this way, the tableting machine 2 controls the hardness of the tablets to be manufactured within the standard range (the hardness is within the standard range of the product) by the control by the steps S137 to S178 of executing the hardness control system of the program stored in the control device 4a. It is possible to produce tablets. The tableting machine 2 is subsequently operated according to steps S109 to S126. Thereby, the tip interval is controlled, and the pressure control reference value (current value) set in the pressure controller 51 is updated. Therefore, the tableting device 1 can manufacture a tablet in which the hardness and the hardness are maintained within the standard range.
 以上説明したように第1実施形態の打錠装置1によれば、粉末を圧縮して製造される錠剤の質量と厚みと硬度のうちの少なくとも一つ、例えば質量と厚みを、打錠機2の連続運転に伴う打錠機2各部の温度変化に拘らず規格範囲内に保持して製造可能な打錠装置1とその運転方法を提供することが可能である。 As described above, according to the tableting device 1 of the first embodiment, at least one of the mass, thickness and hardness of the tablet produced by compressing the powder, such as the mass and thickness, is determined by the tableting machine 2. It is possible to provide a tableting device 1 that can be manufactured while being held within the standard range regardless of the temperature change of each part of the tableting machine 2 during the continuous operation.
 なお、各補正係数kh、kt、kwが夫々1.00の条件で、以上説明したWTH制御での制御基準算定値の補正順位を1番目が硬度、2番目が厚み、3番目が質量とした場合、厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正の結果、ステップS168の判断がNOとなって、ステップS172に進んだ場合、このステップS172の判断は必ずYESとなる。その理由は、ステップS141の処理で、制御装置4aが、質量・厚み・硬度の全ての制御基準算定値を上限値又は下限値まで補正したときに、算定硬度Haが規格範囲内となるか否かを判断し、その判断がYESの場合に前記硬度H-厚みT-質量Wの制御基準算定値の補正順位で夫々補正がされたことによる。 In the case where each correction coefficient kh, kt, kw is 1.00, and the correction order of the control reference calculation values in the WTH control described above is 1st hardness, 2nd thickness, 3rd mass, As a result of the correction of the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, if the determination in step S168 is NO and the process proceeds to step S172, the determination in step S172 is always YES. The reason is whether or not the calculated hardness Ha falls within the standard range when the control device 4a corrects all the control reference calculated values of mass, thickness, and hardness to the upper limit value or the lower limit value in the process of step S141. This is because, when the determination is YES, the correction order of the control standard calculation values of hardness H−thickness T−mass W is corrected.
 以上説明した制御では、錠剤の硬度を規格範囲内とする上で、過度に大きな制御が一度に実施されないように硬度・厚み・質量についての各補正係数(kh、kt、kw)を夫々1.00未満として、これら各補正係数にしたがって、硬度・厚み・質量の夫々の制御基準算定値を小刻みに補正している。それにより、硬度制御での硬度・厚み・質量の夫々の制御基準値の変動を小さく抑制しつつ、前記夫々の制御基準算定値の補正範囲の限度まで補正をすることを必ずしも必要としない。よって、前記補正範囲の限度まで補正をする以前の段階で、前記夫々の規格基準値に略近似する錠剤を製造することが可能となり、製造する錠剤の品質を向上させることが可能である。なお、各補正係数(kh、kt、kw)の値を、第1実施形態では同じとしたが、これらは異なっていてもよい。 In the control described above, each of the correction factors (kh, kt, kw) for hardness, thickness, and mass is less than 1.00 so that excessively large control is not performed at one time when the tablet hardness is within the standard range. As described above, according to each of these correction factors, the control standard calculation values of hardness, thickness, and mass are corrected in small increments. As a result, it is not always necessary to make corrections up to the limit of the correction range of each control reference calculation value while suppressing fluctuations in the respective control reference values of hardness, thickness, and mass in hardness control to be small. Therefore, it is possible to manufacture tablets that are approximately similar to the respective standard reference values before the correction to the limit of the correction range, and it is possible to improve the quality of the tablets to be manufactured. In addition, although the value of each correction coefficient (kh, kt, kw) was made the same in 1st Embodiment, these may differ.
 以上の説明では選択された制御パターン1での各制御基準算定値の補正順位を1番目が硬度H、2番目が厚みT、3番目が質量W(つまり、HTWの記載順)としたが、制御パターン1については、この他に、各制御基準算定値の補正順位を、HWTの記載順、THWの記載順、TWHの記載順、WHTの記載順、WTHの記載順のいずれかに指定することも可能である。そして、これらのうちの一つが指定されることによって、各制御基準算定値の補正順位に従った質量Wと厚みTと硬度Hの夫々の制御基準算定値の補正に基づく硬度制御が行われた上で、この補正された各制御基準算定値にするための杵先間隔設定値lM,LMの更新と圧力制御部51の圧力制御基準値PMの更新とによって、打錠装置1は、質量Wと厚みTと硬度Hとが製品の規格範囲内に保持された錠剤を製造することが可能である。 In the above description, the correction order of each control reference calculated value in the selected control pattern 1 is the hardness H, the second is the thickness T, and the third is the mass W (that is, the order of description of HTW). For control pattern 1, in addition to this, the correction ranking of each control reference calculation value is designated as one of HWT description order, THW description order, TWH description order, WHT description order, or WTH description order. It is also possible. And by designating one of these, the hardness control based on the correction of the control reference calculation values of the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H according to the correction order of each control reference calculation value was performed. In the above, by updating the tip interval setting values 1M and LM to obtain the corrected control reference calculated values and the pressure control reference value PM of the pressure control unit 51, the tableting device 1 has the mass W It is possible to produce a tablet in which the thickness T and the hardness H are maintained within the standard range of the product.
(制御パターン5) 
 第1実施形態での制御パターン5(TH制御)について以下説明する。錠剤の厚みTと硬度Hを制御する制御パターン5(TH制御)が選択された場合、その硬度制御部HKでの制御基準算定値の補正順位を1番目が厚みT、2番目が硬度Hとする場合と、1番目が硬度H、2番目が厚みTとする場合とのいずれかを、パターン判別部において指定(選択)できる。
(Control pattern 5)
The control pattern 5 (TH control) in the first embodiment will be described below. When the control pattern 5 (TH control) for controlling the tablet thickness T and the hardness H is selected, the correction order of the control reference calculation value in the hardness control unit HK is the thickness T, the second is the hardness H The pattern discriminating unit can designate (select) either the case where the first is hardness H or the case where the second is thickness T.
 パターン判別部で制御パターン5(TH制御)が選択された場合、前記ステップS138の判断はNOとなる。これを受けて、制御装置4aは、図7に示すステップS142の処理を実行する。このステップS142においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理の整合性を確保するために、ステップS104で求めた算定質量Waの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを置換する。ステップS142の処理は、第4制御基準算定値更新部(第4制御基準算定値更新手段又は第4制御基準算定値更新工程)をなす。 When the control pattern 5 (TH control) is selected by the pattern determination unit, the determination in step S138 is NO. In response to this, the control device 4a executes the process of step S142 shown in FIG. In step S142, the control device 4a replaces the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass Wa value obtained in step S104 in order to ensure the consistency of the subsequent arithmetic processing. The process of step S142 constitutes a fourth control reference calculation value update unit (fourth control reference calculation value update means or a fourth control reference calculation value update step).
 次に、制御装置4aは、ステップS144、ステップS145の各工程を有して錠剤の算定硬度Haを求める第2算定硬度判断部(第2算定硬度判断手段)WK2を実行する。 Next, the control device 4a executes the second calculated hardness judgment unit (second calculated hardness judgment means) WK2 that includes the steps S144 and S145 to obtain the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet.
 即ち、まず、第2算定硬度演算部(第2算定硬度演算手段又は第2算定硬度演算工程)をなすステップS144の処理が実行される。ステップS144においては、制御装置4aは、前記ステップS140の処理と同様に、質量制御をしたとき(質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたとき)の硬度変動値(これを第1硬度変動値という。)と、厚み制御をしたとき(厚み平均値Txを厚み制御基準算定値TMaにしたとき)の硬度変動値(これを第2硬度変動値という。)と、硬度平均値Hxとから、錠剤の算定硬度Haを次式により求める。 
 Ha=Hx+〔(WMa-Wx)/a5〕+〔(TMa-Tx)/a4〕……式(18)。 
 この式(18)はステップS140で用いた式と同じである。
That is, first, the process of step S144 that constitutes the second calculated hardness calculation unit (second calculated hardness calculation means or second calculated hardness calculation step) is executed. In step S144, the control device 4a, similarly to the processing in step S140, performs the hardness control value (when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa) (this is the first hardness). A variation value), a hardness variation value when the thickness is controlled (when the thickness average value Tx is set to the thickness control reference calculation value TMa), this is referred to as a second hardness variation value, and a hardness average value Hx. From this, the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet is obtained by the following equation.
Ha = Hx + [(WMa−Wx) / a5] + [(TMa−Tx) / a4] (18)
This equation (18) is the same as the equation used in step S140.
 次に、制御装置4aは、ステップS141の処理と同様な算定硬度第2判断部(算定硬度第2判断手段又は算定硬度第2判断工程)をなすステップS145の処理を実行する。ステップS145においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが適正(錠剤の硬度を規格範囲内に保持して生産することが可能)であるか否かを判断する。つまり、ステップS145においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが、厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるのか否かを判断する。 Next, the control device 4a executes the process of step S145 which forms the calculated hardness second determining unit (calculated hardness second determining means or calculated hardness second determining step) similar to the process of step S141. In step S145, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is appropriate (can be produced while maintaining the tablet hardness within the standard range). That is, in step S145, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting each control reference calculation value for thickness and hardness.
 但し、制御パターン5では質量制御基準値の補正は行わないため、質量制御基準算定値WMaを質量制御基準値補正範囲の上限値または下限値に補正することによる硬度制御は含まれない。 However, since the mass control reference value is not corrected in the control pattern 5, hardness control by correcting the mass control reference calculated value WMa to the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the mass control reference value correction range is not included.
 既述の算定硬度Haが硬度制御可能範囲に入っているか否かは、次の二つの式に基づいて判断することができる。 Whether or not the above-described calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range can be determined based on the following two formulas.
 HOL<Ha+(TOL-TMa)/a4
 HOH>Ha-(TMa-TOH)/a4
 さらに前記二つの式は各々次のように変換することができる。
HOL <Ha + (TOL-TMa) / a4
HOH> Ha- (TMa-TOH) / a4
Further, each of the two expressions can be converted as follows.
 HOL-(TOL-TMa)/a4<Ha
 Ha<HOH+(TMa-TOH)/a0
 このことから、ステップS145に示すHOL-(TOL-TMa)/a4<Ha<HOH+(TMa-TOH)/a4の式に置き換えて判断することができる。
HOL- (TOL-TMa) / a4 <Ha
Ha <HOH + (TMa-TOH) / a0
From this, it can be judged by replacing with the equation of HOL− (TOL−TMa) / a4 <Ha <HOH + (TMa−TOH) / a4 shown in step S145.
 ここで、HOL-(TOL-TMa)/a4を硬度制御可能範囲の下限値HLとし、HOH+(TMa-TOH)/a4を硬度可能範囲の上限値HHとした時、 
 ステップS145での硬度制御可能範囲の下限値HLは次式で演算される。 
 HL=HOL-(TOL-TMa)/a4
 ステップS145での硬度制御可能範囲の上限値HHは次式で演算される。 
 HH=HOH+(TMa-TOH)/a4
 これらの式において、HOLは錠剤の硬度制御基準値補正範囲の下限値、HOHは錠剤の硬度制御基準値補正範囲の上限値、TOLは錠剤の厚み制御基準値補正範囲の下限値、TOHは錠剤の厚み制御基準値補正範囲の上限値であり、a4はT-H相関係数である。
Here, when HOL− (TOL−TMa) / a4 is the lower limit value HL of the hardness controllable range and HOH + (TMa−TOH) / a4 is the upper limit value HH of the hardness controllable range,
The lower limit value HL of the hardness controllable range in step S145 is calculated by the following equation.
HL = HOL- (TOL-TMa) / a4
The upper limit value HH of the hardness controllable range in step S145 is calculated by the following equation.
HH = HOH + (TMa-TOH) / a4
In these equations, HOL is the lower limit value of the tablet hardness control reference value correction range, HOH is the upper limit value of the tablet hardness control reference value correction range, TOL is the lower limit value of the tablet thickness control reference value correction range, and TOH is the tablet Is the upper limit value of the thickness control reference value correction range, and a4 is a TH correlation coefficient.
 したがって、ステップS145においては、制御装置4aは、HL<Ha<HHの式によって算定硬度Haが適正(錠剤の硬度を規格範囲内に保持して生産することが可能)であるのか否かを判断する。 Therefore, in step S145, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is appropriate (it is possible to produce the tablet while keeping the hardness of the tablet within the standard range) by an expression of HL <Ha <HH. To do.
 ステップS145の判断がNO(算定硬度Haが厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲外)であることは、厚みと硬度の各制御基準値を補正しても、製造される錠剤の硬度を規格の範囲内とする制御ができない、ということである。この場合、制御装置4aは、既述のステップS146の処理を実行する。これにより、異常を報知する信号(異常信号)が出力されるとともに、例えば打錠機2の運転が停止される。 The fact that the judgment in step S145 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the control values calculated for thickness and hardness) is manufactured even if the control reference values for thickness and hardness are corrected. This means that it is impossible to control the hardness of the tablet to be within the standard range. In this case, the control device 4a executes the process of step S146 described above. As a result, a signal (abnormal signal) for notifying abnormality is output and, for example, the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped.
 ステップS145の判断がYES(算定硬度Haが厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内)であることは、厚みと硬度の各制御基準値を補正することで、製造される錠剤の硬度を規格の範囲内とする制御が可能である、ということである。この場合、既に入力された各種制御基準算定値の補正先の順位に従って、制御装置4aは図8に示した硬度制御部(硬度制御手段)HKを実行する。 The fact that the judgment in step S145 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness and hardness control reference calculation values) is manufactured by correcting the thickness and hardness control reference values. This means that it is possible to control the hardness of the tablet to be within the standard range. In this case, the control device 4a executes the hardness control unit (hardness control means) HK shown in FIG. 8 according to the order of correction destinations of the various control reference calculated values that have already been input.
 第1実施形態での制御パターン5(TH制御)が選択された条件下での硬度制御系統による制御では、ステップS152~ステップS157の各工程を実行する算定硬度補正部HKAと、ステップS162~ステップS168の各工程を実行する算定厚み補正部HKBが実行される。これらの制御は、制御パターン1で、図8、図9、図10を用いて既に説明した制御と同じであるので、重複説明を避けるため、ここでは説明を省略する。しかし、制御パターン5では、算定質量補正部HKCに関するステップS172~ステップS178は実行されない。 In the control by the hardness control system under the condition that the control pattern 5 (TH control) is selected in the first embodiment, the calculated hardness correction unit HKA that executes the steps S152 to S157, and the steps S162 to S162 The calculated thickness correction unit HKB that executes each step of S168 is executed. These controls are the same as those already described with reference to FIGS. 8, 9, and 10 in the control pattern 1, and thus description thereof is omitted here to avoid duplication. However, in the control pattern 5, Steps S172 to S178 related to the calculated mass correction unit HKC are not executed.
 このため、いずれかの制御基準算定値の補正順位が指定されることに基づいて、その補正順位に従った厚みTと硬度Hの各制御基準算定値の補正に基づく硬度制御が行われた上で、杵先間隔設定値lM,LMの更新と圧力制御部51の圧力制御基準値PMの更新とによって、錠剤の厚みと硬度の制御とがなされる。 For this reason, on the basis of the designation of the correction rank of one of the control reference calculated values, the hardness control based on the correction of the control reference calculated values of the thickness T and the hardness H according to the correction rank is performed. Thus, the tablet thickness and hardness are controlled by updating the tip interval setting values 1M and LM and the pressure control reference value PM of the pressure control unit 51.
 それにより、制御パターン5によれば、打錠装置1は、厚みTと硬度Hとが製品の規格範囲内に保持された錠剤を製造することが可能である。 Thereby, according to the control pattern 5, the tableting device 1 can manufacture a tablet in which the thickness T and the hardness H are held within the standard range of the product.
(制御パターン3) 
 第1実施形態での制御パターン3(WH制御)について以下説明する。
(Control pattern 3)
The control pattern 3 (WH control) in the first embodiment will be described below.
 錠剤の質量Wと硬度Hを制御する制御パターン3(WH制御)において、その硬度制御部HKでの制御基準算定値の補正順位を1番目が質量W、2番目が硬度Hとする場合と、1番目が硬度H、2番目が質量Wとする場合とを、パターン判別部において指定できる。 In the control pattern 3 (WH control) for controlling the mass W and hardness H of the tablet, the correction ranking of the control reference calculation value in the hardness control unit HK is the mass W, the second is the hardness H, The case where the first is the hardness H and the second is the mass W can be specified in the pattern discrimination unit.
 制御パターン3が選択された条件下での硬度制御系統による制御では、ステップS152~ステップS157の各工程を実行する算定硬度補正部HKAと、ステップS172~ステップS178の各工程を実行する算定質量補正部HKCとが実行される。これらの制御は、制御パターン1で、図8、図9、図11を用いて既に説明した制御と同じであるので、重複説明を避けるため、ここでは説明を省略する。しかし、制御パターン3では、算定厚み補正部HKBに関するステップS162~ステップS168は実行されない。 In the control by the hardness control system under the condition that the control pattern 3 is selected, the calculated hardness correction unit HKA that executes the processes of steps S152 to S157 and the calculated mass correction that executes the processes of steps S172 to S178. The unit HKC is executed. These controls are the same as those already described with reference to FIGS. 8, 9, and 11 in the control pattern 1, and thus are not described here in order to avoid redundant description. However, in the control pattern 3, steps S162 to S168 relating to the calculated thickness correction unit HKB are not executed.
 このため、いずれかの制御基準算定値の補正順位が指定されることに基づいて、その順位に従った質量Wと硬度Hの夫々の制御基準算定値の補正に基づく硬度制御が行われた上で、圧力制御部51の圧力制御基準値PMの更新によって質量を変える圧力制御が行われる。 For this reason, on the basis of the designation of the correction rank of any control reference calculation value, the hardness control based on the correction of the control reference calculation values of the mass W and the hardness H according to the rank is performed. Thus, pressure control is performed to change the mass by updating the pressure control reference value PM of the pressure control unit 51.
 それにより、制御パターン3によれば、質量Wと硬度Hが製品の規格範囲内に保持された錠剤を製造することが可能である。 Thereby, according to the control pattern 3, it is possible to manufacture a tablet in which the mass W and the hardness H are maintained within the standard range of the product.
 以上説明した錠剤の製造において、錠剤の質量の制御を含む制御パターン例えば制御パターン3(WH制御)については、製造される錠剤の質量Wと厚みTを夫々の制御基準値に保持して、錠剤を製造できる。 In the manufacture of the tablets described above, the control pattern including the control of the tablet mass, for example, the control pattern 3 (WH control), the tablet mass W and the thickness T to be manufactured are held at the respective control reference values. Can be manufactured.
 以下、繰り返し簡単に説明する。まず、質量の変動原因について説明する。打錠機2の連続運転に伴う打錠機2各部の温度上昇に起因する熱膨張により杵先間隔が狭まるように変化し、その変化に伴い成型圧力が上昇する。これにより、圧力制御部51によるフィードバック制御は、錠剤の質量の増加がなくても、成型圧力を低下させる制御をする(つまり、質量を減少させる制御が行われる)。その結果として、錠剤の質量を規格範囲内に保つことができなくなる場合がある。この他、打錠機2の温度が上昇すると、圧縮される粉末の物性によって、当該粉末の結合性が高まることがある。この場合、杵先間隔を一定に保って成型したとしても、成型圧力が低下する。これに伴い圧力制御部51は、成型圧力を増やす制御をするので、質量が増えて、質量を規格範囲内に保つことができなくなる場合がある。 The following is a brief and repeated explanation. First, the cause of mass fluctuation will be described. Due to the thermal expansion caused by the temperature rise of each part of the tableting machine 2 accompanying the continuous operation of the tableting machine 2, the tip spacing changes so as to narrow, and the molding pressure increases with the change. Thereby, the feedback control by the pressure control unit 51 performs control to reduce the molding pressure (that is, control to reduce the mass) even if the mass of the tablet does not increase. As a result, the mass of the tablet may not be maintained within the standard range. In addition, when the temperature of the tableting machine 2 is increased, the binding property of the powder may be increased depending on the physical properties of the powder to be compressed. In this case, even if molding is performed while keeping the tip interval constant, the molding pressure decreases. Along with this, the pressure control unit 51 performs control to increase the molding pressure, so that the mass may increase and the mass may not be maintained within the standard range.
 これに対して、第1実施形態の打錠装置1によれば、粉末を圧縮して製造される錠剤の質量Wと厚みTと硬度Hとのうちの少なくとも一つ、例えば質量Wと厚みTとを、打錠機2の連続運転に伴う打錠機2各部の温度変化に拘らず規格範囲内に保持して錠剤を製造可能な回転式の打錠装置1とその運転方法を提供することが可能である。言い換えれば、以上説明した制御装置4aに格納されたプログラムに基づく運転制御系統での杵先間隔の自動制御によって、打錠機2の連続運転に伴う打錠機2各部の温度変化に拘らず、錠剤の厚みTを規格範囲内に保持できる。これとともに、圧力制御部51に設定された圧力制御基準値(現在値)を、自動的に更新する運転制御系統での制御によって、錠剤の質量Wを規格範囲内に保持して、錠剤を製造することが可能である。 On the other hand, according to the tableting device 1 of the first embodiment, at least one of the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H of the tablet produced by compressing the powder, for example, the mass W and the thickness T. Is provided with a rotary tableting device 1 capable of producing tablets while maintaining the temperature within the standard range regardless of the temperature change of each part of the tableting machine 2 accompanying the continuous operation of the tableting machine 2 and its operating method. Is possible. In other words, by automatic control of the tip interval in the operation control system based on the program stored in the control device 4a described above, regardless of the temperature change of each part of the tableting machine 2 accompanying the continuous operation of the tableting machine 2, The tablet thickness T can be maintained within the standard range. Along with this, the tablet W is manufactured by maintaining the mass W of the tablet within the standard range by controlling the operation control system that automatically updates the pressure control reference value (current value) set in the pressure control unit 51. Is possible.
 しかも、第1実施形態の打錠装置1によれば、運転制御系統により、錠剤の質量W、厚みT、及び硬度Hを夫々制御することが可能であることに加えて、錠剤の質量Wと厚みT、錠剤の質量Wと硬度H、又は錠剤の厚みTと硬度Hの夫々の組合せに応じて、夫々制御することが可能であり、更には錠剤の質量Wを単独に制御することも、又、錠剤の厚みTを単独に制御することも可能である。 Moreover, according to the tableting device 1 of the first embodiment, in addition to being able to control the tablet mass W, thickness T, and hardness H by the operation control system, respectively, It is possible to control the thickness T, the tablet mass W and the hardness H, or the combination of the tablet thickness T and the hardness H, respectively, and further to control the tablet mass W independently. It is also possible to control the tablet thickness T independently.
 更に、第1実施形態の打錠装置1は、複数の制御パターン、具体的には既述の制御パターン1~制御パターン6について、それらの制御を担うフローチャートを共通して使用できるので、制御パターン毎に専用のフローチャートを用意しなくてよい利点がある。 Furthermore, since the tableting device 1 of the first embodiment can use a common flowchart for controlling a plurality of control patterns, specifically, the control patterns 1 to 6 described above, There is an advantage that it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated flowchart every time.
(第2実施形態) 
 次に、本発明の第2実施形態に係る回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置とその運転方法を、図12~図19を参照して説明する。
(Second Embodiment)
Next, a rotary powder compression molding apparatus and a method for operating the same according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
 以下の説明で、第1実施形態と同じ構成、又は第1実施形態と同様な機能を奏する第2実施形態の構成については、第1実施形態と同一符号を付して、その説明を省略する。この第2実施形態で、基礎データ取得手順及びこの手順を実行する基礎データ取得部は第1実施形態と同じである。このため、基礎データ取得部での演算により各相関係数を求める手順も第1実施形態と同じであるので、その説明も省略する。さらに、必要に応じて第1実施形態の説明で用いた図1、図2、及び各フローチャートも参照して第2実施形態を説明する。 In the following description, the same configuration as that of the first embodiment or the configuration of the second embodiment having the same function as the first embodiment is denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted. . In this second embodiment, the basic data acquisition procedure and the basic data acquisition unit for executing this procedure are the same as in the first embodiment. For this reason, the procedure for obtaining each correlation coefficient by the calculation in the basic data acquisition unit is also the same as that in the first embodiment, and the description thereof is also omitted. Furthermore, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2 used in the description of the first embodiment and the respective flowcharts as necessary.
 第2実施形態の打錠装置1は、錠剤の質量Wと厚みTと硬度Hの各制御基準算定値を指定順序で補正することによって、質量Wと厚みTと硬度Hの夫々を規格範囲内に保持する制御を行う制御パターン1(WTH制御)と、錠剤の質量Wと厚みTを各制御基準値に制御する制御パターン2(WT制御)とのいずれかを選択して錠剤を製造することが可能である点と、これに対応したパターン判別部を有している点が、第1実施形態とは異なる。そのため、第2実施形態の打錠装置1は、2通りの制御パターン1,2のうちのいずれかを選択できるとともに、これら2通りの制御パターン1,2の夫々に応じた個別のフローチャート(言い換えれば、プログラム)を用意した点が、第1実施形態とは異なる。 The tableting device 1 according to the second embodiment corrects each control standard calculation value of the mass W, thickness T, and hardness H of the tablet in a specified order so that each of the mass W, thickness T, and hardness H is within the standard range. The tablet is selected by selecting one of the control pattern 1 (WTH control) for performing control to be held in the control and the control pattern 2 (WT control) for controlling the tablet mass W and thickness T to the respective control reference values. This is different from the first embodiment in that it is possible and a pattern determination unit corresponding to this is provided. Therefore, the tableting device 1 according to the second embodiment can select either one of the two control patterns 1 and 2, and an individual flowchart corresponding to each of the two control patterns 1 and 2 (in other words, paraphrase). For example, a program) is different from the first embodiment.
 第2実施形態における制御装置4aでのパターン判別部は図12に示されている。 The pattern discriminating unit in the control device 4a in the second embodiment is shown in FIG.
 このパターン判別部は、図示しない入力装置を用いて指定された制御パターンが制御パターン1又は制御パターン2のいずれであるのかを選択する制御パターン選択部(制御パターン選択手段)と、各基準値(規格基準値)、各制御基準値の補正範囲、及び制御基準算定値の補正順位を登録する補正内容登録部(補正内容登録手段)と、各制御基準値を登録する基準値登録部(基準値登録手段)と、使用するW-H相関係数a5の値をa5αにするかa5βにするかの取扱いを設定する相関係数設定部(相関係数設定手段)とを備える。なお、第2実施形態の制御パターン選択部は、第1実施形態で用いたステップS6の処理、つまり、不使用の相関係数の演算上の取扱いを定めたステップの処理を省略して構成される。 The pattern discrimination unit includes a control pattern selection unit (control pattern selection unit) that selects whether the control pattern designated using an input device (not shown) is the control pattern 1 or the control pattern 2, and each reference value ( Standard reference value), correction range of each control reference value, and correction content registration unit (correction content registration means) for registering the correction order of control reference calculated values, and a reference value registration unit (reference value) for registering each control reference value Registration means) and a correlation coefficient setting unit (correlation coefficient setting means) for setting the handling of whether the value of the WH correlation coefficient a5 to be used is a5α or a5β. The control pattern selection unit of the second embodiment is configured by omitting the process of step S6 used in the first embodiment, that is, the process of determining the handling of unused correlation coefficients. The
 制御パターン選択部はステップSAとステップSBとを有する。ステップSAの処理においては、制御装置4aは、指定された制御パターンが、「制御パターン1」であるのか否かを判断する。ステップSAの判断がYESの場合、制御装置4aは、補正内容登録部をなすステップS4を実行する。ステップSAの判断がNOの場合、処理はステップSBに進む。ステップSBにおいては、制御装置4aは、指定された制御パターンが、「制御パターン2」であるのか否かを判断する。ステップSBの判断がYESの場合、制御装置4aは、基準値登録部をなすステップS5を実行する。ステップSBの判断がNOの場合、処理はステップSAに戻る。 The control pattern selection unit has step SA and step SB. In the process of step SA, the control device 4a determines whether or not the designated control pattern is “control pattern 1”. When the determination in step SA is YES, the control device 4a executes step S4 that forms a correction content registration unit. If the determination in step SA is NO, the process proceeds to step SB. In step SB, the control device 4a determines whether or not the designated control pattern is “control pattern 2”. When the determination in step SB is YES, the control device 4a executes step S5 that forms a reference value registration unit. If the determination in step SB is NO, the process returns to step SA.
 ステップS4及びステップS5は第1実施形態で説明した通りである。ステップS4の次に実行されるステップS17は相関係数設定部をなしており、このステップS17の処理は第1実施形態で説明した通りである。 Step S4 and step S5 are as described in the first embodiment. Step S17 executed after step S4 forms a correlation coefficient setting unit, and the processing of step S17 is as described in the first embodiment.
 このような構成のパターン判別部を用いれば、打錠装置1は、第1実施形態で説明した第1~第6の制御パターンの他にも、例えば「成型品の密度の制御」や「成型品の崩壊性の制御」等を考慮して、或いはこれら各パターンの組み合わせにより考えられる様々な制御パターンの中から、「制御パターン1」又は「制御パターン2」を選択して、選択されたパターンに応じた制御により錠剤(成型品)を製造することが可能となる。 If the pattern discriminating section having such a configuration is used, the tableting device 1 can, for example, “control the density of a molded product” or “molding” in addition to the first to sixth control patterns described in the first embodiment. "Control pattern 1" or "Control pattern 2" is selected from various control patterns that are considered in consideration of "control of product disintegration" or a combination of these patterns. It becomes possible to manufacture a tablet (molded product) by control according to the above.
 なお、パターン判別部の制御パターン選択部は、図12の例示に制約されず、錠剤の質量を制御するか否かを判断するステップS1と、錠剤の厚みを制御するか否かを判断するステップS2と、錠剤の硬度を制御するか否かを判断するステップS3とを有した構成の代替例とすることも可能である。ステップS1~ステップS3は第1実施形態で説明した通りである。 In addition, the control pattern selection part of a pattern discrimination | determination part is not restrict | limited to the illustration of FIG. 12, Step S1 which judges whether the mass of a tablet is controlled, The step which judges whether it controls the thickness of a tablet An alternative example of the configuration having S2 and step S3 for determining whether or not to control the hardness of the tablet is also possible. Steps S1 to S3 are as described in the first embodiment.
 図12で制御パターン1が選択された場合(なお、前記代替例ではステップS3の判断がYES(硬度を制御する)になった場合)、次のステップS4処理が実行される。ステップS4においては、制御装置4aは、錠剤の硬度を制御するための質量、厚み、及び硬度の各制御基準算定値の補正順位の登録(指定)と、各基準値(規格基準値)及び各制御基準値の補正範囲の登録とを行う。 When the control pattern 1 is selected in FIG. 12 (in the alternative example, when the determination in step S3 is YES (controls the hardness)), the next step S4 processing is executed. In step S4, the control device 4a registers (specifies) the correction ranks of the control reference calculation values of mass, thickness, and hardness for controlling the hardness of the tablet, and sets each reference value (standard reference value) and each Register the correction range of the control reference value.
 ステップS4で登録される各基準値は、質量基準値WOと、厚み基準値TOと、硬度基準値HOとである。また、ステップS4で登録される各制御基準値の補正範囲は、質量制御基準値補正範囲の上限値WOH及び同補正範囲の下限値WOLと、厚み制御基準値補正範囲の上限値TOH及び同補正範囲の下限値TOLと、硬度制御基準値補正範囲の上限値HOHと、同補正範囲の下限値HOLとである。 Each reference value registered in step S4 is a mass reference value WO, a thickness reference value TO, and a hardness reference value HO. The correction range of each control reference value registered in step S4 includes the upper limit value WOH of the mass control reference value correction range and the lower limit value WOL of the correction range, the upper limit value TOH of the thickness control reference value correction range, and the same correction. The lower limit value TOL of the range, the upper limit value HOH of the hardness control reference value correction range, and the lower limit value HOL of the correction range.
 制御装置4aは、ステップS4が実行された場合、次のステップS17の処理を経由して質量と厚みと硬度を制御する制御パターン1(WTH制御)を選択する。ステップS17においては、制御装置4aは、制御パターン1において使用するW-H相関係数a5を既述のW-H相関係数a5βの値で置換する処理を行う。 
 この制御パターン1では、既に取得された相関係数a0~a5の全てが使用される。
When step S4 is executed, the control device 4a selects the control pattern 1 (WTH control) for controlling the mass, the thickness, and the hardness through the processing of the next step S17. In step S17, the control device 4a performs processing for replacing the WH correlation coefficient a5 used in the control pattern 1 with the value of the WH correlation coefficient a5β described above.
In this control pattern 1, all the already acquired correlation coefficients a0 to a5 are used.
 前記ステップS3の判断がNO(硬度を制御しない)である場合、制御装置4aは、ステップS5の処理を実行する。ステップS5においては、制御装置4aは、錠剤の質量を制御するための質量制御基準値WM及び厚みを制御するための厚み制御基準値TMを登録する。 If the determination in step S3 is NO (does not control the hardness), the control device 4a executes the process of step S5. In step S5, the control device 4a registers a mass control reference value WM for controlling the mass of the tablet and a thickness control reference value TM for controlling the thickness.
 図12で制御パターン2が選択された場合(なお、前記代替例ではステップS3の判断がNO(硬度を制御しない)になった場合)、制御装置4aは、ステップS5の処理を実行する。 When the control pattern 2 is selected in FIG. 12 (in the alternative example, when the determination in step S3 is NO (the hardness is not controlled)), the control device 4a executes the process of step S5.
 ステップS5においては、制御装置4aは、錠剤の質量と厚みを制御する制御パターン2(WT制御)を選択する。既述のようにステップS4は補正内容登録部であり、ステップS5は基準値登録部であり、ステップS17は相関係数設定部である。 In step S5, the control device 4a selects the control pattern 2 (WT control) for controlling the mass and thickness of the tablet. As described above, step S4 is a correction content registration unit, step S5 is a reference value registration unit, and step S17 is a correlation coefficient setting unit.
 次に、第2実施形態での制御パターン1(WTH制御)による制御の流れを図13~図18を参照して以下説明する。 Next, the flow of control according to control pattern 1 (WTH control) in the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.
 第2実施形態の制御パターン1では、第1実施形態で説明した算定質量演算部をなすステップS104、及び制御パターン第1選択部をなすステップS105が省略されている。そのため、図13に示すようにサンプリングデータを取得するステップS103の次に、制御基準算定値更新部(制御基準算定値更新手段又は制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS137の処理が制御装置4aにより実行される。このステップS137は、第1実施形態で説明した第3制御基準算定値更新部と同一である。 In the control pattern 1 of the second embodiment, the step S104 that forms the calculated mass calculation unit described in the first embodiment and the step S105 that forms the control pattern first selection unit are omitted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13, after step S103 for acquiring sampling data, the process of step S137, which is a control reference calculation value update unit (control reference calculation value update means or control reference calculation value update process), is performed by the control device 4a. It is executed by. This step S137 is the same as the third control reference calculated value update unit described in the first embodiment.
 第2実施形態においては、打錠装置1は、第1実施形態で説明した制御パターン3~制御パターン6を有していない。このため、第2実施形態の制御パターン1では、第1実施形態で説明したステップS138(制御パターン第3選択部)が省略されている。また、第2実施形態の制御パターン1では、第1実施形態で説明した第4制御基準算定値更新部をなすステップS142、第2算定硬度演算部をなすステップS144、および算定硬度第2判断部をなすステップS145(図7参照)も省略されている。 In the second embodiment, the tableting device 1 does not have the control patterns 3 to 6 described in the first embodiment. Therefore, in the control pattern 1 of the second embodiment, step S138 (control pattern third selection unit) described in the first embodiment is omitted. Moreover, in the control pattern 1 of 2nd Embodiment, step S142 which makes the 4th control standard calculation value update part demonstrated in 1st Embodiment, step S144 which makes a 2nd calculation hardness calculating part, and calculated hardness 2nd judgment part Step S145 (see FIG. 7) is also omitted.
 そのため、第2実施形態の制御パターン1では、図13に示すようにステップS137の処理の次に、制御装置4aは、第1算定硬度判断部WK1の各工程を実行する。それにより、まず、制御装置4aは、第1算定硬度演算部をなすステップS140の処理を実行する。 Therefore, in the control pattern 1 of the second embodiment, the control device 4a executes each process of the first calculated hardness determination unit WK1 after the process of step S137 as shown in FIG. Thereby, first, the control apparatus 4a performs the process of step S140 which makes a 1st calculated hardness calculating part.
 第2実施形態の制御パターン1では、ステップS140の次に、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第1判断部をなすステップS141の判断を行なう。このステップS141の判断がYESになると、制御装置4aは、第1実施形態で説明した硬度制御工程を実施する硬度制御部(硬度制御手段)HKをなすステップS151~ステップS178(図14~図17参照)の処理を順次行なう。 In the control pattern 1 of the second embodiment, after step S140, the control device 4a performs the determination of step S141 which is a calculated hardness first determination unit. If the determination in step S141 is YES, the control device 4a performs steps S151 to S178 (FIGS. 14 to 17) forming the hardness control unit (hardness control means) HK that performs the hardness control process described in the first embodiment. (See) are sequentially performed.
 第2実施形態の制御パターン1では、制御装置4aは、図14に示す硬度制御部HKのステップS153、ステップS163、ステップS173のいずれかの処理を実行する。その後、制御装置4aは、図18に示すように第1実施形態で説明した第1算定圧力変動値演算部をなすステップS109の処理を実行し、次に、第1実施形態で説明した算定厚み演算部をなすステップS110の処理を実行する。 In the control pattern 1 of the second embodiment, the control device 4a executes any one of steps S153, S163, and S173 of the hardness control unit HK shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18, the control device 4a executes the process of step S109, which is the first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit described in the first embodiment, and then calculates the calculated thickness described in the first embodiment. The process of step S110 which makes a calculating part is performed.
 この場合、ステップS109においては、制御装置4aは、硬度補正部HKを経由して与えられた質量制御基準算定値WMaを用いて質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値PWaを求める。同様に、ステップS110においては、制御装置4aは、硬度補正部HKを経由して与えられた質量制御基準算定値WMaを用いて質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と厚み平均値Txとから算定厚みTaを求める。 In this case, in step S109, the control device 4a obtains the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculated value WMa given via the hardness correction unit HK. Similarly, in step S110, the control device 4a calculates from the thickness variation value and the thickness average value Tx when mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculation value WMa given via the hardness correction unit HK. The thickness Ta is obtained.
 ステップS110の次に、第2実施形態の制御パターン1では、制御装置4aは、第1実施形態で説明した杵先間隔算定値演算部をなすステップS111を実行する。この場合、ステップS111においては、制御装置4aは、硬度補正部HKを経由して与えられた厚み制御基準算定値TMaを用いて厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値とから杵先間隔算定値(LMa、lMa)を求める。 Next to step S110, in the control pattern 1 of the second embodiment, the control device 4a executes step S111 that constitutes the tip distance calculated value calculation unit described in the first embodiment. In this case, in step S111, the control device 4a uses the thickness control reference calculation value TMa given via the hardness correction unit HK to control the tip interval variation value and the tip interval setting value. From these, the calculated tip spacing value (LMa, lMa) is obtained.
 この後、制御装置4aは、第1実施形態で説明した第2算定圧力変動値演算部をなすステップS112の処理を実行し、次に、第1実施形態で説明した圧力制御基準算定値演算部をなすステップS115の処理を実行する。 Thereafter, the control device 4a executes the process of step S112 which constitutes the second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit described in the first embodiment, and then the pressure control reference calculation value calculation unit described in the first embodiment. The process of step S115 is performed.
 この場合、ステップS112においては、制御装置4aは、硬度補正部HKを経由して与えられた厚み制御基準算定値TMaを用いて厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値PTaを求める。ステップS115においては、制御装置4aは、ステップS109で求めた第1算定圧力変動値PWaと、ステップS112で求めた第2算定圧力変動値PTaと、運転中に求めた成形圧力平均値Pxとから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求める。 In this case, in step S112, the control device 4a obtains the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the thickness control is performed using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa given via the hardness correction unit HK. In step S115, the control device 4a uses the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa obtained in step S109, the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa obtained in step S112, and the molding pressure average value Px obtained during operation. The pressure control reference calculation value PMa is obtained.
 更に、第2実施形態の制御パターン1では、ステップS115の次に、制御装置4aは、ステップS111で求めた予備圧縮及び本圧縮の杵先間隔算定値(lMa,LMa)の値で、予備圧縮及び本圧縮の杵先間隔設定値(lM,LM)を更新して杵先間隔を制御する杵先間隔制御部をなすステップS118の処理を実行する。この後、制御装置4aは、ステップS115で求めた圧力制御基準算定値PMaの値で圧力制御基準値(現在値)PMを更新し、圧力制御部51の各制御圧力値を更新する制御圧力値更新部をなすステップS149の処理を実行する。このステップS149の実行後に、処理はスタートに戻る。 Furthermore, in the control pattern 1 of the second embodiment, after step S115, the control device 4a uses the preliminary compression and main compression tip interval calculated values (lMa, LMa) obtained in step S111 to perform preliminary compression. And the process of step S118 which makes the tip interval control part which updates the tip interval setting value (1M, LM) of this compression and controls the tip interval is executed. Thereafter, the control device 4a updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM with the value of the pressure control reference calculated value PMa obtained in step S115, and updates each control pressure value of the pressure control unit 51. The process of step S149 that forms an update unit is executed. After executing step S149, the process returns to the start.
 以上説明した点を除いて、制御パターン1(WTH制御)についての制御の流れは、第1実施形態と同じである。したがって、この制御パターン1を指定して打錠装置1が運転された場合、第1実施形態で既に説明した理由によって、打錠装置1は、打錠機2の運転中の温度変化に拘らず、錠剤の質量Wと厚みTと硬度Hの全てを規格範囲内に保持して、錠剤を製造することが可能である。 Except for the points described above, the control flow for control pattern 1 (WTH control) is the same as in the first embodiment. Therefore, when the tableting device 1 is operated by designating this control pattern 1, the tableting device 1 does not depend on the temperature change during operation of the tableting machine 2 for the reason already described in the first embodiment. It is possible to produce a tablet while maintaining all of the tablet mass W, thickness T, and hardness H within the specified range.
 即ち、回転式の打錠装置1の連続運転が開始されると、まず、制御装置4aは、図示しない記憶部に記憶されたプログラムに基づき図13に示すステップS101の処理を実行し、サンプリング部41へ「サンプリング指令」を出力する。なお、この処理に代えて、制御装置4aは、人為的にサンプリング指令を出力させる「強制サンプリング指令」の有無を判断することも可能である。 That is, when the continuous operation of the rotary tableting device 1 is started, first, the control device 4a executes the process of step S101 shown in FIG. 13 based on the program stored in the storage unit (not shown), and the sampling unit 41 outputs a “sampling command”. Instead of this processing, the control device 4a can also determine whether or not there is a “forced sampling command” that artificially outputs a sampling command.
 この指令後に、ステップS102の処理が実行され、制御装置4aは、サンプリング部41のサンプリング駆動器44を駆動する。これにより、サンプリングシャッタ43がサンプリングシュート42の入口を開く開き位置に移動されるとともに、このサンプリングシャッタ43で排出シュート39の出口側が閉じられる。したがって、製造される錠剤が、複数個サンプリングされ、サンプリングシュート42を通って測定器3に供給される。こうした錠剤のサンプリングは、制御装置4aがサンプリング部41を制御することにより、打錠機2の連続運転中、所定時間毎、例えば30分毎に実行される。 After this instruction, the process of step S102 is executed, and the control device 4a drives the sampling driver 44 of the sampling unit 41. As a result, the sampling shutter 43 is moved to an open position where the inlet of the sampling chute 42 is opened, and the outlet side of the discharge chute 39 is closed by the sampling shutter 43. Therefore, a plurality of tablets to be manufactured are sampled and supplied to the measuring device 3 through the sampling chute 42. Such tablet sampling is executed every predetermined time, for example, every 30 minutes, during continuous operation of the tableting machine 2 by controlling the sampling unit 41 by the control device 4a.
 前記サンプリングの開始がされると、制御装置4aは、ステップS103の処理を実行する。ステップS103においては、制御装置4aは、サンプリングデータを取得する。ここで取得されるサンプリングデータは、第1位置での杵先間隔設定値lM、第2位置での杵先間隔設定値LM、及び測定器3によって測定されかつ算出された質量平均値Wx、厚み平均値Tx、並びに硬度平均値Hxである。成型圧力平均値Px以外のいずれのデータも通信処理により制御装置4aに読み込まれる。これと共に、ステップS103において、制御装置4aは、圧力センサ29により検出される圧力データを基に、サンプリングされた複数の錠剤についての成型圧力平均値Pxを算出する。なお、サンプリングデータの取得とその制御装置4aへの入力(供給)は、自動ではなく、手動で行うことも可能である。 When the sampling is started, the control device 4a executes the process of step S103. In step S103, the control device 4a acquires sampling data. The sampling data acquired here includes the tip interval setting value 1M at the first position, the tip interval setting value LM at the second position, the mass average value Wx measured and calculated by the measuring instrument 3, and the thickness. The average value Tx and the hardness average value Hx. Any data other than the molding pressure average value Px is read into the control device 4a by communication processing. At the same time, in step S103, the control device 4a calculates the molding pressure average value Px for the plurality of sampled tablets based on the pressure data detected by the pressure sensor 29. The acquisition of sampling data and its input (supply) to the control device 4a can be performed manually instead of automatically.
 この後、制御装置4aは、制御基準算定値更新部をなすステップS137の処理を実行する。ステップS137においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理の整合性を確保するため、錠剤の各基準値の夫々の値で対応する制御基準算定値を置換する処理を行う。つまり、制御装置4aは、錠剤の質量基準値WOの値で錠剤の質量制御基準算定値WMaを、錠剤の厚み基準値TOの値で錠剤の厚み制御基準算定値TMaを、錠剤の硬度基準値HOの値で錠剤の硬度制御基準算定値HMaを、夫々置き換える。このとき、質量基準値WOと質量制御基準算定値WMaは同一値、厚み基準値TOと厚み制御基準算定値TMaは同一値、硬度基準値HOと硬度制御基準算定値HMaは同一値である。 Thereafter, the control device 4a executes the process of step S137 which forms a control reference calculation value update unit. In step S137, the control device 4a performs a process of substituting the corresponding control reference calculated value with each value of each reference value of the tablet in order to ensure the consistency of the subsequent calculation process. That is, the control device 4a uses the tablet mass reference value WO as the tablet mass control standard calculation value WMa, the tablet thickness standard value TO as the tablet thickness control standard calculation value TMa, and the tablet hardness standard value. The hardness control standard calculation value HMa of the tablet is replaced with the value of HO, respectively. At this time, the mass reference value WO and the mass control reference calculated value WMa are the same value, the thickness reference value TO and the thickness control reference calculated value TMa are the same value, and the hardness reference value HO and the hardness control reference calculated value HMa are the same value.
 次に、制御装置4aは、第1算定硬度演算部をなすステップS140の処理を実行する。ステップS140においては、制御装置4aは、質量制御をしたとき(質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたとき)の硬度変動値(これを第1硬度変動値という。)と、厚み制御をしたとき(厚み平均値Txを厚み制御基準算定値TMaにしたとき)の硬度変動値(これを第2硬度変動値という。)と、硬度平均値Hxとから、錠剤の算定硬度Haを求める。この式を下記に示す。 
 Ha=Hx+〔(WMa-Wx)/a5〕+〔(TMa-Tx)/a4〕……式(18)。
Next, the control apparatus 4a performs the process of step S140 which makes a 1st calculated hardness calculating part. In step S140, the control device 4a controls the thickness when the mass control is performed (when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa) (this is referred to as a first hardness variation value). The calculated hardness Ha of the tablet is obtained from the hardness fluctuation value (this is called the second hardness fluctuation value) when the thickness average value Tx is changed to the thickness control reference calculation value TMa and the hardness average value Hx. . This formula is shown below.
Ha = Hx + [(WMa−Wx) / a5] + [(TMa−Tx) / a4] (18)
 この式(18)において、Hxはサンプリング錠の硬度平均値、a5はW-H相関係数、(WMa-Wx)/a5で演算された値が第1硬度変動値である。また、Txはサンプリング錠の厚み平均値、a4はT-H相関係数であり、(TMa-Tx)/a4で演算された値が第2硬度変動値である。したがって、式(18)により、制御装置4aは、硬度平均値Hxと第1硬度変動値と第2硬度変動値とを合計して、算定硬度Haを求めることができる。 In this equation (18), Hx is the hardness average value of the sampling tablets, a5 is the WH correlation coefficient, and the value calculated by (WMa-Wx) / a5 is the first hardness variation value. Tx is the thickness average value of the sampling tablets, a4 is the TH correlation coefficient, and the value calculated by (TMa-Tx) / a4 is the second hardness variation value. Therefore, the control device 4a can obtain the calculated hardness Ha by adding the hardness average value Hx, the first hardness variation value, and the second hardness variation value according to the equation (18).
 次に、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第1判断部をなすステップS141の判断を行なう。ステップS141においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが適正(硬度を規格範囲内に保持して生産を継続することが可能)であるか否かを判断する。つまり、ステップS141においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが、質量・厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるのか否かを判断する。更に、言い換えれば、ステップS141においては、制御装置4aは、演算上において質量と厚みの各制御基準算定値の全てが上限値又は下限値に補正されたとした場合に、算定硬度Haが、錠剤に対する硬度制御基準値の上限値と下限値で規定された範囲、つまり、硬度制御可能範囲に入っているのか否かを判断する。この場合、演算上において、制御装置4aは、質量を最大に増やすとともに厚みを最小に減らしたときに、硬度を最も高くすることができ、この逆に、演算上において質量を最小に減らすとともに厚みを最大に増やしたときに硬度を最も低くすることができる。 Next, the control device 4a performs the determination in step S141 which constitutes a calculated hardness first determination unit. In step S141, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is appropriate (the hardness can be maintained within the standard range and production can be continued). That is, in step S141, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting each control reference calculated value of mass, thickness, and hardness. Furthermore, in other words, in step S141, the control device 4a determines that the calculated hardness Ha is equal to the tablet when all the control reference calculated values of mass and thickness are corrected to the upper limit value or the lower limit value. It is determined whether the hardness control reference value is within a range defined by the upper limit value and the lower limit value, that is, the hardness controllable range. In this case, in the calculation, the control device 4a can maximize the hardness when the mass is increased to the maximum and the thickness is reduced to the minimum, and conversely, the mass is reduced to the minimum while calculating the thickness. The hardness can be minimized when the value is increased to the maximum.
 つまり、既述の算定硬度Haが硬度制御可能範囲に入っているか否かは、次の二つの式に基づいて判断することができる。 
 HOL<Ha+〔(WOH-WMa)/a5〕+〔(TOL-TMa)/a4〕
 HOH>Ha-〔(WMa-WOL)/a5〕-〔(TMa-TOH)/a4〕
 さらに上記二つの式は各々次のように変換することができる。 
 HOL-〔(WOH-WMa)/a5〕-〔(TOL-TMa)/a4〕<Ha
 Ha<HOH+〔(WMa-WOL)/a5〕+〔(TMa-TOH)/a4〕
 このことから、ステップS141に示すHOL-〔(WOH-WMa)/a5〕-〔(TOL-TMa)/a4〕<Ha<HOH+〔(WMa-WOL)/a5〕+〔(TMa-TOH)/a4〕の式に置き換えて判断することができる。
That is, whether or not the above-described calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range can be determined based on the following two expressions.
HOL <Ha + [(WOH−WMa) / a5] + [(TOL−TMa) / a4]
HOH> Ha-[(WMa-WOL) / a5]-[(TMa-TOH) / a4]
Furthermore, the above two equations can be converted as follows.
HOL-[(WOH-WMa) / a5]-[(TOL-TMa) / a4] <Ha
Ha <HOH + [(WMa−WOL) / a5] + [(TMa−TOH) / a4]
From this, HOL-[(WOH-WMa) / a5]-[(TOL-TMa) / a4] <Ha <HOH + [(WMa-WOL) / a5] + [(TMa-TOH) / It can be determined by substituting the equation of a4].
 ここで、HOL-〔(WOH-WMa)/a5〕-〔(TOL-TMa)/a4〕を硬度制御可能範囲の下限値HLとし、HOH+〔(WMa-WOL)/a5〕+〔(TMa-TOH)/a4〕を硬度可能範囲の上限値HHとした時、ステップS141での硬度制御可能範囲の下限値HLは次式で演算される。 
 HL=HOL-〔(WOH-WMa)/a5〕-〔(TOL-TMa)/a4〕
 ステップS141での硬度制御可能範囲の上限値HHは次式で演算される。 
 HH=HOH+〔(WMa-WOL)/a5〕+〔(TMa-TOH)/a4〕
 これらの式において、HOLは錠剤の硬度制御基準値補正範囲の下限値、HOHは錠剤の硬度制御基準値補正範囲の上限値、WOLは錠剤の質量制御基準値補正範囲の下限値、WOHは錠剤の質量制御基準値補正範囲の上限値、TOLは錠剤の厚み制御基準値補正範囲の下限値、TOHは錠剤の厚み制御基準値補正範囲の上限値であり、又、a5はW-H相関係数、a4はT-H相関係数である。
Here, HOL − [(WOH−WMa) / a5] − [(TOL−TMa) / a4] is defined as the lower limit value HL of the hardness controllable range, and HOH + [(WMa−WOL) / a5] + [(TMa− TOH) / a4] is the upper limit value HH of the possible hardness range, the lower limit value HL of the hardness controllable range in step S141 is calculated by the following equation.
HL = HOL-[(WOH-WMa) / a5]-[(TOL-TMa) / a4]
The upper limit value HH of the hardness controllable range in step S141 is calculated by the following equation.
HH = HOH + [(WMa-WOL) / a5] + [(TMa-TOH) / a4]
In these equations, HOL is the lower limit value of the tablet hardness control reference value correction range, HOH is the upper limit value of the tablet hardness control reference value correction range, WOL is the lower limit value of the tablet mass control reference value correction range, and WOH is the tablet. The upper limit value of the mass control reference value correction range, TOL is the lower limit value of the tablet thickness control reference value correction range, TOH is the upper limit value of the tablet thickness control reference value correction range, and a5 is the WH phase relationship. The number, a4, is a TH correlation coefficient.
 したがって、ステップS141においては、制御装置4aは、HL<Ha<HHの式によって、算定硬度Haが適正(硬度を規格範囲内に保持して生産を継続することが可能)であるのか否かを判断する。 Therefore, in step S141, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is appropriate (the hardness can be maintained within the standard range and the production can be continued) according to the formula HL <Ha <HH. to decide.
 ステップS141の判断がNO(算定硬度Haが質量・厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値補正による硬度制御可能範囲外)であることは、質量・厚み・硬度の全ての制御基準値を上限値又は下限値に補正しても、製造される錠剤の硬度を規格範囲内とする制御ができない、ということである。この場合、制御装置4aは、報知・停止部(手段)をなすステップS146を実行する。これにより、異常を報知する信号(異常信号)が出力されるとともに、例えば打錠機2の運転が停止される。 If the determination in step S141 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the control reference calculation values of mass, thickness, and hardness), all control reference values of mass, thickness, and hardness are set to the upper limit value or This means that even if the lower limit value is corrected, it is impossible to control the hardness of the manufactured tablet within the standard range. In this case, the control device 4a executes step S146 that forms a notification / stop unit (means). Thereby, while outputting the signal (abnormal signal) which notifies abnormality, the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped, for example.
 ステップS141の判断がYES(算定硬度Haが質量・厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値補正による硬度制御可能範囲内)である場合、制御装置4aは、既に入力された制御基準算定値の補正順位に従って、硬度制御のための各制御基準算定値の補正を行う硬度制御部(硬度制御手段)HKを実行する。 When the determination in step S141 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the control reference calculation values of mass, thickness, and hardness), the control device 4a determines the correction order of the already input control reference calculation values. Accordingly, a hardness control unit (hardness control means) HK for correcting each control reference calculation value for hardness control is executed.
 即ち、まず、制御装置4aは、図14に示す補正先第1判断部をなすステップS151の処理を実行する。このステップS151においては、制御装置4aは、制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「硬度」であるか否かを判断する。 That is, first, the control device 4a executes the process of step S151 which is a correction destination first determination unit shown in FIG. In step S151, the control device 4a determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “hardness”.
 制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「硬度」ではない場合、ステップS151の判断はNOとなるので、制御装置4aは、補正先第2判断部をなすステップS161の判断を行なう。このステップS161は、制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「厚み」であるか否かを判断する。 When the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is not “hardness”, the determination in step S151 is NO, and thus the control device 4a performs the determination in step S161 which constitutes a correction destination second determination unit. In step S161, it is determined whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “thickness”.
 制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「厚み」でない場合、ステップS161の判断はNOとなるので、制御装置4aは、補正先第3判断部をなすステップS171の判断を行なう。ステップS171においては、制御装置4aは、制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「質量」であるか否かを判断する。 When the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is not “thickness”, the determination in step S161 is NO, and thus the control device 4a performs the determination in step S171 that constitutes the correction destination third determination unit. In step S171, the control device 4a determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculated value is “mass”.
 ステップS151、ステップS161、ステップS171の判断がいずれもNOである場合、即ち、図示しない入力装置により設定された順位に従って硬度と厚みと質量のいずれの制御基準算定値も1番目の補正先として設定(登録)されていない、と判断された場合には、制御装置4aは、錠剤の硬度の制御ができない。このため、制御装置4aは、既述のステップS146の処理を実行する。これにより、異常を報知する信号(異常信号)が出力されるとともに例えば打錠機2の運転が停止される。なお、このような選択肢は、ステップS4で予め制御基準算定値の補正順位を設定(登録)しているので、実際にはあり得ない。 When all of the determinations in step S151, step S161, and step S171 are NO, that is, any control reference calculation value of hardness, thickness, and mass is set as the first correction destination according to the order set by an input device (not shown). When it is determined that (registration) is not performed, the control device 4a cannot control the hardness of the tablet. For this reason, the control apparatus 4a performs the process of step S146 mentioned above. As a result, a signal (abnormal signal) for notifying abnormality is output and, for example, the operation of the tableting machine 2 is stopped. Note that such an option is not actually possible because the correction order of the control reference calculation value is set (registered) in advance in step S4.
 ステップS151の判断がYESである(制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「硬度」である)場合、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第3判断部をなす次のステップS152の判断を行なう。このステップS152においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが、硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する。ここで、硬度制御可能範囲は次式で規定される。 
 HMa-kh(HMa-HOL)≦Ha≦HMa+kh(HOH-HMa)
 この式でkhは硬度制御基準算定値HMaを補正するときの硬度補正係数であり、0.01~1.00の任意な値に設定される。この硬度補正係数khは1.00未満であることが好ましい。
If the determination in step S151 is YES (the first correction destination of the control reference calculated value is “hardness”), the control device 4a performs the determination in the next step S152 constituting the calculated hardness third determining unit. In step S152, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculated value HMa. Here, the hardness controllable range is defined by the following equation.
HMa−kh (HMa−HOL) ≦ Ha ≦ HMa + kh (HOH−HMa)
In this equation, kh is a hardness correction coefficient when correcting the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, and is set to an arbitrary value between 0.01 and 1.00. The hardness correction coefficient kh is preferably less than 1.00.
 ステップS152の判断がYESである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内である)場合、制御装置4aは、第1硬度制御基準算定値更新部をなすステップS153の処理を実行する。このステップS153においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理での整合性を確保するため算定硬度Haの値で硬度制御基準算定値HMaを更新する。 If the determination in step S152 is YES (calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculation value HMa), the control device 4a constitutes a first hardness control reference calculation value update unit step S153. Execute the process. In step S153, the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculated value HMa with the value of the calculated hardness Ha in order to ensure consistency in the subsequent arithmetic processing.
 この後、制御装置4aは、図示しない記憶部に記憶されたプログラムを実行し、ステップS153において更新された硬度制御基準算定値HMaを後述する運転制御系統に供給し、この系統の各ステップを順次実行する。即ち、ステップS151の判断がYES(制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「硬度」)で、ステップS152がYES(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内である)と判断した場合、制御装置4aは、ステップS153の処理を経て後述する運転制御系統の各ステップを実行する。これにより、打錠装置1は、製造される錠剤の硬度を規格範囲内に保持して錠剤を製造することができる。 Thereafter, the control device 4a executes a program stored in a storage unit (not shown), supplies the hardness control reference calculation value HMa updated in step S153 to an operation control system described later, and sequentially performs each step of this system. Execute. That is, the determination in step S151 is YES (the first correction destination of the control reference calculated value is “hardness”), and step S152 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculated value HMa). If it is determined that there is a), the control device 4a executes each step of the operation control system, which will be described later, through the process of step S153. Thereby, the tableting apparatus 1 can manufacture a tablet, keeping the hardness of the tablet manufactured within a specification range.
 ステップS152の判断がNOである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲外である)場合、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第6判断部であるステップS154の判断を行なう。図15に示すステップS154においては、制御装置4aは、錠剤の算定硬度Haが、錠剤の硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さいか否かを、次式によって判断する。 
 HMa-kh(HMa-HOL)>Ha
 ステップS154の判断がYESである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さい)場合、制御装置4aは、第2硬度制御基準算定値更新部(第2硬度制御基準算定値更新手段又は第2硬度制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS155の処理を実行する。図15に示すステップS155においては、制御装置4aは、硬度制御基準算定値HMa等を用いて錠剤の硬度制御基準暫定値HMbを下記の式によって求める。 
  HMb=HMa-kh(HMa-HOL)……式(19)。
If the determination in step S152 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the hardness control reference calculated value HMa), the control device 4a determines the determination in step S154, which is a calculated hardness sixth determination unit. Do. In step S154 shown in FIG. 15, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa of the tablet by the following equation.
HMa-kh (HMa-HOL)> Ha
If the determination in step S154 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa), the control device 4a is configured to update the second hardness control reference calculation value update unit (second hardness control reference calculation value update means or The process of step S155 which performs the 2 hardness control reference calculated value update step) is executed. In step S155 shown in FIG. 15, the control device 4a obtains the tablet hardness control reference provisional value HMb by using the following formula using the hardness control reference calculated value HMa and the like.
HMb = HMa−kh (HMa−HOL) (Equation 19)
 また、ステップS155においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために算出された硬度制御基準暫定値HMbの値で硬度制御基準算定値HMaを更新する。つまり、ステップS155においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さい場合、硬度制御基準値補正範囲の下限値HOLと硬度制御基準算定値HMaとの差に、ステップS152で用いた硬度補正係数khを乗じた値と、硬度制御基準算定値HMaとから硬度制御基準暫定値HMbを求めて、この硬度制御基準暫定値HMbの値で硬度制御基準算定値HMaを更新する。これにより、硬度制御基準算定値HMaを減らす処理が行われる。 In step S155, the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculated value HMa with the value of the hardness control reference provisional value HMb calculated to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S155, when the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines that the difference between the lower limit value HOL of the hardness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference calculated value HMa is step S152. The hardness control reference provisional value HMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the hardness correction coefficient kh used in the above and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is updated with the value of the hardness control reference provisional value HMb. . Thereby, the process which reduces the hardness control reference | standard calculated value HMa is performed.
 この処理において、硬度補正係数khが1.00未満に設定されている場合に従う補正では、許される範囲で限度一杯まで、硬度制御基準算定値HMaを一気に減らす処理をするのではなく、硬度補正係数khによる補正にしたがい前記限度より小さく硬度制御基準算定値HMaが減らされる。なお、硬度補正係数khが1.00に設定されている場合、許される範囲の限度一杯まで、硬度制御基準算定値HMaが一気に減らされる。 In this process, in the correction according to the case where the hardness correction coefficient kh is set to be less than 1.00, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is not reduced at a stretch to the full range within the allowable range, but is processed by the hardness correction coefficient kh. In accordance with the correction, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is reduced below the limit. When the hardness correction coefficient kh is set to 1.00, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is reduced at a stroke to the full limit of the allowable range.
 ステップS154の判断がNOである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより大きい)場合、制御装置4aは、第2硬度制御基準算定値更新手段(第2硬度制御基準算定値更新手段又は第2硬度制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS156の処理を実行する。図15に示すステップS156においては、制御装置4aは、硬度制御基準算定値HMa等を用いて錠剤の硬度制御基準暫定値HMbを下記の式によって求める。 
  HMb=HMa+kh(HOH-HMa)……式(20)。
If the determination in step S154 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is greater than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa), the control device 4a uses the second hardness control reference calculation value update means (second hardness control reference calculation value update means or The process of step S156 is executed. In step S156 shown in FIG. 15, the control device 4a calculates the tablet hardness control reference provisional value HMb using the hardness control reference calculated value HMa and the like by the following equation.
HMb = HMa + kh (HOH−HMa) (Equation 20)
 また、ステップS156においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された硬度制御基準暫定値HMbの値で硬度制御基準算定値HMaを更新する。つまり、ステップS156においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより大きい場合、硬度制御基準値補正範囲の上限値HOHと硬度制御基準算定値HMaとの差に、ステップS152で用いた硬度補正係数khを乗じた値と、硬度制御基準算定値HMaとから硬度制御基準暫定値HMbを求めて、この硬度制御基準暫定値HMbの値で硬度制御基準算定値HMaを更新する。これにより、硬度制御基準算定値HMaを増やす処理が行われる。 In step S156, the control device 4a updates the hardness control reference calculated value HMa with the calculated hardness control reference provisional value HMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S156, when the calculated hardness Ha is larger than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the upper limit value HOH of the hardness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference calculated value HMa is step S152. The hardness control reference provisional value HMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the hardness correction coefficient kh used in the above and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is updated with the value of the hardness control reference provisional value HMb. . Thereby, the process which increases the hardness control reference | standard calculated value HMa is performed.
 この処理において、硬度補正係数khが1.00未満に設定されている場合に従う補正では、許される範囲で限度一杯まで、硬度制御基準算定値HMaを一気に増やす処理をするのではなく、硬度補正係数khによる補正に従い前記限度より小さく硬度制御基準算定値HMaが増やされる。なお、硬度補正係数khが1.00に設定されている場合に従う補正では、許される範囲の限度一杯まで、硬度制御基準算定値HMaが一気に増やされる。 In this process, in the correction according to the case where the hardness correction coefficient kh is set to be less than 1.00, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is not increased at a stretch to the full limit within the allowable range, but by the hardness correction coefficient kh. According to the correction, the hardness control standard calculation value HMa is increased below the limit. In the correction according to the case where the hardness correction coefficient kh is set to 1.00, the hardness control reference calculation value HMa is increased at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
 以上のようにステップS154~ステップS156の各工程で形成される算定硬度補正部HKAによる演算上の硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正では、錠剤の硬度制御基準算定値HMaが、硬度制御基準値補正範囲を外れないように硬度制御基準算定値HMaを更新する。しかし、こうした硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正では前記ステップS152の判断に従って錠剤の硬度を適正化できない。このため、ステップS155又はステップS156の処理の終了後に、制御装置4aは、補正先第4判断部をなすステップS157で次の補正先を判断して、その補正先に、ステップS155又はステップS156において硬度制御基準暫定値HMbの値で更新された硬度制御基準算定値HMaを供給する。 As described above, in the correction of the calculated hardness control reference value HMa by the calculated hardness correction unit HKA formed in each step of steps S154 to S156, the tablet hardness control reference calculation value HMa is corrected to the hardness control reference value correction. The hardness control reference calculation value HMa is updated so as not to fall outside the range. However, the correction of the hardness control reference calculation value HMa cannot optimize the tablet hardness according to the determination in step S152. For this reason, after the process of step S155 or step S156 is completed, the control device 4a determines the next correction destination in step S157 that forms the correction destination fourth determination unit, and sets the correction destination in step S155 or step S156. The hardness control reference calculation value HMa updated with the value of the hardness control reference provisional value HMb is supplied.
 具体的には、ステップS157においては、制御装置4aは、次の補正先が「質量」であるか否かを判断する。これにより、次の補正先が「質量」である場合(ステップS157の判断がYESである場合)、制御装置4aは、質量制御基準算定値WMaの補正処理手順を判断するためのステップS172の判断を行なう。又、次の補正先が「質量」でない場合(ステップS157の判断がNOである場合)、制御装置4aは、厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正処理手順を判断するためのステップS162の判断を行なう。このステップS157の判断(つまり、次の補正が「質量」であるのか「厚み」であるのか)は、図示しない入力装置により指定された各制御基準算定値の補正順位に従っている。 Specifically, in step S157, the control device 4a determines whether or not the next correction destination is “mass”. Thereby, when the next correction destination is “mass” (when the determination in step S157 is YES), the control device 4a determines in step S172 to determine the correction processing procedure for the mass control reference calculated value WMa. To do. When the next correction destination is not “mass” (when the determination in step S157 is NO), the control device 4a performs the determination in step S162 for determining the correction processing procedure for the thickness control reference calculation value TMa. . The determination in step S157 (that is, whether the next correction is “mass” or “thickness”) is in accordance with the correction rank of each control reference calculation value designated by an input device (not shown).
 前記ステップS151の判断がNOとなったことに伴い、この次に実行されるステップS161の判断がYESである(制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「厚み」である)場合、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第4判断部をなすステップS162の判断を行なう。このステップS162においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが、厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する。 When the determination in step S151 is NO and the determination in step S161 to be executed next is YES (the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “thickness”), the control device In step 4a, the determination in step S162, which is a calculated hardness fourth determination unit, is performed. In step S162, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness control reference calculated value TMa.
 ここで、硬度制御可能範囲は次式で規定される。 
HMa-kt(TOL-TMa)/a4≦Ha≦HMa+kt(TMa-TOH)/a4 この式でktは厚み制御基準算定値TMaを補正するときの厚み補正係数であり、0.01~1.00の任意な値に設定され、この厚み補正係数ktは1.00未満であることが好ましい。
Here, the hardness controllable range is defined by the following equation.
HMa−kt (TOL−TMa) / a4 ≦ Ha ≦ HMa + kt (TMa−TOH) / a4 In this equation, kt is a thickness correction coefficient for correcting the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and is an arbitrary value between 0.01 and 1.00 The thickness correction coefficient kt is preferably less than 1.00.
 ステップS162の判断がYESである(算定硬度Haが厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内である)場合、制御装置4aは、第1厚み制御基準算定値更新部をなすステップS163の処理を実行する。 When the determination in step S162 is YES (calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness control reference calculation value TMa), the control device 4a forms a first thickness control reference calculation value update unit. Execute the process.
 このステップS163においては、制御装置4aは厚み制御基準算定値TMa等を用いて錠剤の厚み制御基準暫定値TMbを下記の式によって求める。 
  TMb=TMa+a4(HMa-Ha)……式(21)。
In step S163, the control device 4a obtains the tablet thickness control reference provisional value TMb by using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the like according to the following equation.
TMb = TMa + a4 (HMa−Ha) (Formula (21))
 また、ステップS163においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された厚み制御基準暫定値TMbの値で厚み制御基準算定値TMaを更新する。 In step S163, the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the calculated thickness control reference provisional value TMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent calculation processing.
 この後、制御装置4aは、ステップS163で更新された厚み制御基準算定値TMaを図18に示す運転制御系統に供給し、この系統の各ステップS109~ステップS149の処理を順次実行する。即ち、ステップS161の判断がYES(制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「厚み」)で、ステップS162がYES(算定硬度Haが、厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内である)と判断した場合、制御装置4aは、ステップS163を経て前記運転制御系統のステップS109~ステップS149の処理を順次実行する。これにより、打錠装置1は、製造される錠剤の硬度を規格範囲内に保持して錠剤を製造することができる。 Thereafter, the control device 4a supplies the thickness control reference calculation value TMa updated in step S163 to the operation control system shown in FIG. 18, and sequentially executes the processes of steps S109 to S149 of this system. That is, the determination in step S161 is YES (the first correction destination of the control reference calculated value is “thickness”), and step S162 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is within the hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness control reference calculated value TMa). In step S163, the control device 4a sequentially executes steps S109 to S149 of the operation control system. Thereby, the tableting apparatus 1 can manufacture a tablet, keeping the hardness of the tablet manufactured within a specification range.
 ステップS162の判断がNOである(算定硬度Haが厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲外である)場合、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第7判断部をなすステップS164の判断を行なう。図16に示すステップS164においては、制御装置4aは、錠剤の算定硬度Haが、錠剤の硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さいか否かを、次式によって判断する。 
 HMa-kt(TOL-TMa)/a4>Ha
 ステップS164の判断がYESである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さい)場合、制御装置4aは、第2厚み制御基準算定値更新手段(第2厚み制御基準算定値更新手段又は第2厚み制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS165の処理を実行する。図16に示すステップS165においては、制御装置4aは、厚み制御基準算定値TMa等を用いて錠剤の厚み制御基準暫定値TMbを下記の式によって求める。 
  TMb=TMa-kh(TMa-TOL)……式(22)。
When the determination in step S162 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the thickness control reference calculated value TMa), the control device 4a determines the determination in step S164 that forms the calculated hardness seventh determination unit. Do. In step S164 shown in FIG. 16, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet is smaller than the calculated hardness control reference value HMa of the tablet by the following equation.
HMa-kt (TOL-TMa) / a4> Ha
If the determination in step S164 is YES (calculated hardness Ha is smaller than hardness control reference calculated value HMa), control device 4a uses second thickness control reference calculated value update means (second thickness control reference calculated value update means or The process of step S165 which performs (2 thickness control reference | standard calculation value update process) is performed. In step S165 shown in FIG. 16, the control device 4a obtains the tablet thickness control reference provisional value TMb using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the like according to the following equation.
TMb = TMa−kh (TMa−TOL) (Expression (22))
 また、ステップS165においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された厚み制御基準暫定値TMbの値で厚み制御基準算定値TMaを更新する。つまり、ステップS165においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さい場合、厚み制御基準値補正範囲の下限値TOLと厚み制御基準算定値TMaとの差に、ステップS162で用いた厚み補正係数ktを乗じた値と、厚み制御基準算定値TMaとから厚み制御基準暫定値TMbを求めて、この厚み制御基準暫定値TMbの値で厚み制御基準算定値TMaを更新する。これにより、厚み制御基準算定値TMaを減らす処理が行われる。 In step S165, the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the calculated thickness control reference provisional value TMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S165, when the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the lower limit value TOL of the thickness control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference calculated value TMa is in step S162. The thickness control reference provisional value TMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the thickness correction coefficient kt used in step 1 and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is updated with the value of the thickness control reference provisional value TMb. . Thereby, the process which reduces thickness control reference | standard calculation value TMa is performed.
 この処理において、厚み補正係数ktが1.00未満に設定されている場合に従う補正では、許される範囲で限度一杯まで、厚み制御基準算定値TMaを一気に減らす処理をするのではなく、厚み補正係数ktによる補正にしたがい前記限度より小さく厚み制御基準算定値TMaが減らされる。なお、厚み補正係数ktが1.00に設定されている場合に従う補正では、許される範囲の限度一杯まで、厚み制御基準算定値TMaが一気に減らされる。 In this processing, in the correction according to the case where the thickness correction coefficient kt is set to be less than 1.00, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is not reduced at a stroke to the full range within the allowable range, but is processed by the thickness correction coefficient kt. According to the correction, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is reduced to be smaller than the above limit. In the correction according to the case where the thickness correction coefficient kt is set to 1.00, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is reduced at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
 ステップS164の判断がNOである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより大きい)場合、制御装置4aは、第2厚み制御基準算定値更新部(第2厚み制御基準算定値更新手段又は第2厚み制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS166の処理を実行する。図16に示すステップS166においては、制御装置4aは、厚み制御基準算定値TMa等を用いて錠剤の厚み制御基準暫定値TMbを下記に示す式によって求める。 
  TMb=TMa+kt(TOH-TMa)……式(23)。
When the determination in step S164 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is greater than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa), the control device 4a includes the second thickness control reference calculation value update unit (second thickness control reference calculation value update means or The process of step S166 is performed. In step S166 shown in FIG. 16, the control device 4a obtains the tablet thickness control reference provisional value TMb using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the like by the following formula.
TMb = TMa + kt (TOH−TMa) (Expression (23))
 また、ステップS166においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された厚み制御基準暫定値TMbの値で厚み制御基準算定値TMaを更新する。つまり、ステップS166においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより大きい場合、厚み制御基準値補正範囲の上限値TOHと前記厚み制御基準算定値TMaとの差に、ステップS162で用いた厚み補正係数ktを乗じた値と、厚み制御基準算定値TMaとから厚み制御基準暫定値TMbを求めて、この厚み制御基準暫定値TMbの値で厚み制御基準算定値TMaを更新する。これにより、厚み制御基準算定値TMaを増やす処理が行われる。 In step S166, the control device 4a updates the thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the calculated thickness control reference provisional value TMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S166, when the calculated hardness Ha is larger than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the upper limit value TOH of the thickness control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference calculated value TMa is set. The thickness control reference provisional value TMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the thickness correction coefficient kt used in S162 and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is updated with the value of the thickness control reference provisional value TMb. To do. Thereby, the process which increases thickness control reference | standard calculation value TMa is performed.
 この処理において、厚み補正係数ktが1.00未満に設定されている場合に従う補正では、許される範囲で限度一杯まで、厚み制御基準算定値TMaを一気に増やす処理をするのではなく、厚み補正係数ktによる補正にしたがい前記限度より小さく厚み制御基準算定値TMaが増やされる。なお、厚み補正係数ktが1.00に設定されている場合に従う補正では、許される範囲の限度一杯まで、厚み制御基準算定値TMaが一気に増やされる。 In this processing, in the correction according to the case where the thickness correction coefficient kt is set to be less than 1.00, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is not increased at a stroke to the full range within the allowable range, but is processed by the thickness correction coefficient kt. According to the correction, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is increased below the limit. In the correction according to the case where the thickness correction coefficient kt is set to 1.00, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa is increased at a stroke up to the limit of the allowable range.
 ステップS165又はステップS166の処理が終わると、制御装置4aは、第3算定硬度演算部をなすステップS167の処理を実行し、新たな算定硬度Haを次式により求める。 
 Ha=Hx+〔(WMa-Wx)/a5〕+〔(TMa-Tx)/a4〕……式(18)。
When the process of step S165 or step S166 is completed, the control device 4a executes the process of step S167 forming the third calculated hardness calculation unit, and obtains a new calculated hardness Ha by the following equation.
Ha = Hx + [(WMa−Wx) / a5] + [(TMa−Tx) / a4] (18)
 以上のようにステップS164~ステップS167の各工程で形成される算定厚み補正部HKBによる演算上の厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正では、錠剤の厚み制御基準算定値TMaが、厚み制御基準値補正範囲を外れないように厚み制御基準算定値TMaを更新する。しかし、こうした厚み変化による硬度制御では前記ステップS162の判断に従って錠剤の硬度を適正化できない。このため、ステップS167の終了後に、制御装置4aは、補正先第5判断部をなすステップS168で次の補正先を判断して、その補正先に、ステップS165又はステップS166で更新された厚み制御基準算定値TMaと、ステップS167で新たに算出された算定硬度Haを供給する。 As described above, in the correction of the calculated thickness control reference calculation value TMa by the calculation thickness correction unit HKB formed in each step of steps S164 to S167, the tablet thickness control reference calculation value TMa is corrected to the thickness control reference value correction. The thickness control reference calculation value TMa is updated so as not to fall outside the range. However, the hardness control based on the thickness change cannot optimize the hardness of the tablet according to the determination in step S162. For this reason, after the end of step S167, the control device 4a determines the next correction destination in step S168, which is the fifth correction destination determination unit, and the thickness control updated in step S165 or step S166 to the correction destination. The reference calculated value TMa and the calculated hardness Ha newly calculated in step S167 are supplied.
 具体的には、ステップS168においては、制御装置4aは、次の補正先が「質量」であるか否かを判断する。これにより、次の補正先が「質量」である場合(ステップS168の判断がYESである場合)、制御装置4aは、質量制御基準算定値WMaの補正処理手順を判断するためのステップS172の判断を行なう。又、次の補正先が「質量」でない場合(ステップS168の判断がNOである場合)、制御装置4aは、硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正処理手順を判断するためのステップS152の判断を行なう。このステップS168の判断(つまり、次の補正が「質量」であるのか「硬度」であるのか)は、図示しない入力装置により指定された各制御基準算定値の補正順位に従っている。 Specifically, in step S168, the control device 4a determines whether or not the next correction destination is “mass”. Thereby, when the next correction destination is “mass” (when the determination in step S168 is YES), the control device 4a determines in step S172 to determine the correction processing procedure for the mass control reference calculated value WMa. To do. When the next correction destination is not “mass” (when the determination in step S168 is NO), the control device 4a performs the determination in step S152 for determining the correction processing procedure of the hardness control reference calculated value HMa. . The determination in step S168 (that is, whether the next correction is “mass” or “hardness”) is in accordance with the correction rank of each control reference calculation value designated by an input device (not shown).
 前記ステップS161の判断がNOとなったことに伴い、この次に実行されるステップS171においては、制御装置4aは、制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「質量」であるか否かを判断する。ステップS171の判断がYESである(制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「質量」である)場合、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第5判断部をなすステップS172の判断を行なう。このステップS172においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが、質量制御基準算定値WMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する。 In accordance with the determination in step S161 being NO, in step S171 to be executed next, the control device 4a determines whether or not the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “mass”. to decide. When the determination in step S171 is YES (the first correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “mass”), the control device 4a performs the determination in step S172 that constitutes the calculated hardness fifth determination unit. In step S172, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the mass control reference calculated value WMa.
 ここで、硬度制御可能範囲は次式で規定される。 
 HMa-kw(WOH-WMa)/a5≦Ha≦HMa+kw(WMa-WOL)/a5 
この式でkwは質量制御基準算定値WMaを補正するときの質量補正係数であり、0.01~1.00の任意な値に設定され、この質量補正係数kwは1.00未満であることが好ましい。
Here, the hardness controllable range is defined by the following equation.
HMa−kw (WOH−WMa) / a5 ≦ Ha ≦ HMa + kw (WMa−WOL) / a5
In this equation, kw is a mass correction coefficient when correcting the mass control reference calculation value WMa, and is set to an arbitrary value between 0.01 and 1.00, and this mass correction coefficient kw is preferably less than 1.00.
 ステップS172の判断がYESである(算定硬度Haが質量制御基準算定値WMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内である)場合、制御装置4aは、第1質量制御基準算定値更新部をなすステップS173の処理を実行する。 When the determination in step S172 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha is within the range of hardness controllable by correcting the mass control reference calculation value WMa), the control device 4a forms a first mass control reference calculation value update unit. Execute the process.
 ステップS173においては、制御装置4aは、質量制御基準算定値WMa等を用いて錠剤の質量制御基準暫定値WMbを下記の式によって求める。 
  WMb=WMa+a5(HMa-Ha)……式(24)。
In step S173, the control device 4a obtains the tablet mass control reference provisional value WMb using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and the like according to the following equation.
WMb = WMa + a5 (HMa−Ha) (Expression (24))
 また、ステップS173においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された質量制御基準暫定値WMbの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを更新する。 In step S173, the control device 4a updates the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass control reference provisional value WMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing.
 この後、制御装置4aは、ステップS173で更新された質量制御基準算定値WMaを前記運転制御系統に供給し、この系統の各ステップS109~ステップS149の処理を順次実行する。 Thereafter, the control device 4a supplies the mass control reference calculated value WMa updated in step S173 to the operation control system, and sequentially executes the processes of steps S109 to S149 of this system.
 即ち、ステップS171の判断がYES(制御基準算定値の1番目の補正先が「質量」である場合)で、ステップS172がYES(算定硬度Haが質量制御基準算定値WMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲内である)と判断した場合、制御装置4aは、ステップS173を経て前記運転制御系統のステップS109~ステップS149の処理を順次実行する。これにより、打錠装置1は、製造される錠剤の硬度を規格範囲内に保持して錠剤を製造することができる)。 That is, the determination in step S171 is YES (when the first correction destination of the control reference calculated value is “mass”), and step S172 is YES (the calculated hardness Ha can be controlled by correcting the mass control reference calculated value WMa). If it is determined that it is within the range, the control device 4a sequentially executes the processing of steps S109 to S149 of the operation control system via step S173. Thereby, the tableting apparatus 1 can manufacture a tablet, keeping the hardness of the tablet manufactured within a specification range).
 ステップS172の判断がNOである(算定硬度Haが質量制御基準算定値WMaの補正による硬度制御可能範囲外である)場合、制御装置4aは、算定硬度第8判断部をなすステップS174の処理を実行する。図17に示すステップS174においては、制御装置4aは、錠剤の算定硬度Haが、錠剤の硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さいか否かを、次式によって判断する。 
 HMa-kw(WOH-WMa)/a5>Ha
 ステップS174の判断がYESである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さい)場合、制御装置4aは、第2質量制御基準算定値更新手段(第2質量制御基準算定値更新手段又は第2質量制御基準算定値更新工程)をなすステップS175の処理を実行する。図17に示すステップS175においては、制御装置4aは、質量制御基準算定値WMa等を用いて錠剤の質量制御基準暫定値WMbを下記の式によって求める。 
  WMb=WMa+kw(WOH-WMa)……式(25)。
If the determination in step S172 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is outside the range of hardness controllable by correcting the mass control reference calculated value WMa), the control device 4a performs the process of step S174 forming the calculated hardness eighth determining unit. Execute. In step S174 shown in FIG. 17, the control device 4a determines whether or not the calculated hardness Ha of the tablet is smaller than the calculated hardness control reference value HMa of the tablet by the following equation.
HMa-kw (WOH-WMa) / a5> Ha
When the determination in step S174 is YES (calculated hardness Ha is smaller than hardness control reference calculated value HMa), control device 4a uses second mass control reference calculated value update means (second mass control reference calculated value update means or second mass control reference calculated value update means). The process of step S175 which performs the 2 mass control reference calculation value update step) is executed. In step S175 shown in FIG. 17, the control device 4a obtains the tablet mass control reference provisional value WMb using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and the like by the following equation.
WMb = WMa + kw (WOH−WMa) (Formula 25)
 また、ステップS175においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された質量制御基準暫定値WMbの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを更新する。つまり、ステップS175においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより小さい場合、質量制御基準値補正範囲の上限値WOHと質量制御基準算定値WMaとの差に、ステップS172で用いた質量補正係数kwを乗じた値と、質量制御基準算定値WMaとから質量制御基準暫定値WMbを求めて、この質量制御基準暫定値WMbの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを更新する。これにより、質量制御基準算定値WMaを増やす処理が行われる。 In step S175, the control device 4a updates the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass control reference provisional value WMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent calculation processing. That is, in step S175, when the calculated hardness Ha is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the upper limit value WOH of the mass control reference value correction range and the mass control reference calculation value WMa is equal to step S172. The mass control reference provisional value WMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the mass correction coefficient kw used in the above and the mass control reference calculation value WMa, and the mass control reference calculation value WMa is updated with the value of the mass control reference provisional value WMb. . Thereby, the process which increases mass control reference | standard calculation value WMa is performed.
 この処理において、質量補正係数kwが1.00未満に設定されている場合に従う補正では、許される範囲で限度一杯まで、質量制御基準算定値WMaを一気に増やす処理をするのではなく、質量補正係数kwによる補正にしたがい前記限度より小さく質量制御基準算定値WMaが増やされる。なお、質量補正係数kwが1.00に設定されている場合に従う補正では、許される範囲の限度一杯まで、質量制御基準算定値WMaが一気に増やされる。 In this processing, in the correction according to the case where the mass correction coefficient kw is set to be less than 1.00, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is not increased at a stretch to the full range within the allowable range, but by the mass correction coefficient kw. According to the correction, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is increased below the limit. In the correction according to the case where the mass correction coefficient kw is set to 1.00, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is increased at a stretch to the full limit of the allowable range.
 ステップS174の判断がNOである(算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより大きい)場合、制御装置4aは、第2質量制御基準値更新部(第2質量制御基準値更新手段又は第2質量制御基準値更新工程)をなすステップS176の処理を実行する。図17に示すステップS176においては、制御装置4aは、質量制御基準算定値WMa等を用いて錠剤の質量制御基準暫定値WMbを下記に示す式によって求める。 
  WMb=WMa-kw(WMa-WOL)……式(26)。
When the determination in step S174 is NO (the calculated hardness Ha is greater than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa), the control device 4a includes the second mass control reference value update unit (the second mass control reference value update unit or the second mass). The process of step S176 that performs the control reference value update step) is executed. In step S176 shown in FIG. 17, the control device 4a obtains the tablet mass control reference provisional value WMb by the following formula using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and the like.
WMb = WMa−kw (WMa−WOL) (26)
 また、ステップS176においては、制御装置4aは、以降の演算処理との整合性を確保するために、算出された質量制御基準暫定値WMbの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを更新する。つまり、ステップS176においては、制御装置4aは、算定硬度Haが硬度制御基準算定値HMaより大きい場合、質量制御基準値補正範囲の下限値WOLと質量制御基準算定値WMaとの差に、ステップS172で用いた質量補正係数kwを乗じた値と、質量制御基準算定値WMaとから質量制御基準暫定値WMbを求めて、この質量制御基準暫定値WMbの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを更新する。これにより、質量制御基準算定値WMaを減らす処理が行われる。 In step S176, the control device 4a updates the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the calculated mass control reference provisional value WMb in order to ensure consistency with the subsequent arithmetic processing. That is, in step S176, when the calculated hardness Ha is larger than the hardness control reference calculated value HMa, the control device 4a determines whether the difference between the lower limit value WOL of the mass control reference value correction range and the mass control reference calculated value WMa is equal to step S172. The mass control reference provisional value WMb is obtained from the value obtained by multiplying the mass correction coefficient kw used in the above and the mass control reference calculation value WMa, and the mass control reference calculation value WMa is updated with the value of the mass control reference provisional value WMb. . Thereby, the process which reduces the mass control reference | standard calculated value WMa is performed.
 この処理において、質量補正係数kwが1.00未満に設定されている場合に従う補正では、許される範囲で限度一杯まで、質量制御基準算定値WMaを一気に減らす処理をするのではなく、質量補正係数kwによる補正にしたがい前記限度より小さく質量制御基準算定値WMaが減らされる。なお、質量補正係数kwが1.00に設定されている場合に従う補正では、許される範囲の限度一杯まで、質量制御基準算定値WMaが一気に減らされる。 In this process, in the correction according to the case where the mass correction coefficient kw is set to be less than 1.00, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is not reduced at a stretch to the full range within the allowable range, but the mass correction coefficient kw is used. According to the correction, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is reduced to be smaller than the above limit. In the correction according to the case where the mass correction coefficient kw is set to 1.00, the mass control reference calculation value WMa is reduced at a stroke to the full limit of the allowable range.
 ステップS175又はステップS176の処理が終わると、制御装置4aは、第4算定硬度演算部をなすステップS177の処理を実行し、新たな算定硬度Haを次式により求める。この式は前記式(18)と同じである。 
 Ha=Hx+〔(WMa-Wx)/a5〕+〔(TMa-Tx)/a4〕……式(18)。
When the process of step S175 or step S176 ends, the control device 4a executes the process of step S177 forming the fourth calculated hardness calculation unit, and obtains a new calculated hardness Ha by the following equation. This formula is the same as the formula (18).
Ha = Hx + [(WMa−Wx) / a5] + [(TMa−Tx) / a4] (18)
 以上のようにステップS174~ステップS177の各工程で形成される算定質量補正部HKCによる演算上の質量制御基準算定値WMaの補正では、錠剤の質量制御基準算定値WMaが、質量制御基準値補正範囲を外れないように質量制御基準算定値WMaを更新し、この更新された質量制御基準算定値WMa等を用いて新たな算定硬度を算出する。しかし、こうした質量変化による硬度制御では前記ステップS172の判断に従って錠剤の硬度を適正化できない。このため、ステップS177の終了後に、制御装置4aは、補正先第6判断部をなすステップS178で次の補正先を判断して、その補正先に、ステップS175又はステップS176で更新された質量制御基準算定値WMaと、ステップS177で算出された新たな算定硬度Haを供給する。 As described above, in the correction of the calculated mass control reference calculation value WMa by the calculation mass correction unit HKC formed in each step of step S174 to step S177, the tablet mass control reference calculation value WMa is corrected by the mass control reference value correction. The mass control reference calculation value WMa is updated so as not to deviate from the range, and a new calculated hardness is calculated using the updated mass control reference calculation value WMa and the like. However, the hardness control based on such a mass change cannot optimize the hardness of the tablet according to the determination in step S172. For this reason, after the end of step S177, the control device 4a determines the next correction destination in step S178 which constitutes a correction destination sixth determination unit, and the mass control updated in step S175 or step S176 to the correction destination. The reference calculated value WMa and the new calculated hardness Ha calculated in step S177 are supplied.
 具体的には、ステップS178においては、制御装置4aは、次の補正先が「厚み」であるか否かを判断する。これにより、次の補正先が「厚み」である場合(ステップS178の判断がYESである場合)、制御装置4aは、厚み制御基準算定値TMaの補正処理手順を判断するためのステップS162の判断を行なう。又、次の補正先が「厚み」でない場合(ステップS178の判断がNOである場合)、制御装置4aは、硬度制御基準算定値HMaの補正処理手順を判断するためのステップS152の判断を行なう。このステップS178の判断(つまり、次の補正が「厚み」であるのか否か)は、図示しない入力装置により指定された各制御基準算定値の補正順位に従っている。 Specifically, in step S178, the control device 4a determines whether or not the next correction destination is “thickness”. Thereby, when the next correction destination is “thickness” (when the determination in step S178 is YES), the control device 4a determines in step S162 to determine the correction processing procedure for the thickness control reference calculation value TMa. To do. When the next correction destination is not “thickness” (when the determination in step S178 is NO), the control device 4a performs the determination in step S152 for determining the correction processing procedure of the hardness control reference calculated value HMa. . The determination in step S178 (that is, whether or not the next correction is “thickness”) is in accordance with the correction rank of each control reference calculation value designated by an input device (not shown).
 次に、図18に示した運転制御系統による制御を説明する。この運転制御系統は、図14に示した硬度制御部HKのステップS153、ステップS163、ステップS173のいずれかの処理が実行された後に、制御装置4aにより以下のように制御される。 Next, control by the operation control system shown in FIG. 18 will be described. This operation control system is controlled as follows by the control device 4a after any one of steps S153, S163, and S173 of the hardness control unit HK shown in FIG. 14 is executed.
 まず、制御装置4aは、第1算定圧力変動値演算部をなすステップS109の処理を実行し、質量の変動による圧力の変動値を求める。つまり、ステップS109においては、制御装置4aは、質量平均値Wxを、ステップS137で置換された質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたとき、又はステップS173、ステップS175、ステップS176のいずれかで更新(補正)された質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたとき(つまり、質量制御したとき)の算定圧力変動値PWaを次式により求める。この場合の質量制御基準算定値WMaは、ステップS137で置換された質量基準値WOと同一値ではなくなっている場合がある。 First, the control device 4a executes the process of step S109, which is a first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit, and obtains a pressure fluctuation value due to a mass fluctuation. That is, in step S109, the control device 4a updates (corrects) when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa replaced in step S137, or in any of steps S173, S175, and S176. The calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass control reference calculated value WMa is set (that is, when mass control is performed) is obtained by the following equation. In this case, the mass control reference calculated value WMa may not be the same value as the mass reference value WO replaced in step S137.
 PWa=a0(WMa-Wx)……式(12)。 PWa = a0 (WMa−Wx) (Formula 12)
 この式(12)において、a0はP-W相関係数であり、a0(WMa-Wx)の演算で求められる算出値は、制御装置4aが質量制御をしたとき、つまり、質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたときに得られる算定圧力変動値(これを第1算定圧力変動値と称する。)PWaである。 In this equation (12), a0 is the PW correlation coefficient, and the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a0 (WMa-Wx) is the mass average value Wx when the control device 4a performs mass control. This is a calculated pressure fluctuation value (this is referred to as a first calculated pressure fluctuation value) PWa obtained when the mass control reference calculated value WMa is used.
 ステップS109の処理が終了すると、制御装置4aは、算定厚み演算部をなすステップS110の処理を実行する。なお、ステップS109の処理は後述のステップS115の処理までに実行すれば良く、ステップS110と並行処理で同時に実行することも可能である。 When the process of step S109 is completed, the control device 4a executes the process of step S110 that forms a calculated thickness calculation unit. Note that the process of step S109 may be executed by the process of step S115 described later, and can be executed simultaneously with step S110 in parallel processing.
 ステップS110においては、制御装置4aは、前記質量制御をしたとき(質量平均値Wxを、硬度制御部HKを経由して与えられた質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたとき)の厚み変動値を求め、これと厚み平均値Txとから錠剤の算定厚みTaを次式により求める。この場合の質量制御基準算定値WMaは、ステップS137で置換された質量基準値WOと同一値ではなくなっている場合がある。 
 Ta=Tx+a1(WMa-Wx)……式(13)。
In step S110, the control device 4a obtains the thickness variation value when the mass control is performed (when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculation value WMa given via the hardness control unit HK). From this and the average thickness Tx, the calculated thickness Ta of the tablet is obtained by the following equation. In this case, the mass control reference calculated value WMa may not be the same value as the mass reference value WO replaced in step S137.
Ta = Tx + a1 (WMa−Wx) (Equation 13)
 この式(13)において、a1はT-W相関係数であり、a1(WMa-Wx)の演算で求められる算出値は、制御装置4aが質量制御をしたとき(質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたとき)に得られる厚み変動値である。これにより、質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準算定値WMaにしたときの算定厚みTaが、厚み変動値とサンプリング錠の厚み平均値Txとから求められる。 In this equation (13), a1 is a TW correlation coefficient, and the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a1 (WMa-Wx) is the value when the control device 4a performs mass control (the mass average value Wx is controlled by mass control). This is the thickness fluctuation value obtained when the reference calculation value WMa is used. Thereby, the calculated thickness Ta when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference calculated value WMa is obtained from the thickness variation value and the thickness average value Tx of the sampling tablet.
 次に、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔算定値演算部をなすステップS111の処理を実行する。ステップS111においては、制御装置4aは、算定厚みTaを、ステップS137で置換された厚み制御基準算定値TMaにしたとき、又は、ステップS163、ステップS165、ステップS166のいずれかで更新された厚み制御基準算定値TMaにしたとき(つまり、厚み制御したとき)の、第1位置での杵先間隔算定値lMaと、第2位置での杵先間隔算定値LMaを、夫々次式により求める。この場合の厚み制御基準算定値TMaはステップS137で置換された厚み基準値TOと同一値ではなくなっている場合がある。 
 LMa=LM+a3(TMa-Ta)……式(15) 
 lMa=lM+a3(TMa-Ta)……式(16)。
Next, the control apparatus 4a performs the process of step S111 which makes a tip distance calculated value calculation part. In step S111, the control device 4a sets the calculated thickness Ta to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa replaced in step S137, or the thickness control updated in any of steps S163, S165, and S166. When the reference calculated value TMa is used (that is, when the thickness is controlled), the tip distance calculated value lMa at the first position and the tip distance calculated value LMa at the second position are obtained by the following equations, respectively. In this case, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa may not be the same value as the thickness reference value TO replaced in step S137.
LMa = LM + a3 (TMa-Ta) (15)
lMa = 1M + a3 (TMa−Ta) (16)
 式(15)において、LMは第2位置での杵先間隔設定値、a3はL-T相関係数、TaはステップS110で求めた算定厚みである。同様に、式(16)において、lMは第1位置での杵先間隔設定値、a3はL-T相関係数、TaはステップS110で求めた算定厚みである。 In Equation (15), LM is the setting value of the tip interval at the second position, a3 is the LT correlation coefficient, and Ta is the calculated thickness obtained in step S110. Similarly, in equation (16), lM is the setting value of the tip interval at the first position, a3 is the LT correlation coefficient, and Ta is the calculated thickness obtained in step S110.
 ステップS111の処理が終了すると、制御装置4aは、第2算定圧力変動値演算部をなすステップS112の処理を実行する。ステップS112においては、制御装置4aは、前記厚み制御をした(算定厚みTaを、硬度制御部HKを経由して与えられた厚み制御基準算定値TMaにした)ときの算定圧力変動値PTa(これを第2算定圧力変動値と称する。)を次式により求める。この場合の厚み制御基準算定値TMaは、ステップ137で置換された厚み基準値TOと同一値ではなくなっている場合がある。 
 PTa=a2(TMa-Ta)……式(14)。
When the process of step S111 is completed, the control device 4a executes the process of step S112 that forms the second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit. In step S112, the control device 4a performs the thickness control (calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa (this is the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa given via the hardness control unit HK)) Is referred to as a second calculated pressure fluctuation value). In this case, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa may not be the same value as the thickness reference value TO replaced in step 137.
PTa = a2 (TMa−Ta) (Expression (14))
 この式(14)において、a2はP-T相関係数であり、a2(TMa-Ta)の演算で求められる算出値は、算定圧力変動値PTa(第2算定圧力変動値)である。 In this equation (14), a2 is a PT correlation coefficient, and the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a2 (TMa-Ta) is the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa (second calculated pressure fluctuation value).
 ステップS112処理の実行後に、制御装置4aは、圧力制御基準算定値演算部をなすステップS115の処理を実行する。ステップS115においては、制御装置4aは、硬度制御部HKを経由して与えられた質量制御基準算定値WMaを用いて質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値PWaと、硬度制御部HKを経由して与えられた厚み基準算定値TMaを用いて厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値PTaと、成形圧力平均値Pxとから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを次式により求める。 
 PMa=Px+PWa+PTa……式(17)。
After execution of step S112, the control device 4a executes step S115, which is a pressure control reference calculation value calculation unit. In step S115, the control device 4a displays the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculated value WMa given via the hardness control unit HK, and the hardness control unit HK. From the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the thickness control is performed using the thickness reference calculated value TMa given via, and the molding pressure average value Px, the pressure control reference calculated value PMa is obtained by the following equation.
PMa = Px + PWa + PTa Equation (17).
 この式(17)において、Pxはサンプリング錠の成型圧力平均値、PWaはステップS109で求めた算定圧力変動値(第1算定圧力変動値)、PTaはステップS112で求めた算定圧力変動値(第2算定圧力変動値)である。これにより、ステップS115の式(17)で算出される圧力制御基準算定値PMaは、成型圧力平均値Pxと各算定圧力変動値PWa及びPTaの合計値に等しい。 In this equation (17), Px is the molding tablet average pressure value, PWa is the calculated pressure fluctuation value (first calculated pressure fluctuation value) obtained in step S109, and PTa is the calculated pressure fluctuation value (first value) obtained in step S112. 2 calculated pressure fluctuation value). Thereby, the pressure control reference calculated value PMa calculated by the equation (17) in step S115 is equal to the total value of the molding pressure average value Px and the calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa.
 次に、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔制御部をなすステップS118の処理を実行する。このステップS118においては、制御装置4aは、ステップS111で求めた第1位置の杵先間隔算定値lMaの値で、第1位置の杵先間隔設定値lMを更新し、この更新した杵先間隔設定値lMで第1位置の杵先間隔lを制御するとともに、同じくステップS111で求めた第2位置の杵先間隔算定値LMaの値で、第2位置の杵先間隔設定値LMを更新し、この更新した杵先間隔設定値LMで第2位置の杵先間隔Lを制御する。 Next, the control device 4a executes the process of step S118, which is a tip interval control unit. In step S118, the control device 4a updates the tip position setting value 1M of the first position with the value of the tip position calculated value lMa of the first position obtained in step S111, and this updated tip distance is obtained. The tip position l at the first position is controlled by the set value 1M, and the tip position set value LM at the second position is updated with the value of the tip position calculated value LMa at the second position obtained in the same step S111. The updated tip position setting value LM controls the tip position L of the second position.
 この後、制御装置4aは、第1実施形態で説明した制御圧力値更新部をなすステップS149の処理を実行する。これにより、ステップS149において、制御装置4aは、ステップS115で求めた圧力制御基準算定値PMaの値で圧力制御基準値(現在値)PMを更新するとともに、圧力制御部51の各制御圧力値を更新する。ステップS149の処理を実行後に、処理はスタートに戻る。 Thereafter, the control device 4a executes the process of step S149, which constitutes the control pressure value update unit described in the first embodiment. Thereby, in step S149, the control device 4a updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM with the value of the pressure control reference calculated value PMa obtained in step S115, and sets each control pressure value of the pressure control unit 51. Update. After executing the process of step S149, the process returns to the start.
 以上説明した第2実施形態の打錠装置1によれば、図13~図18に示した制御パターン1に従った制御により、錠剤の質量Wと厚みTと硬度Hとを制御することができる。この制御パターン1を指定して打錠装置1が運転された場合、第1実施形態での説明と同様な理由により、打錠機2の運転中の温度変化に拘らず、錠剤の質量Wと厚みTと硬度Hを規格範囲内に保持して、錠剤を製造することが可能である。 According to the tableting device 1 of the second embodiment described above, the mass W, the thickness T, and the hardness H of the tablet can be controlled by the control according to the control pattern 1 shown in FIGS. . When the tableting device 1 is operated by designating this control pattern 1, the tablet weight W and the tablet W are controlled regardless of the temperature change during the operation of the tableting machine 2 for the same reason as described in the first embodiment. It is possible to manufacture a tablet while maintaining the thickness T and hardness H within the specified range.
 次に、図19を参照して、第2実施形態での制御パターン2(WT制御)が選択された場合の制御の流れを説明する。 Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the flow of control when the control pattern 2 (WT control) in the second embodiment is selected will be described.
 第2実施形態の制御パターン2は、この制御パターン2に応じた個別のフローチャート(言い換えれば、プログラム)を用いて実行される。この場合、第1実施形態で説明した他の制御パターンとの整合性を取るためのステップS106(第1制御基準算定値更新部)の処理、つまり、質量と厚みの各制御基準値(WM、TM)を夫々に対応する制御基準算定値(WMa、TMa)に置き換える処理は必要としないので省略されている。このことから、第2実施形態の制御パターン2では、後述するステップS109~ステップS112の処理での質量制御と厚み制御の各演算処理に夫々に対応する前記制御基準値を用いている。 The control pattern 2 of the second embodiment is executed using an individual flowchart (in other words, a program) corresponding to the control pattern 2. In this case, the processing in step S106 (first control reference calculation value update unit) for ensuring consistency with the other control patterns described in the first embodiment, that is, each control reference value (WM, The process of replacing TM) with the corresponding control reference calculation values (WMa, TMa) is not necessary and is omitted. For this reason, in the control pattern 2 of the second embodiment, the control reference values corresponding to the respective computation processes of mass control and thickness control in the processes of steps S109 to S112 described later are used.
 しかし、この第2実施形態の制御パターン2では、第1実施形態と同様にステップS106(第1制御基準算定値更新部)の置換処理を行っても良い。この場合でも、前記制御基準値(WM、TM)と夫々に対応する制御基準算定値(WMa、TMa)は夫々が同一値であるから、ステップS109~ステップS112、及びステップS115の処理で求められる夫々の演算値は、前記ステップS106の置換処理をしない(省略した)場合で求める夫々の演算値と同一値となる。 However, in the control pattern 2 of the second embodiment, the replacement process in step S106 (first control reference calculated value update unit) may be performed as in the first embodiment. Even in this case, since the control reference calculated values (WMa, TMa) corresponding to the control reference values (WM, TM) are the same value, they are obtained by the processing of steps S109 to S112 and step S115. Each calculated value is the same value as each calculated value obtained when the replacement process in step S106 is not performed (omitted).
 このことは、制御装置4aは、前記制御パターン2以外の他の制御パターンの夫々に対応するプログラムを実行する場合でも、また、幾つかの制御パターンの中から選択される制御パターンに応じたプログラムを実行する際に、制御パターン2が選択された場合でも同様である。 This is because even when the control device 4a executes a program corresponding to each of the control patterns other than the control pattern 2, the program according to the control pattern selected from several control patterns. The same applies to the case where the control pattern 2 is selected when executing.
 更に、制御パターン2は硬度制御系統の処理を備えていない。これにより、第2実施形態の制御パターン2を実行する処理においては、第2実施形態の制御パターン1において図13を用いて説明したステップS137、ステップS140、ステップS141、ステップS146の処理と、図14~図17を用いて説明した硬度制御部をなす全てのステップ(ステップS151~ステップS178)の処理が、省略されている。 Furthermore, the control pattern 2 does not have a hardness control system process. Thus, in the process of executing the control pattern 2 of the second embodiment, the process of step S137, step S140, step S141, and step S146 described with reference to FIG. 13 in the control pattern 1 of the second embodiment, and FIG. Processing of all steps (steps S151 to S178) constituting the hardness control unit described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17 is omitted.
 制御装置4aは、図19に示したフローチャートにおいてサンプリングデータを取得するステップS103の処理の次に、第1算定圧力変動値演算部をなすステップS109の処理を実行する。なお、図19のステップS101~ステップS103の処理、及び運転制御系統に含まれるステップS109~ステップS112、ステップS115、ステップS118、及びステップS149の処理は、図18等に記載した該当ステップと同じ機能を有するように構成されている。 The control apparatus 4a performs the process of step S109 which makes a 1st calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating part after the process of step S103 which acquires sampling data in the flowchart shown in FIG. Note that the processing of steps S101 to S103 in FIG. 19 and the processing of steps S109 to S112, step S115, step S118, and step S149 included in the operation control system are the same functions as the corresponding steps described in FIG. It is comprised so that it may have.
 次に、制御装置4aが実行する制御について、図19に示したフローチャートを参照して説明する。 Next, the control executed by the control device 4a will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
 図19に示した運転制御系統で、制御装置4aは、第1算定圧力変動値演算部をなすステップS109の処理を実行する。ステップS109においては、制御装置4aは、質量制御をしたとき(質量平均値Wxを、質量制御基準値WMにしたとき)の算定圧力変動値PWa(第1算定圧力変動値)を次式により求める。 
 PWa=a0(WM-Wx)……式(12a)。
In the operation control system shown in FIG. 19, the control device 4 a executes the process of step S <b> 109 forming the first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit. In step S109, the control device 4a obtains a calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa (first calculated pressure fluctuation value) when mass control is performed (when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference value WM) by the following equation. .
PWa = a0 (WM−Wx) (Equation 12a)
 ステップS109の処理は、図18に示したステップS109の処理に相当する。このステップS109の処理を実行する既述の式(12a)において、a0はP-W相関係数であり、a0(WM-Wx)の演算で求められる算出値は、制御装置4aが質量制御をしたとき(質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準値WMにしたとき)の算定圧力変動値PWa(これを第1算定圧力変動値と称する。)である。 The process of step S109 corresponds to the process of step S109 shown in FIG. In the above-described equation (12a) for executing the processing of step S109, a0 is a PW correlation coefficient, and the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a0 (WM-Wx) is controlled by the control device 4a. Is the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa (this is referred to as the first calculated pressure fluctuation value) when the mass average value Wx is set to the mass control reference value WM.
 ステップS109の処理が終了すると、制御装置4aは、算定厚み演算部をなすステップS110の処理を実行する。なお、ステップS109の処理は、圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求めるためのステップS115の処理までに実行すれば良く、ステップS110と並行処理で同時に実行することも可能である。 When the process of step S109 is completed, the control device 4a executes the process of step S110 that forms a calculated thickness calculation unit. Note that the process of step S109 may be executed by the process of step S115 for obtaining the pressure control reference calculation value PMa, and can be executed simultaneously with the process of step S110.
 ステップS110においては、制御装置4aは、前記質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と厚み平均値Txとから算定厚みTaを次式により求める。 
 Ta=Tx+a1(WM-Wx)……式(13a)。
In step S110, the control device 4a obtains the calculated thickness Ta from the following formula using the thickness variation value and the thickness average value Tx when the mass control is performed.
Ta = Tx + a1 (WM−Wx) (Expression (13a))
 ステップS110の処理は、図18に示したステップS110の処理に相当する。このステップS110における既述の式(13a)において、a1はT-W相関係数であり、a1(WM-Wx)の演算で求められる算出値は、制御装置4aが質量制御をしたとき(質量平均値Wxを質量制御基準値WMにしたとき)の厚み変動値である。これにより、質量制御をしたときの算定厚みTaは、前記厚み変動値とサンプリング錠の厚み平均値Txとから求められる。 The process of step S110 corresponds to the process of step S110 shown in FIG. In the above-described equation (13a) in step S110, a1 is a TW correlation coefficient, and the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a1 (WM-Wx) is obtained when the control device 4a performs mass control (mass This is the thickness fluctuation value when the average value Wx is set to the mass control reference value WM. Thus, the calculated thickness Ta when mass control is performed is obtained from the thickness variation value and the thickness average value Tx of the sampling tablet.
 次に、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔算定値演算部をなすステップS111の処理を実行する。ステップS111においては、制御装置4aは、厚み制御をしたとき(算定厚みTaを厚み制御基準値TMにしたとき)の、第1位置での杵先間隔算定値lMaと、第2位置での杵先間隔算定値LMaとが、夫々次式により求められる。 
 LMa=LM+a3(TM-Ta)……式(15a) 
 lMa=lM+a3(TM-Ta)……式(16a)。
Next, the control apparatus 4a performs the process of step S111 which makes a tip distance calculated value calculation part. In step S111, the control device 4a performs the thickness control (when the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference value TM), and the tip distance calculated value lMa at the first position and the punch at the second position. The tip interval calculation value LMa is obtained by the following equation.
LMa = LM + a3 (TM-Ta) ...... Formula (15a)
lMa = 1M + a3 (TM−Ta) (16a)
 ステップS111の処理は、図18に示したステップS111の処理に相当する。このステップS111における既述の式(15a)において、LMは第2位置での杵先間隔設定値、a3はL-T相関係数、TaはステップS110の処理で求めた算定厚みである。同様に、ステップS111における既述の式(16a)において、lMは第1位置での杵先間隔設定値、a3はL-T相関係数、TaはステップS110の処理で求めた算定厚みである。 The process of step S111 corresponds to the process of step S111 shown in FIG. In the above-described formula (15a) in step S111, LM is the setting value of the tip interval at the second position, a3 is the LT correlation coefficient, and Ta is the calculated thickness obtained in the process of step S110. Similarly, in the above-described equation (16a) in step S111, 1M is the setting value of the tip distance at the first position, a3 is the LT correlation coefficient, and Ta is the calculated thickness obtained in the process of step S110. .
 ステップS111の処理が終了すると、制御装置4aは、第2算定圧力変動値演算部をなすステップS112の処理を実行する。ステップS112においては、制御装置4aは、厚み制御をしたとき(算定厚みTaを厚み制御基準値TMにしたとき)の算定圧力変動値PTa(これを第2算定圧力変動値と称する。)を次式により求める。 
 PTa=a2(TM-Ta)……式(14a)。
When the process of step S111 is completed, the control device 4a executes the process of step S112 that forms the second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit. In step S112, the control device 4a calculates the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa (this is referred to as a second calculated pressure fluctuation value) when the thickness is controlled (when the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference value TM). Obtained by the formula.
PTa = a2 (TM−Ta) (Formula (14a))
 ステップS112の処理は、図18に示したステップS112の処理に相当する。このステップS112における既述の記式(14a)において、a2はP-T相関係数であり、a2(TM-Ta)の演算で求められる算出値が算定圧力変動値PTa(第2算定圧力変動値)である。 The process of step S112 corresponds to the process of step S112 shown in FIG. In the above described expression (14a) in step S112, a2 is a PT correlation coefficient, and the calculated value obtained by the calculation of a2 (TM-Ta) is the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa (second calculated pressure fluctuation). Value).
 ステップS112の処理の実行後に、制御装置4aは、圧力制御基準算定値演算部をなすステップS115の処理を実行する。ステップS115においては、制御装置4aは、質量制御及び厚み制御による各算定圧力変動値PWa,PTaと、成形圧力平均値Pxとから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを次式により求める。 
 PMa=Px+PWa+PTa……式(17)。
After execution of the process of step S112, the control device 4a executes the process of step S115 that forms a pressure control reference calculation value calculation unit. In step S115, the control device 4a obtains the pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa by the mass control and the thickness control, and the molding pressure average value Px by the following equation.
PMa = Px + PWa + PTa Equation (17).
 ステップS115の処理は、図18に示したステップS115の処理に相当する。このステップS115における既述の式(17)において、Pxはサンプリング錠の成型圧力平均値、PWaはステップS109で求めた算定圧力変動値(第1算定圧力変動値)、PTaはステップS112で求めた算定圧力変動値(第2算定圧力変動値)である。これにより、ステップS115の式(17)で算出される圧力制御基準算定値PMaは、成型圧力平均値Pxと各算定圧力変動値PWa及びPTaの合計値に等しい。 The process of step S115 corresponds to the process of step S115 shown in FIG. In the above-described equation (17) in step S115, Px is the average molding pressure value of the sampling tablet, PWa is the calculated pressure fluctuation value (first calculated pressure fluctuation value) obtained in step S109, and PTa is obtained in step S112. This is the calculated pressure fluctuation value (second calculated pressure fluctuation value). Thereby, the pressure control reference calculated value PMa calculated by the equation (17) in step S115 is equal to the total value of the molding pressure average value Px and the calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa.
 次に、制御装置4aは、杵先間隔制御部をなすステップS118の処理を実行する。ステップS118において、制御装置4aは、ステップS111の処理で求めた第1位置の杵先間隔算定値lMaの値で、第1位置の杵先間隔設定値lMを更新し、この更新された杵先間隔設定値lMで第1位置の杵先間隔lを制御する。これとともに、制御装置4aは、ステップS111のSh理で求めた第2位置の杵先間隔算定値LMaの値で、第2位置の杵先間隔設定値LMを更新し、この更新された杵先間隔設定値LMで第2位置の杵先間隔Lを制御する。ステップS118の処理は、図18に示したステップS118の処理に相当する。 Next, the control device 4a executes the process of step S118, which is a tip interval control unit. In step S118, the control device 4a updates the tip position setting value 1M of the first position with the value of the tip position calculated value lMa of the first position obtained in the process of step S111, and the updated tip position. The tip distance l at the first position is controlled by the distance setting value lM. At the same time, the control device 4a updates the tip position setting value LM of the second position with the value of the tip position calculated value LMa of the second position obtained by the Sh operation in step S111, and this updated tip position is obtained. The tip interval L of the second position is controlled by the interval setting value LM. The process of step S118 corresponds to the process of step S118 shown in FIG.
 この後、制御装置4aは、制御圧力値更新部をなすステップS149の処理を実行し、ステップS115の処理で求めた圧力制御基準算定値PMaの値で圧力制御基準値(現在値)PMを更新する。このように圧力制御部51の各制御圧力値が更新された後、処理はスタートに戻る。ステップS149の処理は、図18に示したステップS149の処理に相当する。 Thereafter, the control device 4a executes the process of step S149 that forms a control pressure value update unit, and updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM with the value of the pressure control reference calculation value PMa obtained in the process of step S115. To do. Thus, after each control pressure value of the pressure control unit 51 is updated, the process returns to the start. The process of step S149 corresponds to the process of step S149 shown in FIG.
 したがって、図19に示した制御パターン2に従った制御により、制御装置4aは、錠剤の質量Wと厚みTとを制御することができる。この制御パターン2が指定されて打錠装置1が運転された場合、第1実施形態での説明と同様な理由により、打錠装置1は、打錠機2の運転中の温度変化や粉末の物性変化などに拘らず、錠剤の質量Wと厚みTをステップS5で登録された各制御基準値に保持して、錠剤を製造することが可能である。 Therefore, the control device 4a can control the mass W and the thickness T of the tablet by the control according to the control pattern 2 shown in FIG. When this control pattern 2 is designated and the tableting device 1 is operated, for the same reason as described in the first embodiment, the tableting device 1 may change the temperature or the powder during the operation of the tableting machine 2. Regardless of changes in physical properties, it is possible to manufacture tablets by holding the tablet mass W and thickness T at the control reference values registered in step S5.
 以上説明した第2実施形態で制御パターン2(WT制御)を実行する運転制御系統は、以下の工程を有している。 
 1.質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値PWa求める工程。 
 2.前記質量制御をしたときの算定厚みTaを求める工程。 
 3.厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔算定値lMa,LMaを求める工程。 
 4.前記厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値PTaを求める工程。 
 5.運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値Pxと第1算定圧力変動値PWaと第2算定圧力変動値PTaとから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求める工程。 
 6.杵先間隔算定値lMa,LMaの値で杵先間隔設定値lM,LMを更新して、杵先間隔を制御する工程。 
 7.圧力制御基準算定値PMaの値で圧力制御基準値PMを更新し、圧力制御部51の各制御圧力値を更新する工程。
The operation control system that executes the control pattern 2 (WT control) in the second embodiment described above has the following steps.
1. A step of obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when mass control is performed.
2. A step of obtaining a calculated thickness Ta when the mass control is performed.
3. A step of obtaining the tip distance calculation values lMa and LMa when the thickness is controlled.
4. A step of obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the thickness is controlled.
5. A step of obtaining the pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the molding pressure average value Px, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation.
6. A step of controlling the tip interval by updating the tip interval setting values 1M and LM with the values of the tip tip calculated values lMa and LMa.
7. A step of updating the pressure control reference value PM with the value of the pressure control reference calculation value PMa and updating each control pressure value of the pressure control unit 51.
 これにより、第2実施形態の制御パターン2が実行された場合、第1実施形態で既に説明したように、サンプリングされた複数の錠剤のサンプリングデータから算出された錠剤の厚み平均値Txにしたがって直接的に杵先間隔設定値lM,LMを変更する制御をするのではなく、まず、打錠装置1は、サンプリングの度にサンプリングデータから得た錠剤の質量平均値Wxを錠剤の質量制御基準値WMにしたとき(質量制御をしたとき)の第1算定圧力変動値PWa及び算定厚みTaを夫々求める。 Thereby, when the control pattern 2 of the second embodiment is executed, as already described in the first embodiment, it is directly according to the tablet thickness average value Tx calculated from the sampling data of a plurality of sampled tablets. Instead of controlling to change the tip interval setting values 1M and LM, the tableting apparatus 1 first calculates the tablet mass average value Wx obtained from the sampling data every time sampling is performed. The first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa and the calculated thickness Ta when the WM is set (when mass control is performed) are obtained.
 その上で、打錠装置1は、算定厚みTaを厚み制御基準値TMにしたとき(厚み制御をしたとき)の杵先間隔算定値lMa,LMa及び第2算定圧力変動値PTaを夫々求める。ここで、杵先間隔算定値lMa,LMaは、厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値とから求める。これにより、打錠装置1は、質量平均値Wxに基づいて杵先間隔を変える場合の杵先間隔に対する影響が評価されて、この影響(杵先間隔の変動)を考慮した杵先間隔算定値lMa,LMaを求めることができる。そして、打錠装置1は、この杵先間隔算定値lMa,LMaの値で杵先間隔設定値lM,LMを更新し、更新された値で杵先間隔l,Lを制御する。これにより、打錠機2の各部の温度変化に伴う錠剤の厚み変動が補正されるので、打錠装置1は、錠剤の厚みTを厚み制御基準値TMに保持できる。 Then, the tableting device 1 obtains the tip distance calculated values lMa and LMa and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference value TM (when the thickness is controlled). Here, the calculated tip spacing values lMa and LMa are obtained from the tip spacing variation value and the tip spacing setting value when the thickness is controlled. Thereby, the tableting device 1 evaluates the influence on the tip distance when changing the tip distance based on the mass average value Wx, and calculates the tip distance calculation value in consideration of this influence (change in the tip distance). lMa and LMa can be obtained. Then, the tableting device 1 updates the tip interval setting values 1M and LM with the values of the tip tip calculated values lMa and LMa, and controls the tip intervals l and L with the updated values. Thereby, since the tablet thickness fluctuation | variation accompanying the temperature change of each part of the tableting machine 2 is correct | amended, the tableting apparatus 1 can hold | maintain the tablet thickness T to the thickness control reference value TM.
 これと共に、第2実施形態の制御パターン2によると、杵先間隔設定値lM,LMの更新により成型圧力が変動して錠剤の質量Wが変わらないように調整している。この調整のために、打錠装置1は、先に求めた算定圧力変動値PWaと、先に求めた算定圧力変動値PTaと、成型圧力平均値Pxとから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求める。その上で、打錠装置1は、圧力制御基準算定値PMaの値で圧力制御基準値(現在値)PMを更新している。 Along with this, according to the control pattern 2 of the second embodiment, adjustment is made so that the molding pressure fluctuates and the tablet mass W does not change by updating the tip interval setting values 1M and LM. For this adjustment, the tableting device 1 calculates the pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the previously calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa, the previously calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa, and the molding pressure average value Px. In addition, the tableting device 1 updates the pressure control reference value (current value) PM with the value of the pressure control reference calculation value PMa.
 このように質量制御と厚み制御による成形圧力に対する影響(つまり、質量制御をしたときの算定圧力変動値PWaと、厚み制御をしたときの算定圧力変動値PTa)とを考慮して求めた圧力制御基準算定値PMaの値で、圧力制御基準値PMを更新することにより、圧力制御部51の圧力制御基準値(現在値)PMが更新される。 Thus, the pressure control obtained in consideration of the influence on the molding pressure by the mass control and the thickness control (that is, the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when the mass control is performed and the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the thickness control is performed). By updating the pressure control reference value PM with the reference calculated value PMa, the pressure control reference value (current value) PM of the pressure control unit 51 is updated.
 そして、更新された圧力制御基準値PMに基づいて成型圧力を制御することにより、打錠機2の連続運転中に、更新された圧力制御基準値PMを基準とするフィードバック制御が行われる。それにより、製造される成型品の成型圧力が圧力制御基準値PMとなるように、臼12への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵16の高さ位置が調節される。 Then, by controlling the molding pressure based on the updated pressure control reference value PM, feedback control based on the updated pressure control reference value PM is performed during continuous operation of the tableting machine 2. Thereby, the height position of the lower punch 16 that defines the filling depth of the powder into the die 12 is adjusted so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured becomes the pressure control reference value PM.
 以上説明したように制御パターン2による運転では、第1実施形態と同様に、打錠装置1は、打錠機2の連続運転に伴う打錠機2各部の温度変化等に拘らず錠剤の厚みTを予め登録された厚み制御基準値に保持して、錠剤を製造することが可能である。また、前記運転制御系統において、演算に基づくステップS149での圧力制御基準値を更新することによって、圧力制御部51に設定された圧力制御基準値(現在値)をはじめとする各制御圧力値が、前記質量制御と前記厚み制御に見合うように自動的に更新されるので、打錠装置1は、錠剤の質量Wを予め登録された質量制御基準値に保持して、錠剤を製造することが可能である。 As described above, in the operation according to the control pattern 2, as in the first embodiment, the tableting device 1 has the tablet thickness irrespective of the temperature change of each part of the tableting machine 2 accompanying the continuous operation of the tableting machine 2. It is possible to manufacture a tablet by holding T at a pre-registered thickness control reference value. Further, in the operation control system, each control pressure value including the pressure control reference value (current value) set in the pressure control unit 51 is updated by updating the pressure control reference value in step S149 based on the calculation. Since the weight control is automatically updated to meet the mass control and the thickness control, the tableting device 1 can hold the tablet mass W at a pre-registered mass control reference value to produce a tablet. Is possible.
 このように、打錠装置1は、制御パターン2に基づいて錠剤の質量と厚みを制御対象とすることで、質量と厚みを夫々に対応する制御基準値に保持して錠剤を製造することが可能である。しかも、この制御方法においては、打錠装置1は、錠剤(成型品)の密度を制御することも可能である。 As described above, the tableting device 1 can control the mass and thickness of the tablet based on the control pattern 2 to manufacture the tablet while maintaining the mass and thickness at the corresponding control reference values. Is possible. Moreover, in this control method, the tableting device 1 can also control the density of the tablet (molded product).
 つまり、錠剤の密度は錠剤の質量と体積によって求められる。この場合、各臼12の穴径が略同一寸法に加工されていることに基づいて、成型される錠剤の直径寸法が略同一となるので、錠剤の直径寸法を固定値として扱うことができる。これとともに、錠剤の体積の変化は厚みの変化に相当することから、錠剤の密度は錠剤の質量と厚みの夫々の値に基づいて求めることができる。これにより、錠剤の密度を制御するためには質量と厚みとを制御すれば良いことになる。したがって、既述のように錠剤の質量と厚みとを制御対象とする制御パターン2に従う制御は、「錠剤の密度を制御する」ことと同等である。 That is, the density of the tablet is determined by the mass and volume of the tablet. In this case, since the diameters of the tablets to be molded are substantially the same based on the fact that the hole diameters of the respective dies 12 are processed to be substantially the same, the diameters of the tablets can be handled as fixed values. At the same time, since the change in the volume of the tablet corresponds to the change in the thickness, the density of the tablet can be determined based on the respective values of the mass and the thickness of the tablet. Thereby, in order to control the density of a tablet, what is necessary is just to control mass and thickness. Therefore, as described above, the control according to the control pattern 2 which controls the mass and thickness of the tablet is equivalent to “controlling the density of the tablet”.
 又、医薬品用の錠剤に対しては、体内に投与された錠剤の崩壊性や溶出性などの特性を一定に保持することが求められることがある。この場合、錠剤の密度と崩壊性、又は溶出性との間に成立する相関関係に基づいて、前記制御パターン2のWT制御に従う錠剤の密度の制御によって、打錠装置1は、前記崩壊性や溶出性が規格範囲内に保持された錠剤を製造することが可能となる。 In addition, for pharmaceutical tablets, it may be required to maintain certain characteristics such as disintegration and dissolution properties of tablets administered into the body. In this case, the tableting device 1 controls the density of the tablet according to the WT control of the control pattern 2 based on the correlation established between the density of the tablet and the disintegration property or the dissolution property. It is possible to produce a tablet whose dissolution property is maintained within the standard range.
 更に、第2実施形態の制御パターン1及び制御パターン2において、予備圧縮・本圧縮の各杵先間隔及び圧力制御部51での制御圧力値の夫々の変更(更新)は、第1実施形態で示したステップS116a~ステップS124、及びステップS125~ステップS135の処理による、杵先間隔制御部KK及び制御圧力値更新部PKを経由して、杵先間隔設定値及び制御圧力値を徐々に変更し、急激な成型圧力の変化に伴う異常圧力の発生を抑制できるようにすることが望ましい。 Furthermore, in the control pattern 1 and the control pattern 2 of the second embodiment, each tip interval of the pre-compression and the main compression and each change (update) of the control pressure value in the pressure control unit 51 are the same as those in the first embodiment. By gradually performing the steps S116a to S124 and the steps S125 to S135, the tip interval setting value and the control pressure value are gradually changed via the tip interval control unit KK and the control pressure value updating unit PK. It is desirable to be able to suppress the occurrence of abnormal pressure associated with a sudden change in molding pressure.
 なお、本発明は前記各実施形態に制約されない。例えば、本発明は、第1ロールを備えない回転式粉末圧縮成型装置、つまり、第2位置に配設された上下一組だけの圧縮成型ロールを備えた成型装置にも適用できる。制御装置の制御対象(例えば、成型品の質量、厚み、及び硬度)を制御する場合、当該制御のうちの少なくとも質量と厚みについての圧力制御部に設定された各制御基準値の更新及び杵先間隔設定値の更新は、時間差を持たせるようにしてもよく、或いは同時に行ってもよい。 Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments. For example, the present invention can also be applied to a rotary powder compression molding apparatus that does not include the first roll, that is, a molding apparatus that includes only one set of upper and lower compression molding rolls disposed at the second position. When controlling the control target of the control device (for example, the mass, thickness, and hardness of the molded product), update of each control reference value and the tip set in the pressure control unit for at least the mass and thickness of the control The interval setting value may be updated with a time difference or may be performed simultaneously.
 又、前記各実施形態では、質量・厚み・硬度に対応する演算上の各算定値(算定質量、算定厚み、算定硬度)が質量・厚み・硬度の夫々の制御基準値から外れていた場合に、打錠装置1は、杵先間隔設定値(現在値)と圧力制御部の圧力制御基準値(現在値)と、硬度制御においては質量・厚み・硬度の各制御基準値(現在値)を更新する制御をしている(これら現在値を更新する値を「更新制御対象値」と言う。)。しかし、これに代えて、打錠装置1は、質量制御基準値に対して質量制御不要範囲を、厚み制御基準値に対して厚み制御不要範囲を、硬度制御基準値に対して硬度制御不要範囲を夫々設定して、演算により求められた更新制御対象値が夫々の制御不要範囲外の値である場合に限って、これら更新制御対象値に基づく制御が行われるようにしても良い。この場合、演算により求められた更新制御対象値が夫々の制御基準値に対して定められた制御不要範囲内の値であれば、更新制御対象値に基づく制御をする必要がない。 In each of the above embodiments, when the calculated values (calculated mass, calculated thickness, calculated hardness) corresponding to the mass / thickness / hardness are out of the control reference values of the mass / thickness / hardness, respectively. The tableting device 1 uses the tip distance setting value (current value), the pressure control reference value (current value) of the pressure control unit, and the control reference value (current value) for mass, thickness, and hardness in hardness control. The update is performed (the values for updating the current values are referred to as “update control target values”). However, instead of this, the tableting device 1 has a mass control unnecessary range for the mass control reference value, a thickness control unnecessary range for the thickness control reference value, and a hardness control unnecessary range for the hardness control reference value. May be set, and control based on these update control target values may be performed only when the update control target values obtained by calculation are values outside the respective control unnecessary ranges. In this case, if the update control target value obtained by the calculation is a value within a control unnecessary range determined for each control reference value, it is not necessary to perform control based on the update control target value.
 そして、各制御基準値に対して前記制御不要範囲を設定した場合、前記制御が行われる度に、制御装置によって再サンプリングが行われるようにサンプリング部を制御することによって、打錠装置1は、前記制御後のサンプリングデータを取得できる構成とすることもできる。これにより、前記制御が適正になされたか否かを検証することが可能である。また、打錠装置1は、演算で求めた前記更新制御対象値が無視できるほど僅かな数値の変化でしかないときにも、再サンプリングが継続して繰り返されて製品ロスが発生し、打錠機2での製品の生産を効率よく運転できない、ということを解消することが可能である。 And, when the control-unnecessary range is set for each control reference value, the tableting device 1 is controlled by controlling the sampling unit so that re-sampling is performed by the control device every time the control is performed. It can also be set as the structure which can acquire the sampling data after the said control. Thereby, it is possible to verify whether or not the control is properly performed. In addition, the tableting device 1 continues the resampling and repeats the re-sampling even when the update control target value obtained by the calculation is negligibly small, resulting in product loss, and tableting. It is possible to eliminate the fact that the production of the product by the machine 2 cannot be efficiently operated.
 各実施形態においては、制御装置4aは、取得した試打データを制御装置4a内の図示しない記憶部へ登録した後に、オペレータの手動操作による運転スイッチの投入を受けて打錠機2を連続生産運転させている。しかし、本発明では、質量、厚み、硬度の試打データが規格範囲内であるか否かを判断するデータ判断部を制御装置に設けて、このデータ判断部が、質量、厚み、硬度の試打データが規格範囲内であると判断した場合、運転スイッチが自動的に投入されて打錠機2の連続生産運転に移行するように、制御装置を構成することが可能である。また、相関係数a0~a5の値が生産される錠剤の品目や特定された原料に対応して予め求められている場合は、制御装置は、これら相関係数a0~a5を制御装置内の図示しない記憶部に登録しておくことができる。これによって、打錠装置1は、生産開始時などで試打運転により試打データに基づく相関係数の取得をあらためて行うことなく、打錠機2の連続生産運転に自動的に移行させることも可能である。 In each embodiment, the control device 4a registers the acquired trial hit data in a storage unit (not shown) in the control device 4a, and then receives the operation switch manually operated by the operator to operate the tablet press 2 in a continuous production operation. I am letting. However, in the present invention, a control unit is provided with a data judgment unit for judging whether the trial hit data for mass, thickness, and hardness is within the standard range, and this data judgment unit is used for trial hit data for mass, thickness, and hardness. Can be configured so that the operation switch is automatically turned on to shift to the continuous production operation of the tableting machine 2. When the values of the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 are obtained in advance corresponding to the item of the tablet to be produced and the specified raw material, the control device sets the correlation coefficients a0 to a5 in the control device. It can be registered in a storage unit (not shown). Accordingly, the tableting device 1 can automatically shift to the continuous production operation of the tableting machine 2 without newly acquiring the correlation coefficient based on the test data at the start of production. is there.
 各実施形態においては、杵先間隔制御部KKと制御圧力値更新部PKを交互にかつ徐々に、夫々目標とする制御基準値に変更する制御をすることが望ましい。しかし、これに代えて、杵先間隔制御部KK又は制御圧力値更新部PKのどちらかを先に目標とする制御基準値まで徐々に変更するように制御し、最初に実行した制御部または更新部の制御が終了してから、引き続き、残された他の制御部または更新部の制御を目標とする制御基準値まで徐々に変更するように制御しても良い。 In each embodiment, it is desirable to perform control in which the tip interval control unit KK and the control pressure value update unit PK are alternately and gradually changed to target control reference values. However, instead of this, control is performed so that either the tip interval control unit KK or the control pressure value update unit PK is gradually changed to the target control reference value first, and the control unit or update executed first After the control of the unit is completed, the control may be performed so as to gradually change to the control reference value targeted for the control of the remaining other control unit or update unit.
 又、前記各実施形態で、選択された制御パターンの演算処理で使用することのできる各種相関係数や、試打データに基づく相関係数の求め方などは既述の説明に制約されない。これは、既述のように成型圧力Pと、質量Wと、厚みTと、硬度Hと、杵先間隔L(またはl)との間には、夫々相関関係があって、夫々に対応する相関係数が成立するので、錠剤の質量の変更(制御)に応じて錠剤の厚みと硬度と成型圧力が変化し、錠剤の厚みの変更(制御)又は杵先間隔設定値の変更(制御)に応じて錠剤の硬度と成型圧力が変化する、と言う相関関係があることに基づく。 Also, in each of the above embodiments, various correlation coefficients that can be used in the calculation process of the selected control pattern, how to obtain the correlation coefficient based on trial hit data, and the like are not limited to the above description. As described above, there is a correlation among the molding pressure P, the mass W, the thickness T, the hardness H, and the tip distance L (or l), and each corresponds to this. Since the correlation coefficient is established, the tablet thickness, hardness, and molding pressure change according to the tablet mass change (control), the tablet thickness change (control), or the tip setting value change (control) This is based on the fact that there is a correlation that the hardness of the tablet and the molding pressure change according to the above.
 例えば、錠剤の質量と厚みと成型圧力との三つの要素の関係について例を挙げると、既述の実施形態におけるP-W相関係数a0の求め方では、質量制御(W2をW1に変更)をした時に生じる錠剤の厚みTの変化量、つまりT-W相関係数a1を用いて〔a1(W1-W2)〕の式により求められる値(これを「厚み変動値」と称する。)の補正処理をしていない。言い換えれば、演算処理において、錠剤の質量制御に応じて変化する錠剤の厚みT2を厚みT1に補正(厚み制御)しないことを前提としたときの成型圧力Pと質量Wとの相関係数をP-W相関係数a0としている。なお、この求め方に従うP-W相関係数を、ここでは、「aα」とする。 For example, as an example of the relationship between the three factors of the tablet mass, thickness, and molding pressure, the method for obtaining the PW correlation coefficient a0 in the above-described embodiment is mass control (W2 is changed to W1). The amount of change in the thickness T of the tablet that occurs when the tablet is taken, that is, the value obtained by the equation [a1 (W1-W2)] using the TW correlation coefficient a1 (this is referred to as the “thickness variation value”). No correction processing is performed. In other words, in the calculation process, the correlation coefficient between the molding pressure P and the mass W when the tablet thickness T2 that changes according to the tablet mass control is not corrected to the thickness T1 (thickness control) is expressed as P -W correlation coefficient a0. Here, the PW correlation coefficient according to this method is “aα”.
 この求め方とは異なり、錠剤の質量制御に応じて変化する既述の錠剤の厚み変動値の補正処理を行うことを前提としたときのP-W相関係数を「aβ」とすると、例えば質量制御に伴う算定圧力変動値PWa(既述の第1算定圧力変動値)を演算処理で求める場合、既述のP-W相関係数a0の値を前記「aα」の値にして演算しても良く、同様にP-W相関係数a0の値を前記「aβ」の値にして演算しても良い。 Unlike this method of calculation, assuming that the PW correlation coefficient is “aβ” on the premise that correction processing of the tablet thickness variation value described above that changes according to tablet mass control is performed, for example, When calculating the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa (previously described first calculated pressure fluctuation value) associated with mass control by calculation processing, the value of the aforementioned PW correlation coefficient a0 is set to the value of “aα”. Similarly, the value of the PW correlation coefficient a0 may be calculated as the value of “aβ”.
 前記「aα」か「aβ」かの何れかの値をP-W相関係数a0として演算処理しても、既述の第1,第2夫々の算定圧力変動値(PTa,PWa)と成型圧力平均値Pxとから算出される圧力制御基準算定値PMaの値は同じ値になる。 Even if the value of either “aα” or “aβ” is calculated as the PW correlation coefficient a0, the calculated first and second calculated pressure fluctuation values (PTa, PWa) and the molding are formed. The pressure control reference calculation value PMa calculated from the pressure average value Px is the same value.
 既述の実施形態において、試打データからP-W相関係数a0は、既述の試打1および試打2での成型圧力Pと質量Wの試打データ(P1,W1及びP2,W2)を用いて、以下の式によってP-W相関係数a0(これをP-W相関係数aαと称する。)を求めている。 
 a0=ΔP/ΔW=(P1-P2)/(W1-W2)……式(1)。 
 ここで、a0=aαである。
In the above-described embodiment, the PW correlation coefficient a0 from the trial hit data is obtained by using the trial hit data (P1, W1 and P2, W2) of the molding pressure P and the mass W in the trial hit 1 and the trial hit 2 described above. The PW correlation coefficient a0 (hereinafter referred to as PW correlation coefficient aα) is obtained by the following equation.
a0 = ΔP / ΔW = (P1-P2) / (W1-W2) (1)
Here, a0 = aα.
 このようにして求めるP-W相関係数aαは、質量W2を質量W1にしたときの質量変化に伴う錠剤の厚みTの変化(厚み変動値=T1-T2)が生じることを前提とした係数である。しかし、演算処理上ではこの厚み変動値の補正を行わないことを前提として、質量W2を質量W1にした時の成型圧力の変動値によってP-W相関係数aαを求めている。 The PW correlation coefficient aα obtained in this way is a coefficient based on the premise that a change in the tablet thickness T (thickness fluctuation value = T1-T2) accompanying the mass change when the mass W2 is changed to the mass W1. It is. However, on the assumption that the thickness variation value is not corrected in the calculation process, the PW correlation coefficient aα is obtained from the variation value of the molding pressure when the mass W2 is changed to the mass W1.
 具体的には、質量制御に応じて変化する錠剤の厚み変動値の補正処理をしないことを前提としたP-W相関係数aαの値をP-W相関係数a0として演算処理した場合、既述の演算式〔PWa=a0(WMa-Wx)…式(12)〕で求められる第1算定圧力変動値PWaの値には、質量制御に応じて変化する厚み変動値を補正することに基づく圧力変動値(変動要素)は含まれないことなる。 Specifically, when the PW correlation coefficient aα is calculated as the PW correlation coefficient a0 on the premise that correction processing of the tablet thickness variation value that changes according to mass control is not performed, For the value of the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa obtained by the above-described arithmetic expression [PWa = a0 (WMa−Wx) (Equation 12)], the thickness fluctuation value that changes according to the mass control is corrected. The pressure fluctuation value (fluctuation factor) based on this is not included.
 これに伴って、既述の演算式〔Ta=Tx+a1(WMa-Wx)…式(13)〕により、前記質量制御に応じて変化する厚み変動値と錠剤の厚み平均値Txとから、前記質量制御をしたときに相当する錠剤の厚み(既述の算定厚みTa)を求め、この算定厚みTaを厚み制御基準算定値TMaにしたとき(厚み制御をしたとき)の第2算定圧力変動値PTaを、既述の演算式〔PTa=a2(TMa-Ta)…式(14)〕から求めればよい。これにより、この第2算定圧力変動値PTaの値にも、前記質量制御に応じて変化する前記厚み変動値〔a1(WMa-Wx)=Ta-Tx〕を補正することによる圧力変動要素(圧力変動値)が含まれない演算処理を行うことができる。 Along with this, from the above-described arithmetic expression [Ta = Tx + a1 (WMa−Wx) (Expression (13)]), from the thickness variation value that changes according to the mass control and the tablet thickness average value Tx, the mass The tablet thickness (calculated thickness Ta described above) corresponding to the control is obtained, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the calculated thickness Ta is set to the thickness control reference calculated value TMa (when the thickness is controlled). Can be obtained from the above-described arithmetic expression [PTa = a2 (TMa−Ta) (Expression (14)]). Thus, the pressure fluctuation element (pressure) by correcting the thickness fluctuation value [a1 (WMa−Wx) = Ta−Tx], which changes according to the mass control, also in the value of the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa. Calculation processing that does not include (variable value) can be performed.
 このように、前記質量制御に応じて変化する厚み変動値を補正したときの圧力変動値(変動要素)を含めないP-W相関係数aαを用いた演算処理をすることで、制御装置は、前記質量制御と前記厚み制御の双方の制御に対応した正確な算定圧力変動値(PTa,PWa)を算出することが可能となる。そして、前記第1,第2の算定圧力変動値(PTa,PWa)と成型圧力平均値Pxとから前記圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求めれば、質量制御に応じて変化する錠剤の厚み変動値を補正しないことを前提としたP-W相関係数aαを用いた以下に示す演算式に従って、圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求めることができる。 As described above, the control device performs the arithmetic processing using the PW correlation coefficient aα that does not include the pressure fluctuation value (fluctuation factor) when the thickness fluctuation value that changes according to the mass control is corrected. Thus, it is possible to calculate an accurate calculated pressure fluctuation value (PTa, PWa) corresponding to both the mass control and the thickness control. And if the said pressure control reference | standard calculated value PMa is calculated | required from said 1st, 2nd calculated pressure fluctuation value (PTa, PWa) and molding pressure average value Px, the thickness fluctuation value of the tablet which changes according to mass control will be obtained. The pressure control reference calculation value PMa can be obtained according to the following arithmetic expression using the PW correlation coefficient aα on the assumption that no correction is made.
 PWa=aα(WMa-Wx)…式(12b) 
 PTa=a2(TMa-Ta)…式(14) 
 PMa=Px+PWa+PTa …式(17)。
PWa = aα (WMa−Wx) Expression (12b)
PTa = a2 (TMa-Ta) (14)
PMa = Px + PWa + PTa Equation (17).
 この場合、式(12b)で求めた圧力制御基準算定値PWaの値は、a0=aαとしているから、既述の演算式〔PWa=a0(WMa-Wx)…式(12)〕で求めた値と同一値である。 In this case, since the value of the pressure control reference calculated value PWa obtained by the equation (12b) is a0 = aα, it is obtained by the above-described arithmetic expression [PWa = a0 (WMa−Wx). It is the same value as the value.
 このように質量制御に応じて変化する錠剤の厚み変動値(Ta-Tx)を補正しないことを前提としたP-W相関係数aαを用いて求める圧力制御基準算定値PMaの演算処理において、質量制御に応じて変化する錠剤の厚み変動値を補正(TxをTaに補正)して求める場合、以下の式に従って行えばよい。 In the calculation process of the pressure control reference calculation value PMa obtained using the PW correlation coefficient aα on the premise that the tablet thickness fluctuation value (Ta−Tx) that changes according to the mass control is not corrected, When the tablet thickness variation value that changes according to the mass control is corrected (Tx is corrected to Ta), the following equation may be used.
 PWa=aα(WMa-Wx)-a2(Ta-Tx)…式(12c) 
 PTa=a2(TMa-Ta)+a2(Ta-Tx)…式(14b) 
 PMa=Px+PWa+PTa…式(17) 
 ここで、a2(Ta-Tx)で求められる値は厚み変動値の補正に基づく圧力変動値である。
PWa = aα (WMa−Wx) −a2 (Ta−Tx) (Equation 12c)
PTa = a2 (TMa−Ta) + a2 (Ta−Tx) Formula (14b)
PMa = Px + PWa + PTa Equation (17)
Here, the value obtained by a2 (Ta−Tx) is a pressure fluctuation value based on the correction of the thickness fluctuation value.
 このように圧力制御基準算定値PMaを、厚み変動値を補正せずに前記式(12b)と前記式(14)とで求める夫々の算定圧力変動値PWa,PTaから求めても、厚み変動値を補正して前記式(12c)と前記式(14b)とで求める夫々の算定圧力変動値PWa,PTaから求めても、前記式(12c)と前記式(14b)夫々の〔a2(Ta-Tx)〕で求められる値が相殺されて、いずれの値も同一値となる。 As described above, even if the pressure control reference calculated value PMa is obtained from the calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa obtained by the above formula (12b) and the above formula (14) without correcting the thickness fluctuation value, the thickness fluctuation value is obtained. Is corrected from the calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa obtained from the equations (12c) and (14b), the equations [12c] and (14b) [a2 (Ta− Tx)]] is canceled out, and all values become the same value.
 このP-W相関係数aαの処理とは異なり、質量制御に応じて変化する錠剤の厚み変動値(Ta-Tx)を補正することを前提としたP-W相関係数aβを求める場合は、処理は、以下の演算方法に従って行われる。 Unlike the processing of the PW correlation coefficient aα, when obtaining the PW correlation coefficient aβ on the assumption that the tablet thickness fluctuation value (Ta−Tx) that changes according to mass control is corrected. The processing is performed according to the following calculation method.
 既述のように質量制御に伴う錠剤の厚み変動により成型圧力も変動する可能性があることに基づき、制御装置は、既述の試打データから、まず、厚みデータT2を厚みデータT1に制御したときに、成型圧力データP2がどのような成型圧力(これを算定圧力P2aと称する。)になるのかを、P-W相関係数a2を用いて次式により求める。 
 P2a=P2+a2(T1-T2)……式(3a)。
Based on the fact that the molding pressure may fluctuate due to the tablet thickness variation accompanying mass control as described above, the control device first controlled the thickness data T2 to the thickness data T1 from the test hit data described above. Sometimes, the molding pressure data P2 is determined by the following equation using the PW correlation coefficient a2 to determine what molding pressure (this is referred to as the calculated pressure P2a).
P2a = P2 + a2 (T1-T2) (Formula (3a)).
 この算定圧力P2aを用いて、厚み変動値によって補正された成型圧力の変動値ΔPを錠剤の質量の変動値ΔWで割る次式により、制御装置は、P-W相関係数aβを求める。 
 aβ=ΔP/ΔW=(P1-P2a)/(W1-W2)……式(1a)。 
 制御装置は、算定圧力P2aにより、P-W相関係数aβを求める上での厚みデータの基準を揃えることができて、厚みデータT1と厚みデータT2との差によって生じる成型圧力の誤差(圧力変動要素)を排除することが可能となる。
Using this calculated pressure P2a, the control device obtains the PW correlation coefficient aβ by the following equation that divides the fluctuation value ΔP of the molding pressure corrected by the thickness fluctuation value by the fluctuation value ΔW of the tablet mass.
aβ = ΔP / ΔW = (P1−P2a) / (W1−W2) (1a)
The control device can align the standard of the thickness data in obtaining the PW correlation coefficient aβ with the calculated pressure P2a, and an error in the molding pressure (pressure) caused by the difference between the thickness data T1 and the thickness data T2 can be obtained. (Variable factors) can be eliminated.
 従って、質量制御に応じて変化する錠剤の厚み変動値を補正することを前提として求めたP-W相関係数aβを用いて圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求める場合は、制御装置は、以下の式に従う演算処理を行えばよい。 Therefore, when the pressure control reference calculation value PMa is obtained using the PW correlation coefficient aβ obtained on the assumption that the tablet thickness fluctuation value that changes according to mass control is corrected, the control device An arithmetic process according to the equation may be performed.
 PWa=aβ(WMa-Wx)…式(12d) 
 PTa=a2(TMa-Ta)+a2(Ta-Tx)=a2(TMa-Tx)…式(14c) 
 PMa=Px+PWa+PTa…式(17)。
PWa = aβ (WMa−Wx) (12d)
PTa = a2 (TMa−Ta) + a2 (Ta−Tx) = a2 (TMa−Tx) (14c)
PMa = Px + PWa + PTa (17)
 ここで、aβ(WMa-Wx)で求められる算定圧力変動値PWaは、質量制御に応じて変化する錠剤の厚み変動値を補正することを前提として求めたP-W相関係数aβを用いているため、厚み変動値補正による圧力変動値が含まれている。 Here, the calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa obtained by aβ (WMa−Wx) is obtained by using the PW correlation coefficient aβ obtained on the assumption that the tablet thickness fluctuation value that changes according to mass control is corrected. Therefore, the pressure fluctuation value by the thickness fluctuation value correction is included.
 これらから、前記夫々の前提の下で求められる圧力制御基準算定値PMaを以下の各計算方法で求めても、前記質量制御と前記厚み制御の双方の制御に対応した正確な算定圧力変動値(PTa,PWa)を算出することが可能となり、いずれの方法で求めた圧力制御基準算定値PMaの値も同一値となる。 From these, even if the pressure control reference calculation value PMa obtained under the respective premises is obtained by the following calculation methods, an accurate calculated pressure fluctuation value corresponding to the control of both the mass control and the thickness control ( PTa, PWa) can be calculated, and the pressure control reference calculation value PMa obtained by any method is the same value.
 第1方法では、制御装置は、質量制御に応じて変化する厚み変動値の補正をせずに前記式(12b)と前記式(14)とで求める夫々の算定圧力変動値PWa,PTaから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求める。第2方法では、制御装置は、質量制御に応じて変化する錠剤の厚み変動値を補正しないことを前提として求めたP-W相関係数aαを用いることにより、厚み変動値を補正することが含まれる前記式(12c)と前記式(14b)とで求める夫々の算定圧力変動値PWa,PTaから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求める。第3方法では、制御装置は、質量制御に応じて変化する錠剤の厚み変動値を補正することを前提として求めたP-W相関係数aβを用いて前記式(12d)と、厚み変動値を補正することが含まれる前記式(14c)とで求める夫々の算定圧力変動値PWa,PTaから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求める。 In the first method, the control device uses the pressures from the calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa obtained by the equations (12b) and (14) without correcting the thickness fluctuation values that change according to mass control. A control reference calculation value PMa is obtained. In the second method, the control device can correct the thickness fluctuation value by using the PW correlation coefficient aα obtained on the assumption that the tablet thickness fluctuation value that changes according to the mass control is not corrected. The pressure control reference calculated value PMa is determined from the calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa determined by the formula (12c) and the formula (14b) included. In the third method, the control device uses the PW correlation coefficient aβ obtained on the assumption that the tablet thickness variation value that changes according to the mass control is corrected, and the equation (12d) and the thickness variation value. The pressure control reference calculation value PMa is obtained from the respective calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa obtained by the equation (14c) including the correction of.
 又、前述したP-W相関係数に「aα」を用いて第1算定圧力変動値PWaを求める場合、第2算定圧力変動値PTaは、既述の計算式〔PTa=a2(TMa-Ta)…式(14)〕で求めている。しかし、この計算式に代えて、制御装置は、成型圧力Pと杵先間隔L(又はl)との間に成立するP-L相関係数(又はP-l相関係数)と、杵先間隔変動値(杵先間隔算定値LMaと前記杵先間隔設定値LMの差)とを用いて第2算定圧力変動値PTaを求めることも可能である。 Further, when the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa is obtained using “aα” as the PW correlation coefficient described above, the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa is calculated using the above-described calculation formula [PTa = a2 (TMa−Ta ) ... It is calculated | required by Formula (14)]. However, in place of this calculation formula, the control device uses a PL correlation coefficient (or Pl correlation coefficient) established between the molding pressure P and the tip interval L (or l), and the tip. It is also possible to obtain the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa using the interval variation value (the difference between the tip interval calculation value LMa and the tip interval setting value LM).
 具体的には、既述の計算式〔LMa=LM+a3(TMa-Ta)…式(15)〕は、 (TMa-Ta)=(LMa-LM)/a3とすることができ、これを、第2算定圧力変動値PTaを求める既述の計算式〔PTa=a2(TMa-Ta)…式(14)〕に代入すると、PTa=a2(LMa-LM)/a3となり、更にPTa=(a2/a3)×(LMa-LM)……式(14d)とすることができる。 Specifically, the above-described calculation formula [LMa = LM + a3 (TMa−Ta) (formula (15)]) can be expressed as (TMa−Ta) = (LMa−LM) / a3. 2 Substituting the calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa into the above-described calculation formula [PTa = a2 (TMa−Ta)... (14)], PTa = a2 (LMa−LM) / a3, and further PTa = (a2 / a3) × (LMa−LM) Equation (14d) can be obtained.
 ここで既述のように、P-T相関係数a2はΔP/ΔTで、L-T相関係数a3はΔL/ΔTで求める係数である。このため、PTaを求める前記式(14d)の(a2/a3)は、以下に示す計算式によって圧力変動値(ΔP)を杵先間隔変動値(ΔL)で割ることで求められ、これをP-L相関係数(例えばa6)と言い換えることができる。 As described above, the PT correlation coefficient a2 is ΔP / ΔT, and the LT correlation coefficient a3 is a coefficient obtained by ΔL / ΔT. Therefore, (a2 / a3) in the above formula (14d) for obtaining PTa is obtained by dividing the pressure fluctuation value (ΔP) by the tip interval fluctuation value (ΔL) by the following calculation formula, It can be paraphrased as -L correlation coefficient (for example, a6).
 a2/a3=(ΔP/ΔT)/(ΔL/ΔT)=ΔP/ΔL
 このことから、前記杵先間隔算定値LMaと前記杵先間隔設定値LMの差(LMa-LM)に前記P-L相関係数(a6=a2/a3)を乗じて求める第2算定圧力変動値PTaは、前記厚み制御基準算定値TMaと前記算定厚みTaの差(TMa-Ta)にP-T相関係数(a2)を乗じて求める既述の第2算定圧力変動値PTaの値と同一値になる。
a2 / a3 = (ΔP / ΔT) / (ΔL / ΔT) = ΔP / ΔL
From this, the second calculated pressure fluctuation obtained by multiplying the difference (LMa−LM) between the calculated tip distance LMa and the tip distance setting value LM by the PL correlation coefficient (a6 = a2 / a3). The value PTa is the value of the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa described above obtained by multiplying the difference (TMa−Ta) between the thickness control reference calculated value TMa and the calculated thickness Ta by the PT correlation coefficient (a2). It becomes the same value.
 更に、錠剤の硬度の制御を伴う制御パターンにおいて使用するW-H相関係数a5については、制御パターン3(WH制御)ではa5αの値を用い、制御パターン1(WTH制御)及び制御パターン5(TH制御)ではa5βの値を用いた実施形態を説明したが、a5βをa5αに置換えて演算処理を行うことも可能である。これは、前述した錠剤の質量と厚みと成型圧力の夫々に成立する相関関係から、質量制御と厚み制御をしたときの夫々の圧力変動値を求める方法と同様に、既述のように錠剤の質量と厚みと硬度の夫々にも相関関係が成立することにより、質量制御と厚み制御をしたときの夫々の硬度変動値を求めることも可能であることに基づく。 Further, for the WH correlation coefficient a5 used in the control pattern with control of the tablet hardness, the value of a5α is used in the control pattern 3 (WH control), and the control pattern 1 (WTH control) and the control pattern 5 ( In the (TH control), the embodiment using the value of a5β has been described, but it is also possible to perform arithmetic processing by replacing a5β with a5α. This is because, as described above, similar to the method for obtaining the pressure fluctuation values when the mass control and the thickness control are performed, from the correlation established between the tablet mass, the thickness and the molding pressure, as described above. This is based on the fact that the correlation between the mass, the thickness, and the hardness is established, so that it is possible to obtain the respective hardness fluctuation values when the mass control and the thickness control are performed.
 又、既述の制御パターン1(WTH制御)で所望の成型品を製造するには、以下の各方法で実施することが可能である。 Moreover, in order to manufacture a desired molded product with the above-described control pattern 1 (WTH control), it is possible to carry out by the following methods.
 (成型品の硬度の単独制御方法) 
 制御パターン1(WTH制御)において、制御装置は、質量制御基準値補正範囲と厚み制御基準値補正範囲を夫々大幅に広げる設定をする。例えば、質量と厚みの各制御基準値補正範囲の下限値を0とし、各制御基準値補正範囲の上限値を設定可能範囲の最大値にする等。次に、制御装置は、硬度制御基準値補正範囲だけを最小にする(例えば、硬度制御基準値補正範囲の下限値と上限値を同値にする等)ことで、硬度変化に応じて圧力制御基準値PM、及び杵先間隔設定値LM,lMを更新する。
(Single control method for hardness of molded product)
In the control pattern 1 (WTH control), the control device performs setting to greatly expand the mass control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference value correction range. For example, the lower limit value of each control reference value correction range of mass and thickness is set to 0, and the upper limit value of each control reference value correction range is set to the maximum value of the settable range. Next, the control device minimizes only the hardness control reference value correction range (for example, by setting the lower limit value and upper limit value of the hardness control reference value correction range to the same value, etc.), so that the pressure control reference is changed according to the hardness change. The value PM and the tip interval setting values LM and lM are updated.
 これにより、成型品の硬度Hが単独で規格範囲内となるように制御(H単独制御)されて所望の成型品を製造することが可能である。 Thereby, it is possible to manufacture a desired molded product by controlling the hardness H of the molded product independently within the standard range (H single control).
 (成型品の質量の単独制御方法) 
 制御パターン1(WTH制御)において、制御装置は、厚み制御基準値補正範囲と硬度制御基準値補正範囲を夫々大幅に広げる設定をする。例えば、厚みと硬度の各制御基準値補正範囲の下限値を0とする等。次に、制御装置は、各制御基準値補正範囲の上限値を設定可能範囲の最大値にして、質量制御基準値補正範囲だけを最小にする(例えば、質量制御基準値補正範囲の下限値と上限値を同値にする等)ことで、質量変化に応じて圧力制御基準値PM、及び杵先間隔設定値LM,lMを更新する。
(Single control method for the mass of molded products)
In the control pattern 1 (WTH control), the control device performs setting to greatly widen the thickness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference value correction range. For example, the lower limit value of each control reference value correction range for thickness and hardness is set to zero. Next, the control device sets the upper limit value of each control reference value correction range to the maximum value of the settable range and minimizes only the mass control reference value correction range (for example, the lower limit value of the mass control reference value correction range and By changing the upper limit value to the same value, etc.), the pressure control reference value PM and the tip interval setting values LM, 1M are updated according to the mass change.
 これにより、成型品の質量Wが単独で規格範囲内となるように制御(W単独制御)されて所望の成型品を製造することが可能である。 Thus, it is possible to manufacture a desired molded product by controlling the mass W of the molded product to be within the standard range (W single control).
 (成型品の厚みの単独制御方法) 
 制御パターン1(WTH制御)において、制御装置は、質量制御基準値補正範囲と硬度制御基準値補正範囲を夫々大幅に広げる設定をする。例えば、質量と硬度の各制御基準値補正範囲の下限値を0とし、質量と硬度の各制御基準値補正範囲の上限値を設定可能範囲の最大値にする等。次に、制御装置は、厚み制御基準値補正範囲だけを最小にする(例えば、厚み制御基準値補正範囲の下限値と上限値を同値にする等)ことで、厚み変化に応じて圧力制御基準値PM、及び杵先間隔設定値LM,lMを更新する。
(Single control method for thickness of molded product)
In the control pattern 1 (WTH control), the control device performs setting to greatly expand the mass control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference value correction range. For example, the lower limit value of each control reference value correction range of mass and hardness is set to 0, and the upper limit value of each control reference value correction range of mass and hardness is set to the maximum value of the settable range. Next, the control device minimizes only the thickness control reference value correction range (for example, by setting the lower limit value and upper limit value of the thickness control reference value correction range to the same value, etc.), so that the pressure control reference is changed according to the thickness change. The value PM and the tip interval setting values LM and lM are updated.
 これより、成型品の厚みTが単独で規格範囲内となるように制御(T単独制御)されて所望の成型品を製造することが可能である。 From this, it is possible to manufacture a desired molded product by controlling the thickness T of the molded product independently within the standard range (T single control).
 (成型品の厚みと硬度の制御方法) 
 制御パターン1(WTH制御)において、制御装置は、質量制御基準値補正範囲を大幅に広げる設定をする。例えば、質量制御基準値補正範囲の下限値を0とし、質量制御基準値補正範囲の上限値を設定可能範囲の最大値にする等。次に、制御装置は、厚み制御基準値補正範囲と硬度制御基準値補正範囲の夫々を最小にする(例えば、厚みと硬度の各制御基準値補正範囲の下限値と上限値を同値にする等)ことで、厚みと硬度の各変化に応じて圧力制御基準値PM、及び杵先間隔設定値LM,lMを更新する。
(Method for controlling thickness and hardness of molded product)
In the control pattern 1 (WTH control), the control device performs setting to greatly widen the mass control reference value correction range. For example, the lower limit value of the mass control reference value correction range is set to 0, and the upper limit value of the mass control reference value correction range is set to the maximum value of the settable range. Next, the control device minimizes each of the thickness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference value correction range (for example, the lower limit value and the upper limit value of each control reference value correction range for thickness and hardness are the same value, etc.) Thus, the pressure control reference value PM and the tip interval setting values LM, 1M are updated in accordance with each change in thickness and hardness.
 これにより、成型品の厚みTと硬度Hの夫々が規格範囲内となるように制御(TH制御)されて所望の成型品を製造することが可能である。 Thus, it is possible to manufacture a desired molded product by controlling (TH control) the thickness T and hardness H of the molded product to be within the standard range.
 (成型品の質量と硬度の制御方法) 
 制御パターン1(WTH制御)において、制御装置は、厚み制御基準値補正範囲を大幅に広げる設定をする。例えば、厚み制御基準値補正範囲の下限値を0とし、厚み制御基準値補正範囲の上限値を設定可能範囲の最大値にする等。次に、制御装置は、質量制御基準値補正範囲と硬度制御基準値補正範囲の夫々を最小にする(例えば、質量と硬度の各制御基準値補正範囲の下限値と上限値を同値にする等)ことで、質量と硬度の各変化に応じて圧力制御基準値PM、及び杵先間隔設定値LM,lMを更新する。
(Method for controlling the mass and hardness of molded products)
In the control pattern 1 (WTH control), the control device performs setting to greatly widen the thickness control reference value correction range. For example, the lower limit value of the thickness control reference value correction range is set to 0, and the upper limit value of the thickness control reference value correction range is set to the maximum value of the settable range. Next, the control device minimizes each of the mass control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference value correction range (for example, the lower limit value and the upper limit value of each control reference value correction range for mass and hardness are the same value, etc.) Thus, the pressure control reference value PM and the tip interval setting values LM and lM are updated in accordance with each change in mass and hardness.
 これにより、成型品の質量Wと硬度Hの夫々が規格範囲内となるように制御(WH制御)されて所望の成型品を製造することが可能である。 Thus, it is possible to manufacture a desired molded product by controlling (WH control) the mass W and the hardness H of the molded product to be within the standard range.
 (成型品の質量と厚みの制御方法) 
 制御パターン1(WTH制御)において、制御装置は、硬度制御基準値補正範囲を大幅に広げる設定をする。例えば、硬度制御基準値補正範囲の下限値を0とし、硬度制御基準値補正範囲の上限値を設定可能範囲の最大値にする等。次に、制御装置は、質量制御基準値補正範囲と厚み制御基準値補正範囲の夫々を最小にする(例えば、質量と厚みの各制御基準値補正範囲の下限値と上限値を同値にする等)ことで、質量と厚みの各変化に応じて圧力制御基準値PM、及び杵先間隔設定値LM,lMを更新する。
(Method for controlling the mass and thickness of molded products)
In the control pattern 1 (WTH control), the control device performs setting to greatly widen the hardness control reference value correction range. For example, the lower limit value of the hardness control reference value correction range is set to 0, and the upper limit value of the hardness control reference value correction range is set to the maximum value of the settable range. Next, the control device minimizes each of the mass control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference value correction range (for example, the lower limit value and the upper limit value of each control reference value correction range for mass and thickness are set to the same value, etc.) Thus, the pressure control reference value PM and the tip interval setting values LM and lM are updated in accordance with each change in mass and thickness.
 これにより、成型品の質量Wと厚みTの夫々が規格範囲内となるように制御(WT制御)されて所望の成型品を製造することが可能である。 Thereby, it is possible to manufacture a desired molded product by controlling (WT control) so that each of the mass W and thickness T of the molded product is within the standard range.
 以上のように本発明のいくつかの実施形態を説明したが、これらの実施形態は、例として提示したものであり、発明の範囲を限定することを意図していない。 Although several embodiments of the present invention have been described above, these embodiments are presented as examples and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention.
 発明の範囲は、制御パターン1(WTH制御)、又は制御パターン2(WT制御)のみを単独で実施できる実施形態を含むことはもちろんであり、更に、これら夫々の制御パターン1,2と他の制御パターン又は制御部(制御手段)とを組み合わせることによって、その組み合せの中から、前記夫々の制御パターンを選択して実施することも含むものである。 The scope of the invention includes, of course, an embodiment in which only the control pattern 1 (WTH control) or the control pattern 2 (WT control) can be performed alone. It also includes selecting and implementing each of the control patterns from the combination by combining the control pattern or the control unit (control means).
 又、本明細書に記載された実施形態には以下の発明が含まれている。 In addition, the following inventions are included in the embodiments described in this specification.
 〔1〕 
 回転盤11を備える粉末圧縮成型機2の運転を制御する制御装置4aに備えられかつ製造される成型品の成型圧力が圧力制御基準値PMに保持されるように前記回転盤11に取付けられた臼12への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵16の高さ位置を制御する圧力制御部51を有する回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置1(又はこの装置の運転方法)であって、成型品の厚みのみの制御を行うための以下の各部(各手段又は各工程)を備えることを特徴とする。 
 圧力制御をしたときの質量変動値と、運転中に求めた複数の成型品の質量平均値Wxとから成型品の算定質量Waを求める算定質量演算部(算定質量演算手段又は算定質量演算工程)。 
 厚み制御基準値TMの値で厚み制御基準算定値TMaを置換する第1制御基準算定値更新部(第1制御基準算定値更新手段又は第1制御基準算定値更新工程)。 
 前記算定質量Waの値で前記質量制御基準算定値WMaを置換する第2制御基準値更新部(第2制御基準値更新手段又は第2制御基準値更新工程)。 
 質量制御をしたときの算定圧力変動値PWaを求める第1算定圧力変動値演算部(第1算定圧力変動値演算手段又は第1算定圧力変動値演算工程)。 
 前記質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の厚み平均値Txとから成型品の算定厚みTaを求める算定厚み演算部(算定厚み演算手段又は算定厚み演算工程)。 
 厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔算定値(lMa及びLMa)を求める杵先間隔算定値演算部(杵先間隔算定値演算手段又は杵先間隔算定値演算工程)。 
 前記厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値PTaを求める第2算定圧力変動値演算部(第2算定圧力変動値演算手段又は第2算定圧力変動値演算工程)。 
 運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値Pxと前記第1、第2の夫々の算定圧力変動値(PWa、PTa)とから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求める圧力制御基準算定値演算部(圧力制御基準算定値演算手段又は圧力制御基準算定値演算工程)。 
 杵先間隔を制御する必要性を判断し、その必要性があると判断した場合、杵先間隔を変更させる杵先間隔制御部(杵先間隔制御手段又は杵先間隔制御工程)。 
 前記圧力制御基準値PMを更新する必要性を判断し、その必要性があると判断した場合、前記圧力制御部51の各制御圧力値を更新する制御圧力値更新部(制御圧力値更新手段又は制御圧力値更新工程)。
[1]
The control device 4a for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine 2 including the rotating disk 11 is attached to the rotating disk 11 so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured is maintained at the pressure control reference value PM. A rotary powder compression molding apparatus 1 (or an operation method of this apparatus) having a pressure control unit 51 for controlling the height position of the lower punch 16 that defines the filling depth of the powder into the die 12, The following portions (each means or each step) for controlling only the thickness of the film are provided.
Calculated mass calculation unit (calculated mass calculation means or calculated mass calculation process) for calculating the calculated mass Wa of the molded product from the mass fluctuation value when the pressure is controlled and the mass average value Wx of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation. .
A first control reference calculation value update unit (first control reference calculation value update means or first control reference calculation value update step) that replaces the thickness control reference calculation value TMa with the value of the thickness control reference value TM.
A second control reference value update unit (second control reference value update means or second control reference value update step) that replaces the mass control reference calculation value WMa with the value of the calculated mass Wa.
A first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating unit (first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating means or first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step) for obtaining a calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when mass control is performed.
Calculated thickness calculation unit (calculated thickness calculating means or calculated thickness calculating step) for calculating the calculated thickness Ta of the molded product from the thickness variation value when the mass control is performed and the average thickness Tx of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation .
A tip interval calculation value calculation unit (tip interval calculation value calculation means or a tip interval calculation value calculation step) for calculating a tip interval calculation value (lMa and LMa) when the thickness is controlled.
A second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating unit (second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating means or a second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step) for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the thickness is controlled.
Pressure control reference calculation value calculation for calculating pressure control reference calculation value PMa from the molding pressure average value Px of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation and the first and second calculated pressure fluctuation values (PWa, PTa). Part (pressure control reference calculation value calculation means or pressure control reference calculation value calculation step).
A tip spacing control unit (tip tip spacing control means or tip tip spacing control step) that determines the necessity of controlling the tip spacing and changes the tip spacing when it is determined that it is necessary.
When the necessity for updating the pressure control reference value PM is determined and it is determined that there is a necessity, a control pressure value updating unit (control pressure value updating means or Control pressure value update process).
 〔2〕 
 回転盤11を備える粉末圧縮成型機2の運転を制御する制御装置4aに備えられかつ製造される成型品の成型圧力が圧力制御基準値PMに保持されるように前記回転盤11に取付けられた臼12への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵16の高さ位置を制御する圧力制御部51を有する回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置1(又はこの装置の運転方法)であって、厚みと硬度の制御を行うための以下の各部(手段又は各工程)を備えることを特徴とする。 
 圧力制御をしたときの質量変動値と、運転中に求めた複数の成型品の質量平均値Wxとから成型品の算定質量Waを求める算定質量演算部(算定質量演算手段又は算定質量演算工程)。 
 厚み基準値TOの値で厚み制御基準算定値TMaを、硬度基準値HOの値で硬度制御基準算定値HMaを夫々置換する第3制御基準算定値更新部(第3制御基準算定値更新手段又は第3制御基準算定値更新工程)。 
 前記算定質量Waの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを置換する第4制御基準算定値更新部(第4制御基準算定値更新手段又は第4制御基準算定値更新工程)。 
 前記質量制御基準算定値WMaを用いて質量制御をしたときの硬度変動値と、厚み制御基準算定値TMaを用いて厚み制御をしたときの硬度変動値とを夫々求め、これら硬度変動値と、運転中に求めた複数の成型品の硬度平均値Hxとから成型品の算定硬度Haを求める第2算定硬度演算部(第2算定硬度演算手段又は第2算定硬度演算工程)。 
 前記算定硬度Haが、厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値が補正されたとしたときの硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第2判断部(算定硬度第2判断手段又は算定硬度第2判断工程)。 
 前記算定硬度第2判断部(算定硬度第2判断手段又は算定硬度第2判断工程)の判断が硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、厚み及び硬度の各制御基準算定値の少なくとも一つを、この少なくとも一つに対応する制御基準値補正範囲の範囲内で更新する硬度制御部(硬度制御手段又は硬度制御工程)。 
 前記硬度制御部(硬度制御手段又は硬度制御工程)を経由して与えられる質量制御基準算定値を用いて質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値PWaを求める第1算定圧力変動値演算部(第1算定圧力変動値演算手段又は第1算定圧力変動値演算工程)。 
 前記質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と前記厚み平均値Txとから成型品の算定厚みTaを求める算定厚み演算部(算定厚み演算手段又は算定厚み演算工程)。 
 前記硬度制御部(硬度制御手段又は硬度制御工程)を経由して与えられる厚み制御基準算定値を用いて厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔算定値lMa,LMaを求める杵先間隔算定値演算部(杵先間隔算定値演算手段又は杵先間隔算定値演算工程)。 
 前記厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値PTaを求める第2算定圧力変動値演算部(第2算定圧力変動値演算部手段又は第2算定圧力変動値演算工程)。 
 運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値Pxと前記第1、第2の算定圧力変動値PWa,PTaとから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求める圧力制御基準算定値演算部(圧力制御基準算定値演算手段又は圧力制御基準算定値演算工程)。 
 杵先間隔を制御する必要性を判断し、その必要性があると判断した場合、杵先間隔を変更させる杵先間隔制御部(杵先間隔制御手段又は杵先間隔制御工程)。 
 前記圧力制御基準値PMを更新する必要性を判断し、その必要性があると判断した場合、前記圧力制御部51の各制御圧力値を更新する制御圧力値更新部(制御圧力値更新手段又は制御圧力値更新工程)。
[2]
The control device 4a for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine 2 including the rotating disk 11 is attached to the rotating disk 11 so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured is maintained at the pressure control reference value PM. A rotary powder compression molding apparatus 1 (or an operation method of this apparatus) having a pressure control unit 51 for controlling the height position of the lower punch 16 that defines the filling depth of the powder into the mortar 12, and having a thickness and It comprises the following parts (means or processes) for controlling the hardness.
Calculated mass calculation unit (calculated mass calculation means or calculated mass calculation process) for calculating the calculated mass Wa of the molded product from the mass fluctuation value when the pressure is controlled and the mass average value Wx of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation. .
A third control reference calculation value update unit (third control reference calculation value update means or a third control reference calculation value update means or Third control standard calculation value update process).
A fourth control reference calculation value update unit (a fourth control reference calculation value update unit or a fourth control reference calculation value update step) that replaces the mass control reference calculation value WMa with the value of the calculated mass Wa.
A hardness fluctuation value when mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculated value WMa and a hardness fluctuation value when thickness control is performed using the thickness control reference calculated value TMa are obtained, respectively, A second calculated hardness calculating unit (second calculated hardness calculating means or second calculated hardness calculating step) that calculates the calculated hardness Ha of the molded product from the hardness average value Hx of the plurality of molded products determined during operation.
Calculated hardness second determination unit (calculated hardness second determination means or calculation) for determining whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range when the thickness and hardness control standard calculation values are corrected. Hardness second judgment step).
When the determination of the calculated hardness second determining unit (calculated hardness second determining means or calculated hardness second determining step) is within a hardness controllable range, at least one of the control standard calculated values of thickness and hardness is set to at least A hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control step) that is updated within a control reference value correction range corresponding to one.
First calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when mass control is performed using a mass control reference calculation value given via the hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control process) (First calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating means or first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step).
A calculated thickness calculation unit (calculated thickness calculation means or calculated thickness calculation step) for calculating a calculated thickness Ta of a molded product from the thickness variation value when the mass control is performed and the thickness average value Tx.
Tip distance calculation value calculation unit for calculating the tip distance calculation values lMa and LMa when the thickness is controlled using the thickness control reference calculation value given via the hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control step) (Tip interval calculation value calculation means or tip interval calculation value calculation step).
A second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating section (second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating section means or a second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step) for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the thickness is controlled.
Pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit (pressure control) for determining a pressure control reference calculated value PMa from the molding pressure average value Px of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation and the first and second calculated pressure fluctuation values PWa and PTa. Reference calculation value calculation means or pressure control reference calculation value calculation step).
A tip spacing control unit (tip tip spacing control means or tip tip spacing control step) that determines the necessity of controlling the tip spacing and changes the tip spacing when it is determined that it is necessary.
When the necessity for updating the pressure control reference value PM is determined and it is determined that there is a necessity, a control pressure value updating unit (control pressure value updating means or Control pressure value update process).
 〔3〕 
 回転盤11を備える粉末圧縮成型機2の運転を制御する制御装置4aに備えられかつ製造される成型品の成型圧力が圧力制御基準値PMに保持されるように前記回転盤11に取付けられた臼12への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵16の高さ位置を制御する圧力制御部51を有する回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置1(又はこの装置の運転方法)であって、質量と硬度の制御を行うための以下の各部(又は各工程)を備えることを特徴とする。 
 質量基準値WOの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを、硬度基準値HOの値で硬度制御基準算定値HMaを夫々置換する第3制御基準算定値更新部(第3制御基準算定値更新手段又は第3制御基準算定値更新工程)。 
 質量制御をしたときの硬度変動値と、運転中に求めた複数の成型品の硬度平均値Hxとから成型品の算定硬度Haを求める第1算定硬度演算部(第1算定硬度演算手段又は第1算定硬度演算工程)。 
 前記算定硬度Haが、質量・硬度の各制御基準算定値が補正されたとしたときの硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第1判断部(算定硬度第1判断手段又は算定硬度第1判断工程)。 
 前記算定硬度第1判断部(算定硬度第1判断手段又は算定硬度第1判断工程)の判断が前記硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、質量及び硬度の各制御基準算定値の少なくとも一つを、この少なくとも一つに対応する制御基準値補正範囲の範囲内で更新する硬度制御部(硬度制御手段又は硬度制御工程)。 
 前記硬度制御部(硬度制御手段又は硬度制御工程)を経由して与えられる質量制御基準算定値を用いて質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値PWaを求める第1算定圧力変動値演算部(第1算定圧力変動値演算手段又は第1算定圧力変動値演算工程)。 
 運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値Pxと前記第1算定圧力変動値PWaとから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求める圧力制御基準算定値演算部(圧力制御基準算定値演算手段又は圧力制御基準算定値演算工程)。 
 前記圧力制御基準値PMを更新する必要性を判断し、その必要性があると判断した場合、前記圧力制御部51の各制御圧力値を更新する制御圧力値更新部(制御圧力値更新手段又は制御圧力値更新工程)。
[3]
The control device 4a for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine 2 including the rotating disk 11 is attached to the rotating disk 11 so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured is maintained at the pressure control reference value PM. A rotary powder compression molding apparatus 1 (or an operation method of this apparatus) having a pressure control unit 51 for controlling the height position of the lower punch 16 that defines the filling depth of the powder into the mortar 12, and It comprises the following parts (or each process) for controlling the hardness.
A third control reference calculation value update unit (third control reference calculation value update means or third control reference value update unit or replacement means for replacing the mass control reference calculation value WMa with the value of the mass reference value WO and the hardness control reference calculation value HMa with the value of the hardness reference value HO, respectively. Third control standard calculation value update process).
A first calculated hardness calculating unit (first calculated hardness calculating means or first calculated hardness calculation unit or a first calculated hardness calculating unit) calculates a calculated hardness Ha of a molded product from a hardness variation value when mass control is performed and a hardness average value Hx of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation. 1 calculation hardness calculation process).
A calculated hardness first determining unit (calculated hardness first determining means or calculation) for determining whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range when each control standard calculated value of mass and hardness is corrected. Hardness first determination step).
When the determination of the calculated hardness first determining unit (calculated hardness first determining means or calculated hardness first determining step) is within the hardness controllable range, at least one of the control reference calculated values of mass and hardness is calculated by A hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control step) that is updated within a control reference value correction range corresponding to at least one.
First calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa when mass control is performed using a mass control reference calculation value given via the hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control process) (First calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating means or first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step).
A pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit (a pressure control reference calculated value calculation means or a pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit) that calculates a pressure control reference calculated value PMa from a molding pressure average value Px of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation and the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa. Pressure control standard calculation value calculation process).
When the necessity for updating the pressure control reference value PM is determined and it is determined that there is a necessity, a control pressure value updating unit (control pressure value updating means or Control pressure value update process).
 〔4〕 
 回転盤11を備える粉末圧縮成型機2の運転を制御する制御装置4aに備えられかつ製造される成型品の成型圧力が圧力制御基準値PMに保持されるように前記回転盤11に取付けられた臼12への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵16の高さ位置を制御する圧力制御部51を有する回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置1(又はこの装置の運転方法)であって、質量と厚みと硬度の制御を行うための以下の各部(手段又は各工程)を備えることを特徴とする。 
 圧力制御をしたときの質量変動値と、運転中に求めた複数の成型品の質量平均値Wxとから成型品の算定質量Waを求める算定質量演算部(算定質量演算手段又は算定質量演算工程)。 
 指定された制御パターンが成型品の硬度の制御を含むのか否かを判断する制御パターン第1選択部(制御パターン第1選択手段又は制御パターン第1選択工程)。 
 指定された制御パターンが成型品の硬度の制御を含ないと前記制御パターン第1選択部(制御パターン第1選択手段又は制御パターン第1選択工程)が判断した場合、質量制御基準値WMの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを、厚み制御基準値TMの値で厚み制御基準算定値TMaを夫々置換する第1制御基準算定値更新部(第1制御基準算定値更新手段又は第1制御基準算定値更新工程)。 
 指定された制御パターンが成型品の質量の制御を含むのか否かを判断する制御パターン第2選択部(制御パターン第2選択手段又は制御パターン第2選択工程)。 
 指定された制御パターンが成型品の質量の制御を含まないと前記制御パターン第2選択部(又は制御パターン第2選択工程)が判断した場合、前記算定質量Waの値で前記質量制御基準算定値WMaを置換する第2制御基準算定値更新部(第2制御基準算定値更新手段又は第2制御基準算定値更新工程)。 
 指定された制御パターンが成型品の硬度の制御を含むと前記制御パターン第1選択部 (制御パターン第1選択手段又は制御パターン第1選択工程)が判断した場合、質量基準値WOの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを、厚み基準値TOの値で厚み制御基準算定値TMaを、硬度基準値HOの値で硬度制御基準算定値HMaを、夫々置換する第3制御基準算定値更新部(第3制御基準算定値更新手段又は第3制御基準算定値更新工程)。 
 指定された制御パターンが成型品の質量の制御を含むか否かを判断する制御パターン第3選択部(制御パターン第3選択手段又は制御パターン第3選択工程)。 
 指定された制御パターンが成型品の質量の制御を含むと前記制御パターン第3選択部(制御パターン第3選択手段又は制御パターン第3選択工程)が判断した場合、質量制御をしたときの硬度変動値と、前記厚み制御をしたときの硬度変動値とを夫々求め、これら硬度変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の硬度平均値Hxとから成型品の算定硬度Haを求める第1算定硬度演算部(第1算定硬度演算手段又は第1算定硬度演算工程)。 
 前記算定硬度Haが、質量・厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値が補正されたとしたときの硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第1判断部(算定硬度第1判断手段又は算定硬度第1判断工程)。 
 指定された制御パターンが成型品の質量の制御を含まないと前記制御パターン第3選択部(制御パターン第3選択手段又は制御パターン第3選択工程)が判断した場合、前記算定質量Waの値で質量制御基準算定値WMaを置換する第4制御基準算定値更新部(第4制御基準算定値更新手段又は第4制御基準算定値更新工程)。 
 質量制御をしたときの硬度変動値と、厚み制御をしたときの硬度変動値とを求め、これら硬度変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の硬度平均値Hxとから成型品の算定硬度Haを求める第2算定硬度演算部(第2算定硬度演算手段又は第2算定硬度演算工程)。 
 前記算定硬度が、厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値が補正されたとしたときの硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第2判断部(算定硬度第2判断手段又は算定硬度第2判断工程)。 
 前記算定硬度第1判断部(算定硬度第1判断手段又は算定硬度第1判断工程)の判断が硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、質量、厚み、及び硬度の各制御基準算定値の少なくとも一つを、この少なくとも一つに対応する制御基準値補正範囲の範囲内で更新する硬度制御部(硬度制御手段又は硬度制御工程)、又は、前記算定硬度第2判断部(算定硬度第2判断手段又は算定硬度第2判断工程)の判断が硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、厚み及び硬度の各制御基準算定値の少なくとも一つを、この少なくとも一つに対応する制御基準値補正範囲の範囲内で更新する硬度制御部(硬度制御手段又は硬度制御工程)。 
 指定された制御パターンが成型品の質量の制御を含むと前記制御パターン第2選択部 (制御パターン第2選択手段又は制御パターン第2選択工程)が判断した場合、又は、指定された制御パターンが成型品の質量の制御を含まないと前記制御パターン第2選択部(制御パターン第2選択手段又は制御パターン第2選択工程)が判断した場合で、かつ、前記第2制御基準値更新部(第2制御基準値更新手段又は前記第2制御基準値更新工程)を経由した場合、若しくは指定された制御パターンが前記硬度制御部(硬度制御手段又は前記硬度制御工程)を経由した場合に、質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値を求める第1算定圧力変動値演算部(第1算定圧力変動値演算手段又は第1算定圧力変動値演算工程)。 
 前記質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の厚み平均値Txとから成型品の算定厚みTaを求める算定厚み演算部(算定厚み演算手段又は算定厚み演算工程)。 
 厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値とから杵先間隔算定値LMa,lMaを求める杵先間隔算定値演算部(杵先間隔算定値演算手段又は杵先間隔算定値演算工程)。 
 前記厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値PTaを求める第2算定圧力変動値演算部(第2算定圧力変動値演算手段又は第2算定圧力変動値演算工程)。 
 運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値Pxと前記第1算定圧力変動値PWaと前記第2算定圧力変動値PTaとから圧力制御基準算定値PMaを求める圧力制御基準算定値演算部(圧力制御基準算定値演算手段又は圧力制御基準算定値演算工程)。 
 杵先間隔を制御する必要性を判断し、その必要性があると判断した場合、杵先間隔を変更させる杵先間隔制御部(杵先間隔制御手段又は杵先間隔制御工程)。 
 前記圧力制御基準値PMを更新する必要性を判断し、その必要性があると判断した場合、圧力制御部51の各制御圧力値を更新する制御圧力値更新部(制御圧力値更新手段又は制御圧力値更新工程)。
[4]
The control device 4a for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine 2 including the rotating disk 11 is attached to the rotating disk 11 so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured is maintained at the pressure control reference value PM. A rotary powder compression molding apparatus 1 (or an operation method of this apparatus) having a pressure control unit 51 for controlling the height position of the lower punch 16 that defines the filling depth of the powder into the mortar 12, and It comprises the following parts (means or steps) for controlling the thickness and hardness.
Calculated mass calculation unit (calculated mass calculation means or calculated mass calculation process) for calculating the calculated mass Wa of the molded product from the mass fluctuation value when the pressure is controlled and the mass average value Wx of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation. .
A control pattern first selection unit (control pattern first selection means or control pattern first selection step) for determining whether or not the designated control pattern includes control of the hardness of the molded product.
When the control pattern first selection unit (control pattern first selection means or control pattern first selection step) determines that the designated control pattern does not include control of the hardness of the molded product, the value of the mass control reference value WM The first control reference calculated value update unit (first control reference calculated value update means or first control reference calculated) replaces the mass control reference calculated value WMa with the thickness control reference value TM and the thickness control reference calculated value TMa. Value update process).
A control pattern second selection unit (control pattern second selection means or control pattern second selection step) for determining whether or not the designated control pattern includes control of the mass of the molded product.
When the control pattern second selection unit (or control pattern second selection step) determines that the designated control pattern does not include control of the mass of the molded product, the mass control reference calculated value is calculated based on the calculated mass Wa. A second control reference calculation value update unit (second control reference calculation value update means or a second control reference calculation value update step) that replaces WMa.
If the control pattern first selection unit (control pattern first selection means or control pattern first selection step) determines that the designated control pattern includes control of the hardness of the molded product, the mass is represented by the mass reference value WO. The third control reference calculation value update unit (first control unit) replaces the control reference calculation value WMa with the thickness reference value TO, the thickness control reference calculation value TMa, and the hardness reference value HO with the hardness control reference calculation value HMa. 3 control standard calculation value update means or third control standard calculation value update process).
A control pattern third selection unit (control pattern third selection means or control pattern third selection step) for determining whether or not the designated control pattern includes control of the mass of the molded product.
If the control pattern third selection unit (control pattern third selection means or control pattern third selection step) determines that the designated control pattern includes the control of the mass of the molded product, the hardness variation when the mass control is performed A first calculation for obtaining the calculated hardness Ha of the molded product from the hardness variation value and the hardness average value Hx of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation. Hardness calculation section (first calculated hardness calculation means or first calculated hardness calculation step).
A calculated hardness first determining unit (calculated hardness first determining means) for determining whether or not the calculated hardness Ha is within a hardness controllable range when each control reference calculated value of mass, thickness, and hardness is corrected. Or calculated hardness first judgment step).
When the control pattern third selection unit (control pattern third selection means or control pattern third selection step) determines that the designated control pattern does not include control of the mass of the molded product, the value of the calculated mass Wa A fourth control reference calculation value update unit (a fourth control reference calculation value update unit or a fourth control reference calculation value update step) that replaces the mass control reference calculation value WMa.
The hardness fluctuation value when the mass is controlled and the hardness fluctuation value when the thickness is controlled are obtained, and the calculated hardness of the molded product from these hardness fluctuation values and the average hardness value Hx of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation. A second calculated hardness calculation unit for obtaining Ha (second calculated hardness calculation means or a second calculated hardness calculation step).
A calculated hardness second determining unit (calculated hardness second determining means or calculated hardness) for determining whether or not the calculated hardness is within a hardness controllable range when the thickness and hardness control standard calculated values are corrected. Second determination step).
When the determination of the calculated hardness first determining unit (calculated hardness first determining means or calculated hardness first determining step) is within a hardness controllable range, at least one of the control reference calculated values of mass, thickness, and hardness is calculated. A hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control step) updated within a control reference value correction range corresponding to at least one of these, or the calculated hardness second judgment unit (calculated hardness second judgment means or calculation) When the determination in the second hardness determination step) is within the hardness controllable range, at least one of the thickness and hardness control reference calculation values is updated within the control reference value correction range corresponding to the at least one. Hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control process).
When the designated control pattern includes control of the mass of the molded product, the control pattern second selection unit (control pattern second selection means or control pattern second selection step) determines, or the designated control pattern is When the control pattern second selection unit (control pattern second selection means or control pattern second selection step) determines that the control of the mass of the molded product is not included, and the second control reference value update unit (first 2 control reference value update means or the second control reference value update process), or when the designated control pattern passes through the hardness control unit (hardness control means or hardness control process) A first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating section for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value when the first calculation pressure fluctuation is performed (first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating means or first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step);
Calculated thickness calculation unit (calculated thickness calculating means or calculated thickness calculating step) for determining the calculated thickness Ta of the molded product from the thickness fluctuation value when the mass control is performed and the average thickness Tx of the plurality of molded products determined during operation .
Tip distance calculation value calculation unit (tip distance calculation value calculation means or tip distance calculation value) for calculating the tip distance calculation values LMa and lMa from the tip distance variation value and the tip distance setting value when the thickness is controlled. Calculation process).
A second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating unit (second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating means or a second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step) for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa when the thickness is controlled.
Pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit for obtaining a pressure control reference calculated value PMa from a molding pressure average value Px of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value PWa, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value PTa. (Pressure control reference calculation value calculation means or pressure control reference calculation value calculation step).
A tip spacing control unit (tip tip spacing control means or tip tip spacing control step) that determines the necessity of controlling the tip spacing and changes the tip spacing when it is determined that it is necessary.
When it is determined that the pressure control reference value PM needs to be updated and the pressure control reference value PM is determined to be necessary, a control pressure value updating unit (control pressure value updating means or control) that updates each control pressure value of the pressure control unit 51 Pressure value update process).
 〔5〕 
 前記〔1〕、前記〔2〕、前記〔4〕、請求の範囲の請求項2,4,7のいずれかに記載の回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置(又は前記〔1〕、前記〔2〕、前記〔4〕、請求の範囲の請求項1,3,5のいずれかに記載の回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置の運転方法)において、
 前記杵先間隔制御部(杵先間隔制御手段又は杵先間隔制御工程)が、 
 前記杵先間隔算定値と前記杵先間隔設定値とが同じであるか否かを判断する杵先間隔制御判断部(杵先間隔制御判断手段又は杵先間隔制御判断工程)と、 
 この杵先間隔制御判断部(杵先間隔制御判断手段又は杵先間隔制御判断工程)の判断がYESとなるまで繰り返し実行される以下の各部(手段又は各工程)と、 
を、更に備えることを特徴とする。 
 前記杵先間隔制御判断部(杵先間隔制御判断手段又は前記杵先間隔制御判断工程)の判断がNOである場合、前記杵先間隔設定値が前記杵先間隔算定値より大きいか否かを判断する第1杵先間隔判断部(第1杵先間隔判断手段又は第1杵先間隔判断工程)。 
 この第1杵先間隔判断部(第1杵先間隔判断手段又は第1杵先間隔判断工程)の判断がYESの場合、前記杵先間隔設定値と前記杵先間隔算定値との差(絶対値)が、規定寸法値より小さいか否かを判断する第2杵先間隔判断部(第2杵先間隔判断手段又は第2杵先間隔判断工程)。 
 前記第1杵先間隔判断部(第1杵先間隔判断手段又は第1杵先間隔判断工程)の判断がNOの場合、前記杵先間隔設定値と前記杵先間隔算定値との差(絶対値)が、前記規定寸法値より小さいか否かを判断する第3杵先間隔判断部(第3杵先間隔判断手段又は第3杵先間隔判断工程)。 
 前記第2杵先間隔判断部(第2杵先間隔判断手段又は第2杵先間隔判断工程)の判断がNOの場合、前記杵先間隔設定値から前記規定寸法値を減らした値で前記杵先間隔設定値を更新して、杵先間隔を狭める第1杵先間隔制御部(第1杵先間隔制御手段又は第1杵先間隔制御工程)。 
 前記第2杵先間隔判断部(第2杵先間隔判断手段又は第2杵先間隔判断工程)の判断がYESの場合及び前記第3杵先間隔判断部(第3杵先間隔判断手段又は第3杵先間隔判断工程)の判断がYESの場合、前記杵先間隔算定値で前記杵先間隔設定値を更新し、この更新された値に杵先間隔を変更する第2杵先間隔制御部(第2杵先間隔制御手段又は第2杵先間隔制御工程)。 
 前記第3杵先間隔判断部(第3杵先間隔判断手段又は第3杵先間隔判断工程)の判断がNOの場合、前記杵先間隔設定値に前記規定寸法値を加えた値で前記杵先間隔設定値を更新して、杵先間隔を広げる第3杵先間隔制御部(第3杵先間隔制御手段又は第3杵先間隔制御工程)。
[5]
The rotary powder compression molding apparatus according to any one of [1], [2], [4] and claims 2, 4 and 7 (or [1], [2] In the above [4], the operation method of the rotary powder compression molding apparatus according to any one of claims 1, 3 and 5)
The tip interval control section (tip tip control means or tip tip control step)
A tip interval control determining unit (tip tip interval control determining means or a tip interval control determining step) for determining whether or not the tip interval calculation value and the tip interval setting value are the same;
Each of the following parts (means or each process) that is repeatedly executed until the judgment of the tip distance control determining unit (tip distance control determining means or the tip distance control determining step) becomes YES,
Is further provided.
When the determination of the tip interval control determining unit (tip tip interval control determining means or the tip tip interval control determining step) is NO, it is determined whether or not the tip interval setting value is larger than the tip interval calculated value. A first tip interval determining unit for determining (first tip interval determining means or a first tip interval determining step).
If the determination of the first tip interval determining unit (the first tip interval determining means or the first tip interval determining step) is YES, the difference (absolutely) between the tip interval setting value and the tip interval calculation value Value) is smaller than the prescribed dimension value, and determines whether or not the second tip interval determination unit (second tip interval determination means or second tip interval determination step).
If the determination of the first tip interval determining unit (the first tip interval determining means or the first tip interval determining step) is NO, the difference (absolutely) between the tip interval setting value and the tip interval calculated value Value) is smaller than the specified dimension value, and determines whether or not a third tip distance determination unit (third tip distance determination means or third tip distance determination step).
When the determination of the second tip interval determination unit (the second tip interval determination means or the second tip interval determination step) is NO, the flange is set to a value obtained by subtracting the specified dimension value from the tip interval setting value. A first tip interval control unit that updates the tip interval setting value and narrows the tip interval (first tip interval control means or first tip interval control step).
When the determination of the second tip interval determination unit (second tip interval determination unit or second tip interval determination step) is YES and the third tip interval determination unit (third tip interval determination unit or second If the determination in step 3) is YES, the second tip interval control unit updates the tip interval setting value with the tip tip calculated value and changes the tip interval to the updated value. (Second tip distance control means or second tip distance control step).
When the determination of the third tip interval determination unit (the third tip interval determination means or the third tip interval determination step) is NO, the hook is set to a value obtained by adding the specified dimension value to the tip interval setting value. A third tip distance control unit that updates the tip distance setting value and widens the tip distance (a third tip distance control means or a third tip distance control step).
 〔6〕 
 前記〔1〕、前記〔2〕、前記〔3〕、前記〔4〕、前記〔5〕請求の範囲の請求項2,4,7のうちのいずれかに記載の回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置(又は、前記〔1〕、前記〔2〕、前記〔3〕、前記〔4〕、前記〔5〕、請求の範囲の請求項1,3.5のうちのいずれかに記載の回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置の運転方法)において、 
 前記制御圧力値更新部(制御圧力値更新手段又は制御圧力値更新工程)が、 
 前記圧力制御基準値PMと前記圧力制御基準算定値PMaとが同じであるか否かを判断する圧力制御基準値更新判断部(圧力制御基準値更新判断手段又は圧力制御基準値更新判断工程)と、 
 この圧力制御基準値更新判断部(圧力制御基準値更新判断手段又は圧力制御基準値更新判断工程)の判断がYESとなるまで繰り返し実行される以下の部(又は工程)を、更に備えることを特徴とする。 
 前記圧力制御基準値PMが前記圧力制御基準算定値PMaより大きいか否かを判断する第1圧力制御基準値判断部(第1圧力制御基準値判断手段又は第1圧力制御基準値判断工程)。 
 この第1圧力制御基準値判断部(第1圧力制御基準値判断手段又は第1圧力制御基準値判断工程)の判断がYESの場合、前記圧力制御基準値PMと前記圧力制御基準算定値PMaとの差(絶対値)が、規定圧力値より小さいか否かを判断する第2圧力制御基準値判断部(第2圧力制御基準値判断手段又は第2圧力制御基準値判断工程)。 
 前記第1圧力制御基準値判断部(第1圧力制御基準値判断手段又は第1圧力制御基準値判断工程)の判断がNOの場合、前記圧力制御基準値PMと前記圧力制御基準算定値PMaとの差(絶対値)が、前記規定圧力値より小さいか否かを判断する第3圧力制御基準値判断部(第3圧力制御基準値判断手段又は第3圧力制御基準値判断工程)。 
 前記第2圧力制御基準値判断部(第2圧力制御基準値判断手段又は第2圧力制御基準値判断工程)の判断がNOの場合、前記圧力制御基準値PMから前記規定圧力値を引いた値で前記圧力制御基準値PMを更新し、この更新された圧力制御基準値PMを基準に前記圧力制御部の各制御圧力値を更新する第1制御圧力値更新部(第1制御圧力値更新手段又は第1制御圧力値更新工程)。 
 前記第2圧力制御基準値判断部(第2圧力制御基準値判断手段又は第2圧力制御基準値判断工程)の判断がYESの場合及び前記第3圧力制御基準値判断部(第3圧力制御基準値判断手段又は第3圧力制御基準値判断工程)の判断がYESの場合、前記圧力制御基準算定値PMaの値で前記圧力制御基準値PMを更新し、この更新された圧力制御基準値PMを基準に前記圧力制御部の各制御圧力値を更新する第2制御圧力値更新部(第2制御圧力値更新手段又は第2制御圧力値更新工程)。 
 前記第3圧力制御基準値判断部(第3圧力制御基準値判断手段又は第3圧力制御基準値判断工程)の判断がNOの場合、前記圧力制御基準値PMに前記規定圧力値を加えた値で前記圧力制御基準値PMを更新し、この更新された圧力制御基準値PMを基準に前記圧力制御部の各制御圧力値を更新する第3制御圧力値更新部(第3制御圧力値更新手段又は第3制御圧力値更新工程)。
[6]
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5] The rotary powder compression molding apparatus according to any one of claims 2, 4 and 7 in claims. (Or [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], and the rotary type according to any one of claims 1 and 3.5 in the claims) In the operation method of the powder compression molding device)
The control pressure value update unit (control pressure value update means or control pressure value update step)
A pressure control reference value update determination unit (pressure control reference value update determination means or pressure control reference value update determination step) for determining whether or not the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculated value PMa are the same; ,
The pressure control reference value update determination unit (pressure control reference value update determination unit or pressure control reference value update determination step) further includes the following unit (or step) that is repeatedly executed until the determination is YES. And
A first pressure control reference value determining unit (first pressure control reference value determining means or first pressure control reference value determining step) for determining whether or not the pressure control reference value PM is greater than the pressure control reference calculated value PMa;
When the determination of the first pressure control reference value determination unit (the first pressure control reference value determination means or the first pressure control reference value determination step) is YES, the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculated value PMa A second pressure control reference value determination unit (second pressure control reference value determination means or a second pressure control reference value determination step) for determining whether or not the difference (absolute value) is smaller than the specified pressure value.
When the determination of the first pressure control reference value determination unit (first pressure control reference value determination means or first pressure control reference value determination step) is NO, the pressure control reference value PM and the pressure control reference calculation value PMa A third pressure control reference value determination unit (a third pressure control reference value determination means or a third pressure control reference value determination step) for determining whether or not the difference (absolute value) is smaller than the specified pressure value.
A value obtained by subtracting the specified pressure value from the pressure control reference value PM when the determination of the second pressure control reference value determination unit (second pressure control reference value determination means or second pressure control reference value determination step) is NO. The first control pressure value updating unit (first control pressure value updating unit) updates the pressure control reference value PM and updates each control pressure value of the pressure control unit based on the updated pressure control reference value PM. Or a 1st control pressure value update process).
When the determination of the second pressure control reference value determination unit (second pressure control reference value determination means or the second pressure control reference value determination step) is YES and the third pressure control reference value determination unit (third pressure control reference If the determination in the value determining means or the third pressure control reference value determining step) is YES, the pressure control reference value PM is updated with the value of the pressure control reference calculated value PMa, and the updated pressure control reference value PM is A second control pressure value updating unit (second control pressure value updating means or a second control pressure value updating step) for updating each control pressure value of the pressure control unit with reference.
A value obtained by adding the specified pressure value to the pressure control reference value PM when the determination of the third pressure control reference value determination unit (the third pressure control reference value determination means or the third pressure control reference value determination step) is NO. The third control pressure value updating unit (third control pressure value updating unit) updates the pressure control reference value PM and updates each control pressure value of the pressure control unit based on the updated pressure control reference value PM. Or a 3rd control pressure value update process).
 1…回転式の打錠装置(回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置)、2…打錠機(粉末圧縮成型機)、3…測定器、4…制御盤、4a…制御装置、11…回転盤、12…臼、15…上杵、16…下杵、17…質量調節軌道、19…軌道昇降機構、28…本圧縮用の間隔調整機構、28e…間隔検出部の一部、29…圧力センサ、41…サンプリング部、ステップS104…算定質量演算部、ステップS105…制御パターン第1選択部、ステップS106…第1制御基準算定値更新部、ステップS107…制御パターン第2選択部、ステップS108…第2制御基準算定値更新部、ステップS109…第1算定圧力変動値演算部、ステップS110…算定厚み演算部、ステップS111…杵先間隔算定値演算部、ステップS112…第2算定圧力変動値演算部、ステップS115…圧力制御基準算定値演算部、ステップS117…杵先間隔制御判断部、ステップS118…杵先間隔制御部、ステップS119…第1杵先間隔判断部、ステップS120a…第2杵先間隔判断部、ステップS120b…第3杵先間隔判断部、ステップS121a…第1杵先間隔制御部、ステップS121b…第2杵先間隔制御部、ステップS121c…第3杵先間隔制御部、ステップS125…圧力制御基準値更新判断部、ステップS127…第1圧力制御基準値判断部、ステップS128…第2圧力制御基準値判断部、ステップS129…第1制御圧力値更新部、ステップS130…第3圧力制御基準値判断部、ステップS131…第2制御圧力値更新部、ステップS132…第3制御圧力値更新部、ステップS137…制御基準算定値更新部又は第3制御基準算定値更新部、ステップS138…制御パターン第3選択部、ステップS140…第1算定硬度演算部、ステップS141…算定硬度第1判断部、ステップS142…第4制御基準算定値更新部、ステップS144…第2算定硬度演算部、ステップS145…算定硬度第2判断部、ステップS149…制御圧力値更新部、ステップS151…補正先第1判断部、ステップS152…算定硬度第3判断部、ステップS153…第1硬度制御基準算定値更新部、ステップS154…算定硬度第6判断部、ステップS155,156…第2硬度制御基準算定値更新部、ステップS157…補正先第4判断部、ステップS161…補正先第2判断部、ステップS162…算定硬度第4判断部、ステップS163…第1厚み制御基準算定値更新部、ステップS164…算定硬度第7判断部、ステップS165,166…第2厚み制御基準算定値更新部、ステップS167…第3算定硬度演算部、ステップS168…補正先第5判断部、ステップS171…補正先第3判断部、ステップS172…算定硬度第5判断部、ステップS173…第1質量制御基準算定値更新部、ステップS174…算定硬度第8判断部、ステップS175,176…第2質量制御基準算定値更新部、ステップS177…第4算定硬度演算部、ステップS178…補正先第6判断部、PK…制御圧力値更新部(制御圧力値更新手段)、KK…杵先間隔制御部(杵先間隔制御手段)、HK…硬度制御部(硬度制御手段)  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Rotary type tableting device (rotary type powder compression molding apparatus), 2 ... Tableting machine (powder compression molding machine), 3 ... Measuring instrument, 4 ... Control board, 4a ... Control apparatus, 11 ... Rotary board, DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 12 ... Mill, 15 ... Upper arm, 16 ... Lower arm, 17 ... Mass adjustment track, 19 ... Track raising / lowering mechanism, 28 ... Space adjustment mechanism for main compression, 28e ... A part of space | interval detection part, 29 ... Pressure sensor, 41 ... sampling unit, step S104 ... calculated mass calculation unit, step S105 ... control pattern first selection unit, step S106 ... first control reference calculated value update unit, step S107 ... control pattern second selection unit, step S108 ... second Control reference calculated value update unit, step S109 ... first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation part, step S110 ... calculated thickness calculation part, step S111 ... tip distance calculated value calculation part, step S112 ... second calculated pressure fluctuation value Calculation unit, step S115 ... pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit, step S117 ... tip distance control determination unit, step S118 ... tip distance control unit, step S119 ... first tip distance determination unit, step S120a ... second key Point interval determination unit, step S120b ... third rod tip interval determination unit, step S121a ... first rod tip interval control unit, step S121b ... second rod tip interval control unit, step S121c ... third rod tip interval control unit, step S125: pressure control reference value update determination unit, step S127: first pressure control reference value determination unit, step S128: second pressure control reference value determination unit, step S129: first control pressure value update unit, step S130: third Pressure control reference value determination unit, step S131 ... second control pressure value update unit, step S132 ... third control pressure value update unit, step 137 ... Control reference calculated value update unit or third control reference calculated value update unit, step S138 ... Control pattern third selection unit, step S140 ... First calculated hardness calculation unit, step S141 ... Calculated hardness first determination unit, step S142 ... 4th control standard calculation value update part, step S144 ... 2nd calculation hardness calculation part, step S145 ... calculation hardness 2nd judgment part, step S149 ... control pressure value update part, step S151 ... correction destination 1st judgment part, step S152: Calculated hardness third determining unit, step S153: First hardness control reference calculated value updating unit, step S154 ... Calculated hardness sixth determining unit, steps S155, 156 ... Second hardness control reference calculated value updating unit, step S157 ... Correction destination fourth determination unit, step S161 ... Correction destination second determination unit, step S162 ... Calculated hardness fourth determination unit, step S163: first thickness control reference calculated value update unit, step S164 ... calculated hardness seventh determination unit, steps S165, 166 ... second thickness control reference calculated value update unit, step S167 ... third calculated hardness calculation unit, step S168 ... Correction destination fifth determination unit, step S171 ... Correction destination third determination unit, step S172 ... Calculated hardness fifth determination unit, step S173 ... First mass control reference calculated value update unit, step S174 ... Calculated hardness eighth determination unit, Steps S175, 176 ... second mass control reference calculated value update unit, step S177 ... fourth calculated hardness calculation unit, step S178 ... correction destination sixth determination unit, PK ... control pressure value update unit (control pressure value update means), KK ... Tip distance control section (tip distance control means), HK ... Hardness control section (hardness control means)

Claims (10)

  1.  回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置の運転方法であって、
     前記粉末圧縮成型装置は、
     回転盤と、
     前記粉末圧縮成型機の運転を制御する制御装置とを備え、
     前記制御装置は、製造される成型品の成型圧力が所定の圧力制御基準値に保持されるように前記回転盤に取付けられた臼への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵の高さ位置を制御する圧力制御部を含む、前記運転方法は、
     質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値を求める第1算定圧力変動値演算工程と、
     前記質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の厚み平均値とから成型品の算定厚みを求める算定厚み演算工程と、
     厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値とから杵先間隔算定値を求める杵先間隔算定値演算工程と、
     前記厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値を求める第2算定圧力変動値演算工程と、
     運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値と前記第1算定圧力変動値と前記第2算定圧力変動値とから圧力制御基準算定値を求める圧力制御基準算定値演算工程と、
     前記杵先間隔算定値で前記杵先間隔設定値を更新して、杵先間隔を制御する杵先間隔制御工程と、
     前記圧力制御基準算定値で前記圧力制御部の前記圧力制御基準値を更新し、前記圧力制御部の各制御圧力値を更新する制御圧力値更新工程と、
     を有することを特徴とする。
    A method for operating a rotary powder compression molding apparatus,
    The powder compression molding apparatus is
    A turntable,
    A control device for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine,
    The control device is a height position of a lower punch that defines a filling depth of powder into a mortar attached to the rotating disk so that a molding pressure of a molded product to be manufactured is maintained at a predetermined pressure control reference value. Including the pressure control unit for controlling the operation method,
    A first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value when performing mass control;
    A calculated thickness calculation step for obtaining a calculated thickness of the molded product from a thickness variation value when the mass control is performed and a thickness average value of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation,
    A tip interval calculation value calculation step for obtaining a tip interval calculation value from the tip interval variation value and the tip interval setting value when the thickness is controlled;
    A second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value when the thickness is controlled;
    A pressure control reference calculated value calculating step for obtaining a pressure control reference calculated value from the molding pressure average value of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value;
    A tip interval control step of controlling the tip interval by updating the tip interval setting value with the tip interval calculated value;
    A control pressure value update step of updating the pressure control reference value of the pressure control unit with the pressure control reference calculation value and updating each control pressure value of the pressure control unit;
    It is characterized by having.
  2.  回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置は、
     回転盤と、
     前記粉末圧縮成型機の運転を制御する制御装置とを備え、
     前記制御装置は、
     製造される成型品の成型圧力が所定の圧力制御基準値に保持されるように前記回転盤に取付けられた臼への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵の高さ位置を制御する圧力制御部と、
     質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値を求める第1算定圧力変動値演算部と、
     前記質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の厚み平均値とから成型品の算定厚みを求める算定厚み演算部と、
     厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値とから杵先間隔算定値を求める杵先間隔算定値演算部と、
     前記厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値を求める第2算定圧力変動値演算部と、
     運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値と前記第1算定圧力変動値と前記第2算定圧力変動値とから圧力制御基準算定値を求める圧力制御基準算定値演算部と、
     前記杵先間隔算定値で前記杵先間隔設定値を更新して、杵先間隔を制御する杵先間隔制御部と、
     前記圧力制御基準算定値で前記圧力制御部の前記圧力制御基準値を更新し、前記圧力制御部の各制御圧力値を更新する制御圧力値更新部と、
     を有することを特徴とする。
    Rotary powder compression molding equipment
    A turntable,
    A control device for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine,
    The controller is
    Pressure control for controlling the height position of the lower punch that defines the filling depth of powder into the mortar attached to the rotating disk so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured is maintained at a predetermined pressure control reference value And
    A first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating unit for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value when performing mass control;
    A calculated thickness calculation unit for calculating a calculated thickness of a molded product from a thickness fluctuation value when the mass control is performed and a thickness average value of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation;
    A tip interval calculation value calculation unit for calculating a tip interval calculation value from the tip interval variation value and the tip interval setting value when the thickness is controlled;
    A second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value when the thickness is controlled;
    A pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit for obtaining a pressure control reference calculated value from the molding pressure average value of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value;
    Updating the tip interval setting value with the tip interval calculation value, and controlling the tip interval control unit;
    A control pressure value update unit that updates the pressure control reference value of the pressure control unit with the pressure control reference calculation value and updates each control pressure value of the pressure control unit;
    It is characterized by having.
  3.  回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置の運転方法であって、
     前記粉末圧縮成型装置は、
     回転盤と、
     粉末圧縮成型機の運転を制御する制御装置とを備え、
     前記制御装置は、製造される成型品の成型圧力が圧力制御基準値に保持されるように前記回転盤に取付けられた臼への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵の高さ位置を制御する圧力制御部を含む、前記運転方法は、
     成型品の質量基準値で質量制御基準算定値を、成型品の厚み基準値で厚み制御基準算定値を、成型品の硬度基準値で硬度制御基準算定値を夫々置換する制御基準算定値更新工程と、
     前記質量制御基準算定値を用いて質量制御をしたときの硬度変動値と、前記厚み制御基準算定値を用いて厚み制御をしたときの硬度変動値とを夫々求め、これら硬度変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の硬度平均値とから成型品の算定硬度を求める第1算定硬度演算工程と、
     前記算定硬度が、質量・厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値が補正されたとしたときの硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第1判断工程と、
     前記算定硬度第1判断工程の判断が前記硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、質量、厚み、及び硬度の各制御基準算定値の少なくとも一つを、この少なくとも一つに対応する制御基準値補正範囲の範囲内で更新する硬度制御工程と、
     前記硬度制御工程を経由して与えられる質量制御基準算定値を用いて質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値を求める第1算定圧力変動値演算工程と、
     前記硬度制御工程を経由して与えられる前記質量制御基準算定値を用いて質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の厚み平均値とから成型品の算定厚みを求める算定厚み演算工程と、
     前記硬度制御工程を経由して与えられる厚み制御基準算定値を用いて厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値とから杵先間隔算定値を求める杵先間隔算定値演算工程と、
     前記硬度制御工程を経由して与えられる前記厚み制御基準算定値を用いて厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値を求める第2算定圧力変動値演算工程と、
     運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値と前記第1算定圧力変動値と前記第2算定圧力変動値とから圧力制御基準算定値を求める圧力制御基準算定値演算工程と、
     前記杵先間隔算定値で前記杵先間隔設定値を更新して、杵先間隔を制御する杵先間隔制御工程と、
     前記圧力制御基準算定値で前記圧力制御部の圧力制御基準値を更新し、前記圧力制御部の各制御圧力値を更新する制御圧力値更新工程と、
     を有することを特徴とする。
    A method for operating a rotary powder compression molding apparatus,
    The powder compression molding apparatus is
    A turntable,
    A control device for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine,
    The control device controls the height position of the lower punch that defines the powder filling depth to the mortar attached to the rotating disk so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured is maintained at the pressure control reference value. The operation method includes a pressure control unit that
    Control standard calculation value update process that replaces the mass control standard calculation value with the mass standard value of the molded product, the thickness control standard calculation value with the thickness standard value of the molded product, and the hardness control standard calculation value with the hardness standard value of the molded product. When,
    The hardness fluctuation value when the mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculated value and the hardness fluctuation value when the thickness control is performed using the thickness control reference calculated value are obtained, respectively. A first calculated hardness calculating step for calculating a calculated hardness of the molded product from the average hardness values of the plurality of molded products determined in
    A calculated hardness first determining step of determining whether the calculated hardness is within a hardness controllable range when each control reference calculated value of mass, thickness, and hardness is corrected;
    When the determination in the calculated hardness first determination step is within the hardness controllable range, at least one of the control reference calculation values of mass, thickness, and hardness is set to a control reference value correction range corresponding to the at least one. Hardness control process to be updated within the range;
    A first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value when mass control is performed using a mass control reference calculated value given via the hardness control step;
    Calculated thickness of the molded product from the thickness variation value when mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculated value given via the hardness control step and the thickness average value of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation Calculated thickness calculation process to be obtained,
    Tip distance calculation value calculation for calculating a tip distance calculation value from a tip distance variation value and a tip distance setting value when thickness control is performed using a thickness control reference calculation value given via the hardness control step Process,
    A second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value when the thickness is controlled using the thickness control reference calculated value given via the hardness control step;
    A pressure control reference calculated value calculating step for obtaining a pressure control reference calculated value from the molding pressure average value of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value;
    A tip interval control step of controlling the tip interval by updating the tip interval setting value with the tip interval calculated value;
    A control pressure value update step of updating the pressure control reference value of the pressure control unit with the pressure control reference calculation value and updating each control pressure value of the pressure control unit;
    It is characterized by having.
  4.  回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置は、
     回転盤と、
     前記粉末圧縮成型機の運転を制御する制御装置とを備え、
     前記制御装置は、
     製造される成型品の成型圧力が圧力制御基準値に保持されるように前記回転盤に取付けられた臼への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵の高さ位置を制御する圧力制御部と、
     成型品の質量基準値で質量制御基準算定値を、成型品の厚み基準値で厚み制御基準算定値を、成型品の硬度基準値で硬度制御基準算定値を夫々置換する制御基準算定値更新部と、
     前記質量制御基準算定値を用いて質量制御をしたときの硬度変動値と、前記厚み制御基準算定値を用いて厚み制御をしたときの硬度変動値とを夫々求め、これら硬度変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の硬度平均値とから成型品の算定硬度を求める第1算定硬度演算部と、
     前記算定硬度が、質量・厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値が補正されたとしたときの硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第1判断部と、
     前記算定硬度第1判断部の判断が前記硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、質量、厚み、及び硬度の各制御基準算定値の少なくとも一つを、この少なくとも一つに対応する制御基準値補正範囲の範囲内で更新する硬度制御部と、
     前記硬度制御部を経由して与えられる質量制御基準算定値を用いて質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値を求める第1算定圧力変動値演算部と、
     前記硬度制御部を経由して与えられる質量制御基準算定値を用いて前記質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の厚み平均値とから成型品の算定厚みを求める算定厚み演算部と、
     前記硬度制御部を経由して与えられる厚み制御基準算定値を用いて厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値とから杵先間隔算定値を求める杵先間隔算定値演算部と、
     前記硬度制御部を経由して与えられる前記厚み制御基準算定値を用いて前記厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値を求める第2算定圧力変動値演算部と、
     運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値と前記第1算定圧力変動値と前記第2算定圧力変動値とから圧力制御基準算定値を求める圧力制御基準算定値演算部と、
     前記杵先間隔算定値で前記杵先間隔設定値を更新して、杵先間隔を制御する杵先間隔制御部と、
     前記圧力制御基準算定値で前記圧力制御部の圧力制御基準値を更新し、前記圧力制御部の各制御圧力値を更新する制御圧力値更新部と、
     を有することを特徴とする。
    Rotary powder compression molding equipment
    A turntable,
    A control device for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine,
    The controller is
    A pressure control unit for controlling a height position of a lower punch that defines a filling depth of powder into a die attached to the rotating disk so that a molding pressure of a molded product to be manufactured is maintained at a pressure control reference value; ,
    A control reference calculation value update unit that replaces the mass control reference calculated value with the molded product mass reference value, the thickness control reference calculated value with the molded product thickness reference value, and the hardness control reference calculated value with the molded product hardness reference value. When,
    The hardness fluctuation value when the mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculated value and the hardness fluctuation value when the thickness control is performed using the thickness control reference calculated value are obtained, respectively. A first calculated hardness calculator that calculates the calculated hardness of the molded product from the average hardness values of the plurality of molded products determined in
    A calculated hardness first determining unit that determines whether the calculated hardness is within a hardness controllable range when each control reference calculated value of mass, thickness, and hardness is corrected;
    When the determination of the calculated hardness first determination unit is within the hardness controllable range, at least one of the control reference calculation values of mass, thickness, and hardness is set to a control reference value correction range corresponding to the at least one. A hardness control unit to be updated within the range;
    A first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating unit for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value when mass control is performed using a mass control reference calculated value given via the hardness control unit;
    Calculate the calculated thickness of the molded product from the thickness fluctuation value when the mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculated value given via the hardness control unit and the average thickness of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation. The calculated thickness calculator to be obtained;
    Tip distance calculation value calculation for calculating a tip distance calculation value from a tip distance variation value and a tip distance setting value when thickness control is performed using a thickness control reference calculation value given via the hardness control unit And
    A second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating unit for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value when the thickness control is performed using the thickness control reference calculated value given via the hardness control unit;
    A pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit for obtaining a pressure control reference calculated value from the molding pressure average value of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value;
    Updating the tip interval setting value with the tip interval calculation value, and controlling the tip interval control unit;
    A control pressure value updating unit that updates the pressure control reference value of the pressure control unit with the pressure control reference calculation value and updates each control pressure value of the pressure control unit;
    It is characterized by having.
  5.  回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置の運転方法であって、
     前記粉末圧縮成型装置は、
     回転盤と、
     前記粉末圧縮成型機の運転を制御する制御装置とを備え、
     前記制御装置は、製造される成型品の成型圧力が圧力制御基準値に保持されるように前記回転盤に取付けられた臼への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵の高さ位置を制御する圧力制御部を含む、前記運転方法は、
     成型品を制御する複数の制御パターンの中から、前記制御装置の制御パターン判別部によって選択される制御パターンが、成型品の質量と厚みと硬度の夫々を制御する「制御パターン1」であるのか、成型品の質量と厚みの夫々を制御する「制御パターン2」であるのかを判別し選択する制御パターン判別工程を有し、
     前記制御パターン判別工程により選択された前記「制御パターン1」は、
      成型品の質量基準値で質量制御基準算定値を、成型品の厚み基準値で厚み制御基準算定値を、成型品の硬度基準値で硬度制御基準算定値を夫々置換する制御基準算定値更新工程と、
      前記質量制御基準算定値を用いて質量制御をしたときの硬度変動値と、前記厚み制御基準算定値を用いて厚み制御をしたときの硬度変動値とを夫々求め、これら硬度変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の硬度平均値とから成型品の算定硬度を求める第1算定硬度演算工程と、
      前記算定硬度が、質量・厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値が補正されたとしたときの硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第1判断工程と、
      前記算定硬度第1判断工程の判断が前記硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、質量、厚み、及び硬度の各制御基準算定値の少なくとも一つを、この少なくとも一つに対応する制御基準値補正範囲の範囲内で更新する硬度制御工程と、
      前記硬度制御工程を経由して与えられる質量制御基準算定値を用いて質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値を求める第1算定圧力変動値演算工程と、
      前記硬度制御工程を経由して与えられる質量制御基準算定値を用いて質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の厚み平均値とから成型品の算定厚みを求める算定厚み演算工程と、
      前記硬度制御工程を経由して与えられる厚み制御基準算定値を用いて厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値とから杵先間隔算定値を求める杵先間隔算定値演算工程と、
      前記硬度制御工程を経由して与えられる厚み制御基準算定値を用いて厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値を求める第2算定圧力変動値演算工程と、
      運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値と前記第1算定圧力変動値と前記第2算定圧力変動値とから圧力制御基準算定値を求める圧力制御基準算定値演算工程と、
      前記杵先間隔算定値で前記杵先間隔設定値を更新して、杵先間隔を制御する杵先間隔制御工程と、
      前記圧力制御基準算定値で前記圧力制御部の圧力制御基準値を更新し、前記圧力制御部の各制御圧力値を更新する制御圧力値更新工程と、を有し、
     前記制御パターン判別工程により選択された前記「制御パターン2」は、
      質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値を求める第1算定圧力変動値演算工程と、
      前記質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の厚み平均値とから成型品の算定厚みを求める算定厚み演算工程と、
      厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値とから杵先間隔算定値を求める杵先間隔算定値演算工程と、
      前記厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値を求める第2算定圧力変動値演算工程と、
      運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値と前記第1算定圧力変動値と前記第2算定圧力変動値とから圧力制御基準算定値を求める圧力制御基準算定値演算工程と、
      前記杵先間隔算定値で前記杵先間隔設定値を更新して、杵先間隔を制御する杵先間隔制御工程と、
      前記圧力制御基準算定値で前記圧力制御部の前記圧力制御基準値を更新し、前記圧力制御部の各制御圧力値を更新する制御圧力値更新工程と、
     を有することを特徴とする。
    A method for operating a rotary powder compression molding apparatus,
    The powder compression molding apparatus is
    A turntable,
    A control device for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine,
    The control device controls the height position of the lower punch that defines the powder filling depth to the mortar attached to the rotating disk so that the molding pressure of the molded product to be manufactured is maintained at the pressure control reference value. The operation method includes a pressure control unit that
    Whether the control pattern selected by the control pattern discrimination unit of the control device from among a plurality of control patterns for controlling the molded product is “control pattern 1” for controlling the mass, thickness, and hardness of the molded product. A control pattern discriminating step for discriminating and selecting “control pattern 2” for controlling each of the mass and thickness of the molded product,
    The “control pattern 1” selected in the control pattern discrimination step is
    Control standard calculation value update process that replaces the mass control standard calculation value with the mass standard value of the molded product, the thickness control standard calculation value with the thickness standard value of the molded product, and the hardness control standard calculation value with the hardness standard value of the molded product. When,
    The hardness fluctuation value when the mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculated value and the hardness fluctuation value when the thickness control is performed using the thickness control reference calculated value are obtained, respectively. A first calculated hardness calculating step for calculating a calculated hardness of the molded product from the average hardness values of the plurality of molded products determined in
    A calculated hardness first determining step of determining whether the calculated hardness is within a hardness controllable range when each control reference calculated value of mass, thickness, and hardness is corrected;
    When the determination in the calculated hardness first determination step is within the hardness controllable range, at least one of the control reference calculation values of mass, thickness, and hardness is set to a control reference value correction range corresponding to the at least one. Hardness control process to be updated within the range;
    A first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value when mass control is performed using a mass control reference calculated value given via the hardness control step;
    Calculate the calculated thickness of the molded product from the thickness variation value when mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculated value given via the hardness control step and the average thickness value of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation. Calculated thickness calculation process,
    Tip distance calculation value calculation for calculating a tip distance calculation value from a tip distance variation value and a tip distance setting value when thickness control is performed using a thickness control reference calculation value given via the hardness control step Process,
    A second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value when thickness control is performed using a thickness control reference calculated value given via the hardness control step;
    A pressure control reference calculated value calculating step for obtaining a pressure control reference calculated value from the molding pressure average value of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value;
    A tip interval control step of controlling the tip interval by updating the tip interval setting value with the tip interval calculated value;
    A control pressure value update step of updating the pressure control reference value of the pressure control unit with the pressure control reference calculation value and updating each control pressure value of the pressure control unit, and
    The “control pattern 2” selected in the control pattern discrimination step is
    A first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value when performing mass control;
    A calculated thickness calculation step for obtaining a calculated thickness of the molded product from a thickness variation value when the mass control is performed and a thickness average value of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation,
    A tip interval calculation value calculation step for obtaining a tip interval calculation value from the tip interval variation value and the tip interval setting value when the thickness is controlled;
    A second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating step for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value when the thickness is controlled;
    A pressure control reference calculated value calculating step for obtaining a pressure control reference calculated value from the molding pressure average value of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value;
    A tip interval control step of controlling the tip interval by updating the tip interval setting value with the tip interval calculated value;
    A control pressure value update step of updating the pressure control reference value of the pressure control unit with the pressure control reference calculation value and updating each control pressure value of the pressure control unit;
    It is characterized by having.
  6.  前記硬度制御工程は、
     前記制御基準算定値を補正する補正先が「硬度」であるか否かを判断する補正先第1判断工程と、
     前記算定硬度が、硬度補正係数を用いた前記硬度制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第3判断工程と、
     前記算定硬度第3判断工程の判断が前記硬度補正係数を用いた前記硬度制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、前記算定硬度の値で前記硬度制御基準算定値を更新する第1硬度制御基準算定値更新工程と、
     前記制御基準算定値を補正する補正先が「厚み」であるか否かを判断する補正先第2判断工程と、
     前記算定硬度が、厚み補正係数を用いた前記厚み制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第4判断工程と、
     前記算定硬度第4判断工程の判断が前記厚み補正係数を用いた前記厚み制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、前記算定硬度を前記硬度制御基準算定値にしたときの厚み変動値と前記厚み制御基準算定値とから前記厚み制御基準算定値を更新する第1厚み制御基準算定値更新工程と、
     前記制御基準算定値を補正する補正先が「質量」であるか否かを判断する補正先第3判断工程と、
     前記算定硬度が、質量補正係数を用いた前記質量制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第5判断工程と、
     前記算定硬度第5判断工程の判断が前記質量補正係数を用いた前記質量制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、前記算定硬度を前記硬度制御基準算定値にしたときの質量変動値と前記質量制御基準算定値とから前記質量制御基準算定値を更新する第1質量制御基準算定値更新工程と、
     前記算定硬度第3判断工程の判断が前記硬度補正係数を用いた前記硬度制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲外の場合、前記算定硬度が、前記硬度制御基準算定値より小さいか否かを判断する算定硬度第6判断工程と、
     前記算定硬度第6判断工程で前記算定硬度が前記硬度制御基準算定値より小さいと判断された場合、硬度制御基準値補正範囲の下限値と前記硬度制御基準算定値との差に前記算定硬度第3判断工程で用いた前記硬度補正係数を乗じた値と、前記硬度制御基準算定値とから前記硬度制御基準算定値を更新し、この逆に、前記算定硬度第6判断工程で前記算定硬度が前記硬度制御基準算定値より大きいと判断された場合、前記硬度制御基準値補正範囲の上限値と前記硬度制御基準算定値との差に前記算定硬度第3判断工程で用いた前記硬度補正係数を乗じた値と、前記硬度制御基準算定値とから前記硬度制御基準算定値を更新する第2硬度制御基準算定値更新工程と、
     前記制御基準算定値の次の補正先が「質量」であるか「厚み」であるかを判断する補正先第4判断工程と、
     前記算定硬度第4判断工程の判断が前記厚み補正係数を用いた前記厚み制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲外の場合、前記算定硬度が、前記硬度制御基準算定値より小さいか否かを判断する算定硬度第7判断工程と、
     前記算定硬度第7判断工程で前記算定硬度が前記硬度制御基準算定値より小さいと判断された場合、厚み制御基準値補正範囲の下限値と前記厚み制御基準算定値との差に前記算定硬度第4判断工程で用いた前記厚み補正係数を乗じた値と、前記厚み制御基準算定値とから前記厚み制御基準算定値を更新し、この逆に、前記算定硬度第7判断工程で前記算定硬度が前記硬度制御基準算定値より大きいと判断された場合、前記厚み制御基準値補正範囲の上限値と前記厚み制御基準算定値との差に前記算定硬度第4判断工程で用いた前記厚み補正係数を乗じた値と、前記厚み制御基準算定値とから前記厚み制御基準算定値を更新する第2厚み制御基準算定値更新工程と、
     この第2厚み制御基準算定値更新工程で更新された厚み制御基準算定値に基づいて、新たな算定硬度を算出する第3算定硬度演算工程と、
     前記制御基準算定値の次の補正先が「質量」であるか「硬度」であるかを判断する補正先第5判断工程と、
     前記算定硬度第5判断工程の判断が前記質量補正係数を用いた前記質量制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲外の場合、前記算定硬度が、前記硬度制御基準算定値より小さいか否かを判断する算定硬度第8判断工程と、
     前記算定硬度第8判断工程で前記算定硬度が前記硬度制御基準算定値より小さいと判断された場合、質量制御基準値補正範囲の上限値と前記質量制御基準算定値との差に前記算定硬度第5判断工程で用いた前記質量補正係数を乗じた値と、前記質量制御基準算定値とから前記質量制御基準算定値を更新し、この逆に、前記算定硬度第8判断工程で前記算定硬度が前記硬度制御基準算定値より大きいと判断された場合、前記質量制御基準値補正範囲の下限値と前記質量制御基準算定値との差に前記算定硬度第5判断工程で用いた前記質量補正係数を乗じた値と、前記質量制御基準算定値とから前記質量制御基準算定値を更新する第2質量制御基準算定値更新工程と、
     この第2質量制御基準算定値更新工程で更新された質量制御基準算定値に基づいて、新たな算定硬度を算出する第4算定硬度演算工程と、
     前記制御基準算定値の次の補正先が「厚み」であるか「硬度」であるかを判断する補正先第6判断工程と、
     を有することを特徴とする請求項3又は5に記載の粉末圧縮成型装置の運転方法。
    The hardness control step includes
    A correction destination first determination step of determining whether or not the correction destination for correcting the control reference calculation value is “hardness”;
    A calculated hardness third determining step for determining whether or not the calculated hardness is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculated value using a hardness correction coefficient;
    When the determination in the calculated hardness third determination step is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculation value using the hardness correction coefficient, the hardness control reference calculation value is updated with the calculated hardness value. 1 hardness control standard calculation value update process,
    A correction second determination step for determining whether or not the correction destination for correcting the control reference calculation value is “thickness”;
    A calculated hardness fourth determining step for determining whether or not the calculated hardness is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness control reference calculated value using a thickness correction coefficient;
    Variation in thickness when the calculated hardness is set to the hardness control reference calculation value when the determination in the calculated hardness fourth determination step is within a hardness controllable range by correction of the thickness control reference calculation value using the thickness correction coefficient A first thickness control reference calculation value update step for updating the thickness control reference calculation value from a value and the thickness control reference calculation value;
    A correction third determination step for determining whether or not the correction destination for correcting the control reference calculation value is “mass”;
    A calculated hardness fifth determining step for determining whether the calculated hardness is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the mass control reference calculated value using a mass correction coefficient;
    When the calculated hardness is determined within the hardness controllable range by correcting the mass control reference calculation value using the mass correction coefficient, the mass fluctuation when the calculated hardness is the hardness control reference calculation value A first mass control reference calculated value update step for updating the mass control reference calculated value from a value and the mass control reference calculated value;
    Whether or not the calculated hardness is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value when the determination in the calculated hardness third determination step is outside the range of hardness controllable by correction of the hardness control reference calculated value using the hardness correction coefficient A calculated hardness sixth judging step for judging
    When the calculated hardness is determined to be smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value in the calculated hardness sixth determination step, the calculated hardness is calculated based on the difference between the lower limit value of the hardness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference calculation value. 3 update the hardness control reference calculation value from the value multiplied by the hardness correction coefficient used in the determination step and the hardness control reference calculation value, and conversely, the calculated hardness in the calculated hardness sixth determination step When it is determined that the hardness control reference value is larger than the calculated value, the difference between the upper limit value of the hardness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference value is the hardness correction coefficient used in the calculated hardness third determination step. A second hardness control reference calculated value update step for updating the hardness control reference calculated value from the multiplied value and the hardness control reference calculated value;
    A correction destination fourth determination step of determining whether the next correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “mass” or “thickness”;
    Whether or not the calculated hardness is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value when the determination in the calculated hardness fourth determination step is outside the range of hardness controllable by correction of the thickness control reference calculation value using the thickness correction coefficient A calculated hardness seventh judging step for judging
    If the calculated hardness is determined to be smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value in the calculated hardness seventh determination step, the calculated hardness is calculated based on the difference between the lower limit value of the thickness control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference calculation value. 4 The thickness control reference calculation value is updated from the value obtained by multiplying the thickness correction coefficient used in the determination step and the thickness control reference calculation value, and conversely, the calculated hardness is calculated in the calculated hardness seventh determination step. When it is determined that the calculated value is larger than the hardness control reference calculation value, the thickness correction coefficient used in the calculated hardness fourth determination step is added to the difference between the upper limit value of the thickness control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference calculation value. A second thickness control reference calculated value update step for updating the thickness control reference calculated value from the multiplied value and the thickness control reference calculated value;
    A third calculated hardness calculation step for calculating a new calculated hardness based on the thickness control reference calculated value updated in the second thickness control reference calculated value update step;
    A correction destination fifth determination step of determining whether the next correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “mass” or “hardness”;
    Whether the calculated hardness is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value when the determination in the calculated hardness fifth determination step is outside the range of hardness controllable by correction of the mass control reference calculation value using the mass correction coefficient A calculated hardness eighth judging step for judging
    If it is determined that the calculated hardness is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value in the calculated hardness eighth determining step, the calculated hardness is calculated based on the difference between the upper limit value of the mass control reference value correction range and the mass control reference calculated value. 5 The mass control reference calculation value is updated from the value obtained by multiplying the mass correction coefficient used in the determination step and the mass control reference calculation value, and conversely, the calculated hardness is calculated in the calculated hardness eighth determination step. If it is determined that the calculated value is larger than the hardness control reference calculation value, the mass correction coefficient used in the calculated hardness fifth determination step is added to the difference between the lower limit value of the mass control reference value correction range and the mass control reference calculation value. A second mass control reference calculated value update step for updating the mass control reference calculated value from the multiplied value and the mass control reference calculated value;
    A fourth calculated hardness calculating step of calculating a new calculated hardness based on the mass control reference calculated value updated in the second mass control reference calculated value updating step;
    A correction destination sixth determination step of determining whether the next correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “thickness” or “hardness”;
    The operation method of the powder compression molding apparatus according to claim 3 or 5, characterized by comprising:
  7.  回転式の粉末圧縮成型装置は、
     回転盤と、
     粉末圧縮成型機の運転を制御する制御装置とを備え、
     前記制御装置は、
     製造される成型品の成型圧力が圧力制御基準値に保持されるように前記回転盤に取付けられた臼への粉末の充填深さを規定する下杵の高さ位置を制御する圧力制御部と、
     成型品を制御する複数の制御パターンの中から、前記制御装置の制御パターン判別部によって選択される制御パターンが、成型品の質量と厚みと硬度の夫々を制御する「制御パターン1」であるのか、成型品の質量と厚みの夫々を制御する「制御パターン2」であるのかを判別し選択する制御パターン判別部とを有し、
     前記制御パターン判別部により選択された前記「制御パターン1」は、
      成型品の質量基準値で質量制御基準算定値を、成型品の厚み基準値で厚み制御基準算定値を、成型品の硬度基準値で硬度制御基準算定値を夫々置換する制御基準算定値更新部と、
      前記質量制御基準算定値を用いて質量制御をしたときの硬度変動値と、前記厚み制御基準算定値を用いて厚み制御をしたときの硬度変動値とを夫々求め、これら硬度変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の硬度平均値とから成型品の算定硬度を求める第1算定硬度演算部と、
      前記算定硬度が、質量・厚み・硬度の各制御基準算定値が補正されたとしたときの硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第1判断部と、
      前記算定硬度第1判断手段の判断が前記硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、質量、厚み、及び硬度の各制御基準算定値の少なくとも一つを、この少なくとも一つに対応する制御基準値補正範囲の範囲内で更新する硬度制御部と、
      前記硬度制御手段を経由して与えられる質量制御基準算定値を用いて質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値を求める第1算定圧力変動値演算部と、
      前記硬度制御手段を経由して与えられる前記質量制御基準算定値を用いて質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の厚み平均値とから成型品の算定厚みを求める算定厚み演算部と、
      前記硬度制御手段を経由して与えられる厚み制御基準算定値を用いて厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値とから杵先間隔算定値を求める杵先間隔算定値演算部と、
      前記硬度制御手段を経由して与えられる厚み制御基準算定値を用いて厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値を求める第2算定圧力変動値演算部と、
      運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値と前記第1算定圧力変動値と前記第2算定圧力変動値とから圧力制御基準算定値を求める圧力制御基準算定値演算部と、
      前記杵先間隔算定値で前記杵先間隔設定値を更新して、杵先間隔を制御する杵先間隔制御部と、
      前記圧力制御基準算定値で前記圧力制御部の圧力制御基準値を更新し、前記圧力制御部の各制御圧力値を更新する制御圧力値更新部と、を有し、
     前記制御パターン判別手段により選択された前記「制御パターン2」は、

      質量制御をしたときの第1算定圧力変動値を求める第1算定圧力変動値演算部と、
     前記質量制御をしたときの厚み変動値と運転中に求めた複数の成型品の厚み平均値とから成型品の算定厚みを求める算定厚み演算部と、
      厚み制御をしたときの杵先間隔変動値と杵先間隔設定値とから杵先間隔算定値を求める杵先間隔算定値演算部と、
      前記厚み制御をしたときの第2算定圧力変動値を求める第2算定圧力変動値演算部と、
      運転中に求めた複数の成型品の成型圧力平均値と前記第1算定圧力変動値と前記第2算定圧力変動値とから圧力制御基準算定値を求める圧力制御基準算定値演算部と、
      前記杵先間隔算定値で前記杵先間隔設定値を更新して、杵先間隔を制御する杵先間隔制御部と、
      前記圧力制御基準算定値で前記圧力制御部の前記圧力制御基準値を更新し、前記圧力制御部の各制御圧力値を更新する制御圧力値更新部と、
     を有することを特徴とする。
    Rotary powder compression molding equipment
    A turntable,
    A control device for controlling the operation of the powder compression molding machine,
    The controller is
    A pressure control unit for controlling a height position of a lower punch that defines a filling depth of powder into a die attached to the rotating disk so that a molding pressure of a molded product to be manufactured is maintained at a pressure control reference value; ,
    Whether the control pattern selected by the control pattern discrimination unit of the control device from among a plurality of control patterns for controlling the molded product is “control pattern 1” for controlling the mass, thickness, and hardness of the molded product. A control pattern discriminating unit that discriminates and selects whether or not it is “control pattern 2” for controlling each of the mass and thickness of the molded product,
    The “control pattern 1” selected by the control pattern discrimination unit is
    A control reference calculation value update unit that replaces the mass control reference calculated value with the molded product mass reference value, the thickness control reference calculated value with the molded product thickness reference value, and the hardness control reference calculated value with the molded product hardness reference value. When,
    The hardness fluctuation value when the mass control is performed using the mass control reference calculated value and the hardness fluctuation value when the thickness control is performed using the thickness control reference calculated value are obtained, respectively. A first calculated hardness calculator that calculates the calculated hardness of the molded product from the average hardness values of the plurality of molded products determined in
    A calculated hardness first determining unit that determines whether the calculated hardness is within a hardness controllable range when each control reference calculated value of mass, thickness, and hardness is corrected;
    When the determination of the calculated hardness first determination means is within the hardness controllable range, at least one of the control reference calculation values of mass, thickness, and hardness is set to a control reference value correction range corresponding to the at least one. A hardness control unit to be updated within the range;
    A first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating unit for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value when mass control is performed using a mass control reference calculated value given via the hardness control means;
    Calculate the calculated thickness of the molded product from the thickness variation value when mass control is performed using the mass control standard calculated value given via the hardness control means and the average thickness value of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation. The calculated thickness calculator to be obtained;
    Tip distance calculation value calculation for calculating a tip distance calculation value from a tip distance variation value and a tip distance setting value when thickness control is performed using a thickness control reference calculation value given via the hardness control means And
    A second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value when thickness control is performed using a thickness control reference calculated value given via the hardness control means;
    A pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit for obtaining a pressure control reference calculated value from the molding pressure average value of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value;
    Updating the tip interval setting value with the tip interval calculation value, and controlling the tip interval control unit;
    A control pressure value update unit that updates the pressure control reference value of the pressure control unit with the pressure control reference calculation value and updates each control pressure value of the pressure control unit, and
    The “control pattern 2” selected by the control pattern discrimination means is

    A first calculated pressure fluctuation value calculating unit for obtaining a first calculated pressure fluctuation value when performing mass control;
    A calculated thickness calculation unit for calculating a calculated thickness of a molded product from a thickness fluctuation value when the mass control is performed and a thickness average value of a plurality of molded products obtained during operation;
    A tip interval calculation value calculation unit for calculating a tip interval calculation value from the tip interval variation value and the tip interval setting value when the thickness is controlled;
    A second calculated pressure fluctuation value calculation unit for obtaining a second calculated pressure fluctuation value when the thickness is controlled;
    A pressure control reference calculated value calculation unit for obtaining a pressure control reference calculated value from the molding pressure average value of the plurality of molded products obtained during operation, the first calculated pressure fluctuation value, and the second calculated pressure fluctuation value;
    Updating the tip interval setting value with the tip interval calculation value, and controlling the tip interval control unit;
    A control pressure value update unit that updates the pressure control reference value of the pressure control unit with the pressure control reference calculation value and updates each control pressure value of the pressure control unit;
    It is characterized by having.
  8.  前記硬度制御部は、
     前記制御基準算定値を補正する補正先が「硬度」であるか否かを判断する補正先第1判断部と、
     前記算定硬度が、硬度補正係数を用いた前記硬度制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第3判断部と、
     前記算定硬度第3判断部の判断が前記硬度補正係数を用いた前記硬度制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、前記算定硬度の値で前記硬度制御基準算定値を更新する第1硬度制御基準算定値更新部と、
     前記制御基準算定値を補正する補正先が「厚み」であるか否かを判断する補正先第2判断部と、
     前記算定硬度が、厚み補正係数を用いた前記厚み制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第4判断部と、
     前記算定硬度第4判断部の判断が前記厚み補正係数を用いた前記厚み制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、前記算定硬度を前記硬度制御基準算定値にしたときの厚み変動値と前記厚み制御基準算定値とから前記厚み制御基準算定値を更新する第1厚み制御基準算定値更新部と、
     前記制御基準算定値を補正する補正先が「質量」であるか否かを判断する補正先第3判断部と、
     前記算定硬度が、質量補正係数を用いた前記質量制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内であるか否かを判断する算定硬度第5判断部と、
     前記算定硬度第5判断部の判断が前記質量補正係数を用いた前記質量制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲内の場合、前記算定硬度を前記硬度制御基準算定値にしたときの質量変動値と前記質量制御基準算定値とから前記質量制御基準算定値を更新する第1質量制御基準算定値更新部と、
     前記算定硬度第3判断部の判断が前記硬度補正係数を用いた前記硬度制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲外の場合、前記算定硬度が、前記硬度制御基準算定値より小さいか否かを判断する算定硬度第6判断部と、
     前記算定硬度第6判断手段で前記算定硬度が前記硬度制御基準算定値より小さいと判断された場合、硬度制御基準値補正範囲の下限値と前記硬度制御基準算定値との差に前記算定硬度第3判断部で用いた前記硬度補正係数を乗じた値と、前記硬度制御基準算定値とから前記硬度制御基準算定値を更新し、この逆に、前記算定硬度第6判断部で前記算定硬度が前記硬度制御基準算定値より大きいと判断された場合、前記硬度制御基準値補正範囲の上限値と前記硬度制御基準算定値との差に前記算定硬度第3判断部で用いた前記硬度補正係数を乗じた値と、前記硬度制御基準算定値とから前記硬度制御基準算定値を更新する第2硬度制御基準算定値更新部と、
     前記制御基準算定値の次の補正先が「質量」であるか「厚み」であるかを判断する補正先第4判断部と、
     前記算定硬度第4判断部の判断が前記厚み補正係数を用いた前記厚み制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲外の場合、前記算定硬度が、前記硬度制御基準算定値より小さいか否かを判断する算定硬度第7判断部と、
     前記算定硬度第7判断部で前記算定硬度が前記硬度制御基準算定値より小さいと判断された場合、厚み制御基準値補正範囲の下限値と前記厚み制御基準算定値との差に前記算定硬度第4判断部で用いた前記厚み補正係数を乗じた値と、前記厚み制御基準算定値とから前記厚み制御基準算定値を更新し、この逆に、前記算定硬度第7判断部で前記算定硬度が前記硬度制御基準算定値より大きいと判断された場合、前記厚み制御基準値補正範囲の上限値と前記厚み制御基準算定値との差に前記算定硬度第4判断部で用いた前記厚み補正係数を乗じた値と、前記厚み制御基準算定値とから前記厚み制御基準算定値を更新する第2厚み制御基準算定値更新部と、
     この第2厚み制御基準算定値更新部で更新された厚み制御基準算定値に基づいて、新たな算定硬度を算出する第3算定硬度演算部と、
     前記制御基準算定値の次の補正先が「質量」であるか「硬度」であるかを判断する補正先第5判断部と、
     前記算定硬度第5判断部の判断が前記質量補正係数を用いた前記質量制御基準算定値の補正による硬度制御可能範囲外の場合、前記算定硬度が、前記硬度制御基準算定値より小さいか否かを判断する算定硬度第8判断部と、
     前記算定硬度第8判断部で前記算定硬度が前記硬度制御基準算定値より小さいと判断された場合、質量制御基準値補正範囲の上限値と前記質量制御基準算定値との差に前記算定硬度第5判断部で用いた前記質量補正係数を乗じた値と、前記質量制御基準算定値とから前記質量制御基準算定値を更新し、この逆に、前記算定硬度第8判断部で前記算定硬度が前記硬度制御基準算定値より大きいと判断された場合、前記質量制御基準値補正範囲の下限値と前記質量制御基準算定値との差に前記算定硬度第5判断部で用いた前記質量補正係数を乗じた値と、前記質量制御基準算定値とから前記質量制御基準算定値を更新する第2質量制御基準算定値更新部と、
     前記第2質量制御基準算定値更新部で更新された質量制御基準算定値に基づいて、新たな算定硬度を算出する第4算定硬度演算手部と、
     前記制御基準算定値の次の補正先が「厚み」であるか「硬度」であるかを判断する補正先第6判断部と、
     を有することを特徴とする請求項4又は7に記載の粉末圧縮成型装置。
    The hardness controller
    A correction destination first determination unit that determines whether or not a correction destination for correcting the control reference calculation value is “hardness”;
    A calculated hardness third determination unit for determining whether the calculated hardness is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculation value using a hardness correction coefficient;
    When the determination of the calculated hardness third determining unit is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculation value using the hardness correction coefficient, the hardness control reference calculation value is updated with the calculated hardness value. 1 hardness control standard calculation value update unit,
    A correction destination second determination unit for determining whether or not the correction destination for correcting the control reference calculation value is “thickness”;
    A calculated hardness fourth determining unit for determining whether the calculated hardness is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the thickness control reference calculated value using a thickness correction coefficient;
    Variation in thickness when the calculated hardness is set to the calculated value of the hardness control reference when the determination of the calculated hardness fourth determining unit is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the calculated thickness control reference value using the thickness correction coefficient A first thickness control reference calculation value update unit that updates the thickness control reference calculation value from a value and the thickness control reference calculation value;
    A correction destination third determination unit for determining whether or not the correction destination for correcting the control reference calculation value is “mass”;
    A calculated hardness fifth determining unit for determining whether the calculated hardness is within a hardness controllable range by correcting the mass control reference calculated value using a mass correction coefficient;
    If the calculated hardness is determined within the hardness controllable range by correcting the mass control reference calculation value using the mass correction coefficient, the mass fluctuation when the calculated hardness is the hardness control reference calculation value A first mass control reference calculated value update unit that updates the mass control reference calculated value from a value and the mass control reference calculated value;
    Whether the calculated hardness is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value when the determination of the calculated hardness third determination unit is out of a hardness controllable range by correcting the hardness control reference calculation value using the hardness correction coefficient A calculated hardness sixth judging section for judging
    When the calculated hardness sixth determining means determines that the calculated hardness is smaller than the hardness control reference calculated value, the calculated hardness is calculated based on the difference between the lower limit value of the hardness control reference value correction range and the hardness control reference calculated value. 3 update the hardness control standard calculation value from the value multiplied by the hardness correction coefficient used in the determination unit and the hardness control standard calculation value, and conversely, the calculated hardness in the calculated hardness sixth determination unit When it is determined that the calculated value is larger than the hardness control reference calculation value, the difference between the hardness control reference value correction range upper limit value and the hardness control reference calculation value is set to the hardness correction coefficient used in the calculated hardness third determination unit. A second hardness control reference calculation value update unit that updates the hardness control reference calculation value from the multiplied value and the hardness control reference calculation value;
    A correction destination fourth determination unit that determines whether the next correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “mass” or “thickness”;
    Whether or not the calculated hardness is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value when the determination of the calculated hardness fourth determination unit is outside the range of hardness controllable by correction of the thickness control reference calculation value using the thickness correction coefficient A calculated hardness seventh judging section for judging
    When the calculated hardness seventh determining unit determines that the calculated hardness is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value, the calculated hardness is calculated based on the difference between the lower limit value of the thickness control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference calculation value. 4 The thickness control reference calculation value is updated from the value obtained by multiplying the thickness correction coefficient used in the determination unit and the thickness control reference calculation value, and conversely, the calculated hardness is determined by the calculated hardness seventh determination unit. When it is determined that the calculated value is larger than the hardness control reference calculation value, the difference between the upper limit value of the thickness control reference value correction range and the thickness control reference calculation value is the thickness correction coefficient used in the calculated hardness fourth determination unit. A second thickness control reference calculation value update unit that updates the thickness control reference calculation value from the multiplied value and the thickness control reference calculation value;
    A third calculated hardness calculation unit that calculates a new calculated hardness based on the thickness control reference calculated value updated by the second thickness control reference calculated value update unit;
    A correction destination fifth determination unit for determining whether the next correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “mass” or “hardness”;
    Whether the calculated hardness is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value when the determination of the calculated hardness fifth determination unit is outside the range of hardness controllable by correction of the mass control reference calculation value using the mass correction coefficient A calculated hardness eighth judging section for judging
    When the calculated hardness eighth determining unit determines that the calculated hardness is smaller than the hardness control reference calculation value, the difference between the upper limit value of the mass control reference value correction range and the mass control reference calculation value is 5 The mass control reference calculation value is updated from the value obtained by multiplying the mass correction coefficient used in the determination unit and the mass control reference calculation value, and conversely, the calculated hardness is determined by the calculated hardness eighth determination unit. When it is determined that the calculated value is larger than the hardness control reference calculation value, the difference between the lower limit value of the mass control reference value correction range and the mass control reference calculation value is the mass correction coefficient used in the calculated hardness fifth determination unit. A second mass control reference calculated value update unit that updates the mass control reference calculated value from the multiplied value and the mass control reference calculated value;
    A fourth calculated hardness calculating hand for calculating a new calculated hardness based on the mass control reference calculated value updated by the second mass control reference calculated value updating unit;
    A correction destination sixth determination unit that determines whether the next correction destination of the control reference calculation value is “thickness” or “hardness”;
    The powder compression molding apparatus according to claim 4 or 7, characterized by comprising:
  9.  前記算定硬度第3判断工程及び前記第2硬度制御基準算定値更新工程で用いる前記硬度補正係数と、前記算定硬度第4判断工程及び前記第2厚み制御基準算定値更新工程で用いる前記厚み補正係数と、前記算定硬度第5判断工程及び前記第2質量制御基準算定値更新工程で用いる前記質量補正係数のうちの少なくとも一つの補正係数による補正が、1.00未満の補正係数の値で行われることを特徴とする請求項6に記載の粉末圧縮成型装置の運転方法。 The hardness correction coefficient used in the calculated third hardness determination step and the second hardness control reference calculated value update step, and the thickness correction coefficient used in the calculated hardness fourth determination step and the second thickness control reference calculated value update step. And correction with at least one correction coefficient among the mass correction coefficients used in the calculated hardness fifth determination step and the second mass control reference calculation value update step is performed with a correction coefficient value of less than 1.00. The operating method of the powder compression molding apparatus according to claim 6.
  10.  前記算定硬度第3判断部及び前記第2硬度制御基準算定値更新部で用いる前記硬度補正係数と、前記算定硬度第4判断部及び前記第2厚み制御基準算定値更新部で用いる前記厚み補正係数と、前記算定硬度第5判断部及び前記第2質量制御基準算定値更新部で用いる前記質量補正係数のうちの少なくとも一つの補正係数を、1.00未満の値とすることを特徴とする請求項8に記載の粉末圧縮成型装置。 The hardness correction coefficient used in the calculated hardness third determination section and the second hardness control reference calculation value update section, and the thickness correction coefficient used in the calculated hardness fourth determination section and the second thickness control reference calculation value update section. And at least one correction coefficient among the mass correction coefficients used in the calculated hardness fifth determination unit and the second mass control reference calculation value update unit is set to a value less than 1.00. The powder compression molding apparatus described in 1.
PCT/JP2014/062505 2013-09-27 2014-05-09 Rotary-type powder compression molding device and method of operating same WO2015045473A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013-201608 2013-09-27
JP2013201608A JP5707462B2 (en) 2013-09-27 2013-09-27 Rotary powder compression molding apparatus and its operating method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015045473A1 true WO2015045473A1 (en) 2015-04-02

Family

ID=52742633

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/062505 WO2015045473A1 (en) 2013-09-27 2014-05-09 Rotary-type powder compression molding device and method of operating same

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP5707462B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2015045473A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5585113A (en) * 1994-09-09 1996-12-17 Korsch Pressen Gmbh Process for quality control in the production of tablets by pressing
JPH10263896A (en) * 1997-03-26 1998-10-06 Hata Tekkosho:Kk Rotary type powder compression molding device, and its operating method
US20050200038A1 (en) * 2004-03-12 2005-09-15 Courtoy Nv Method for controlling a rotary tablet press and such a press
JP2008264814A (en) * 2007-04-18 2008-11-06 Kikusui Seisakusho Ltd Controller for powder compression molding machine

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5585113A (en) * 1994-09-09 1996-12-17 Korsch Pressen Gmbh Process for quality control in the production of tablets by pressing
JPH10263896A (en) * 1997-03-26 1998-10-06 Hata Tekkosho:Kk Rotary type powder compression molding device, and its operating method
US20050200038A1 (en) * 2004-03-12 2005-09-15 Courtoy Nv Method for controlling a rotary tablet press and such a press
JP2008264814A (en) * 2007-04-18 2008-11-06 Kikusui Seisakusho Ltd Controller for powder compression molding machine

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP5707462B2 (en) 2015-04-30
JP2015066566A (en) 2015-04-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11407158B2 (en) Systems and methods for normalizing PID control across injection molding machines
CN109764243B (en) Method for controlling fluid flow through a valve
US10245771B2 (en) Method for the process management of a mold-filling process of an injection molding machine
US20050279454A1 (en) Pressure control system
CN109630446A (en) Gas apparatus for predicting and vacuum pumping hardware
JP6379096B2 (en) Method and apparatus for process device calibration
US10751779B2 (en) Plate roll bending machine bending control system and method
CN104566839B (en) The control method of air-conditioning system air injection enthalpy-increasing
JP2006264755A (en) Flow meter type liquid filling apparatus
CN105712611A (en) Method And Apparatus For The Automated Production Of Glass Objects With A Preset Wall Thickness, Preferably For Electrochemical Sensors
WO2015045473A1 (en) Rotary-type powder compression molding device and method of operating same
CN109945431A (en) Temperature control method, device, system and air-conditioning
JP4660660B2 (en) Control method of metal supply
JPH10263896A (en) Rotary type powder compression molding device, and its operating method
US8356729B2 (en) Material metering system
US20190184663A1 (en) Method for manufacturing tire component member
EP3021996B1 (en) Spring forming device, method for forming a helical spring and corresponding computer program
KR101590113B1 (en) Method and system for adjusting the flow rate of charge material in a charging process of a shaft furnace
KR20160001488A (en) Apparatus for manufacturing ingot
JP5814393B2 (en) Rotary powder compression molding equipment
JP2008264814A (en) Controller for powder compression molding machine
JP2007047000A (en) Method for weighing powdery and granular substance
JP7424447B2 (en) Vacuum valves, valve systems, control devices and calibration devices for valve systems
EP3938117A1 (en) Hot melt adhesive foam dispensing system
JP2007038271A (en) Powder compression molding machine, and method for controlling the same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14848384

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14848384

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1